VERSION 4.

0

Drafting

GUIDE

www.cad-schroer.com

All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any manner (print, photocopy or other) without the written permission of CAD Schroer GmbH. CAD Schroer GmbH has made its best effort to ensure that the information in this document is accurate and reliable, but cannot guarantee the accuracy, timeliness, reliability or completeness of any of the information contained herein. CAD Schroer GmbH will not make any warranty nor accept legal responsibility or liability of any kind for consequences resulting from errors or omissions. Registered Trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH: MEDUSA, STHENO Trademarks of CAD Schroer GmbH: MEDUSA4, STHENO/PRO, MEDEA, MPDS Third-Party Products and Trademarks: Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/DETAIL and Pro/TOOLKIT are registered trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation. All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. August 2009 Copyright © CAD Schroer GmbH Fritz-Peters-Str. 26 - 30 D - 47447 Moers

Germany CAD Schroer GmbH Fritz-Peters-Str. 26-30 47447 Moers
Tel. +49 2841 91 84 - 0 Fax +49 2841 91 84 - 44 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.de www.cad-schroer.de

France CAD Schroer France SAS 17, Rue du Docteur Lebel 94300 Vincennes
Tel. +33 1 41 94 51 40 Fax +33 1 43 77 17 68 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.fr www.cad-schroer.fr

Italy CAD Schroer Italia SRL Piazza Della Resistenza 26 20021 Bollate MI
Tel.: +39 02 38303267 Fax: +39 02 33303399 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.it www.cad-schroer.it

Switzerland CAD Schroer AG Bettlistr. 35 8600 Dübendorf
Tel. +41 44 802 89 - 80 Fax +41 44 802 89 - 88 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.ch www.cad-schroer.ch

United Kingdom CAD Schroer UK Ltd 39 Newnham Road Cambridge CB3 9EY
Tel. +44 1223 460 408 Fax +44 1223 460 409 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.co.uk www.cad-schroer.co.uk

USA CAD Schroer US, Inc. 34 Rand Place, Pittsford NY 14534
Tel. +1 585 264 1409 Fax +1 781 623 1279 e-mail: info@cad-schroer.com www.cad-schroer.com

2

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Preface Introduction to MEDUSA
What is MEDUSA?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Features of MEDUSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to MEDUSA Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About Multi-segment Lines in MEDUSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Advantages of Using Multi-segment Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 29 30 31 32 34 35 36 41 43

Starting MEDUSA Overview of the Work Environment
Quick Guide to the Work Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Drawing Area and Popup Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Menu Bar and Pulldown Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tools and Tooltrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . File Selectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

File

The File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Creating a New Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Closing a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

© CAD Schroer GmbH

3

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Saving Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Sheet Administration by using Working Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Importing a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Exporting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Plotting a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Printing a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Sheet Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 The Sheet Header Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Sheet History Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Quitting MEDUSA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Edit

85

The Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Undo and Redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Cut, Copy and Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Area Cut and Area Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Find Text and Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Select

97

Overview of Selection Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 The Select Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 The Selection Tools from the Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Selecting with the Mouse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Select with the Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Toggling a Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Power Selection Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Selecting Elements by Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Selecting Elements by Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

View

117

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Selecting Toolbar Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Set of Tooltrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Dynamic Pan and Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

4

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Zoom Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Storing and Restoring Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 View Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Display Grids
Introduction to Grids. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a new Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Current Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining a Grid as Standard Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activating and Deactivating a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing and Hiding a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting a Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

133 135 136 138 143 144 145 146 147 149 151 152 154 155 156 158 159 162 164 167 168 171 172 173 174 176 177 178 179 180

Layers
Introduction to Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layers Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Layer Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Set Layer Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Set Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customize Layer Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layer Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Options
Options Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defaults - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Message Area Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legible Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheet History Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dashboard Element Selection Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© CAD Schroer GmbH

5

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Switches - Control User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Dimension Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Hit Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Arc Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Settings for References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Administrator Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Utilities

203

The Utilities Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 The Protractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Point Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 User Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Un-number & Re-number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Copy to Clipboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 The Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Trail File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Instancing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Add Preview to Sheet/Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Add Current View as Preview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Accelerator and Map Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Bacis1 and Windows

251

Bacis1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251

Licenses Help

253 255

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Using the Help Menu of the MEDUSA Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Using the Help Button in Dialogs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Context Sensitive Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 The Message Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Toolbar

261

Toolbar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

6

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Adjust the Contents of the Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toolbar Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sheets Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storing and Restoring Windows. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zoom Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scale View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Navigation Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tree Table Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 264 265 266 267 268 270 271 272 278 286 287 288 289 291 292 293 295 296 297 298 301 304 305 306 310 311 312 315 316 317 318 319 320

Dashboard
Dashboard Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Components of the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Dashboard to Display Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Dashboard to Modify Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using the Dashboard for Creating New Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sub-Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing Styles and Style Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style Definitions and their Effect on an Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Style Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User-Defined Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Probe Specifiers
Using Probe Specifiers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auto Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Free Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grid Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intersection Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Segment Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© CAD Schroer GmbH

7

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Perpendicular Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Center Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Mid Segment Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 Tangent Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Last Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 Offset from Last Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Datum of Selected Element Probe Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Status Area

331

Overview Status Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Displaying the Tree Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Dock and Undock the Tree Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Creating and Ending Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Reparent Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Interacting with the Tree Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341 Query and Change Sheet Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 User Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347

Lines

349

Overview of Create Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Line Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Creating a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Popup Menu While Drawing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Closed Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Offset Lines Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Line Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Line Point Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Point Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Trace a Line Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Overview of Edit Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Editing a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387 Edit Line Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Complex Line Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

8

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Navigating a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

2D Modeling

407

Introduction to 2D Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Centerlines, Hidden Lines and Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Sweeping Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Edge Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project End Elevations of Shafts and Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Restore Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 415 416 417 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 436 439 440

Transformation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transformation on Selected Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamically Aligning Geometry Along a Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Move Geometry by Grid Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Move Selected Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441 Connect and Clear Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Symbols
Introduction to Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview of Symbol Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Temporary Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforming Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbol Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Moving a Symbol’s Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing Symbol Property Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Named Symbols. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

443 444 445 446 450 451 455 456 457 458 461

Diagram Symbols

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Creating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

© CAD Schroer GmbH

9

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Loading and Inserting a Temporary Diagram Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Loading and Inserting a Named Diagram Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468 Selecting and Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469

Construction Lines

471

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 Construction Line Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Creating Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Reusing the Current Datum Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 Offset Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Deleting and Hiding Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Confining Construction Lines to a Specific Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Transported Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Projected Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Dynamic Construction Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Creating Dynamic Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500

Dimensioning

505

Dimension Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Setting the Default Dimension Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Properties, Styles and the Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Creating Basic Linear Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Linear Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Creating Angular Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Angular Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529 Circle and Arc Dimension Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Creating Symmetrical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Creating Half Symmetrical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Creating Datum Offset Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534 Creating Isometric Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 Creating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 Feature Control Frames and Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Editing Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542

10

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Welding Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552 Surface Finish Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558

Text

561

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562 Creating Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Text Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacing Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Line Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balloon Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text Translator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unicode Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 569 570 572 574 575 579 586 587 589

Tables

About CSV Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590 Overview Table Creation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Creating a New Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Edit Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597 Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Creating a Parts List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Fit and Bore Hole Tables

601

Fit Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Bore Hole Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims)
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Prims to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transforming and Deleting Prims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prim Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . How MEDUSA Stores and Updates Prims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

617 618 619 622 623 627 629

Area Fills

Introduction to Crosshatching and Stippling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Defining a Closed Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631

© CAD Schroer GmbH

11

MEDUSA4 Drafting
Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Crosshatch Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Stipple Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Selecting and Deleting Stippling or Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Multiple Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646 Filling Disjoint Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647 Create Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Masking Hidden Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 652

Reference Sheet Procedure

655

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Porthole Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657 Creating Porthole Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Reference Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Creating a New Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Load, Convert, Delete and Compare a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664

SMART Edit

669

Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 General Selection Hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670 Calling SMART Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 SMART Edit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 Edit Dimension Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Edit Dimension Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 Datum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680 Dragging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683

SMART Drafting

685

Calling SMART Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 Drawing Lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 Drawing Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Flipping Arcs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Using Construction Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 697 Extending an Existing Geometry with SMART Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 699 Changing Line Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 700

12

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment

701

Controlling User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702 Customizing MEDUSA Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703 Copying Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Custom Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Deleting Custom Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Background Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704 705 707 708 709 711 719

List of Figures Index

© CAD Schroer GmbH

13

MEDUSA4 Drafting

14

© CAD Schroer GmbH

. Convention Menu Example Choose Zoom from the View menu Add button Choose the tool Creates thin solid lines.345 The ciaddobj command Return or Control-g Enter command> plot_config tar -cvf /dev/rst0 filename Explanation Indicates a command. Syntax SyntaxBold SyntaxItalic Filename&path UPPERCASE italic bold medusa\med2d\m2d\src\ MEDUSA or CADCONVERT left mouse button Drafting User Guide A temporary group is a collection of . dialog or tooltray.. The display for other platforms can differ slightly. function or button that you can choose from a menu. commands.MEDUSA4 PREFACE Book Conventions The following table illustrates and explains conventions used in writing about MEDUSA applications. Indicates the buttons to press on a mouse and names of books. User input. Names of products. Where system output and user input are mixed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 15 . Shows path and filenames. Emphasize text. Supply an appropriate substitute for each variable. keywords and keys to press on a keyboard. Please note: Illustrations showing menus and forms are taken from a window system. user input is in bold. for the given example replace filename with an actual file name. acos 0.

on the CD-ROM. or directly by calling it up within the MEDUSA user interface. HTML title is Drafting User Guide.pdf).htm. Printing Documentation A PDF (Portable Document Format) file is included for each online book. 3. 2. Choose MEDUSA Documentation from the pulldown menu.htm listing all available documents. Click the book title you want to view. 3. CD-ROM 1. If you don‘t have the Acrobat Reader.com/products/acrobat/readstep.g. you can download it for free from the Adobe homepage: http://www. Click the book title you want to view. Check with your system administrator if you need more information. Click left on the entry Help inside the main menu. german or french. See the first page of each online book for the document name which corresponds to the PDF file name (e. 2. Click on the file mainmenu. Navigate with your HTML browser to the CD-ROM into the following directory. Click on the file mainmenu. <CDROM_mount_point>/doc/<language>/ (Unix) <CDROM_Drive>:\doc\<language>\ (Windows) 2. A browser opens showing the mainmenu.htm. MEDUSA Interface 1.adobe. PDF file is drafting. You can view this online documentation in the installation directory. You must have Acrobat Reader installed to view and print PDF files. Navigate to the directory where MEDUSA is installed.html 16 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Installation Directory 1.MEDUSA4 Preface Online User Documentation Online documentation for each book is provided in HTML format. <MEDUSA installation directory>/meddoc/doc/<language>/ (Unix) <MEDUSA installation directory>\meddoc\doc\<language>\ (Windows) where <language> is either english.

....... 22 © CAD Schroer GmbH 17 ...............MEDUSA4 Drafting INTRODUCTION TO MEDUSA This chapter provides an overview of MEDUSA.. 19 • Introduction to MEDUSA Elements............................................................................ 20 • About Multi-segment Lines in MEDUSA .................................. 21 • Advantages of Using Multi-segment Lines.......................... • What is MEDUSA?............................ 18 • Main Features of MEDUSA..........................................

18 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to MEDUSA What is MEDUSA? MEDUSA is a system of linked computer programs that perform a wide range of functions for computer aided design and computer aided manufacture (CAD/CAM). Fields of application for MEDUSA are amongst others mechanical engineering. The system includes a powerful drafting system for creating and manipulating all types of drawings. Using 2D Drawings in Other MEDUSA Programs Once a MEDUSA sheet is produced using the MEDUSA drafting system. 2D/3D layout plant design. These drawings can be readily interpreted by other programs running within MEDUSA. it can be modified and interpreted by other MEDUSA applications. factory layout and electrical engineering. The MEDUSA drafting system is therefore an integral part of all other MEDUSA applications.

undo. • A Dashboard. for building up assemblies). for example. in addition to temporary association of elements through selection sets and groups • The graphical user interface is designed to: • Enhance the user’s work flow. which informs the user of the properties of geometry as it is created and modified • A tree viewer. and redo (for certain MEDUSA functions). and the dimensioning standards in use. for example a popup menu for the active tool reduces the number of hand and head movements • Increase the user’s productivity by making existing functionality more accessible and organizing the functionality on the screen on the basis of frequency of use • Allow the user to recover from mistakes by offering the facility to cancel. including the ability to specify the type and appearance of the sheets. which keeps the user aware of the logical structure of the sheet and so maximizes the potential of permanent groups • The ability to customize MEDUSA.MEDUSA4 Drafting Main Features of MEDUSA Main Features of MEDUSA Some of the main features that distinguish MEDUSA from other 2D CAD systems are: • The use of multi-segment lines rather than single segment lines • The permanent grouping of elements (for example. © CAD Schroer GmbH 19 . the ability to: • Define styles for elements • Rearrange the contents of the tooltrays. and assign new styles to the custom tools • The ability for the System Administrator to control how MEDUSA will run on site.

These are: • Lines composed of one or more line segments • Text elements • Prims (predefined graphical shapes) • Groups (elements which are associated with each other and are manipulated as a single entity) Element Properties Each element class has a number of properties. are dependent on the element class. For example. either for the instance on the sheet. line properties are displayed in the Line Properties dialog as shown below.MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to MEDUSA Introduction to MEDUSA Elements A MEDUSA sheet consists of different elements. known as attributes. MEDUSA displays the most significant attributes on the dashboard. or for the MEDUSA session. Figure 1 Example of an Element Properties Dialog Users can easily change the properties of each element. 20 © CAD Schroer GmbH . These properties. or for the use of the tool (until the user selects another tool). You can display a full set of the different attributes in an Element Properties dialog. As you create or modify an element. known as element classes.

or adding or deleting points to the line affects the geometry of the whole line: Figure 2 Adding a Point to a Line: A multi-segment line can be an open line with two ends: Figure 3 An Open Multi-segment Line Or a closed line: Figure 4 A Closed Multi-segment Line A multi-segment line can be manipulated as a single entity. © CAD Schroer GmbH 21 . Moving one of the points. A point is created at each vertex in the line.MEDUSA4 Drafting About Multi-segment Lines in MEDUSA About Multi-segment Lines in MEDUSA In MEDUSA. a line consists of a series of points joined by line segments.

for example: • Convert two line segments into an arc and vice versa • Move a segment through a specified angle and vary its length • Add and remove fillets and chamfers You can manipulate complex shapes that are drawn as a single line as a single element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to MEDUSA Advantages of Using Multi-segment Lines You can develop a shape by modifying one line (and its segments) rather than several independent lines. “Shapes” is produced by drawing one half of the component and then duplicating and mirroring it: Figure 6 Shapes 22 © CAD Schroer GmbH . you can. Modifications to one part of a multi-segment line automatically affect the other line segments. The outline of the design shown in Figure 6. This example shows the result of successively deleting points in a multi-segment line: Figure 5 Deleting Points in a Multi Segment Line When you edit a line at segment level.

2. 3. Open a terminal window (DOS box).bat -advanced Use Login-File and MEDUSA command 1. for example: d:\medusa\master_project\login. Click the Windows Start button and move the cursor over Programs. you have several possibilities. In this mode the tool SMART Edit is available. Click left on the entry MEDUSA to start MEDUSA. Type the login command with its complete path. 4. For starting MEDUSA in advanced mode enter the command: d:\medusa\master_project\startmedusa.MEDUSA4 Drafting STARTING MEDUSA To start MEDUSA. • medusa -api -advanced starts MEDUSA in advanced mode with Bacis2. Use the Start button in the Windows task bar 1. A further pulldown menu opens.bat 3. for example. © CAD Schroer GmbH 23 .bat 3. Use Start-Batch-File 1. Open a terminal window (DOS box). After pressing Return MEDUSA is started. Move the cursor to the MEDUSA entry. • medusa -advanced starts MEDUSA in advanced mode. 2. 2. Type the start command with its complete path. After pressing Return MEDUSA is started. After pressing Return type one of the following commands: • medusa -api starts MEDUSA with Bacis2. for example: d:\medusa\master_project\startmedusa.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Starting MEDUSA 24 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

............................................................. 41 © CAD Schroer GmbH 25 ............ 26 • Using the Mouse ................... 36 • File Selectors ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 31 • Dialogs ................................................ 29 • The Drawing Area and Popup Menus........................ 35 • Tools and Tooltrays ............MEDUSA4 Drafting OVERVIEW OF THE WORK ENVIRONMENT This chapter introduces MEDUSA users to the various features that make up the work environment..................... 32 • Toolbar ...................................................................................... 34 • Dashboard .............................................................. 30 • Menu Bar and Pulldown Menus ....................... 27 • Keyboard................................................ • Quick Guide to the Work Environment....................... New users find this chapter a useful introduction to MEDUSA.

for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Quick Guide to the Work Environment The work environment is made up of several menus that provide fast access to the drafting functionality. which can also be used to display messages . Figure 7 Features of the Work Environment Probe Specifiers Menu bar Toolbar Dashboard Drawing Area Tree Viewer Tooltrays and Tools Status Area Active Tool Sheet Tabs Message Line Drop Area Output Message Area Please note: The output message area is not visible unless you click the Toggle output message area tool from the status area. Following figure shows a graphic representation of the menus and other features you see when you start MEDUSA. Additional to the Toggle output message area tool shown above you find a second arrow. The tree viewer is not visible unless you select the Tree toggle button . The Output Message Area displays any messages. located in the status area below the drawing area. 26 © CAD Schroer GmbH . A click on the arrow opens a semi-transparent message window in the bottom right corner of the drawing area (for details see “Overview Status Area” on page 332) Click left on the Sheet Tabs to switch between the loaded sheets displayed in the Drawing Area. after probing a point inside the drawing area or if an error occurs.

you can use the wheel as follows: • You can zoom into and out of the sheet. Pressing the Shift key and using the left mouse button has the same effect as using the middle mouse button. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Mouse Using the Mouse The mouse buttons have the usual functionality. • Hold down means to press the mouse button and keep it pressed until it is said to release it. If this is the case. double click or hold down a mouse button. then contact your System Administrator. • Double click means to click the mouse button twice in close succession. Please note: Your mouse buttons may be mapped differently than usual. the left button is used for choosing menu items or selecting elements. or you want to change the mapping. Zoom takes place along the line of sight from the eye to the point under the cursor. when selecting a style in the dashboard Dragging Dragging means to hold down a mouse button and move the mouse pointer to another position. Using the Mouse Wheel If you have a wheel mouse. You use dragging to: © CAD Schroer GmbH 27 . and the right mouse button is used for opening a popup menu available for most functions inside MEDUSA providing further functionality for the current tool. Pushing the wheel forward zooms in. • In conjunction with the pressed Ctrl key on your keyboard (in order to prevent changes by mistake) you can scroll inside lists. The mouse wheel zoom allows the user to zoom in precisely on the point directly under the cursor. Using Mouse Buttons You can either click. the middle mouse button is used for adding elements to a selection or create chain dimensions. for example. pushing backward zooms out. • Click means to push down and then instantly release the mouse button.

previously selected elements remain selected and other elements are also selected. Drag the pointer to the diagonally opposite corner. See the chapter “Select” on page 97. Please note: If you select elements by clicking the left mouse button and drag the cursor. for more information on selecting MEDUSA elements. • Select elements on your sheet. c. However. then all previously selected elements are deselected. b.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment • Move dialogs around a sheet. if you press the middle mouse button. 28 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Position the pointer at a corner of the area you want to select. As you drag a temporary selection box appears. The selection box lets you see what elements will be selected. doing following steps: a. Click the left mouse button.

g. • For a popup menu Esc dismisses the popup menu. closed geometry. it is mentioned in the appropriate explanation. Esc-Key The use of the Esc-key has different effects depending on the context in which it is used. “Accelerator and Map Keys” on page 247.g. Esc deselects all elements as defined in the Accelerator Key dialog (see “Utilities”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Keyboard Keyboard Shift-Key The Shift-key is used in MEDUSA to enhance functions. For details how to do this see “Utilities”. Ctrl-Key The Ctrl-key is used in MEDUSA for independent functionality like dynamically pan and zoom. “Accelerator and Map Keys” on page 247). After placing the text. Esc exits the tool.g. shortcuts (e. © CAD Schroer GmbH 29 . ctrl+s) or a certain character combination (e. for example by adding or subtracting to a selection. at). fillets or welding symbols. • For dimensioning Esc makes nothing until the current dimension was placed on the sheet. Other Keys The Accelerator and Mapkey dialog allows to define frequently used tools to be called by certain keys (e. • If the mouse cursor is on the drawing area. you can place further texts until you press Esc again and exit the tool. • For tools like creating lines. • For a dialog Esc performs the cancel operation. • For tools like dimensioning and creating text the function of Esc depends on the state in which the tool currently is. F12). If the Ctrl-key can be used for a tool. Before adding the next dimension Esc exits the tool. Examples: • When creating text pressing the Esc-key closes the edit field below the dashboard but you can still place the text.

You display the popup menu by pressing the right mouse button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment The Drawing Area and Popup Menus The drawing area is where you create MEDUSA drawings. An example is shown in the figure below. The menu gives you quick access to those functions most used by the active tool. “Features of the Work Environment” on page 26 for a diagram of the MEDUSA window. Figure 8 Example for Popup Menus General Popup Menu Line Editing Popup Menu 30 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The popup menu changes according to the active tool type. (See Figure 7. a popup menu becomes available.) Once you move the pointer into the drawing area.

File.MEDUSA4 Drafting Menu Bar and Pulldown Menus Menu Bar and Pulldown Menus The menu bar displays the names of the pulldown menus. A second level pulldown menu appears containing a list of available sheet sizes.. Pulldown menus consist of menu items such as Save or Print. © CAD Schroer GmbH 31 . a dialog appears. Move your mouse over the New option. Move the mouse cursor over the menu name of the menu bar. The pulldown menu for handling files opens. for example.. Click the left mouse button on a menu item to select it.. 4. Move the mouse over the options of the pulldown menu. 2. Figure 9 Section of the Menu Bar showing the File Menu Menu name Menu item A second-level pulldown menu To select options from the menu bar: 1. As you move over menus with an arrow to the right a second menu appears. Functions occur depending on the item you selected. 3. 5..). Please note: The sheet types available to you may be customized to meet your site requirements and therefore the list may be different from that one shown above. as shown in the following figure. If you select an item which ends in three dots (. Click the left mouse button.

if you select the Open option from the File menu. Buttons Dialogs have buttons for applying the changes you made inside the dialog. Keep the left mouse button pressed and move the cursor until the dialog is in the required position. 4. Release the left mouse button. The following buttons can be found often in dialogs: 32 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the Open dialog appears: Figure 10 Open Dialog To move the dialog to a convenient place on the screen: 1. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Dialogs A dialog is a floating window which allows you to enter information appropriate to the current function or which displays a series of options or buttons appropriate to the current function. Move the cursor into the title bar of the dialog. canceling the changes or opening the online help. In the other parts of the manuals you find no explanations for these buttons anymore. This section explains the buttons which are often used. For example. Press and hold down the left mouse button. 3.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dialogs Figure 11 Often Used Buttons OK applies the changes you made inside the dialog and closes the dialog window. © CAD Schroer GmbH 33 . If there is no link for the current item the global help section is opened. Apply applies the changes you made inside the dialog but the dialog window remains open. Cancel closes the dialog window without applying the settings of the dialog. Help opens the HTML Online Help for the appropriate topic.

34 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The following figure shows the toolbar after starting MEDUSA the first time. positioned below the menu bar. For choosing an item from the toolbar point to the button and click the left mouse button. Move the cursor on Toolbars. A pulldown menu opens offering the items of View. Figure 12 The Toolbar Please note: Your toolbar can differ from that one given above if the System Administrator changed the settings. Move the cursor upon the entry View in the main menu. Click left on the toolbar you want to hide or display. For adjusting the toolbar items using the main menu do the following: 1. The pulldown menu disappears and the toolbar is changed according to your selection. Click the left mouse button. 4. 3. The following pulldown menu opens: Figure 13 View Pulldown Menu The check mark in front of an entry shows you that the appropriate toolbar entry is visible. By default you find items like opening and saving sheets. If there is no check mark the appropriate toolbar entry is not displayed. has a selection of the more frequently-used items from the pulldown menus. zoom functions and line navigation. You can adjust the toolbar to your needs by adding and deleting items. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Toolbar The toolbar.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 35 . for • displaying property values for selected elements. • setting property values for selected elements and • setting property values for the element you are creating. The figure below shows an example of the dashboard .in this case the line dashboard. You can use the dashboard for a number of different purposes. for example. depending on the type of items that have been selected on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Dashboard The Dashboard. contains information about the properties of the MEDUSA geometry element that you are creating or modifying. The dashboard displays different properties. which is below the toolbar. Figure 14 The Line Dashboard The use of the Dashboard is explained in “Dashboard” on page 291.

Figure 15 Features of the Tooltrays Probe Specifiers Tools and tool sets Tooltray buttons A series of probe specifiers is located to the right of the tooltrays. including construction lines. You can choose between the two sets of tooltrays. and • placing symbols of various types. They contain tools for creating. Each tooltray contains a number of different tools and tool sets. By default the Complete set is set. Each of it contains a number of tooltrays. it contains tools for: • creating lines. 36 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Basic and Complete. For example. and manipulating drawings. • creating text.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Tools and Tooltrays The tooltrays are on the left hand side of the drawing area. They give you hints about the use of each option or tool. Tool Tips Tool tips are lines of text which appear next to the cursor when you position the cursor over any option or tool within MEDUSA. For details see “Probe Specifiers” on page 40. Figure 15 shows the features of the Complete set of tooltrays. modifying. How to change the set of tooltrays see “Choosing a Set of Tooltrays” on page 37.

Contains one tooltray with tools for commonly used tasks including line creation. Click on View in the menu bar to open the following pulldown menu (Figure 16). editing. 2. tools and tool sets. For choosing a set of tooltrays: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tools and Tooltrays Choosing a Set of Tooltrays The difference between the sets of tooltrays is the number of tooltrays. © CAD Schroer GmbH 37 . dimensioning and crosshatching. The tooltrays change depending on your choice. You can now choose between Complete and Basic. text. Figure 16 Set of Tooltrays Pulldown Menu 3. The check marks the activated set of tooltrays. The following sets are available. Move the cursor over the Set of tooltrays entry. Select one. Table 1 Set of Tooltrays Set of Tooltrays Complete Basic Description Contains a number of tooltrays offering the full range of MEDUSA functionality.

for example. Lines + Edit) click the left mouse button. 38 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Choosing a Tooltray Tools are kept in tooltrays. Click the left mouse button on the arrow to display the contents of the set. to tools for creating lines of different thicknesses or tools that mirror selected elements. Figure 18 Line Tool Set The tool set in the figure above is from the Lines + Edit tooltray. Point to the arrow to the lower right corner of the tool set. Tool sets provide access to related tools. Figure 17 Tooltray Buttons Tool Tool set Selected tooltray Tool Sets Some tools are stored with other similar tools in a tool set. If the tool tip displays the tooltray you want (e. vertically or obliquely. You also can move the cursor on the toolset. Figure 19 Example for a Tool Set 3. Only one of the tools in the set is displayed in the tooltray. The chosen tooltray is selected. 2.g. To choose a tool from a tool set: 1. You can recognize a tool set by an arrow at the lower right corner of the button as shown in Figure 18. Move the cursor above the tooltray tabs. According to the chosen set of tooltrays different tooltrays are available. For choosing a tooltray: 1. If you move the mouse cursor above a tab the tooltray tip appears (for details see ”Tool Tips”) showing the tooltray available by this tab. click left and hold the mouse button for a little while. 2. Move the cursor above the tool you want to select.

The message area below the drawing area gives information on the next step to do for using the chosen tool. Once you have chosen a tool it becomes active. “Features of the Work Environment” on page 26. © CAD Schroer GmbH 39 . Each tool is used in a different manner. remain active after you have used them so that you can continue to work with them until you choose another tool. The active tool is always shown in the status area as shown in Figure 7. Move your cursor over the tool. The action takes effect as soon as you click the button. To use the tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tools and Tooltrays 4. For example. move the pointer into the drawing area. Click the left mouse button to select the tool. if you select the thick line in the figure above the outermost right icon is displayed in the tooltray. Many of the tools are described later in this manual. Now you are ready to use the tool. delete all the construction lines on the sheet. move the pointer into the drawing area. Click the left mouse button to select the tool. 3. Please note: You cannot choose a tool that is disabled and which has a dimmed appearance. The tool you select becomes the default tool and it is displayed inside the tooltray. Please note: Some of the tools. The message line inside the status area gives information on the next step to do for using the chosen tool. When you point to the tool it appears highlighted blue. In addition to the tools some tool trays contain tool buttons that enable you to. 5. Now you are ready to use the tool. To use the tool. for example. A description of the tool appears in the message line at the bottom of the screen inside the status area and a tool tip appears adjacent to the cursor. like the create line tools. The tool button gets a black border and appears more pale then when not selected. Choosing a Tool For choosing a tool: 1. 2.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment Probe Specifiers Probe specifiers enable you to specify the type of probe you want to make. You choose a probe specifier by pointing to it and clicking the left mouse button. for example. You can choose probe specifiers before or after you choose a tool. 40 © CAD Schroer GmbH . for example. Auto Probe becomes active again. to select a position on a line or at a grid intersection. Figure 20 Probe Specifiers Please note: If you probed a point inside the drawing area the default probe specifier.

in the Open Sheet and Save As dialog. Rename Directories and Files Files and directories can be renamed in the list directly by pressing the button F2 on your keyboard. Renaming also finishes. or by a left mouse click on a directory or file name which is already selected. if the file selector looses the focus. The figure below shows a selected file which can be renamed now. Figure 21 Dialog Open Sheet Adjust the Size of Lists Between the directory and the file list a thin size grip for comfortable resizing is available. as well as in many other file selector dialogs. for example. To finish renaming press the Return key on your keyboard. This section gives you some functions which exceed the usual behavior.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Selectors File Selectors MEDUSA provides file selectors. © CAD Schroer GmbH 41 .

all the files are listed. Wildcards in File Names In the dialogs for loading and saving sheet files you can enter wildcards for displaying only certain files in the field Filename. After typing filter entries press the Return key on your keyboard to apply your entries and display only the files which match the filter.] . Possible wildcards are: • * . its appearance changes indicating that the next left click selects the size grip. The file list can be sorted by clicking left on any of the column headers.she. You may specify several filter entries all separated by a single space or by a semi-colon. A first click sorts ascending and the second one sorts descending.. giving the names of the Files.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of the Work Environment If you move the mouse cursor on this size grip. After selecting the size grip moving the mouse resizes the lists. 42 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Sorting File List The file list of a file selector has three columns.sets of characters can be represented in square brackets.she. if you enter d*.matches zero or more of any characters • ? . the last modification Date and the Size of the file. For example. which begin with the letter d and which have the extension .matches any single character • [.

............................................ 48 • Saving Sheets..................................................... 56 • Importing a File .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 82 • Quitting MEDUSA ................................ 83 © CAD Schroer GmbH 43 ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 53 • Sheet Administration by using Working Sets ................................... 49 • Opening a File............................... 63 • Plotting a Sheet.............................. 45 • Closing a Sheet.................... 75 • The Sheet Header Editor ......... 44 • Creating a New Sheet... 64 • Printing a Sheet ..... • The File Menu ................................................................ 67 • Sheet Properties ...............................MEDUSA4 Drafting FILE This chapter explains the functions which are available when you select the File option from the menu bar........................................................................... 62 • Exporting a File ... 80 • Sheet History Stack.........................................................

the following pulldown menu opens. Figure 22 The File Pulldown Menu 44 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting File The File Menu If you select File in the menu bar.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Sheet Creating a New Sheet You can create standard sized sheets and custom sheets (non standard size) To create a new sheet move the cursor over the New option. Figure 23 Sheet Type List of the New Option standard size non standard size Now you can select either a standard size sheet or a non standard size sheet.00 210.00 420.00 297. as shown in Standard Sheet E/A0 D/A1 C/A2 B/A3 A/A4 (horizontal) AV/A4V (vertical) Metric (mm) Width Height 1189. © CAD Schroer GmbH 45 . Therefore you should confirm with your System Administrator the sizes of the sheets supported at your installation. A list of sheet types appears top right of the File pulldown menu.00 594.0 34.5 22. Standard Sized Sheet To create a standard sheet select one of the standard sizes.00 594.5 33.0 17.00 210.00 297. Table 2 Standard Sheet Sizes .0 22.0 8.0 17.0 8. for example Table 2.00 841.00 297.0 11.0 The sizes of the standard sheets may differ from those shown and they may be specific to your installation.5 11.00 420. You can modify the sheet size in the Sheet Properties dialog as described in “Sheet Size” on page 78.0 11.00 841. The new sheet opens according to the desired size.00 Imperial (inches) Width Height 44.

Click OK for creating the new sheet If you chose a Custom sized sheet a blank sheet is created. If you choose Custom you are free in defining the Width and Height of the sheet additionally to the specification of Scale. Width. 2. Type defines the type of the drafting. Figure 24 Special Sheets Dialog The dialog offers the following parameters: Size provides the standard sheet sizes and a Custom entry. you can define the Scale. For details see “Permanent and Temporary Sheet Scale” on page 76.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Non standard Custom Sheet For creating a non standard sheet do the following: 1. Units and the Type different from the default settings available with the standard sheets. Please note: You can only change the units if there is more than one unit type available. Units defines the sheet units either to Metric (mm) or Imperial (inch). Set the parameters for the sheet as required. Choose New -> from the File menu for opening the Special Sheets dialog. Height define the size of a Custom sheet. For details see “Sheet Type” on page 47. Scale defines the permanent scale of the sheet. If you created a Custom sheet annotate the sheet as described in ”Annotating a Sheet”. For details see “Units” on page 77. For the standard sizes offered by Size these entry fields are disabled. 3. Units and Type. If you choose one of the standard sheet sizes. If you chose one of the standard sized sheets a new sheet is created with the settings you made. 4. Units are set by your System Administrator. 46 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Annotating a Sheet If you have a custom sheet there is no title block containing the name of the sheet for unique identification. Select a New Text tool . you would set the Type option button to 2D if you are working in MEDUSA Drafting.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Sheet Sheet Type The sheet type varies depending on the MEDUSA application you are working in. For example. © CAD Schroer GmbH 47 . 2. 4. or on the requirements of your company. Type the drawing name into the text entry box on the right of the dashboard. Change the text style on the dashboard to Free. and click left. The range of sheet types is defined by your System Administrator. To annotate a sheet: 1. Therefore it is essential to annotate the sheet with the sheet name so that it can be easily identified when you display it on the workstation screen or when you plot it. 3. The Type option button in the Special Sheets dialog lists the available sheet types for your project. Please note: You cannot change the sheet type after you have created the sheet. 5. Move your cursor until the text is in the position you require. Change the text type on the dashboard to Drawing Number.

If you choose a file which should be closed. the selected drawing is promptly closed. Figure 25 Pulldown Menu Close 48 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If you made modifications in the sheet which have not been saved till now the Save or Discard Sheet dialog appears and you are asked to save or discard the changes. A list of available sheets appears.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Closing a Sheet If you want to close a certain sheet choose the Close option from the File menu.

Click on Save stores modifications in the drawing and saves the current sheet under its existing identity. © CAD Schroer GmbH 49 . (See also “Toolbar Overview” on page 262) Save The Save option is only available if you have loaded an existing sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Saving Sheets Saving Sheets The File pulldown menu offers four different save options which are shown below. that is a sheet which has been saved before under a defined name in a specified directory. Figure 26 The Save Options of the File Menu saves the current sheet under its existing identity saves a new sheet or saves a copy of the current sheet under a new identity saves the current sheet automatically in defined intervals saves the current sheet as raster image file The Save and Save As tool is also available in the toolbar.

MEDUSA4 Drafting File Save As You can use the Save As option to: • save a new created sheet under a defined file name in a specified directory • save a copy of the current sheet under a new file name in a specified directory For saving a sheet to a new file click on Save As from the File menu. Here you can select the folder where you wish to save your sheet. For further information see the MEDUSA Administration Guide. Please note: Your System Administrator can modify the default file name as displayed in the Filename input field. 50 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The left side of the Save As dialog shows the directory structure. The lower field at the right hand side of the dialog displays the names of the files which are stored in the current directory. It offers a list of file types. The Filter pulldown menu can be called by clicking on the arrow. Figure 27 The Save As Dialog The Filename input field displays the actual path and directory and a default file name with the extension she. The Save As dialog is displayed.

3. 4. Click on Auto Sheet Save from the File menu to open the Auto Save Dialog. 3. The dialog disappears. Auto Sheet Save 1. Select the directory where you wish to save your sheet. • home stores the sheet in your home directory. Select the file type as which you want to save your sheet. Enter a number of seconds to define the interval in which the current sheet should be stored automatically. • user stores the sheet to the directory you define in the field Path Selection. For example. The Path Selection field displays the path in which the sheet is saved automatically. Figure 29 The Auto Save Dialog 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Saving Sheets Figure 28 The Filter Pulldown Menu For saving the current sheet: 1. Select the Location where you wish to save the sheet from the pulldown menu list. 2. choose AutoCAD DXF (*. Following locations are available: • current stores the sheet in the current directory. Click OK to apply the settings or Cancel to quit the dialog without applying the settings. It is only enabled if the Location is user.dxf) for exporting the current sheet with AutoCAD exchange format. The directory is displayed in the Filename field. © CAD Schroer GmbH 51 . The current sheet is stored in the chosen directory under the defined file name. Click on Save.

By default the type is tif. By default the extension for the image file is tif. Open the Image Browse Dialog by clicking the Browse button. Click OK. Inside the Image Save As Dialog the type for saving as image can be chosen by the arrow to the right of the Save Image Type field. 52 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Select the directory where you wish to save the image file and click the Open button. 4. Please note: This option will only be enabled if the RASTER product is included in your project. By default the displayed file name accords with the drawing number of the current sheet. Figure 30 The Image Save As Dialog 2. The dialog disappears and the desired path is displayed in the Filename field of the Image Save As dialog. Please note: If the medcolraster product is part of your product list. Click on Save as Image from the File menu for opening the Image Save As Dialog. 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Save As Image MEDUSA enables you to save a sheet as image. 3. the Image type options can differ from the one shown above (for details. The sheet is saved as image and the Image Save As Dialog disappears. see the MEDRaster User Guide).

MEDUSA4 Drafting Opening a File Opening a File To open drawing files choose the Open option from the File menu. which are tsh (old STHENO format). a file type selector and a file list. Open Sheet Dialog For opening a drawing: 1. For continuing to open a drawing: 2. Select the Open option from the File menu to open the Open Sheet dialog. Other sheets which can be loaded are defined by its extensions. • The right hand side has six preview areas in which files may be viewed (for details see ”Preview”). With this the graphical file manager with preview function opens allowing you to open drawings from any directory. © CAD Schroer GmbH 53 . dxf (drawing exchange format) and dwg (standard AutoCAD). Figure 31 Open Sheet Dialog You can also open the Open Sheet dialog via the Open an existing sheet button from the toolbar. By default MEDUSA offers the file type with extension she in the field below Filter. If there are drawings in the selected directory they are displayed in the list Filename. which is explained in chapter “Toolbar Overview” on page 262. The Open Sheet dialog consists of two parts: • The left part of the dialog offers a directory browser. Select the directory containing the drawing you want to open inside the browser on the left hand side by clicking left on a path name.

Write Protected Preview The right hand side of the Open Sheet dialog allows you to preview drawings without opening them. b. Now the file can be opened by: a. 54 © CAD Schroer GmbH . On the right hand side the border of the appropriate preview becomes red. There are two alternative ways of opening a file.MEDUSA4 Drafting File 3. • You can double click the left mouse button inside the list Filename. The file is loaded and the dialog remains open. Click left on the Apply button if you want to open further drawings. If you reached your path select the drawing you want to open inside the Filename list. Click left on the Open button. The lock informs you whether a file is write protected or not. The preview drawings itself can be used for opening a drawing too. the tab below the drawing area displays the filename and at the left hand site of it the symbol of a lock. Figure 32 Display of File Attribute . Both close the Open Sheet dialog. • You can click left on a preview box. The chosen drawing is loaded and the Open Sheet dialog closes. Write Protection Display When you have opened a MEDUSA drawing.

If the seventh of nine files is selected.g. • Open drawings To open a file. then only the thirteenth and the fourteenth are previewed.: If the thirteenth of fourteen files is selected. If the number of files exceeds a multiple of six. If the directory contains up to six files. the last files are displayed as remainder (e. scroll inside the Filename list.MEDUSA4 Drafting Opening a File Figure 33 Preview of the Open Sheet Dialog For the preview section following functionalities are available: • Preview all drawings To preview all files click left on the Preview button. The files are displayed in ’sixpacks’ and the selected file is highlighted by a red frame. click into the preview window of your choice using the left mouse button. If the directory contains more than six files. then only the seventh. • Preview one drawing To preview only one of the six drawings move the cursor above the appropriate preview box and click the middle mouse button. all files are displayed in the preview windows. select the file you want to preview and click left on the Preview button. © CAD Schroer GmbH 55 . the eighth and the ninth are previewed).

Sheet Working Sets Dialog The Sheet Working Sets dialog enables you to create and use WSD files. copy and delete WSD files • Load and close the sheets defined in the WSD file • Refresh the list of available sheets • Reset the list of selected sheets to that one stored in the WSD file • Manage the properties associated with WSD files • Add sheet files to and remove sheet files from a WSD file 56 © CAD Schroer GmbH . open. This dialog allows you to: • Create. To display the Sheet Working Sets dialog. This section describes how to group a number of sheets under one Working Set Definition (WSD) file and how to use WSD files.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Sheet Administration by using Working Sets You can group a number of sheets under one name by using a Working Set Definition (WSD) file. select the Working Sets option Figure 34 Sheet Working Sets Dialog from the File menu.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 57 . For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Administration by using Working Sets Popup Menu for the Lists of Sheets If you move the cursor over the lists of the Sheet Working Sets dialog the following popup menu is available: Figure 35 Popup Menu for Sheet Lists Select All. This option is used after adding and removing sheets from a WSD file. 6. if the Loaded Sheet option is set to Clear in the Working Set Properties dialog (for details to this dialog see “Modifying Loading Behavior” on page 61). 5. The Selected Sheets list is empty. Creating a WSD File 1. Select the directory where you wish to store the WSD file and insert a file name. Click on Save. The Saves the current multi-sheet set button becomes disabled until you change something in the WSD file. 2. This occurs. 4. any sheets associated with that working set will be closed automatically. you are asked to save the contents. Sort is used for sorting the list entries alphabetical. if an old working set has been modified. Please note: If already a working set has been loaded. that is the area of the dialog below the tools. Click the Defines a new multi-sheet working set button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. 3. The WSD file entry on the Sheet Working Sets dialog is left blank. The current working set is saved immediately. Click the Saves the current multi-sheet set button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. The Available Sheets list displays the sheets of the current working directory. Select the files that you wish to be part of the new Working Set in the Available Sheets list and move it into the Selected Sheets list using the Add available sheet to set button . there may be some interactions. A file selector dialog appears. Deselect All selects or deselects all entries of a list. If a working set is already opened.

Choose the directory and WSD file which should be loaded. The sheet lists are updated according to the definitions in the loaded WSD file. The current WSD file is deleted from the hard disk. 2. The Open Working Set dialog opens which looks like a usual dialog for opening files. Click the Opens a multi-sheet set button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. Click OK. Adding Sheets to a WSD File To add sheets to a WSD file: 1. Select the sheet files from the Available Sheets list on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. a new working set is created and the sheet set is updated. 2. (Using the Sheet Working Sets dialog). 3. Click the Deletes current multi-sheet set button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. The Available Sheets list displays all sheet files of the selected directory which are not defined in the current working set. Loading a WSD File 1. 2. Click the Saves current multi-sheet set under a new identity button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog for opening the Save As A New Working Set file selector dialog. Identify the folder for the WSD file and enter its name in the File Name field. Both lists together show all sheet files inside the selected directory. Open the WSD file if it is not currently open.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Creating a Copy of the Current WSD File 1. Choose OK. 3. Click the Add option to move the files to the Selected Sheets list. Deleting a WSD File 1. 2. If the set already exists an error is reported in the output message area and the File Selector dialog remains on the screen to allow you to try again. Provided the given file does not already exist. The Selected Sheets list displays all sheet files which are defined in the current working set. 58 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Its settings remain until you create a new or load another WSD file.

all sheets of the appropriate WSD file are loaded. Removing Sheets from a WSD File To remove unwanted sheets from the WSD file: 1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 59 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Administration by using Working Sets Please note: Sheets are automatically added to a WSD file once it is active. Loading Sheets of a WSD File Clicking the Loads the complete working set button on the Sheet Working Sets dialog loads the files listed in the Selected Sheets panel into your current MEDUSA session. If you choose the option Don’t ask unless I open another working set and click the OK button. You can alter the behavior of the load process. For example. the WSD file is loaded automatically when starting the next session until you load another WSD file or no WSD file and save the defaults with that setting. Cancel aborts loading. This is explained in “Modifying Loading Behavior” on page 61. If you loaded the files of a WSD file and if you save the defaults when quitting MEDUSA (see “Quitting MEDUSA” on page 83). you can modify what MEDUSA does with sheets that are not found and with currently loaded sheets. Select the sheet files from the Selected Sheets list on the Sheet Working Sets dialog. See “Once the Working Set is Active” on page 60. 2. The selected sheet files are removed from the WSD file. Click the Remove option to move the files to the Available Sheets list. then in the next session you are asked for reloading the sheets of the WSD file by the following dialog: Figure 36 Reload WSD File If you choose OK.

on the Sheet Working Sets dialog closes 60 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Sheet files that are referenced in the WSD file are excluded. Closing Sheets of a WSD File Clicking the Closes all files of the current multi-sheet set button the files listed in the Selected Sheets panel. Click Reset the multi-sheet set to reset the Selected Sheets list to the saved WSD file and display a refreshed Available Sheets list. If there are unsaved changes. Figure 37 Save or Discard Working Set Dialog A similar dialog is displayed when a new working set is created or opened and you have made changes to the existing Working Set. allowing you to save or discard any changes to the working set definition.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Once the Working Set is Active Once a working set is loaded in MEDUSA. Refresh and Reset Sheet Lists Click Refresh the available sheet list to display a refreshed Available Sheets list. any sheets that are subsequently opened or created are automatically added into the working set. the following dialog is displayed. At the end of a session the working set is checked for modifications. Similarly when sheets are closed (for example using Windows > Close) they are automatically removed from the working set. This button is only available if you moved sheets between the lists as explained in ”Adding Sheets to a WSD File” and “Removing Sheets from a WSD File” on page 59.

click the Manage the properties associated with working sets button Working Sets dialog. • Abort discontinues the Load option. Use the Loaded Sheets pulldown menu to define whether to retain or close any sheet files which are already loaded. • Auto Switch uses the sheet files already loaded. 2. you will be prompted to save or discard any unsaved changes. Figure 39 Load WSD Error Dialog © CAD Schroer GmbH 61 . • Always Load reloads the sheet files. Use the Know Sheets pulldown menu to either use the sheet files already loaded in MEDUSA or to reload them. Figure 38 Working Set Properties Dialog 1. you will be prompted to save or discard any unsaved changes. • Ignore loads only those sheet files that are found. • Clear closes the sheet files already loaded. When you load a WSD file. The File Selector dialog will appear once for each missing sheet. Loading is aborted. You can use this dialog to navigate to a folder where the desired sheet is located. listing the sheet files that are not found. Use the Lost Sheets pulldown menu to ignore or abort the sheet files that do not exist. • Search displays a File Selector dialog if any sheets are not found. An Error dialog is displayed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Administration by using Working Sets Modifying Loading Behavior You can customize the way in which the sheets are loaded using the Working Set Properties dialog. • Retain keeps the sheet files already loaded. 3. When you load a WSD file. on the Sheet To display this dialog.

The dialog shows the directory structure on the left hand side. 1. Choose the directory from which you wish to load the file. Select Import from the File menu. The Import File dialog appears.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Importing a File MEDUSA provides the possibility to import sheets with IGES standard and CADDS format. 4. The desired file type is displayed in the Filter field on the right hand side. Select a file. The sheet is displayed. 2. Click on Open to import the chosen sheet into MEDUSA. Now the Open button is activated. Select a type. Figure 41 The Import File Dialog 3. The pulldown menu opens and displays a list of file types. 62 © CAD Schroer GmbH . • IGES -> Cadds opens a sheet with the CADDS IGES format. 5. The tab below the drawing area displays an intermediate name of the drawing starting with IMPORT. Figure 40 The Import Pulldown Menu • IGES -> Standard opens a sheet with the standard IGES format.

• MEDUSA NG 2000I2 saves the current sheet with the format of MEDUSA 2000I2 and earlier. 4. Select Export from the File menu. Figure 43 The Export File Dialog 3. Choose the directory in which you wish to save the file. The Export File dialog appears.2. Please note: For exporting sheets in AutoCAD drawing format (dwg) or the exchange format (dxf) use the menu item Save as (see “Saving Sheets” on page 49). Path and filename of the current sheet appear in the Filename field. The pulldown menu opens and displays a list of file types. The desired file type is displayed in the Filter field on the right hand side. Figure 42 The Export Pulldown Menu • MEDUSA4 Rev. The dialog shows the directory structure on the left hand side. Select a type.MEDUSA4 Drafting Exporting a File Exporting a File MEDUSA provides the possibility to export sheets to IGES and some older MEDUSA formats. © CAD Schroer GmbH 63 . 2. • MEDUSA NG 2001/2003 saves the current sheet with the format of MEDUSA versions between 2001 and 2003. Click on Save to save the sheet in the requested format and directory.2 saves the current sheet with the format of MEDUSA4 Rev. 1. • IGES saves the current sheet with the Standard or CADDS IGES format.

MEDUSA4 Drafting File Plotting a Sheet To display the Plot Sheet dialog.. option from the File menu. select the Plot.. Figure 44 Plot Dialog The parameters of the Plot Sheet dialog are: 64 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Text in this entry box determines what will appear in the first line of the plot information title box if it is plotted. Drafting project This is an user project. the smoother the curve appears. By default the value is 1. which defines the appearance of drawing elements. Title A title box may be included at the bottom of the plotted sheet. The numbers change automatically to reflect the coordinates of whichever Plot Template you select (that is. You may alter these coordinates if required.MEDUSA4 Drafting Plotting a Sheet Admin plot project defines the plot queues and plotter driver programs to be used by the plotting system administrator. Sheet or Window). Layers This pulldown list allows you to select which layer or specific set of layers (for example All layers) you would like to plot. Max Angle. Priority Sets the priority of running the plot process on your computer It can be a value from 1 (highest priority) to 5 (lowest priority). Drawing code Gives the number of the drawing code used for plotting. You can click in this area and edit this text if required. © CAD Schroer GmbH 65 . Plot templates Allows you to define whether you wish to use the full sheet or the current view in the MEDUSA drawing window as the template for the plot. Plot window These entry boxes define the coordinates defining precisely which area of the sheet is plotted. No of copies Allows you to define how many copies will be plotted. Up to ten Drawing codes are defined in the code. Min. Angle Arcs are drawn using a number of straight lines known as chords.dat. Curve Factor. The Drafting project can be the Admin plot project at the same time. Plot scale This option is only active when Enable Autoscale choice box is not selected. Refer to your System Administrator for more information. Use this entry box to define a specific scale. The more chords that are used to draw the arc. Refer to your System Administrator for more information. The way in which arcs appear on your screen is not necessarily the way that they appear on the plotted sheet. Plotter Format Is relevant only for particular plotters and may not be relevant at your site. Each directory is called queue. Available queues Displays all available directories where MEDUSA sheets and plot definition files are stored until they are processed by a plotter driver program.

Max Angle. Min. profile and load point lines on or off for plotting. a raster image included in the sheet is plotted with the sheet. Query Plot Queue opens the following dialog: Figure 45 Plot Queue Dialog The list of Available queues is shown. Additionally you can define whether a referenced raster is updated before plotting. You can sort it either by priority or plot number. Angle work together to define the arc factor for the plotted sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting File The options Curve Factor. The operation of these entry boxes is the same as the operation of the entry boxes which are used to define the way in which arcs appear on your computer screen. Plot raster backdrop If this option is on. 66 © CAD Schroer GmbH . and whether the raster is copied also into the plot queue. Visibility Settings of Design Objects this option sets the visibility of hidden.

You can choose a file in any directory. option from the File menu. In order to do this choose the File option from the Print output to pulldown list. The File Selector button opens the dialog. Filename and path are passed to the Filename input field.MEDUSA4 Drafting Printing a Sheet Printing a Sheet To display the Print dialog. Figure 46 Print Dialog The parameters of the Print dialog are: Filename becomes active if you want to print to a file. You have to enter name and complete path of the plotfile.. © CAD Schroer GmbH 67 . select the Print..

Figure 47 Directory Pulldown Menu of the Print Dialog Figure 48 Predefined Directory with added Filename During the startup of the Print dialog the directories defined in the defaults. if they exist. The user has only to add the filename by clicking twice on the desired file. when the Print output to option is set on File.dat are checked. please.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Directory This input field works in conjunction with the Filename field and is also only active. The selected one is entered into the Filename input field and is used as start directory for the File Selector dialog.dat (for detailed information on this subject. 68 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If not. the following error message appears. refer to the Customization Guide). It provides the possibility to choose a predefined target directory from a pulldown list. In order to display the pulldown list the Administrator has to define the accordant keywords in the defaults.

No of copies Allows you to define how many copies will be printed. Refer to your System Administrator for more information. if A4“. Paper Height gives the width and height of the paper on which the sheet is printed. Paper Width. Explicit Format definition is taken from the currently displayed window (values of the Paper Width and Paper Height fields). for example “Rotating only if A3“ or “Special paper tray.MEDUSA4 Drafting Printing a Sheet Figure 49 Error Message. Format names are assigned with additional predefined format-specific commands (DEFFORMAT commands). Print output to Allows you to define the destination for printing which is either the printer or a file. Print templates Allows you to define whether you wish to use the full sheet or the current view in the MEDUSA drawing window as the template for the print. © CAD Schroer GmbH 69 . If you choose File then the entry Filename becomes active for specifying a file name. Drawing code Gives the number of the drawing code used for printing. Complies with the AREA HARD command in the description file. is dependant on the type of printer that you use. By default the value is 1. Which parts of an oversized drawing are trimmed or whereabouts on the paper an undersized drawing is placed. or similar. Up to ten Drawing codes are defined in the code. If this is not supported on the selected printer at your installation the graphics will be sized and located based on the sizes given but then they could be trimmed to the available paper size.dat. if Predefined Directory does not exist Available printers displays a list of all the printers configured in your system. Area options These options are not normally used for general printing operations and should not require alteration. Printer Format complies with the FORMAT command and is used to pass format names. Hard Plot size according to the inquired hardware limits of the plotter at run time (and the plotter driver settings with WINPLOT respectively). Allows you to define an explicit paper size.

Enable Autoscale When this choice box is selected. Additionally you can define whether a referenced raster is updated before printing. MEDUSA will automatically scale the defined area to fit on the sheet. ensure this choice box is not selected and use the Print scale option. please. Min. Min. Print backdrop If this option is on. refer to the Customization Guide). You can click in this area and edit this text if required. The way in which arcs appear on your screen is not necessarily the way that they appear on the printed sheet. The numbers change automatically to reflect the coordinates of whichever Print templates you select (that is. Max Angle. Print scale This option is only active when Enable Autoscale choice box is deselected. The operation of these entry boxes is the same as the operation of the entry boxes which are used to define the way in which arcs appear on your computer screen. and whether the raster is copied also into the plot queue. Title Depending upon settings in the Advanced Options dialog. the smoother the curve appears. Angle Arcs are drawn using a number of straight lines known as chords. The graphics will not become distorted. To define a specific scale. Auto Takes the information on the paper size out of the sheet. Max Angle. complies with AREA AUTO in the description file. This can be set through the plotter control panel. Layers This pulldown list allows you to select which layer or specific set of layers (for example All layers) you would like to print. If this information is not available. Print window These entry boxes define the coordinates defining precisely which area of the sheet is printed. a raster image included in the sheet is printed with the sheet. if auto scaling is disabled and the requested print is too large for the selected printer. Angle work together to define the arc factor for the printed sheet. nothing is printed. (see “Advanced Options” on page 72) a title box may be included at the bottom of the printed sheet. The more chords that are used to draw the arc. You may alter these coordinates if required. The default setting for Print scale is 3.dat (for detailed information on this subject. Text in this entry box determines what will appear in the first line of the print information title box if it is printed. Your Administrator can define another default value by setting the accordant keyword and the desired value in the defaults. the area defaults to A4 portrait. Curve Factor. 70 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The options Curve Factor. Sheet or Window). Use this entry box to define a specific scale.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Soft Sets the size of the drawing area by using the softclip limits obtained from the plotter itself. WARNING: Normally.

If the Enable Auto rotate choice box is selected it becomes deselected if you select this choice box. if necessary. ensure that both the Enable Auto scale and Enable Auto rotate choice boxes are selected. If the Rotate Print choice box is selected it becomes deselected if you select this choice box again. MEDUSA automatically rotates the defined area to suit the sheet orientation. MEDUSA always rotates the area to be printed through 90 degrees. Enable Optimization Option relevant only for pen plotter according to the OPT command in the description file. then the sheet will be rotated. For details see “Advanced Options” on page 72. prevents that the pens are changed to often and optimizes the path of the pens. for example to print a landscape shaped area on a printer which has a portrait orientation paper feed. Please note: To ensure that the area to be printed is scaled to the fullest extent for the paper size. © CAD Schroer GmbH 71 . Rotate Print When this choice box is selected. A portrait orientated sheet will not be rotated. Advanced Options Opens a dialog allowing you to set further print settings. if you send a landscape shaped sheet on a printer which has a portrait orientation paper feed. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Printing a Sheet Enable Autorotate When this option is selected.

Once set to On use the Values 72 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The fields on this dialog are described below. for example for text printing or defining a print title block. click the Advanced Options button on the Print dialog. Boundary Brackets If On angular Margin markers are drawn on the printed sheet. using the Advanced Printing Options dialog. outside of the sheet borders to define the corners of the sheet boundary area If On a blank margin is kept around the edge of the sheet. Figure 50 Advance Printing Options Dialog Select the required options and define any optional user text on this dialog and click OK to return to the Print dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Advanced Options You can define advanced printing options. To display this dialog. Layout Options These radio buttons define various sheet layout options.

the physical pen is used to create this line. even if the proportional spacing is not shown on the screen. Text for the title block may be defined in the Title entry box on the Printer dialog and the Optional User Text area of the Advanced Printing Options dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Printing a Sheet button to display a dialog which allows you to specify the margin extents as X and Y coordinates. It is the area on the plot paper. © CAD Schroer GmbH 73 . If OFF is active. one thin per color is sufficient. Using THKSIM ON. Thickness Simulation Complies with the THKSIM ON/OFF switch If required. Scrubbing area Option only relevant for pen plotter Complies with the SCR ON/OFF command (Scrubbing) in the description file. Particularly with color plotters the number of defined pens will be very large. Please note: A disadvantage is that the plot file becomes needlessly large. Visibility Options Using the On or Off radio buttons you can select wether Hidden lines. so that the ink begins to flow in the right moment. it uses a pen repeatedly. that the pens can draw undisturbed. If the On radio button is selected text with shear attributes is printed sheared. Title Block If On a title block is drawn at the bottom of the print. Proportional Spacing If the On Text Shear radio button is selected text with proportional spacing attributes is printed with proportional spacing. Profile Lines or Loadpoints should be visible or not in the print. if the first correct line is produced. which is used for the fact. See “Controlling User Options” in the MEDUSA Administration Guide. even if the shear is not shown on the screen. i. possibly too large. Format Options These radio buttons define various format options Please note: Text may have a proportional spacing or shear attribute set but this spacing or shear setting may not be displayed on the screen. outside of the graphics area. in order to create a line which surpasses the line width of the thickest pen.e.

Each User Text entry box defines a line of text which can appear in the title block. Enter text into the text entry areas as required. Set the other options on the dialog as required. Select an option from the Print output to pulldown list to define whether you want to print directly to the printer or to a file.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Optional User Text These text entry areas allow you to specify optional lines of text which may be included in the title block of the printout below the graphics area. To display the Print Dialog choose the Print option from the File menu. 74 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Select a printer name from the Available Printers list. Perform Printing 1. If you selected Print output to file type a name for the file in the Filename text entry box. To disable one or more lines of user text so that they are not shown on the printed sheet. 3. as specified. 4. If required click the File Selector.. 6. Please note: The Filename text entry box and the File Selector. button and use the browser to define a file name and location in which to store the file. Click OK to print either to the printer or to a file.. button remain grayed out until you select the Printer option from the Print output to pulldown list. Please note: The title block is not printed unless the Title Block option is set to On in the dialog. If you want all user text to be shown on the printed sheet ensure that none of the Disable choice boxes is selected. 3. 1. 5. select the appropriate Disable choice box(es). 2... 2.

Figure 51 The Sheet Properties Dialog You can change the following sheet properties: • The scale (see “Permanent and Temporary Sheet Scale” on page 76). • The units (see “Units” on page 77). Choose Sheet Properties from the File menu. • The size of the sheet (see “Sheet Size” on page 78).MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Properties Sheet Properties This section describes how to change the sheet properties by using the Sheet Properties dialog. © CAD Schroer GmbH 75 . 1. The sheet properties dialog appears.map file). • The Layer Naming Convention field indicates whether layer names on your sheet conform to the default names set up in your project (in the layers.

The default name is DrgNo. For example. This enables you to enter actual object dimensions while. If you have saved your sheet the saved name and path name are displayed. tab Switches. if you want the dimensions you enter to be scaled down by a factor of two (that is. This scale is saved with the sheet. use the Defaults dialog. you can change the default sheet scale for the entire sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Sheet Filename The Filename field in the Sheet Properties dialog displays the full path name of the current sheet. 76 © CAD Schroer GmbH . for example. You can set the permanent sheet scale when you create the sheet or you can set it later in the Sheet Properties dialog. that is.Control User Options” on page 181. you should enter 1:2. See ”Options”. To avoid the problem. “Switches . all values you enter are divided by two before being drawn on the sheet).. The name displayed depends upon whether you have saved the sheet. Permanent Sheet Scale The Sheet field in the Sheet Properties dialog defines the permanent scale for the sheet. of having to scale up something small like an integrated circuit. Please note: You cannot change the sheet filename in this field. If the current sheet is a new sheet and if it has not been saved the default filename is displayed. creating a quarter scale drawing.. You save the sheet using the Save As. but this may alter if your System Administrator has defined standard sheets for use at your site.she. any dimensions that you specify are the actual dimensions used when the element is plotted on paper. item from the File menu. Permanent and Temporary Sheet Scale The default scale of a sheet is 1:1. for example. Figure 52 Sheet Properties Dialog: Scale Please note: To change the default sheet units.

Units The units that are available in your project are set by your System Administrator and can be changed using the Sheet Properties dialog shown in Figure 51. enter 1:0. if you want all the dimensions you enter to be multiplied by a factor of two. or 2:1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 77 . you can set temporary linear or angular units. type 1:1 in the Sheet field. To set a local unit choose a linear unit from the Linear pulldown list. However.5.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Properties If you want to draw an object larger than actual size then you must enter a factor greater than one. These units are used to store measurements internally. The temporary factor is used either until you: • Change or reset the permanent sheet scale (by clicking the Reset button) • Save and choose a new sheet If you save the sheet and then continue to work on it the temporary scale remains the same for that sheet. For example. Temporary Sheet Scale The Temporary field in the Sheet Properties dialog defines the temporary scale for the sheet. Resetting the Default Sheet Scale To reset the scale to the default value. Figure 53 Sheet Properties Dialog: Units Permanent Sheet Units These units (mm or inches) are set when you create the sheet and cannot be changed. Enter the scale in the same way as the permanent sheet scale. Linear Units You can define a local unit to use while either dimensioning or entering coordinates in the Enter Coords dialog. Click the Apply button to update the width and height fields. This scale is not saved with the sheet. “The Sheet Properties Dialog” on page 75.

296 degrees) Gradians (100 grad = 90 degrees) Radians Please note: To specify a negative angle. • Store text (as reminders to yourself) • Rotate a large object some of the points may be moved outside the normal sheet area during the rotation. The dimensions of the new sheet are measured from the sheet origin in the lower left corner. type fractions of inches in decimal format. type half an inch as 0. The standard list comprises: • Degrees (the default angular unit) • • • • Minutes Seconds (1 radian angular unit is approximately 57.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Please note: When entering coordinates. 78 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Angular Units The Angular option button contains a list of angular units set by your System Administrator. It does not change the size of the border or title block. for example.5. Changing the sheet size changes the area that is plotted. Maximum Sheet Size You may need to define points outside the normal sheet area. For example when you: • Create large radius arcs you may need to define reference points that lie outside the normal drawing area. Sheet Size Figure 54 Sheet Properties Dialog: Size You can modify the size of the sheet by typing in the actual dimensions you require in the Sheet Width and Sheet Height fields of the Sheet Properties dialog. type a minus sign before the number.

For example. Setting the Maximum Sheet Size For setting the maximum sheet size enter the maximum width and height of the sheet and define a border size by typing in the actual dimensions you need in the Maximum Width and Maximum Height fields in the Sheet Properties dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet Properties You can perform such operations by using a border area around the normal sheet area. if you want a border that is 10 units wider than the sheet. Please note: By default the maximum size is: Maximum width = sheet width + 2(width+height) Maximum height = sheet height + 2(width+height) © CAD Schroer GmbH 79 . You cannot place points outside of this area. Plotting (printing) is explained in “Plotting a Sheet” on page 64 (“Printing a Sheet” on page 67). enter values that are 10 units more than those you defined for the sheet size. You use the Maximum fields to define the width of this border area. When you click the OK or Apply buttons. the sheet is automatically redrawn. This area is not printed if you use the Full sheet plotting option.

Edit the entries as required. To display the Sheet Header Editor dialog select the Sheet Header Editor. chapter ”Administration”.. If an input field is a mandatory field it is marked with a star (*). number of the drawing. Possible groups would be. The following description of the Sheet Header Editor dialog is an example only because the open configuration allows many more possibilities of text definitions. that the content of the text field can be summarized to logical groups via the configuration (see the Administration Guide. for example: standard entries (name of the drawing. The zoom window is set automatically to the area of the text field. Another benefit is. efficient and interactive processing of the data. Manually processing this information is not only very laborious but it can also generate errors. the processing of long lists of text field information can be structured concisely.. “Setting up the Sheet Header Editor”). all processed with the same tool. Consequently.MEDUSA4 Drafting File The Sheet Header Editor The text field of a drawing contains a lot of information. The special advantage of the Sheet Header Editor is its open configuration. material. This allows as many text field types as desired. The Sheet Header Editor dialog enables fast.. 1.. Figure 56 Mandatory Input Field 80 © CAD Schroer GmbH .) or the area of the revision index.. option from the File menu. scale. Figure 55 Sheet Header Editor Pulldown menu for selecting pages Scrolls pages back and forth 2. then the dialog box opens. The tool needs a short moment to read all required information from the sheet.

If you choose Cancel the Sheet Header Editor quits and the dialog box is closed. If you made changes inside the edit fields these changes are lost. Click OK or Apply for confirming the current entries of the Sheet Header Editor dialog. If you choose Apply the data is taken into the sheet after an error-free check of the input fields but the dialog box stays open. The operation and appearance of the Sheet Header Editor can be configured according to the user's needs via a configuration file. If you choose OK the data is taken into the sheet and the dialog box closes after an error-free check of the input fields. © CAD Schroer GmbH 81 . Figure 57 Error Mandatory Input 3. For detailed information about the configuration of the Sheet Header Editor see the Administration Guide. otherwise an error message opens.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Sheet Header Editor Please note: Quitting the dialog via the button OK is only possible after all mandatory input fields have a content.

Figure 58 Sheet History Option. The file is loaded in MEDUSA. The sheet history stack is available in the form of a list of previous opened files and can be found at the bottom of the File pulldown menu. 82 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click on the entry File located on the menu bar. The number of files displayed is configurable. 2. “Sheet History Stack” on page 179. The File pulldown menu appears. please see ”Options”. 1. Click on a file name.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Sheet History Stack Additional to the Open menu option (see “Opening a File” on page 53). there is also a sheet history stack provided within the File pulldown menu. The sheet history stack is located at the bottom. In this form MEDUSA provides quick access to files in a manner consistent with other Microsoft Windows applications. List of last opened files The number of files displayed in the sheet history stack can be configured with up to a maximum of eight files being displayed at any one time. For more information concerning the configuration of the sheet history stack.

The following dialogs are displayed: • If you have created a sheet which has not been saved till now the Save or Discard Sheet dialog opens. b. Click on Discard rejects changes and closes the MEDUSA session. The sheet is still loaded and you can continue your session. • If you have made any changes of the defaults during the session MEDUSA displays the Save or Discard Defaults dialog with the according message. Figure 60 The Save or Discard Dialog 2 The buttons Save as. Click on Save As calls up the Save As dialog. (See also “Saving Sheets” on page 49) and quit the session.MEDUSA4 Drafting Quitting MEDUSA Quitting MEDUSA To quit MEDUSA choose Quit from the File menu. The displayed message contains a hint of the path and file which has been modified. You can store the sheet in a requested directory. c. Click Save to store the sheet and the changes under its existing identity. Discard and Cancel work as described above. Figure 59 The Save or Discard Dialog 1 a. © CAD Schroer GmbH 83 . The dialog closes and the session is terminated. Click on Cancel ignores quitting. • If you have modified a sheet which has already been saved in a directory the Save or Discard Sheet dialog opens.

b. closes the dialog and quits the MEDUSA session.MEDUSA4 Drafting File Figure 61 The Save or Discard Defaults Dialog a. Click on Cancel ignores quitting and you can continue the session. Click on Save stores the changes of the defaults. Click on Discard ignores the changes and quits the session. 84 © CAD Schroer GmbH . c.

............ 86 • Undo and Redo........................................................... • The Edit Menu................... 90 • Area Cut and Area Copy..................MEDUSA4 Drafting EDIT This chapter explains the functions which are available when you select the Edit option from the menu bar................... 94 © CAD Schroer GmbH 85 .............................................. 88 • Cut.................................................... Copy and Paste..................................................................... 93 • Find Text and Replace Text...............................

Figure 62 The Edit Pulldown Menu In the following each option is explained in the order of appearance in the pulldown menu. ”Switches . For details see “Undo and Redo” on page 88. Copy.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit The Edit Menu The figure below gives an overview of the available options of the pulldown menu which is displayed when you select Edit in the menu bar. Copy is used for cutting or copying selected elements and store them in a paste buffer. Redo activates actions you canceled before with Undo. To activate this function see “Options”. Redo Undo enables you to cancel a series of actions you did before. Area Copy allows you to cut/copy selected elements surrounded by a group line. Please note: Under Windows it is possible to change Copy to Copy to clipboard in order to paste elements also into other applications. Undo. For details see “Area Cut and Area Copy” on page 93. Deselect All All selected elements are deselected. Delete All selected elements are deleted. Cut. Area Cut. For details see “Cut. 86 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Paste Cut. Copy and Paste” on page 90. Paste is used for placing elements from the paste buffer back onto the sheet.Control User Options” on page 181.

Unlock ProDetail elements Elements imported from Pro/ENGINEER into a MEDUSA sheet are locked and you are not able to edit it. The Unlock ProDetail elements function allows the elements imported from Pro/ENGINEER to be unlocked within the MEDUSA sheet. Please note: Some of the functions described above are also available in the toolbar (see “Toolbar Overview” on page 262) or in the general popup menu which is displayed by moving the pointer into the drawing area and clicking the right mouse button. For details see “Find Text” on page 94. For details see “Replace Text” on page 95. Replace text opens the Replace dialog which enables you to find a text in a sheet and replace it with a another text. For details see the MEDPro Guide.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Edit Menu Find text opens the Search Text dialog which enables you to search and find a defined text in a MEDUSA sheet. (For further information see “The Drawing Area and Popup Menus” on page 30) © CAD Schroer GmbH 87 .

When you call up the dialog again the work steps 1 . Choose Undo from the Edit menu. The dialog is closed and all actions up to this point are undone. Figure 64 The Select actions to Undo Dialog 2 88 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 63 The Select actions to Undo Dialog The dialog displays the history of your actions. The Select actions to undo dialog appears.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Undo and Redo The Undo function enables you to cancel a number of work steps at the same time. Select for example the third line and click OK.2 (Figure 63) are disappeared and the steps are displayed as shown below. The work step that has been performed at last is positioned at the top of the list. 2. Undo 1. This action can be reversed completely or partially by using the Redo function. You are prompted to select a row in the list of actions to undo.

All work steps up to this point are activated again. The Select actions to redo dialog appears. Figure 65 The Select Actions to Redo Dialog 2. Choose Redo from the Edit menu. You can now proceed as described for undoing. The actions which has been canceled are listed in the field.MEDUSA4 Drafting Undo and Redo Redo 1. Select a line in the list and click OK. © CAD Schroer GmbH 89 .

Select one or more elements. The defined datum point is the point at which the elements will be placed. The copied elements are stored in the paste buffer and you can paste them now. Select one or more elements. Choose Cut from the popup menu. 2. 2. Copy 90 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The selection disappears from the drawing and it is stored in the paste buffer for pasting the element(s). Copy 1. is also available with the popup menu inside the drawing area when the default selection tool is active. 3. It works a little different: 1. The selection disappears from the drawing and it is stored in the paste buffer for pasting the element(s). While pasting you can manipulate the elements. Choose Copy from the Edit menu. Please note: If the menu entry is Copy to Clipboard instead of Copy. Cut 1. 2. Choose Cut from the Edit menu. Cut is also available with the popup menu inside the drawing area when the default selection tool is active. Select one or more elements. the elements stored in the paste buffer are also available for pasting it within other applications. Copy and Paste The tools are used to cut or copy selected elements and paste them at a certain point on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Cut. Define a datum point for the selection by probing into the sheet. It works the same way as described for ”Cut”.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 91 .and y-direction. scaling on. Magnify allows you to size the attached elements in x. Copy and Paste Paste Popup Menu While Pasting After selecting Paste from the Edit menu the following popup menu is available: Figure 66 Paste Popup Menu Recreate structure If you select elements which belong to a group by using the Selects elements of any type tool . scaling off dynamic scaling is switched off and the entry turns to Dyn. You can see the effect only if your sheet has different scale views defined. pasted elements are dynamically sized according to the current scale in the drawing. the existing structure is reproduced. Positive factors larger than 1 increase the size of the attached elements and factors larger than 0 and smaller than 1 decrease the size. With dynamic scaling on. Dyn. Dyn. After typing in the magnification factors press Return for applying the values. Rotate 90 rotates the attached elements by 90 degree counter clockwise around the datum point of the selection. If you click on Dyn. scaling on Toggles dynamic scaling on or off. the copied elements build their own group. these elements are added to the existing group. Rotate opens an edit field below the dashboard for defining any angle you like. copy and paste them via the right mouse popup menu. After choosing this entry type the value for the angle and press Return for applying you specification on the selected elements. That means. Negative values and 0 give an error message. If you click on the entry Recreate structure before you paste the selected elements and paste. scaling off. If you choose this entry the appropriate edit fields open below the dashboard for entering the magnification factors.MEDUSA4 Drafting Cut.

For details on its entries see “Popup Menu While Pasting” on page 91. Now you can either a. Paste 92 © CAD Schroer GmbH . It works the same way as given above for Paste from the Edit menu. choose Exit Tool from the popup menu to finish pasting or b. is also available with the popup menu inside the drawing area when the default selection tool is active. Select Paste from the Edit menu and move the cursor into the drawing area. 2. Perform Pasting 1. enter another datum point to paste the elements once more. Exit Tool quits the tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Undo cancels the last action. If you want to manipulate the attached elements click right to open the popup menu. Click the left mouse button to paste the attached elements. The elements from the buffer are attached at the crosshair of the cursor.

Create a closed line of any style/type around the objects you want to cut or copy. Choose the Paste option from the right mouse button popup menu. 3. 2. 7. Click left to paste the elements on the sheet. select the line. 5. All elements inside the line become selected. The selected elements become attached to the cursor at the datum position. Now you can either a. Choose the Apply option from the popup menu. If it is not already selected. 8. The selected elements are cut or copied and they are stored to the buffer. 6. enter another datum point to paste the elements once more. 1. ready for pasting. Select a position as the datum point for the cut or copied elements. Move your cursor until the elements are in the required location. 4. © CAD Schroer GmbH 93 . Select Area copy or Area cut from the Edit menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Cut and Area Copy Area Cut and Area Copy The Area copy and Area cut tools from the Edit menu allow you either to cut or copy selected elements surrounded by a closed line and to select a datum point to position the cut or copied elements. choose Exit Tool from the popup menu to finish pasting or b.

The last made settings remain until you call up the dialog once more and change these. If there is another text which accords to the search entry. If required you can edit the text now. whereby upper and lower case has not to be considered. 3.e. it is in the edit mode. 4. Choose the Find Text tool from the Edit menu. Figure 67 Search Text Dialog Type a text which you are searching for into the Find what entry field. i. which accords with the text in the entry field. The Search Text dialog appears as shown below. 2. MEDUSA zooms in on this text and you can proceed as described before. MEDUSA zooms in on the text. Find Text 1. Click on Find Next.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Find Text and Replace Text The Find Text and Replace Text tools enable you to search/find a text inside a MEDUSA sheet to edit it or to replace it with another text. You can insert a text string or only a part of it. The text is highlighted. 94 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click on the Find button at the bottom of the dialog. You can repeat the last step until there is no other text anymore which accords to the searched text. Close the dialog by using the Exit button. The input field for text appears in the left upper corner of the drawing area.

Choose the Replace Text tool from the Edit menu. • Match case: Upper and lower case will be considered with the search. The Replace dialog is displayed as shown in the figure below. which is defined by selection inside a sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Find Text and Replace Text Within the dialog you can narrow down the search using different settings. This is the default setting when you start your MEDUSA session and call up the dialog for the first time. You have to insert a complete text string in the upper input field. • Whole sheet: The inserted text will be searched within the whole sheet. • Selection: The inserted text is searched inside a limited area. Replace Text This function enables you to search/find a text according to the description before and replace it with another defined text. You can define the search area on the MEDUSA sheet by using two different Find in options. The two items Match whole word only and Match case narrow down the search with regard to the text input. • Match whole word only: searches for a whole text string. First of all upper and lower case has not to be considered. 1. Figure 68 Replace Dialog © CAD Schroer GmbH 95 .

Click on Find next zooms in respectively the next text and you can replace the text by using the Replace button again. 4. 5. Click on the Replace button replaces the text. MEDUSA zooms in the according text. 3. Insert the text which should be replaced against the text in the Find Text entry field into the Replace with input field. Click on the Find button to select the first text which shall be replaced. You can replace all texts according to the settings at the same time by using the Replace All button. 2. Quit the dialog by using the Exit button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit In addition to the parameters which have been already described before with the Search Text dialog the Replace dialog contains parameters whose functions will be explained in the following section. 7. 96 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 6.

................... save as a symbol or transform.................................................................................................................. 99 • The Selection Tools from the Toolbar................................ delete.............. 100 • Selecting with the Mouse ......................... 113 • Selecting Elements by Area.......................... 112 • Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups .. • Overview of Selection Methods .......................... 104 • Power Selection Tool ............... 115 © CAD Schroer GmbH 97 ........................................................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting SELECT In this chapter you get general information about selection and the tools which enable you to select one or more elements that you can copy...... 106 • Selecting Elements by Attributes ................................. 101 • Select with the Popup Menu .......................................................................................... 103 • Toggling a Selection.... 98 • The Select Menu.................

MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Overview of Selection Methods There are a number of different methods to select elements: • You can select elements using the mouse and cursor. 98 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is a special kind of selecting because it is always done while using the tools for manipulating elements or parts of elements enclosed by a group line. ”Using the Dashboard to Modify Properties” on page 296. Once you have selected elements. MEDUSA provides tools for selection: • in the menu bar (see “The Select Menu” on page 99). See “Power Selection Tool” on page 106 and “Selecting Elements by Attributes” on page 112. • Edit the selection if you selected a single element. see “Dashboard”. • You can select elements using boundary groups. • in the toolbar (see “The Selection Tools from the Toolbar” on page 100) and • in the general popup menu (see “Select with the Popup Menu” on page 103). you can: • Copy or cut the selection set and paste it somewhere else on the sheet. For details see “Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups” on page 113 • You can select elements using groups and the tree structure. See “Interacting with the Tree Viewer” on page 341. • Save the selection set as a symbol • Transform them using the transform tools • Change any properties that the elements in the selection set may share in common. • Delete the selection set. See “Selecting with the Mouse” on page 101 • You can select elements by using either the Power Selection or the Select Elements by Attributes dialog which are called up from the general popup menu.

You find this tool also in the right mouse popup menu. For toggling the selection of single elements see “Toggling a Selection” on page 104. You can find the Select Elements by Area. Figure 69 The Select Tools from the Menu Bar Select Elements by Area. Clear Flagged removes flags from all elements marked with the option Flag Selected.. Select Flagged selects all the elements marked with the option Flag Selected. which can be selected with the option Select Flagged. Deselect All deselects any selected element in the sheet. After using this option the sheet has no element. For fur- ther information on this tool see “Selecting Elements by Area” on page 115.. © CAD Schroer GmbH 99 .. In the dialog you have to set definitions for the area selection.. dialog..MEDUSA4 Drafting The Select Menu The Select Menu The menu bar provides some selection tools which you can find in the pulldown menu by clicking on Select. tool also in the toolbar. opens the Select Elements by Area.. Select All selects all the elements on the sheet. Flag Selected flags all the elements on the sheet which are currently selected. Toggle Sheet selects any element which is currently deselected and it deselects all elements which are currently selected.

in order to have quick access to the most frequently used selection tools. The Select sheet-level named groups tool limits the selection to elements that belong to sheet level groups. ”Groups” on page 334 for details. See “Status Area”. Please note: You can also copy selection tools from the toolbar into your User tooltray. The selection tools pulldown menu opens. The Selects named groups tool limits the selection to elements that belong to groups. The functions of the tools on this menu are shown in the following table: Table 3 Selection Tool Functions Tool Function The Selects lines tool limits the selection to lines only. The group and all its elements are selected. See “Status Area”. See also the chapter “Toolbar” on page 261. The Select dimensions tool limits the selection to dimensions. See “Selecting Elements by Area” on page 115 for details.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select The Selection Tools from the Toolbar The default selection tool is the Selects elements of any type tool which selects any element. To change the selection tool click left on the arrow to the right of the Selects elements of any type tool or the tool itself. text and prims (not contained in groups) and groups at sheet level. The Select text elements tool limits the selection to text elements. The Selects prims tool limits the selection to prims. The Selects elements or named groups at sheet level tool limits the selection to lines. ”Groups” on page 334 for details. The Select Stipple tool limits the section to Stipple elements The Select Crosshatching tool limits the selection to crosshatch elements The Select elements by area tool displays the Select elements by area dialog. The group and all its elements are selected. 100 © CAD Schroer GmbH . You can change the selection tool to refine the choice of elements that can be selected.

If you click left again. Elements are selected if they have one or more points in the drag selection area: • Lines are selected by any of the points defining the line. but if it does not cover any points of that line then the line is not selected. Clicking on Elements You can select an element by positioning the cursor over the element and then clicking left. © CAD Schroer GmbH 101 . You can select single elements. Keep the left button pressed and move the cursor to the opposite corner of the area you want. 3. release the left mouse button. • Text are selected by the datum of the text element. Dragging Selection by dragging lets you select one or more elements in an area of the sheet. If the selection rectangle extends over a part of the text. If the selection rectangle extends over a part of the prim. MEDUSA selects the next element near the cursor.MEDUSA4 Drafting Selecting with the Mouse Selecting with the Mouse This chapter shows you how to select elements using the mouse.) If you are trying to select an element that is close to another element you may not select the element you want. When the element is selected it is highlighted in a different color. • Prims are selected by the datum of the prim. To select by dragging: 1. (For default it is red. select elements by drawing a selection frame (dragging) and you can revert the selection status of elements. but the System Administrator can preset another highlight color as default. MEDUSA draws an expanding box to show the area. When the cursor is at the opposite corner of the area. but if it does not include the datum point then the text is not selected. without moving the cursor. but it does not include the datum point then the prim is not selected. Press and hold the left mouse button at one corner of the area. If the selection rectangle extends over a part of a line. 2.

In the first example all elements are selected because they are completely enclosed in the selection area: Figure 70 Drag Selection.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Any elements with points inside the selection area are selected and any selected elements become deselected unless you specify otherwise. The following examples show how different selection areas can select different elements. Example1 Text Element Text Element Text Element Text Element Drag Selection Area All elements selected In the second example only some elements are selected because some elements have points inside the selection area and some have not. See “Select with the Popup Menu” on page 103. The points defining the lines and the datums of the text elements are shown as crosses: Figure 71 Drag Selection: Example2 Text Element Text Element Text Element Text Element Drag Selection Area Only some elements selected (shown in bold) 102 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Any elements that are already deselected remain deselected while dragging over them again. Select Elements by Attribute. opens the Select Elements by Attributes dialog. Select Once avoids deselecting currently selected elements whilst dragging a selection rectangle.. Any elements that are already selected remain selected while dragging over them again. Deselect Once is used while adding selections using the Shift key. Figure 72 Popup Menu: Selection Entries The selection entries are: Deselect All Deselects any selected element in the sheet. Deselect Once avoids selecting currently deselected elements whilst dragging a selection rectangle... Select. opens the Power Selection dialog. You also can move the cursor to an empty area of the sheet and click left. © CAD Schroer GmbH 103 .. for details see “Power Selection Tool” on page 106.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select with the Popup Menu Select with the Popup Menu If the cursor is over the drawing area clicking right opens a popup menu providing several entries for selection. For details see “Selecting Elements by Attributes” on page 112. Select Once is used while adding selections using the Shift key.

104 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Examples The first example in Figure 74 shows how elements are selected (and deselected) when using two drag selections. Popup Menu While selecting elements and holding down the Shift key the right mouse button opens the following popup menu: Figure 73 Toggle Select Popup Menu The popup menu provides the selection tools which are also available inside the toolbar. The second drag selection includes pressing the Shift key. or • moving your cursor over an element and then clicking the middle mouse button. ”Utilities Toolbar” on page 266.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Toggling a Selection Toggling selected elements means that if an element is already selected then it is deselected and vice versa. You can toggle a selection by: • holding down the Shift key and click left on one element or dragging over several elements. For details on the selection tools see “Toolbar”.

if you are trying to deselect elements. and do not want to reselect any elements. The second drag selection includes pressing the Shift key.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toggling a Selection Figure 74 Changing Selection Set: Example 1 First Drag Selection Area Second Drag Selection Area Press Shift to achieve the selection result The second example shows the effect of using Select Once from the popup menu before the second drag selection. © CAD Schroer GmbH 105 . Figure 75 Changing Selection Set: Example 2 Select Once First Drag Selection Area Second Drag Selection Area Press the Shift key to achieve the selection result Similarly. you can use Deselect Once from the popup menu.

3. Style. Press the right mouse button to display the default popup menu. Choose the Select. 1. style. option. Move the pointer into the drawing area. Figure 76 Selection Dialog Element Class Selection Criteria Options Lines Multi Line Texts Prims Dimensions Crosshatches Notes Part Balloons Tables Element Class Buttons Single Line Texts Color Style list Layer list List of shapes List of boldnesses Selection mode Save current filter settings in custom selector button Multiple Selection Option Button The dialog provides the following parameters: Selection Criteria Options From left to right you find the option boxes for Element Class. The Power Selection Dialog appears. Shape 106 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Power Selection Tool MEDUSA provides an option to make selection of elements from a large data amount easier. 2.. layer and color and their properties. Occupied Layers. The tool allows selection by any combination of class..

Occupied Layer list gives all layers available in the current sheet. items in other lists will be deselected too. Layer. For details see “Save Filter as User Button” on page 111 Multiple Selection Option Button opens a further list allowing you to combine settings for filtering in order to define multiple selection criteria. Shape and Bold lists the following is valid: • Items which can be used for selecting elements are displayed black. For example. all colors have a grey rectangle except the black one. Buttons: Select all selects all elements using the current selection criteria on the whole sheet. For details see “Selection Modes” on page 108. if you open a new sheet and select the element class Single Line Texts. styles like construction and solid thick are deselected too. or to use the settings from the dialog. You can predefine Lines. Element Class Buttons These buttons predefine the element class which can be selected or not. Selection mode allows you to use properties of selected elements for predefining selection criteria. it contains a white square. if you deselect the element class Lines. For details see “Multiple Selection” on page 110.MEDUSA4 Drafting Power Selection Tool and Color. For example. Color list gives all colors available in the current sheet. Draw Selection only hides all elements of the sheet which are currently not selected and shows all elements © CAD Schroer GmbH 107 . If a class is chosen the button looks like being pressed. If a box contains a check mark the appropriate selection criteria is chosen for selecting elements. If a grey rectangle is displayed. If a color can be used for selecting elements. Single Line Texts. Style list gives you all element styles available in the current sheet. Prims. For the Style. Notes. Buttons of classes which are not in the sheet are displayed dimmed. Dimensions. Save filter in custom selector button allows you to save the current filter options to a user defined button placed inside the drop area. Bold list gives all boldnesses available in the current sheet. a little white square is displayed inside the color. Crosshatches. there are no appropriate elements with this color. • If you deselect an item in one list. Part Balloons and Tables for selection. Multi Line Texts. Shape list gives all shapes available in the current sheet. • Items which are displayed grey are disabled and cannot be selected.

Close. Press the right mouse button for opening the popup menu. Selection Modes The Power Selection Dialog has two distinct modes: • Building a selection filter by selecting elements within the sheet and • using the filter settings of the dialog to select elements within the sheet. Use this button. Update After modifications in the drawing this button updates the lists. The following sections give further information on using the dialog. 2. Refresh Graphics from the toolbar redisplays all elements again. in order to change the selection filter. Choose an option. Lists Popup Menu . Move the cursor either over the list of styles or layers. if you want to select certain elements of a group. Filter Selection applies the current selection criteria on the current element selection on the sheet. Consider that you have to activate the option Modify filter / Use for selection before using this button. Help work as usual. Select All selects all enabled entries of the current list and Deselect All deselects them. 108 © CAD Schroer GmbH . for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select which are currently selected.Select All and Deselect All Option Inside the lists of the Power Selection Dialog a popup menu is available allowing you to select or deselect all enabled list entries: 1. Figure 77 Select All or Deselect All Popup Menu 3.

Click the Modify filter / Use for selection radio button. or b. Modify Filter and Use for Element Selection To use the selection criteria defined in the Power Selection Dialog to select elements on the sheet: 1. Press Select All to use the current criteria for selecting elements on the whole sheet. Figure 78 Selecting Modes (1) 3. Click the Build filter from sheet selection radio button. Set selection criteria in the dialog. Now you either a.MEDUSA4 Drafting Power Selection Tool Build Filter from Element Selection within the Sheet To build a selection filter by selecting elements within the sheet: 1. move the cursor over an element or select an area by drag selection (see “Dragging” on page 101) to select certain elements with the defined properties. Select elements from the sheet. © CAD Schroer GmbH 109 . 2. Figure 79 Selecting Modes (2) The top part of the dialog is then enabled for modification. Clicking a second time on the same entry deselects it. 3. Any elements in the current drawing become selected if their properties accord with the properties of the elements selected first (in step 1). As you click on a list entry it becomes highlighted. The Power Selection Dialog display is updated and the properties of the selected elements are highlighted. select all elements with the defined properties on the sheet by clicking Select All. for example. by clicking in the lists for choosing a certain style or layer. 2.

Figure 80 Multiple Selection Dialog The button extends the list of selection.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Multiple Selection The Power Selection tool allows multiple selection criteria to be assembled. 110 © CAD Schroer GmbH . now settings inside the Power Selection Dialog or selections inside the drawing area are applied to this selected line. 7. With this you define the filter for selecting elements more precisely and you can combine any properties (for example. select the properties inside the Power Selection Dialog. For details see “Save Filter as User Button” on page 111. all elements colored green and all elements colored blue on a certain layer). 3. Now you can define several selection criteria. Click the button right at the bottom of the dialog. 5. Repeat the steps 5 and 6 until you defined all selection criteria used for filtering selecting elements on the sheet. select elements inside the drawing area. Click on a line inside the table in order to select this line. Depending on step 3 either a. As you select an element or as you choose a property in the Power Selection Dialog the line (you chose in step 2) of the multiple selection table updates immediately. Add a new line by clicking on the button of the last line in the table. Choose a selection mode (see “Selection Modes” on page 108). 6. 2. The new line is appended at the end of the table and it has the same entries as the previously line you worked on. Adjust this new line to your needs according to step 3 and 4. Now you can define further lines. According to your choice. For defining a multiple selection table do the following steps: 1. 4. or b. The button removes entries out of the list. The multiple selection table opens. Now you can save these settings to a selector button.

The selection tool is created inside the drop area on the left of the drawing area.MEDUSA4 Drafting Power Selection Tool Save Filter as User Button MEDUSA allows you to store the criteria you defined within the Power Selection Dialog to a tool button which you can put in your User tooltray in order to have easy access on the made filter definitions used for selecting elements. Then you can edit the name of the tool and its selection criteria and save the modifications. Now you can put this custom tool into the User tooltray. If you want to change the icon for the tool click left on the icon in front of the edit field. You can choose another symbol and then click left on OK. © CAD Schroer GmbH 111 . If you click right on a selection custom tool inside the drop area or inside the User tooltray the entry Properties is provided which opens the Power Selection Dialog giving all the filter settings you saved with the current selection tool. For the figure above the tool icon looks like this: . 3. The dialog will display the custom tool settings. 4. Choose Save inside the dialog Select Icon. Click on the Save filter in custom selector button Figure 81 Save Filter Dialog which opens the following dialog. In front of this name an icon is given which will be used for the tool. If you want to change the tool name click left into the field and type another name. You can also drag&drop a selection custom tool button into the open Power Selection Dialog when in Modify filter / Use for selection mode. The edit field provides an automatically created name for the selection tool you are going to create. 2. Another dialog is opened listing all symbols inside the default directory of the MEDUSA installation. For saving filter settings to a user selector button: 1.

You can type more than one entry.. Figure 82 Select Elements By Attribute The following options and buttons are available: Elements with user attribute.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Selecting Elements by Attributes You can select all elements that have user attributes. 112 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Choose the Select Elements by Attribute. If you do so separate the entries with a space ( ). The attribute or value has to be entered in the appropriate text field. Toggle Selects all elements of the specified type that are deselected and deselects all elements of the specified type that are currently selected.) or semi-colon (. option from the popup menu to display the Select Elements by Attribute dialog. Elements with attribute value selects elements which have the defined user attribute or attribute value. (This is equivalent to a mathematical “and”. comma (. Remove Removes the specified elements from the current selection set. Select Starts a new selection set containing the specified elements.) Undo Cancels the last select element action. Add Adds the specified elements to the current selection set.). Close.. Common Selects those elements that are common to existing or new selections. Help work as usual.

Only group lines consisting of straight line segments are valid. © CAD Schroer GmbH 113 . Figure 83 Group Box and Freehand Group Line It makes no difference whether the elements are at sheet level or in a permanent group any element or point of an element enclosed by a group line is recognized when selecting by the group line. You can define boundary group lines whenever you require and delete them after you have used them. texts.MEDUSA4 Drafting Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups A boundary group is a collection of elements (lines. The following sections show you how to define boundary groups and how to select and manipulate elements or parts of elements which are in such a boundary group. ”Interacting with the Tree Viewer” on page 341). When you draw a group line freehand. dimensions and prims) contained within a group line. Boundary groups are intended to set up temporary collections of elements. do not create any curved line segment. unlike groups in the tree structure which are used to associate permanent collections of elements (for details see “Status Area”. groups. The group line is defined using a special group line type. Some examples of group lines are shown in Figure 83. There are two ways of defining group lines: • Freehand (point by point) using the Creates group lines tool • Using the Creates group line boxes tool Both tools are available in the Creation Tools tooltray. Defining Boundary Groups Boundary groups are defined by group lines.

for example. probing into the sheet. For selecting boundary groups you do this as follows: 1. If you manipulate such a group the other points defining the element are not affected. or b. for example. for example. using the Enter Coords dialog. which defines. Now you can define the datum point. If you want to change the manipulation tool now use the popup menu. Choose one of the manipulation tools for boundary groups. 2. Against this the tools shown above automatically select all elements and parts of elements. for example. either by a. mirroring or shearing using any of the tools shown in the graphic below available in the Creation Tools tooltray. When you enclose only some of the points of an element with a group line. which are enclosed by a group line. Figure 84 Tools for Manipulating Boundary Groups Rotate Mirror vertically Shear horizontally Move Mirror horizontally Magnify Shear vertically Usually you select elements in order to manipulate them. the rotation point. the Rotate the selected points tool. you create a so called point group. All elements and element points enclosed by group lines become selected. by rotating. Refer to the message line what to do next. According to the chosen tool the function is executed immediately or you need to do further steps. enter a rotation angle. The graphic below shows that the effect of moving a group of this type is to shear the elements partially enclosed by the group line: Figure 85 Moving a Point Group 114 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Manipulate Boundary Groups Elements or points of elements which are enclosed by group lines can be manipulated.

Add applies the definitions for area selection and adds the selected elements to previously selected elements. Common behaves like a mathematical AND operation. Elements which are already selected but which do not match the area definitions remain selected. © CAD Schroer GmbH 115 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Selecting Elements by Area Selecting Elements by Area MEDUSA provides advanced definitions used for selecting elements inside a certain area of the drawing. they are displayed highlighted. Common selects all those elements which are inside the first selection AND which are selectable by the Group lines. Common This option considers the last selection for selecting new elements. For example. if you already selected elements. and deselects all currently selected elements which meet the defined parameters. Toggle selects all elements which meet the defined parameters and which are currently not selected. Remove applies the definitions for area selection and removes the newly selected elements from the previously selected elements. The Select elements by area dialog opens: Figure 86 Select Elements by Area Dialog from the selection tools inside the tool- Select Add Remove Toggle Common Undo The Select elements by Area dialog has the following buttons: Select applies the definitions for area selection and inside the drawing the selected elements are highlighted. For area selection choose the Select elements by area tool bar. If you now define as selection criteria Group lines.

• Sheet selects only elements which are on sheet level. The following parameter are provided: Enclosed selects elements which are enclosed completely by the defined area. Consider that a geometry is recognized as Enclosed if all its points are inside the selection area. • Other defines that the area is enclosed by a certain line type. • Any defines that all elements on any group level which match the area definitions are selected. • Selected defines that the area is enclosed by the selected line. Help Buttons which work as usual. which can be chosen from the pulldown list available by the arrow on the right of the edit field. Close. • Group defines that the area is enclosed by a group line. 116 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Boundary line provides the options for defining the boundary of an area. Level provides the options for defining the level of selected elements. After choosing Select the selected line is deselected. The rectangle is recognized as completely Enclosed by the group line. Figure 87 Example: Select Elements by Area Partially enclosed selects elements which are enclosed completely and partially by the defined area.MEDUSA4 Drafting Select Undo is used for canceling the last selection. The following example shows this. This option is disabled if there is no or more than one line selected in the sheet.

.... 125 • View Windows........... preview and how to store and restore views............................................. 123 • Zoom Selection .................. 124 • Storing and Restoring Windows................................ 118 • Selecting Toolbar Items..................................................................................................... • Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 120 • Set of Tooltrays ................................MEDUSA4 Drafting VIEW This chapter describes the facilities that give you control over how you view................................................ 121 • Zoom....................... 122 • Dynamic Pan and Zoom ....................................................... 128 © CAD Schroer GmbH 117 ....................

Full Sheet displays the whole current sheet. For details see “Selecting Toolbar Items” on page 120. Window zooms into an area you define by dragging a rectangle using the left mouse button. Figure 88 View Pulldown Menu The following View menu options are available. Pan centers the view around the probed point. For details see “Zoom” on page 122.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Overview The figure below gives you an overview of the available options of the pulldown menu which is displayed when you select View in the menu bar. Zoom opens a further pulldown menu for different kinds of zooming. For details see “Set of Tooltrays” on page 121. Set of tooltrays opens the pulldown menu where you can choose between different sets of tooltrays. Toolbars opens a further pulldown menu for setting the items displayed inside the toolbar. 118 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Choose Views. Redraw draws everything new inside the drawing area. View Frames is used for displaying frames of the different view windows inside the main view. If you did not zoom in before nothing is done. Clear hides any element on the current sheet. Store and Restore.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview Zoom to scale zooms into the probed area until the view is to scale. For details see “View Windows” on page 128. Pan Zoom allows dynamic pan and zoom with the mouse. If you did not use Previous before nothing is done. “Setting View Properties” on page 129. For details see “Storing and Restoring Windows” on page 125. Close Views is used for displaying and closing several view windows. Click on the Refresh Graphics tool Previous The drawing area displays the same contents as it was last time you zoomed in. For details see “Dynamic Pan and Zoom” on page 123. Next Reverse function of Previous. in the toolbar shows the elements again. © CAD Schroer GmbH 119 .. For details see “View Windows“. is used for storing and restoring zoomed window views..

Move the cursor upon the entry View in the menu bar. Click the left mouse button. Move the cursor on Toolbars. 4. The pulldown menu disappears and the toolbar is changed according to your selection.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Selecting Toolbar Items For adjusting the toolbar items using the menu bar do the following: 1. If there is no check mark the appropriate toolbar entry is not displayed. 2. The following pulldown menu opens: Figure 89 Toolbars Pulldown Menu The check mark in front of an entry shows you that the appropriate toolbar entry is visible. 120 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click left on the toolbar you want to hide or display. 3. A pulldown menu opens offering the items of View.

”Choosing a Set of Tooltrays” on page 37. editing. 2. Click on Options in the menu bar to open the pulldown menu (Figure 90). Table 4 Sets of Tooltrays Sets of tooltrays Complete Basic Description Contains a number of tooltrays offering the full range of MEDUSA functionality. The difference between the sets is the number of tooltrays. Move the cursor over the Set of tooltrays entry. The check mark indicates the activated set. Contains one tooltray with tools for commonly used tasks including line creation. The tooltrays on the left hand side of the drawing area change depending on your choice. The following sets of tooltrays are available. text. Figure 90 Set of Tooltrays Pulldown Menu 3. tools and tool sets. dimensioning and crosshatching. © CAD Schroer GmbH 121 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Set of Tooltrays Set of Tooltrays MEDUSA provides different sets of tooltrays. For choosing a set of tooltrays: 1. See also ”Overview of the Work Environment”. Select one. You can now choose between Complete and Basic.

Zoom Top Right zooms into the top left/right of the current sheet. Zoom Bottom Left . 122 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting View Zoom MEDUSA provides several possibilities for zooming into and out of the drawing. Zoom Double zooms window of the current sheet to double size You can also zoom in the window to double size by clicking on Zoom In and then using the short cut Ctrl+D. Zoom Top Left . For zooming choose Zoom from the View menu. Zoom Half zooms window of the current sheet to half size You can also zoom out the window to half size by clicking on Zoom Out and then using the short cut Ctrl+H. Zoom Bottom Right zooms into the bottom left/right of the current sheet. Zoom Maximum zooms to the maximum extents of the sheet including any border area around the outside of the sheet (see “File“. The probed point is centered on the display. “Sheet Properties” on page 75). The following pulldown menu opens: Figure 91 Zoom Pulldown Menu The pulldown entries are: Zoom In zooms into the drawing by a fixed factor to a probed point. Zoom Out zooms out of the drawing by a fixed factor.

If you move the mouse forward you are zooming into the drawing. 4. For this hold down the CTRL key and press the left mouse button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dynamic Pan and Zoom Dynamic Pan and Zoom MEDUSA offers an easy way of zooming into and out of the sheet and panning the sheet using the mouse. Alternatively you can use the CTRL key to pan dynamically. Choose Pan Zoom from the View menu. Alternatively you can zoom in and out by the following methods: • Use the CTRL key to zoom dynamically. 2. Move the mouse around for panning the sheet. Release the middle mouse button if you want to finish zooming. you are zooming out. Zoom For dynamic zooming: 1. Move the cursor on the drawing area. 3. Then move the mouse around for panning. “Using the Mouse” on page 27). Pan For dynamic panning: 1. Click and hold the left mouse button. Choose Pan Zoom from the View menu. If you push backward. © CAD Schroer GmbH 123 . Release the left mouse button if you panned to the desired position. 4. 2. Move the mouse forward and backward which is up and down on the sheet. Then move the mouse forward and backward for zooming out and in. If you move the mouse backward you are zooming out of the drawing. you are zooming in. • If you have a wheel mouse (see also “Overview of the Work Environment“. Click and hold the middle mouse button. As you move the mouse the elements of the sheet move the same way. If you push forward the wheel. Move the cursor on the drawing area. 5. 3. For this hold down the CTRL key and press the right mouse button. 5. use the wheel for dynamic zooming.

For example. The Zoom on selected geometry tool enlarges the area around currently selected drawing elements. Figure 92 Window Section Before and After Zoom Selection: active group Before Zoom After Zoom 124 © CAD Schroer GmbH . if you select this tool when a group is active MEDUSA zooms into the area displaying all elements in the group in the window.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Zoom Selection Another kind of zooming into the sheet is provided by the toolbar.

Therefore. Click the Save button. Storing and restoring window views is also available inside the toolbar. you may want to create a window view showing the title box. MEDUSA automatically zooms into this area for any sheet you display. 2. If you do so. Please note: You cannot store a window view using a name which is already in the list Session or Sheet. 2. For example. For details see the chapter “Toolbar“. “Storing and Restoring Windows” on page 268.MEDUSA4 Drafting Storing and Restoring Windows Storing and Restoring Windows It is often useful to define several views of a sheet in order to work on different areas of the geometry. Select the Store and Restore option from the View menu. or you can save them with the sheet and use them again in another MEDUSA session. known as window views within a drawing and store them. The Windows dialog appears: Figure 93 Windows Dialog Sheet entry box Save Delete Restore Refresh Show Position Button for showing the list of window views stored with the sheet The buttons of the Windows dialog are explained in the following sections. When you restore this window view. You can either store window views for the duration of the current MEDUSA session. For storing and restoring window views: 1. you are prompted for choosing another name. The window view name appears in the Session entry box. You can call up these window views later. you can define views. Save To save the window view to use with any session: 1. Type a name into the Session entry box. Zoom into the area that you wish to save with the Zoom or Window function. © CAD Schroer GmbH 125 .

126 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Press the Restore button The window is restored. red rectangles are automatically drawn on the sheet defining the extent of each window view. Show Position The Show Position button displays the locations of all window views that are saved with the sheet. Please note: If you open a sheet which has saved window views with the same name as the session window views then the window view saved with the sheet is opened. Select the required window view name from either the Session list or the Sheet list. Restore You can display any saved window view: 1. The window view is deleted. Perhaps you need to display the whole sheet in order to see this information. Refresh The Refresh button redraws the graphics.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Delete Select the name of the window view to be deleted from the list and click the Delete button. 2. The window view names are displayed in the lower. left corner of each rectangle. in the Windows dialog. for example. When you press this button. to display no longer the position frames after using Show Position.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Storing and Restoring Windows Figure 94 Store and Restore: Show Position © CAD Schroer GmbH 127 .

in addition to the main view window. You can use this facility. A new view window appears in the drawing area. Select Choose Views from the View menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting View View Windows The view window facility enables you to open up to four windows showing views of your current sheet. see “Zoom” on page 122) and window view restorations (see “Storing and Restoring Windows” on page 125) occur in the current view window. for instance. Please note: All view operations (for example. The default window (that is. Opening a View Window To display the sheet in a view window: 1. the main graphic display window) is named View 1 and the other windows are named Views 2 through 5. Zoom. to have the whole sheet displayed in one view window while you have a zoomed-in view in another. Select one of the views. The following popup menu appears: Figure 95 Choose Views Pulldown Menu 2. which are Open View 2 through Open View 5. 128 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

choose View Frames from the View menu. this View is the current one and any zoom operation happens in the current view. You have the possibility to zoom in any arbitrary view. If the Current View switch is not activated in any view.e. it is displayed in the current view window. i. The following View Frames dialog is displayed: © CAD Schroer GmbH 129 . It is automatically activated. and display the detail in the current view. except the Dynamic pan. when you open a new View window via Views > Choose Views. either in the main window or in any other view.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Windows Figure 96 View Window Displayed Each View has a Current View check button. Setting View Properties To set the properties for a view window. the main view is automatically made current. If you zoom in a detail within the main window.

chain. color and thickness. Figure 98 View Window Frame Property Example You can resize. a frame border appears around the required selection area. You can see the frame in the main view as well as in the appropriate View. when you pan and zoom in. for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Figure 97 View Frames Dialog The View Frames dialog enables you to specify: • Whether frame borders are shown. dotted. For example. you may be able to drag a corner of the window to enlarge or reduce the window size. When you select a Frame Border choice box. • The pen type used for the frame borders. The Pen number defines the line style for the border. solid. overlap or hide view windows using your standard operating system window management tools. move. 130 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

The example below shows the main view being used as a reference view to the whole sheet. Figure 99 Copying and Pasting Between View Windows © CAD Schroer GmbH 131 . while the view windows are used to copy geometry between different detail areas of the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Windows Copy and Paste Between View Windows Full copy and paste facilities are available between all view windows providing you with an effective means of working efficiently on complex drawings.

MEDUSA4 Drafting View 132 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Draw Selection makes selected elements visible. Figure 100 The Display Functions from the Menu Bar Clear hides any element on the current sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting DISPLAY This chapter gives the functions which are available by choosing Display from the menu bar. Clicking on Display in the menu bar the following pulldown menu opens. Click on the Refresh Graphics tool in the toolbar shows the elements again. © CAD Schroer GmbH 133 . For displaying only the selected elements choose Clear and then Draw Selection. Undraw Selection makes the selected elements invisible.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Display 134 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

.................. 138 • Choosing the Current Grid ................................ 143 • Defining a Grid as Standard Grid .............. 149 © CAD Schroer GmbH 135 ...................................................................................... 146 • Modifying a Grid............................................................................................................... 145 • Drawing and Hiding a Grid..................... • Introduction to Grids....................... 136 • Creating a new Grid ................................... 147 • Deleting a Grid ..................................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting GRIDS This chapter describes how to use grids and points to align elements....................................... 136 • Grids Menu .......................................... 144 • Activating and Deactivating a Grid...............................................

to align geometric and text elements). Figure 101 Grids Menu 136 © CAD Schroer GmbH . You can make a grid active or inactive. (for example. You cannot use grid lines to position elements on a drawing.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Introduction to Grids You may prefer to construct drawings using grids instead of construction lines. Grid Points and Free Points Grid points help you to create and position elements on a drawing. They are constructed of grid points which are usually connected with grid lines. See Figure 103. If you use a free probe specifier when a grid is active. Grids are a sheet overlay rather than actual lines. When a grid is inactive. You can use the Grid Properties dialog to create and use grids. Grids Menu Inside the main menu bar you find the item Grids. you can create free points at the cursor position anywhere on the sheet. every free point that you create is placed at the nearest grid point to the cursor. but grid lines are present purely as a visual aid. A grid can remain active even if it is not displayed. Like construction lines. You also can make it visible or invisible. you can use grids as a basis on which to make the actual drawing. The menu Grids provides the functions for setting the display and properties of the grid. This action is called snapping. “Grid Properties Dialog” on page 139.

. visible the grid is active and probing points inside the drawing area snaps to the next grid point. © CAD Schroer GmbH 137 . These lines can be drawn as points using this item. This item opens the dialog giving the properties of the current grid.MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to Grids The menu offers the following parameter: Hide Current Grid/Show Current Grid If Hide Current Grid is visible the grid is visible and it can be switched to invisible with this menu item. If the grid is deactivated this menu item turns to Activate Grid for activating the grid snapping again. Grid Properties. It is explained in chapter “Creating a new Grid” on page 138. Points/Lines If Points is visible the current grid is displayed as lines. The grid snapping can be deactivated with this item. Border With these items you can display the grid on the whole sheet (Full) or at the border only (Border). If the grid display is set to Points the origin is displayed as a small cross. For details see “Activating and Deactivating a Grid” on page 145. If the grid is drawn as points this item turns into Lines for switching to line display again.0 of your sheet. Set Origin This menu item is used for changing the origin of the current grid to a probed point. Deactivate Grid/Activate Grid If Deactivate Grid is Full. Reset Origin 0. For details see “Drawing and Hiding a Grid” on page 146.. If the grid is invisible this menu item turns to Show Current Grid for displaying the current grid again.0 This item resets the origin back to the coordinates 0.

Press the Apply button to accept the new name. take this entry as name of your first defined grid. Type and Tickness of the line. or b. which can be displayed by using the arrow as shown below. you can repeat these steps up to ten times. 5. 3. c. Enter the other properties of the grid as required. The grids are saved when the sheet is saved. 2. Select the Grids menu and click on the Grid Properties tool . The new grid name can have up to six alphanumeric characters and the first character must be a letter. enter a new name for the grid. see “Grid Properties Dialog” on page 139.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Creating a new Grid You can create up to ten grids for each sheet. Figure 102 The Grid Name List If you want to modify the properties of a grid see “Modifying a Grid” on page 147. if you wish the grid origin to be at the lower left corner of the sheet. Click Apply to accept the changes. 4. The Grid Properties dialog is displayed. for example: a. Procedure To create a grid: 1. 138 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Enter 5 in the X Spacing and Y Spacing entry box to define the spacing between the grid lines. Spaces and special characters are not allowed. Define the style of the grid lines by choosing Color. At each time the last entered grid name is displayed in the input field. b. The new grid name is displayed in the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Properties dialog remains opened and you can continue making settings. Click OK to apply the changes and dismiss the Grid Properties dialog. You can either: a. Type 0 into the Grid origin X and Grid origin Y entry boxe. It is added to a list. 6. When you open a new sheet and call up the Grid Properties dialog the Grid name field already contains the entry draft. Since you can create up to 10 grids for each sheet.

• For selecting a color click on the Color button. © CAD Schroer GmbH 139 . Type and Thickness of the line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a new Grid Grid Properties Dialog Figure 103 Grid Properties Dialog Each grid has the following properties: Grid name A name (maximum six alphanumeric characters) that uniquely identifies a grid (see also page 138). The Select color dialog opens. You can define Color. where you can choose the desired color. Line style specifies the style of the grid lines.

Choose the desired line type from the list. 0 which is the bottom left hand corner of the sheet. the grid origin is at the same position as the sheet origin. Figure 105 The Type Pulldown Menu • To define the thickness open the pulldown menu by clicking on the arrow right of the Thickness field. Figure 106 The Thickness Pulldown Menu Default settings are black for color. Grid origin The coordinates X and Y indicate the grid origin which is the starting point for the grid. Choose the desired thickness from the list.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Figure 104 Color Button to open the Select Color Dialog • To define the type open the pulldown menu by clicking on the arrow right of the Type field. By default. Dotted for Type and the thinnest line for Thickness. 140 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Usually it is 0.

For example. Representation defines wether the grid is displayed with lines or with points Points only the cross-over points of the grid lines are displayed Lines the complete grid lines are displayed © CAD Schroer GmbH 141 . Rotate grid provides the option Isometric grid and the edit fields for rotation angles at the X axis and the Y axis. If Isometric grid is chosen all other settings are disabled (including the settings for Shear grid) and the grid is set to the isometric defaults (which is 30 degree rotation at the x axis and 60 degree rotation at the y axis. defines the number of segments inside a circle. Origin rotation gives the angle by which the grid is rotated around the origin. and so on units around the grid origin. a value of 5. If you change this value the Number of changed too. If you change this value the Angle is changed too.00 gives grid circles. which are drawn with a spacing of 5. 10. 15. both counterclockwise).or ydirection according to the given Angle. The following settings can be made: X spacing. Y spacing defines the spacing between the grid lines in horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) direction. Shear grid provides the options X axis and Y axis for shearing either the grid lines in x. The following settings can be made for a polar grid: Radial increment defines the distance between the circular grid lines to each other and to the origin of the grid. If this option is selected (indicated by the check mark inside the option field) parameters for the Polar option are not accessible. gives the increment in radial direction seen from the origin.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a new Grid Cartesian gives the settings for a cartesian grid. If this option is selected (indicated by the check mark inside the option field) parameters for the Cartesian option are not accessible. Angle segments is Number of segments is the increment angle per segment. Polar gives the settings for a polar grid.

Figure 107 The Sub-Grid Increment Pulldown Menu 142 © CAD Schroer GmbH . can use these fields to display as Major and Minor increments. Sub-grid increment Grids that are displayed as points. For instance. 2 or 4. then the sub-grid Interval can be 1. if the X interval is 4. For instance. if the Interval field is 4.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Extent defines wether the grid is displayed as full sheet or on the border only Full the grid is displayed on the whole sheet Border the grid is displaye at the border only Interval An integer value which defines what grid lines are drawn on the sheet. You can only set the value of this field to be an exact divisor of the Interval field. then only every 4th grid line will be shown.

2. The Grid Properties dialog as given in Figure 103. “Grid Properties Dialog” on page 139 appears. The Dialog displays the properties of the grid.. This grid is called the current grid. “The Grid Name List” on page 138. It can now be displayed and activated as described on the following pages. For choosing the current grid: 1. 3. Select the grid you want to be the current grid from the list. click the OK button. Display the list of defined grids via the arrow right of the Grid name input field as shown in Figure 102. Select the Grid Properties. at one time you can only activate or display one of them.. 4. But. In order to make this grid the current one. tool from the Grids menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 143 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Choosing the Current Grid Choosing the Current Grid In MEDUSA it is possible to define several grids for one sheet.

5. 144 © CAD Schroer GmbH . you have to save the changes of the defaults when quitting the program. The selected grid becomes the standard grid for all sheets opened during the current session. 3. Click on Set defaults. 4. The Grid properties dialog is closed. assumed that the Show current grid option (menubar > Options > Show current grid) is activated. The grid defined as default is displayed. 2. 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Defining a Grid as Standard Grid You can define any current grid as standard grid. If you wish to keep this default setting for subsequent sessions. Select the desired grid in the Grid Properties dialog as described in section “Choosing the Current Grid” on page 143. Apply the setting with OK. In order to see this effect first open another or a new sheet and then the Grid properties dialog. Press the Standard button and then OK. both for the current session and following sessions.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Activating and Deactivating a Grid Activating and Deactivating a Grid You can activate and deactivate the current grid at any time. When you turn off a grid. Activating a Grid You can turn on the current grid by clicking on the Activate Grid tool in the menu Grids. all points that you create using the free probe specifier are adjusted to the nearest grid point to the position of the cursor. If a grid is active probing a point snaps to the nearest grid point. Deactivating a Grid You can turn off the current grid by clicking on the Deactivate Grid tool in the menu Grids. you can position points using the free probe specifier anywhere on the sheet. To create free points between the grid lines you must deactivate the grid. © CAD Schroer GmbH 145 . When a grid is active.

Changing the Drawing Interval If you find that grid lines are obscuring your view of a drawing. if you enter 3 for each axis. Click OK to apply the changes and dismiss the Grid Properties dialog. you can choose to display only some of the grid lines. then every third grid line will be displayed. 146 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For example. This does not affect the grid spacing. only every second or third grid line. you can specify that only every second or third line is drawn. To display a partial grid: 1. Enter a value in the Interval fields. but you do not want to hide the grid. 2. you can only display one grid on your current sheet at a time. Hiding the Current Grid You can hide the current grid by clicking on the Hide Current Grid tool in the menu Grids. 3. You can also choose the frequency of the grid lines displayed. Click on the Grid Properties tool in the menu Grids to display the Grid Properties dialog. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Drawing and Hiding a Grid Although you can create up to ten grids for each sheet. Drawing the Current Grid You can draw the current grid by clicking on the Show Current Grid tool in the menu Grids. that is. for example. whether every grid line should be displayed or.

5. “The Grid Name List” on page 138). © CAD Schroer GmbH 147 . Select the grid you want to modify.MEDUSA4 Drafting Modifying a Grid Modifying a Grid You can change any of the properties of an existing grid with the Grid Properties dialog.. Click on the Grid Properties tool inside the menu Grids to open the Grid Properties dialog. 1. 4. For details on the parameter see chapter “Creating a new Grid” on page 138. Change the properties of the grid as required.. input field to call up the list of available grids (see Figure 102. Click OK to apply the changes and dismiss the Grid Properties dialog. Figure 108 Grid Properties Dialog 2. 3. Click on the arrow right of the Grid name. The dialog displays the current properties of the chosen grid.

Resetting the Grid Origin To reset the origin of the current grid to (0. Click on the Set Grid Origin tool in the Grids menu. Probe the point on the element that you want to align it to. 2. This is shown below where the grid origin is set to the bottom left corner of the element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids Aligning a Grid With an Element You can move the origin of the current grid so that it is aligned with an element. Figure 109 Set Grid Origin to Element Corner X X Element not aligned with grid Grid origin moved To do this: 1.0) click on the Reset Grid Origin tool menu. in the Grids 148 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Deleting a Grid Deleting a Grid To delete a grid: 1. Click on the Grid Properties tool in the Grids menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 149 . The selected grid is deleted. Press the Delete button. 3. Select the grid you want to delete from the list of available grids. Open the Grid name pulldown-list as described before. Click OK to apply the change and dismiss the Grid Properties dialog. The Grid Properties dialog is displayed. 4. 2. 5. Please note: You cannot delete the last grid on the sheet. Another grid from the list is made current.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Grids 150 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

................ 168 © CAD Schroer GmbH 151 ..................................................................................... 152 • Layers Menu ............................................................................................ • Introduction to Layers ................................................... 154 • Default Layer Allocation ........................................................ 159 • Customize Layers ..................................................................................................................................... 164 • Layer Datum ................ 167 • Layer Change .......MEDUSA4 Drafting LAYERS This chapter describes how to use and customize layers and layer sets........... 158 • Layer Set Management...................... 156 • Set Layer Attributes ........................................... 155 • Layer Properties........................................................................................................... 162 • Customize Layer Sets................

152 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Layers do not describe spatial relationships between elements on different layers. Please note: An element can only belong to one layer. You can then easily select and operate on all the elements of these layers. specify that one layer should contain the sheet outline. are used to group the geometric elements so that they can be operated together. in the building sheet example above you could create a layer set consisting of the layers of the first five floors. In an industrial drawing sheet you might wish to assign all the electrical wiring elements to one layer and the plumbing elements to another. These films. When printing you can choose which layers to print. For example. All elements exist at the same depth as there is no third dimension in MEDUSA. called layers. and so on. for example. You can mark layers as being unhitable. a third all the text. meaning that the geometry on those layers cannot be selected. another the sheet tiles. In this way layers provide another way of grouping elements with similar functions. A layer set is a collection of individual layers which can be treated as a single layer for editing purposes.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Introduction to Layers The geometry on a MEDUSA sheet can be visualized as a stack of transparent films containing geometric elements. Each layer is used to distinguish between parts of a sheet that have different functions. For example. you might want to create a plan view drawing of a building where all the geometry for each floor of the building is put on a distinct layer. This would then allow you to hide the geometry of some floors by making those layers invisible. Figure 110 Layers Your company policy could. Please note: A single layer can belong to one or more layer sets.

If Full is activated. Layer Attributes The following table gives you the layer attributes: Attribute Name Number Visible Hitable Values text string 0-1023 ON OFF ON OFF Description This is the layer name. Protection Unprotect Modify Full Color switch ON OFF color Color © CAD Schroer GmbH 153 . The system also has some predefined layers and layer sets. If OFF the color of the style is used This is the color used for drawing the layer. elements on the layer can be created or modified. and OFF if they are to be made invisible. if the elements on the layer can be selected or used in determining the probe position when using a probe modifier (NEAR. If Unprotect is activated. the system prevents elements being created or existing elements from being deleted or modified on the layer. INTERSECTION etc). The layer set All contains all the layers in the system. these elements are not loaded or saved. If you load or save symbols with elements which are on this layer. if the elements on the layer are to be drawn. Your System Administrator may have set up your system with layers and layer sets to be used on your sheets.MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to Layers MEDUSA can define a maximum of 1024 layers identified internally in the system by layer numbers in the range of 0 through 1023 inclusive. This is an identifier for internal use by the system. This is set to ON. The layer All is used as neutral layer and default layer for some styles. If ON. Setting this attribute to OFF will stop the layer's elements from being selected. the elements on the layer are drawn in the color specified by the color attribute. This is set to ON. Modify is the same as Full for elements which are on the sheet.

Set Layer Datum opens the Layer Datum dialog. This is explained in “Select“. One tab is used for setting the attributes of layers temporary for the current session. The other tab is used for defining layer sets and layer names permanently. Figure 111 Layers Menu The menu offers the following functions: Layer Manager opens the Layer Management Dialog. “Power Selection Tool” on page 106. Please note: You can use layers and layer sets as a means of setting up or modifying the current selection. 154 © CAD Schroer GmbH . see “Layer Set Management” on page 159. Change Layer opens the Change Layer dialog. see “Layer Properties” on page 156. For details see “Layer Change” on page 168. which can be done in Administration mode only. For details see “Layer Datum” on page 167.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Layers Menu In the menu bar you find the item Layers which provides the functions for setting the display and properties of layers. The layer manager provides all the functions for customizing layers and layer sets by two tabs.

Inside the dialog you find an entry Layer providing a pulldown list with all named layers. Figure 112 Dashboard: Layers button for opening the Layer Manager layer field While creating or editing an element you can change its layer either inside the dashboard or in the properties dialog. 4. prim. text. Select a new layer name from the Layer pulldown list.MEDUSA4 Drafting Default Layer Allocation Default Layer Allocation When you create an element. Change Layer with the Dashboard Inside the dashboard you can choose any layer from the pulldown list available with the arrow on the right hand side of the layer field. dimensioning. The layer of the currently selected elements is displayed in the dashboard as shown below. The properties dialog for the current element opens. crosshatching. Create or edit an element. 3. it is automatically assigned to a default layer according to its style. and so on). © CAD Schroer GmbH 155 . Apply the new layer to the element using the button Apply or OK. You also can open the dialog with the properties button inside the dashboard. and so on) or function (sheet outline. Inside the dashboard you still see the properties of the element. class (line. If you choose a layer which differs from the preferred layer set by the style then the creation button gets a yellow border to mark this fact. 2. The layer name has changed. Change Layer with the Properties Dialog 1. Choose Properties from the popup menu available with the right mouse button. The dashboard also provides a button for opening the Layer Management Dialog whose tabs are explained in “Layer Properties” on page 156 and “Layer Set Management” on page 159.

For defining layer properties choose either the Layer Manager option from the entry Layers in the menu bar. If you select a layer set from the pulldown list available by the arrow on the right of the text field.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Layer Properties The layer management in MEDUSA allows you to set some parameters related to layers temporary for the current MEDUSA session. click left on the button View or change the layer properties . The tab Layer Properties is open by default. The Layer Management Dialog appears providing two tabs for Layer Properties and for Layer Set Management (admin only). if you are just creating or editing an element. or. the Layer Set Attributes of the chosen set are displayed. 156 © CAD Schroer GmbH . indicating that no layer set is chosen. Figure 113 Layer Manager: Tab Layer Properties show options You find the following entries on the tab: Layer Sets This text field displays the currently chosen layer set. You can change the visibility and selectivity of layers and you can set the protection flag and the layer color. It is empty by default.

Each line of the list shows the layer number. Show Used Layers. Reset sets the layer settings back to the default values. Vis switches on or off the layer visibility. Please note: If you click on the column header in the case of On. In the case of Prot. You find information on the attributes in the section “Introduction to Layers“.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layer Properties The attributes of the layer are listed below. Show All Layers Options for displaying either all named layers. or all available layers from 0 to 1023. The list shows one layer per line. Layer Name Column which gives the name of the layer. In case of OK the dialog is closed. Vis. Modify or Unprotected. the entries change to Full. all layers used in the current sheet. Lay Col opens the Select color dialog which allows you to select the color for the current layer by clicking on a colored button and confirming your choice with OK. On switches the check marks for visibility and selectivity on or off at the same time. Modify or Unprotected. After Apply the button is disabled until you changed something in the dialog. © CAD Schroer GmbH 157 . Hit switches on or off the layer selectivity (hitability). Cancel. Col switches on or off the layer color. Prot switches the layer protection flag to Full. “Layer Attributes” on page 153. Figure 114 Select Color Dialog Show Named Layers. Help work as usual. OK. Hit and Col all check boxes in the list change to ON (with check mark) or OFF (empty). the name and attributes of the layer. Apply uses the current settings.

Confirm your settings using Apply or OK. For details on the parameters see “Layer Properties” on page 156.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Set Layer Attributes For the current MEDUSA session you can set the attributes for layers like visibility. named or used layers. Set the parameters to your needs. 158 © CAD Schroer GmbH . “Layer Manager: Tab Layer Properties” on page 156). used color and the protection mode. This is available for the layer color only. Please note: The settings for layer attributes you do here are temporary. selectivity. For setting layer attributes do the following steps: 1. 2. If you chose Apply the settings are applied and the dialog remains open. You have the following possibilities: • Click on the header of a column to set a parameter for all listed layers to the same value. • Click on a check box to toggle its setting to on or off. 3. It can be all. Open the dialog Layer Management Dialog by choosing Layers > Layer Manager in the menu bar and then the tab Layer Properties (see Figure 113. • Double click on a list entry to open a further dialog for selecting a value. • Click on the arrow to the right of a list entry to select a value from a pulldown list. If you chose OK the settings are applied and the dialog is closed. This is available only for the protection flag Prot. In the list you see the layers according to the defined show option. In the next MEDUSA session the default settings are used again.

To enter Administrator mode choose the entry Admin Mode from the Options menu. Click on Layer Set Management (admin only) for displaying its contents. Choose either the Layer Manager option from the entry Layers in the menu bar. It is empty by default. Two tabs are available. 1. click left on the button View or change the layer properties for opening the Layer Management Dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layer Set Management Layer Set Management Please note: For the layer set management you have to be in Administrator mode. Figure 115 Layer Manager: Tab Layer Set Management (admin Only) Text field Color selection button show options On top of the Layer Set Management (admin only) tab you find the following entries: Layer Sets This text field displays the currently chosen layer set. or. 2. for Layer Properties and for Layer Set Management (admin only). if you are just creating or editing an element. If you select a layer set from the pulldown list available by © CAD Schroer GmbH 159 . indicating that no layer set is chosen. If you are not in Administrator mode all entries of the tab below are disabled.

On the left you see the list of All Layers (depending on the show options) and on the right you see the list of layers which belong to the current Layer Set (Actual Layers). which are the layers numbered from 0 to 1023. Below the parameters on top of the dialog you find two lists. Details are given in “Customize Layers” on page 162. the field becomes enabled and the name is displayed in it. If you click double on a layer number inside the list above. Off switches the options for visibility and selectivity at the same time On or Off. Hitable. Unhitable switches the selected layers Hitable (selectable) or Unhitable (not selectable). Protected Full.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers the arrow on the right of the text field. On. Invisible switches the selected layers Visible or Invisible. On the right of the Layer Set Management (admin only) tab you find the section Layer Set Attributes. Show Named Layers. Show Used Layers. Protected Modify. Delete deletes the current layer set. all layers used in the current sheet. and for moving layers from one list to the other. the Layer Set Attributes of the chosen set are displayed. Show All Layers Options for displaying either all named layers. Now you can delete or change the layer name. Between the lists you find some buttons used for selecting and deselecting layers either in the left or right list. Unprotected Options for allowing changes on layers or not. Save This button allows you to save the current layer set. or all layers available in MEDUSA. 160 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 116 Layer Manager: List Buttons Deselect all available layers Invert selection of all available layers Select all available layers Add selected layers to set Remove selected layers from set Select all layers in set Invert selection in set Deselect all layers in set Below the lists of the Layer Set Management tab you find the section Layer on the left hand side: Text field (below the list of all layers on the left) The field is disabled by default. Visible. All entries are disabled if no layer set is chosen.

Color selection button (below the option Color OFF) opens the Select color dialog which allows you to select the color for the current layer set by clicking on a colored button and confirming your choice with OK. Color ON. Reset. Color OFF If the option Color ON is set. the elements on the layer are drawn in the color specified by the color attribute. If the option Color OFF is set the elements on the layers defined in the current layer set are drawn with the color defined for the appropriate styles. Figure 117 Select Color Dialog The buttons in the bottom of the Layer Set Management (admin only) tab. Help. Cancel. Protected Full prevents changing layer attributes and adding layers. © CAD Schroer GmbH 161 . Apply. are the same as given for the tab “Layer Properties” on page 156. which are OK. Unprotected allows to change layer attributes and add new layers.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layer Set Management Protected Modify allows to add new layers.

It can be all. named or used layers. Open the dialog Layer Management Dialog by choosing Layers > Layer Manager in the menu bar and then the tab Layer Set Management (admin only) (see Figure 115. This section shows you how to rename layers and how to delete layer names. the layer is removed from the list. The appropriate name in the list changes to Layer_<No> (No is the current layer number) to mark it as undefined. In MEDUSA you always have 1024 layers numbered from 0 to 1023. In the list on the left hand side you see the layers according to the defined show option. Double click left either on a layer number or the layer name. so you cannot add new layers which have a higher number.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Customize Layers You can customize layers when in Administrator mode. 162 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 118 Example: Rename Layer Name 3. 2. assuming that you are already in administrator mode: 1. For deleting a layer name do the following steps. “Layer Manager: Tab Layer Set Management (admin Only)” on page 159). Additionally the button for deleting the layer name is activated. If the show option Show Named Layers is chosen. Click left on the button Delete layer name . Below the list the text field becomes enabled and the layer name is displayed.

the name is also updated in the list of layers defined in the layer set. Click left on the button OK to set layer name The layer name is changed and the list is updated to the new name. Type a new name or change the displayed name. © CAD Schroer GmbH 163 . Double click left either on a layer number or the layer name. Open the dialog Layer Management Dialog by choosing Layers > Layer Manager in the menu bar and then the tab Layer Set Management (admin only) (see Figure 115.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customize Layers For renaming a layer do the following: 1. The text field and both buttons on the right from it are disabled. 5. 2. 4. If the currently displayed layer set contains the changed layer. 3. “Layer Manager: Tab Layer Set Management (admin Only)” on page 159). . Click left in the text field. As you do so the button Delete layer name becomes inactive and the button OK to set layer name is activated. Below the list the text field becomes enabled and the layer name is displayed.

Click the Save button for storing the changes on the layer set. If a layer is highlighted. If the name is unique the new layer set is saved immediately. Layer Manager 164 © CAD Schroer GmbH . “Administrator Mode” on page 196.xml file in the customer product. To change the name of a layer set: 1. Click left in the text field Layer Sets. modify or delete layer sets open the dialog Layer Management Dialog by choosing Layers > in the menu bar and then the tab Layer Set Management (admin only) (see Figure 115. Select a layer set from the list available by clicking on the arrow on the right of the layer sets text field. Click left on the button Add layer to set . 2. 2. Click the Save button to create the new layer set. There are two possibilities to define your own layer sets: a. If the layer set already exists you are asked for overwriting it. Click the Save button. “Layer Manager: Tab Layer Set Management (admin Only)” on page 159). 3. If you click on an already highlighted layer. Select a layer set. The selected layers are shifted from the left list to the right one. The list on the right Actual Layers displays the layers which are defined in the current set. To add layers to a layer set: 1. please refer to the chapter “Options“. 3. To enter Administrator mode. Click left on layers in the left list which shall be added to the layer set. The new layer set is available in the pulldown list now.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Customize Layer Sets You can customize layer sets when in Administrator mode. 3. Type a new name for the set into the entry box. To add a new layer set: 1. creating a layerset. using the Layer Manager or b. 2. Enter a new unique name in the Layer Sets field. Defining Layer Sets using the Layer Manager To create. it is selected and ready for moving to the right list Actual Layers. 4. it is deselected.

xml files. 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customize Layer Sets To remove layers from a layer set: 1. and merges any layerset. They have to be placed into the product directories into m2d\src.xml file is shown above: <layersets> <layerset> <name>SET1</name> <color_on>true</color_on> <color_pen>0</color_pen> <hitable>true</hitable> <protection>3</protection> <visible>true</visible> <layers>1-3 5</layers> </layerset> <layerset> <name>SET2</name> <color_on>true</color_on> <color_pen>0</color_pen> <hitable>true</hitable> <protection>2</protection> <visible>true</visible> <layers>10-23 36-38 99</layers> </layerset> </layersets> © CAD Schroer GmbH 165 . The selected layers are shifted from the right list to the left one. Click left on layers which shall be removed from the layer set in the list Actual Layers. starting from top. Click left on the button Remove layer from set . it is deselected. 2. Select a layer set. Click the Save button for applying the changes on the layer set. If you click on an already highlighted layer. The list on the right Actual Layers displays the layers which are defined in the current set.xml files that are found. 4. Defining Layer Sets in Product Directories It is possible to have more than one layerset. MEDUSA looks through all m2d\src directories that are in the product list. select the set and click the Delete button. An example for a layerset. To delete a layer set. If a layer is highlighted it is selected and ready for moving to the other list.

protected modify • 2 . 166 © CAD Schroer GmbH .protected full • 3 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers protection: • 1 . For information about adding user product directories see the Customization Guide please (available only in English language).unprotected Please note: Changes of the layer sets should always be done in the customer product not in the product directories of the original product.

then any created construction line will be created on layer 127. elements are allocated to their default layers. Enter either a name or a layer datum number into the Layer Datum field. The dialog provides a pulldown list of any layer names which are set in the Layer Manager dialog. for example Miscellaneous. any new created construction line will be created on layer Miscellaneous. Please note: If you define the layer datum as 0. it is allocated to a default layer as described in “Default Layer Allocation” on page 155. You can change the layer datum within the Layer Datum dialog either by choosing a name from the list or entering a number. they are created on the 27th layer after the datum layer. © CAD Schroer GmbH 167 . If you enter a layer number. Figure 119 Layer Datum Dialog To define a new layer datum: 1. select Set Layer Datum from the Layers pulldown menu. 3. Press OK. Construction Lines. 2. For example. This is the same result as if the Layer Datum Off option had been chosen. for example 100. To display the Layer Datum dialog. you activate the Layer Datum ON option and press Apply or OK. That is. by default construction lines are created on layer number 27. The layer datum is set to 0 by default. or you make no entry.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layer Datum Layer Datum When an element is created. If you choose a layer from the list. Select Layer Datum On.

Select the elements for which you want to change the layer. Choose the desired layer. it is allocated to a default layer as described in “Default Layer Allocation” on page 155. The dialog remains opened and you can repeat the action for other elements. The pulldown menu closes and the name of the layer is inserted into the text field. Figure 120 The Change Layer Dialog The dialog provides the two different options. 1. To display the Change Layer dialog. Click on Apply transfers the layer to the selected elements. 168 © CAD Schroer GmbH . select Change Layer from the Layers pulldown menu. Click on OK applies the change and quits the dialog. a. 2. Figure 121 The Change Layer Pulldown Menu A list of the names of any available layers is displayed. The Change Layer option of the Layer pulldown menu enables you to change the layer of elements. Absolute and Incremental. If Absolute is activated: You can open a pulldown menu using the right arrow. The layer name is displayed in the dashboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers Layer Change When an element is created. The name of the changed layer is displayed in the layer field of the dashboard.

You can increase or reduce this number by inserting an incremental value in the text field. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Layer Change b. If Incremental is activated: The text field right of the option is activated now and displays 0. © CAD Schroer GmbH 169 . you enter 3 in the Incremental field and click Apply. which is the layer named General Notes. A click on OK transfers the inserted value and closes the dialog. “Layer Manager: Tab Layer Properties” on page 156).Option Incremental Each layer is assigned to a specific number (see Figure 113. The layer of this element changes to layer 9 (6 + 3 = 9). A click on Apply transfers the inserted value and the dialog remains opened. it is named automatically and displayed in the list of named layers. Figure 122 Change Layer Dialog . if a selected element is on layer 6. Please note: When you changed the layer incrementally and the new layer is not a named layer.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Layers 170 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

........................................................................................................................................................... 195 • Administrator Mode... 191 • Settings for References ............................................................................................. 181 • Dimension Defaults.......................................... 196 • Configuration........................ 186 • Hit Radius ........................................................................................................ 174 • Message Area Display Properties...............................................Overview............................... 173 • Common Settings ..... 177 • Drawing Code ......................................................................................................... 178 • Sheet History Stack.................................. • Options Menu.. 197 © CAD Schroer GmbH 171 ....................MEDUSA4 Drafting OPTIONS This chapter gives you information on setting global parameters in MEDUSA. 194 • Interfaces ..................................... 176 • Legible Height ...................................... 189 • Arc Factor ........... 172 • Defaults .................................................................................................................................................................................................................Control User Options............................... 179 • Dashboard Element Selection Limits .......................... 180 • Switches ..............

MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Options Menu In the menu bar you find the item Options which provides functions for adjusting global settings. For details see “Interfaces” on page 195.. For details see “Defaults . Interfaces opens the dialog for defining parameters used for importing and exporting sheets. among other things. to add and configure plotter or printer. For details see “Administrator Mode” on page 196. Admin Mode opens the Admin Mode dialog. properties of messages.Overview” on page 173. text legibility and the sheet history stack. For details see “Configuration” on page 197. Configuration This entry is only available in the Administrator mode. arc factor for drawing arcs and circles. global user options. opens the dialog for setting up the default values for dimensioning.. It enables you. search radii for selecting elements. Figure 123 Options Menu The menu offers the following entries: Defaults. 172 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Overview Defaults . Dimension opens the Dimension Session Defaults dialog for setting dimension style and standard to use as default. Refsys controls the type of text transformation for a loaded reference (see “Settings for References” on page 194).MEDUSA4 Drafting Defaults . Figure 124 Defaults Dialog: Tabs The Defaults dialog has the following tabs: Common provides the options for common settings (see “Settings for References” on page 194). For details see “Dimension Defaults” on page 186. The other buttons depend on the current tab and they are explained in the appropriate section of this chapter.Overview To set up the defaults select the Defaults… entry from the Options menu. Radii / Arc Fac defines certain radii values for probing on the sheet and allows you to make settings for the display of arcs and circles. For details see “Switches . For details to the settings see the 3D Design User Guide. © CAD Schroer GmbH 173 . In the bottom of the dialog you find at least the buttons Cancel and Help.Control User Options” on page 181. which work as usual. 3D defines settings for the MEDUSA 3D product. For details see “Hit Radius” on page 189 and “Arc Factor” on page 191. Switches is used for setting some global user options. The Defaults dialog opens.

For details see “Message Area Display Properties” on page 176. 174 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Common Settings Figure 125 Defaults Dialog: Tab Commo The sections of the dialog are: Message Area Display allows you to define global parameters for messages displayed inside the output message area.

For details see “Drawing Code” on page 178. For details see “Dashboard Element Selection Limits” on page 180.dat. For text styles this setting is not applied because text styles have a font given in the style definition. © CAD Schroer GmbH 175 . Sheet History Stack defines the length of the list containing the last loaded sheets provided in the pulldown File menu. The chosen default font is used for texts where text is created indirectly like in dimensions or feature control frames. Defaults sets the values back to default values. 10 codes are provided. Default font provides a pulldown list displaying all available fonts. The buttons of the Common tab are: Apply uses the current settings of the dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Common Settings Text Legibility defines the number of pixels valid for the legibility of text. code1 to code10. You find the code definitions in the file code. For details see “Sheet History Stack” on page 179. Dashboard element selection limits defines the limits of element selection for the display in the dashboard. Drawing Code defines in which way a particular element type is drawn. For details see “Legible Height” on page 177.

Please note: The output message area is not visible unless you click the Toggle output message area tool from the status area. Section Message Area Display The parameters of the Message Area Display section of the Common tab are: Enable at startup If this option is marked. You can choose if either only Errors. To set properties of messages select the Common tab from the Defaults dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Message Area Display Properties You can define some properties related to messages given inside the output message area. Messages Types to Display This section holds the options for defining the type of messages. see page 26. Figure 126 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. 176 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the message area will be displayed in the next MEDUSA session in the same way as it was when saving the defaults last time. or if All messages are given. On top of the tab you find the section Message Area Display giving the parameters available for setup. If you choose All messages also logging messages like after probing elements or updating the layer display are given. Errors and Warnings.

this decreases the time needed to redraw sheets containing many text elements. If you increase the minimum legible height the smaller text is drawn as a rectangle which decreases the number of lines which MEDUSA needs to draw. See “Switches . The dialog provides the section Text Legibility. 4. Select the Redraw tool from the toolbar or the Redraw option from the View menu to see the result of the changed legible height. Therefore. Section Text Legibility 2.Control User Options” on page 181. 3. as shown below.. Choose the Common tab from the Defaults dialog. The minimum height is 1 pixel. Type in the new height in numbers of pixels. Figure 127 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. To find out the default for the legible height or to change it: 1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 177 ..MEDUSA4 Drafting Legible Height Legible Height The legible height determines whether text is displayed in a legible form or as a rectangle. The text is always displayed legibly on the cursor. Please note: Legible text may also be affected by settings in the Switches tab of the Defaults dialog. Click the Apply button to change the legible height or click the Cancel button to dismiss the dialog.

the currently displayed code is code1. If you wish to transfer this definition as default setting for subsequent MEDUSA sessions. which will be opened subsequently in the current session. respectively the Customization Guide. If the option Apply Drawing code change to all loaded sheets is off (default).dat file. If Bold is activated. Figure 128 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. If Normal (default setting) is activated. (For details refer to the Administration Guide. When starting MEDUSA again. code1 up to code10. Drawing Code Section When running MEDUSA for the first time the code setting depends on the settings of the Dimension Text switch (see “Dimension Defaults” on page 186 and page 187). In order to switch to a particular code. which appears when quitting the program.dat. The definitions of codes can be found within the code. the currently displayed code is code4.) 178 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 1. the accordant code is displayed as current code. click on the desired entry in the list and confirm the change by using the Apply button. The default will be overwritten then. 2. you have to do the following: By default the keyword code_default is written as comment within the defaults. The currently used code is displayed in the Code selection list field. Delete the command characters (--) in front of the keyword. you have to approve the “Save as default” request. Enter the value of the desired code. In order to be able to set another code as default. The Code selection list provides 10 different drawing codes. the chosen drawing code is only applied on the current sheet and all sheets.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Drawing Code The Drawing Code specifies the display of a particular element type.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheet History Stack Sheet History Stack Inside the File menu you find a list of drawings which were opened last time. © CAD Schroer GmbH 179 . For defining the number of sheets listed in the File menu select the Common tab from the Defaults dialog. See also “File”. This list is called the sheet history stack. You can define a number from 1 to 8. Figure 129 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. ”Sheet History Stack” on page 82. You see the section Sheet History Stack as given in the following figure. Section Sheet History Section The value for History stack depth defines how many file names are displayed inside the pulldown list of the File menu.

If you confirm the changes. Dashboard Element Selection Limits When you quit the program. please refer to the Administration Guide. the new values will be taken over. the dashboard is not displayed or updated. press the Reset button. By default these limits are: • general = 5000 elements • props = 2000 elements • text props = 500 elements You can define the limits either in the Defaults dialog (Options > Defaults > Common) or in the defaults. If the number of selected elements exceed the limit count. where you can insert the desired values. Figure 130 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. you are asked if you want to save the changes of the defaults or not. For details to settings in the defaults. 180 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 130 shows the appropriate part of the Common tab. Please note: The higher the values are the longer MEDUSA needs for checking.dat.dat file of the product.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Dashboard Element Selection Limits Some dashboard actions depend on the count of selected elements. In order to return to the default values. and are valid for following MEDUSA sessions.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Switches .Control User Options The Switches tab allows you to control a number of user options.. To set user options. Figure 131 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches © CAD Schroer GmbH 181 . select the Switches.. tab from the Defaults dialog.Control User Options Switches .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Options General parameters are: is used for drawing dynamic lines between the current point and the cursor during line creation and line edit operations. if you will be asked to merge multiple rasters on sheet save or not. Clip zoomed window If this option is on and if you zoom into the sheet using the tool Windows into the area of a sheet . only the elements inside the selection frame are displayed. MEDUSA saves the coordinates of the current main window as default. Store Image in Sheet If a sheet contains an image it is stored inside the sheet file. with the next start of MEDUSA the main window appears in the same size and on the same position. Then. Define vertices with left mouse button allows drawing points of a line using the left mouse button. If this option is off the image is saved as reference (with path and file name) only. if the license for images is activated. You then can use this entry or the shortcut 182 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If this option is off. which are not part of the selection frame but which do fit into the zoomed view. also elements are displayed. Copy to clipboard If this option is on (default). Prefer Color by Layer The layer color has priority over the element color. This option is only available. closed geometries are created as 2D Features meaning that outline and center lines are grouped. That is. Merge Image on Save allows you to control. any elements which are created on a layer assigned to a specific color will be displayed in this color irrespective of their element color. ”Transported Construction Lines” on page 489. Display rubber band Enable Transportation lines enables transportation lines. the Edit menu entry Copy changes to Copy to clipboard (see “Edit”. Create 2D Features If this option is on. The borders of the selection frame are displayed as dotted lines (you can see two of them as maximum). This option is only available. ”Transported Construction Lines”. If this option is off you can place points of elements only with the middle mouse button. Load image backdrop If a sheet is loaded which has a referenced backdrop image the image is loaded too. For details see ”Construction Lines”. if the license for images is activated. Enable Error bell is used for creating a sound every time an error occurs indicating that an error information is shown in the output message area. ”The Edit Menu” on page 86). Save Window Position If this option is on.

Always Changed default settings are always saved. Display of line thickness If this option is active (default). for example. Show Used Layers All used layers of the current sheet are displayed in the Layer Manager list. using the shortcut Ctrl+v. An inquiry dialog will be not displayed. Parameters for Construction Line Extent are: Window Construction lines are drawn until the border of the currently visible drawing area. which can be defined in the dialog opened with File -> Sheet properties. also into another application like MS Word. For this option lines also means text lines and lines of prims. when leaving the program. Parameters for Layer Manager List Switsches are: Show Named Layers All named layers are displayed in the Layer Manager list. all lines are displayed according their defined thickness.Control User Options Ctrl+c to copy the currently selected elements into the clipboard and paste them. Please note: The option Copy to clipboard is activated under Windows only. If this option is off. layers from 0 to 1023) are displayed in the Layer Manager list. set MED_CLIPBOARDCOPY=1 If Copy to clipboard is off. Sheet Construction lines are limited by the sheet size. Show all Layers All layers available in MEDUSA (i. when leaving the program. all lines are displayed thinly. Prompt A query occurs whether changed default settings should be saved or not. you can copy and paste as given above but you cannot paste into another application.MEDUSA4 Drafting Switches . An inquiry dialog will be not displayed. Parameters for Save Defaults on Exit are: Never Changed default settings are never saved. You get the same behavior by setting the environment variable MED_CLIPBOARDCOPY to one in the file login. Parameters for Text Display are: © CAD Schroer GmbH 183 . Maxsiz Construction lines are drawn till the maximum size of the drawing area.bat.e.

the last symbol placed on the sheet using the tool Load named symbol becomes selected and highlighted after leaving the Load named symbol tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Decortext is used for always displaying text as text if it is within the legible height. if you copy a rectangle having dimensions and a text into a drawing with a different scale. no symbol is selected after leaving the tool Load named symbol. The options for Scale text height (during paste or symbol load) define. None No texts are scaled. or which was saved with the symbol is ignored. Add preview on symbol unload adds preview automatically to any symbol file when unloaded. Only dimension texts (TDM) All texts except dimension texts are scaled. how texts are scaled when pasting or loading symbols. Save references keeps a porthole reference inside a sheet but the appropriate geometry is not loaded. or which was saved with the symbol. legible text is used for always displaying text as legible text overriding other options. If this option is not selected all text appears as a rectangular box. 184 © CAD Schroer GmbH . at current level If this option is set. The level on which the symbol currently is. Add preview on sheet save adds preview automatically to any sheet when saved Parameters for the Symbol Load/Unload section are: at sheet level If this option is set symbols are loaded or saved (unloaded) always on sheet level. Parameters for Sheet Loading/Saving are: Load references loads the geometry of a porthole reference (see “Reference Sheet Procedure” on page 655). For example. text and dimension text are scaled according to the following options: All texts All texts are scaled. with shear allows text shear attributes to be defined and display text with shear appropriately. symbols are loaded or saved (unloaded) always on the level they are currently on. If this option is deactivated. Select symbol after exit tool After setting this option.

The button on this tab is: Defaults sets the values back to default values. Imperial sets the sheet units to the imperial system (inch) to use as default each time you open a new sheet.Control User Options Parameters for the Sheet Units section are: Metric sets the sheet units to the metric system (mm) to use as default each time you open a new sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Switches . © CAD Schroer GmbH 185 .

Figure 132 Defaults Dialog: Tab Dimension 186 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For details on dimensioning see “Dimensioning” on page 505.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Dimension Defaults You can select a dimension style and standard to use as default when you create dimensioning. To set the default dimensioning standard select the Dimension tab from the Defaults dialog.

Blob is the symbol of the starting point when using coordinate dimensioning. ”Point Functions”. jis and iso. If this option is set.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimension Defaults You find the following entries inside the Dimension tab: Standard provides the options for the standard dimensioning. Bold displays dimension text with font weight bold (default = code4/depending on the settings). Available options are bsi. Escape is a placeholder for the display of the formats. chapter “Setting up Boldness for Plotting Dimensions“. Arrows and Gaps shows the definitions for arrows and gaps for the selected Standard. is equivalent to code1). Small sets the text height for the tolerance smaller than the text high of the dimension. Radial Dimension Certain standards can allow that radial dimensions can be drawn with or without a line witnessing the radius. ansi. Parameters for Dimension Text are: Normal displays dimension text with normal font weight (default setting. boldness of plotted dimensions can be set to a certain value by defining environment variables inside the login. Clicking left on the button Symbol opens the Special Characters dialog. Diametric Letters and symbols for defining the Prefix and Suffix of the dimensioning text for diametric dimensioning. din. Radial Letters and symbols for defining the Prefix and Suffix of the dimensioning text for radial dimensioning. You can change the settings by clicking left on the appropriate button and choose a new symbol from the Point Function dialog (see ”Lines”. © CAD Schroer GmbH 187 . Please note: In addition the ISO standard can allow flipped out diameter dimensions to be drawn with or without a witness line exhibiting the diameter. Radial Dimension is used for that case too. For details see the Administrator Guide.bat. This control allows the user to select which alternative to use. Clicking left on the button Symbol opens the Special Characters dialog. It is used internally. (See also “Drawing Code” on page 178) Parameters for the DIN Tolerance Text Height section are: Normal sets the text height for the tolerance according to the text high of the dimension. ”Point Functions” on page 379).

select arrows of a different style. Please note: If you click Update standard the standard will always reflect these modifications whenever you select that standard. 3. • Update standard to reset your personal copy of that particular standard. you try to change a dimension. Always Damaged dimensions are always saved. 188 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Update Standard uses the current settings as the standard for dimensioning. you are asked how to handle damaged dimensions every time. Next time you start MEDUSA the old default settings are used again. You can then revert to the original.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Parameters for the Saved Damaged Dimensions section are: Prompt If this option is set. Choose the tab Dimension. Select the Defaults … option from the Options menu. 4. When closing the session a dialog appears asking you if you want to save or discard the changed defaults. Click: • Apply to apply a modified version of the dimensioning standard to the sheet. Modify the standard as required. If you select Save then the current standard is used in any further MEDUSA session If you select Cancel the current standard dimensioning settings are lost. ”Editing Dimensions”. you can modify the dimension standards or create a personal copy of a modified standard. 2. The Defaults dialog appears. default standard whenever required. If you wish. 5. Select the dimensioning standard you wish to use. for example. For details see ”Dimensioning”. Never Damaged dimensions are never saved but are always reverted to their original structure if possible. The buttons on this tab are: Apply uses the current settings of the tab. ”Possible Messages while Changing Dimensions” on page 546. 1.

0 Maximum Radius specifies the maximum radius of a point using Near.0 © CAD Schroer GmbH 189 . Segment or Tangent probe specifiers. Hit Radius is not valid for Free and Auto probe specifiers. Figure 133 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Factor The Search Radii section of the dialog provides following entries: Hit Radius specifies the radius which is required in order that MEDUSA finds a geometry. choose the Radii / Arc Factor tab from the Defaults dialog. Default: 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Hit Radius Hit Radius To find out the current hit radius. Intersection. Default: 50. Perpendicular.

Default: 2.00 The Auto Probe Radii section of the dialog provides following entries: Near Point Radius is the radius for finding the nearest point using an Auto probe specifier. The Arc Factor section of the dialog is explained in “Arc Factor” on page 191. The buttons of the dialog are: Apply uses the current settings of the tab.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Coincidence Radius specifies that separate points are considered for coincidence unless they are separated by a distance greater than the Coincidence Radius.5 Intersection Radius specifies the radius for finding an intersection point using an Auto probe specifier. 190 © CAD Schroer GmbH .5 Please note: The values used in the radii sections have to be specified as screen units (and not sheet units). Set as Default takes the current values as default values. Defaults sets the values back to default values. Default: 2. Default: 2.5 Segment Radius Radius for finding a segment point using an Auto probe specifier. Default: 0.

the number of chords used to describe the curve changes sequentially. the smoother the curve will appear. If you set the arc factor to display curves less smoothly. In addition the minimum angle is silently forced to be less than or equal to the maximum angle. 12.0 • Minimum angle: 3. The initial values for the arc factor are set to: • Curve factor: 0. The arc factor controls the angles between these chords and therefore affects the number of chords which are used to display each arc on the MEDUSA sheet on your screen. Therefore. for example. and 0. 6. ”Printing a Sheet” on page 67.0 for the curve factor. 16 and so on. Arc Factor Please note: If you changed the arc factor choose Redraw from the View menu to see the result. (See values A © CAD Schroer GmbH 191 . 4. For information on how to set the arc factor in printing see “File”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Arc Factor Arc Factor Arcs are drawn using a number of straight lines known as chords. Large arcs (those greater than 90 degrees) are always processed in sections. this decreases the time to redraw sheets containing complex geometry.5 through 60 degrees for the angles.0125 through 100000. this decreases the number of lines which MEDUSA needs to draw. Options of the Arc Factor section: Curve Factor If the curve factor is changed or an arc is magnified. Figure 134 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Fac. The more chords that are used to draw the arc. 8. 3 to 4 to 5. To find out the current arc factor or change it choose the Radii / Arc Factor tab from the Defaults dialog. Therefore.0125 • Maximum angle: 15. Please note: Setting the arc factor for displaying the sheet on the screen does not affect the arc factor that is used when you print/plot a MEDUSA sheet. an arc between 90 and 180 degrees changes in the sequence 2.00 The values submitted are limited to 0. 8 and so on and a complete circle changes in the sequence 4.

Angle If the arc factor decreases (or the size of the arc increases) the number of chords increases until the maximum number of chords is reached. The smallest value allowed is 0. The largest value allowed is 60 degrees. Figure 135 Display of the Arc Factor Options 192 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This minimum number is controlled by specifying a maximum angle for the chords in the Max Angle field.5 degrees. The minimum angle is 5 degrees when you start up MEDUSA.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options and B Figure 135). (See angle D Figure 135). This maximum number is controlled by specifying a minimum angle for the chords in the Min Angle field. The buttons of the tab are explained in “Hit Radius” on page 189. (See angle C Figure 135). however. See “Note on How the Arc Factor is Calculated” on page 193 for more information. The maximum angle is 30 degrees when you start up MEDUSA. Min. Angle If the arc factor increases (or the size of the arc decreases) the number of chords decreases until the minimum number of chords is reached. Max.

0)) / (sheet_conv)**2 © CAD Schroer GmbH 193 . the curve factor is compared against a value derived from the following calculation: curve factor = (chord_height)**4 / (chord_length)**2 chord_height is the height of the arc above the chord at the midpoint of the arc (see Figure 135. This calculation and comparison is performed using sheet units and is not related in any way to the screen size of the element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Arc Factor Note on How the Arc Factor is Calculated This information is included for the benefit of those users who need to understand how MEDUSA calculates the arc factor. As a result. chord_length is the length of a chord drawn between the two end points of the arc (see Figure 135. when you zoom in or if you use small curves. If the value is exceeded the arc is halved and the calculation and comparison repeated. the display of arcs becomes more ragged and you need to reduce the curve factor to maintain a smooth curve. B).0*LOGe(ARCFAC))/LOGe(2. A). As each arc is considered. The number of segments is controlled by the use of a curve factor value which is in turn determined by the arc factor value that you specify. The curve factor value is derived from the arc factor value using the following formula: curve_factor = 10**((2.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Settings for References The Refsys tab provides three options which are used to control the type of text transformation for loaded references. For detailed information on references please refer to “Reference Sheet Procedure” on page 655. If the text is part of a reference. the transformation of text is executed also with the reference analogously to the source drawing. Figure 137 Context Menu of the Transformation Tools Mirror and Rotate For detailed information on text transformation please refer to “Transformation of Text Elements” on page 434. 194 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This type defines the appearance of the text after a transformation. you have to specify the same type of transformation within the Defaults dialog (Figure 136). e.g. Figure 136 Refsys Tab of Defaults Dialog When text on the source drawing of a reference is transformed. mirrored or rotated. you choose a specified type of transformation (Figure 137) in the context menu (right mouse button) of the transformation tool. only then. in order to display the text accordingly after loading.

which is the tab MEDUSA -> DXF/DWG. because its parameters are explained in detail in the CADConvert User Guide.cfg file. This option is only available in Admin mode! DXF/DWG Config Path opens the CADConvert Configuration Path dialog. DXF Mapping Tables opens the dialog CADConvert Mapping Tables.MEDUSA4 Drafting Interfaces Interfaces In MEDUSA you can set up several parameters for importing and exporting files in DXF/DWG AutoCAD exchange and standard format. which is the tab DXF/DWG -> MEDUSA. and one for exporting. Figure 138 Menu Interfaces DXF/DWG opens the dialog Options DXF/DWG-Interface. Figure 139 CADConvert Configuration-Path Dialog Please note: The dialogs are not explained in this section. You can choose the required one from the list. which are located in the cc_custom directory of your user product and contain a cadconvert. © CAD Schroer GmbH 195 . It displays a list of all subdirectories. which holds the tabs for all the configuration files defining the mapping of lines and texts when converting MEDUSA files into DXF/ DWG and vice versa. one for importing files. which has two tabs.

Figure 141 Admin Password Typing the correct password (default is admin) and choosing OK activates administrator mode. By clicking left the check mark or the item Admin Mode this mode is switched off. Figure 140 Pulldown Menu Admin Mode Admin Mode If a check mark is given you are in administrator mode. This entry is only accessible if you are in administrator mode. an error message comes up and the password is not changed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Administrator Mode If MEDUSA runs with administrator rights the item Admin Mode from the Options menu allows you to change the password and switching the administrator mode on and off. After choosing OK the password is changed. If there is no check mark in front of this entry and you click left on Admin Mode you are asked for the password. 196 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Change Admin Password allows you to change the administrator password. After clicking this item the following dialog comes up: Figure 142 Admin Password Change You have to type the password two times. If the entered and re-entered passwords do not match.

Details are given in “Plotter Configuration” on page 198. Details are given in “Select Background Color” on page 202 printdef writes the current environment settings as text file. The result is a binary file used internally by MEDUSA when creating dimensions with fits. Choose Configuration to display the following pulldown menu. For details see “Printdefinition” on page 202. Figure 143 The Configuration Pulldown Menu Plotter Configuration The Plotter Configuration dialog allows you to add and configure printers or plotters to use for printing MEDUSA drawings. Details are given in “Fits” on page 201 Fits Select background color The function enables you to change the background color of the sheet. compiles the data files containing the definitions for fits in metric and imperial dimensions.MEDUSA4 Drafting Configuration Configuration Please note: The Configuration function of the Options menu is only available in the Admin mode. © CAD Schroer GmbH 197 .

For details see “Edit Description” on page 200.. please create it. Properties. Add. For details see “Adding a Printer” on page 199. Figure 144 Plotter Configuration Dialog The Plotters field in the Plotter Configuration dialog shows a list of plotters that are installed in your MEDUSA project. opens the dialog for editing the properties of a selected printer.. For details see “Properties” on page 200. The plotters may be connected to different printer drivers or may be connected to the same printer driver but with different configurations. select Plotter Configuration from the Configuration pulldown menu. If there is no directory like this on your system. In Windows this directory has to be c:\temp\ and in Unix it is /tmp/.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Plotter Configuration To display the Plotter Configuration dialog. Please note: Printing and plotting needs a temporary directory for writing intermediate files.. 198 © CAD Schroer GmbH . opens the dialog for adding a printer. Delete deletes a printer by selecting the printer name from the Plotters list and then click the Delete button.. Edit Description opens a text editor with the description file for the selected printer.

.log. • Logging. Please note: The name of the log file is automatically defined to be Name with extension .. the number of copies and the length of time it took to print. Click OK. Refer to your System Administrator for information about each printer driver. 2. Figure 145 The Add Plotter Dialog The dialog displays a list of available plotter drivers... There may be a number of different drivers depending upon the printers available at your site. for the driver qtplot amongst others there are configuration files for creating black/white or colored PDF files). 4. 5. • Full Logging. Click the Add.. 3.. For example. For each driver different configuration files can exist (e. enters general details about each print job into the log file. Select the Logging choice box(es) if you wish to create a log file showing details of all your printing jobs. the time and date at which the file was printed. Type a name for the printer in the Name entry box. Select a Description file. button on the Plotter Configuration dialog.g.MEDUSA4 Drafting Configuration Adding a Printer To install a new plotter or printer in your MEDUSA project: 1. The Add Plotter dialog appears. Select the printer driver that you wish to use. enters more detailed information about each print job into the log file. 6. © CAD Schroer GmbH 199 . This option is grayed out until you select the Logging choice box.

giving you information about the plotter you have created and location of the plotter configuration file. an error message is displayed.. To do this. or to turn logging on or off. An information dialog appears. Figure 146 Plotter Information Dialog If there are no plot products in your product list. you must first open the printer configuration file for editing. (See “Adding a Printer” on page 199). either: 200 © CAD Schroer GmbH . select the printer name from the Plotter list in the Plotter Configuration dialog. Select or deselect the Logging and Full Logging choice boxes as required to turn log file creation on or off. An example of this is shown in Figure 146. Properties To view the current properties of a plotter. Edit Description To configure an installed printer. and press the Properties. button. as shown in Figure 147.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options The new printer is added to the Plotter list in the Plotter Configuration dialog.. Figure 147 Plotter Properties Dialog This dialog gives the name of the printer and the driver to which it is connected. The Plotter Properties dialog appears.

Fits compiles the default definition files for fits.dat files contain the definitions for fits and you can edit them with a usual text editor. In the Dimension Properties dialogs you have to activate Limit/fit by setting a check mark in the choice box. For detailed information about dimensioning see the chapter “Dimensioning” on page 505.bin). The file has the name <plottername>.dat and the fits_imperial. For dimensioning MEDUSA reverts to the binary file (e. The following figure gives an example: Fits Figure 148 The Compiling Fits Message in the Output Message Area The fits-metric. button. If something changes these files change and the binary file needs to be compiled again for the usage within MEDUSA. Printer configuration is generally defined by your System Administrator..MEDUSA4 Drafting Configuration • Select the plotter name from the Plotter list in the Plotter Configuration dialog. to a binary file. Within these files the System Administrator defines the fits according to the standards of the company. For example: <medusa>\MASTER_PROJECT\superprint\macro\Plotter. © CAD Schroer GmbH 201 . The file opens in a new window. which are fits-metric.g. Please note: You were informed of the name and location of this file when the printer was added.des You can use this file to configure the printer in a number of different ways. Clicking on Fits gives you appropriate messages inside the output message area.dat and the fits_imperial.dat files.. It provides the list of defined fits from the . With this you are able to choose the needed fit for your dimension. fits.des.dat files. Figure 149 Limit/Fit Choice Box in Dimension Properties Dialog If you click on the Look up table button the Limits and Fits dialog opens. Choosing one the according identification code is added to the dimension. • Use your standard system File Open options to open the relevant printer configuration file. and press the Edit Description.

By default MEDUSA offers four different background colors.MEDUSA4 Drafting Options Select Background Color MEDUSA opens sheets by default with an ivory colored background. 2. The environment settings and variables for your MEDUSA session are saved to the defined text file. When you close the program you are asked if the change should be saved as default setting. Select the Configuration > Select background color option from the Options menu. Click left on the button Save. ”Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings” on page 709. For details see “Customizing the User Environment”. 1. Select the Configuration > printdef option from the Options menu. Choose one of the colors and click OK. The sheet background appears in the requested color. Printdefinition You can save the environment settings of your MEDUSA session as a text file. 1. Figure 150 The Select Background Color Dialog 2. You can change the background color by using the Select background dialog. 202 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dialog for defining a text file is displayed. 3. The Select background dialog is displayed. Choose a path in the file browser and type a file name in the appropriate text field.

...... 206 • Point Functions ..... 235 • Trail File ...................... 245 • Accelerator and Map Keys......................................................................................... 212 • Un-number & Re-number............................................. 217 • Copy to Clipboard .................................................................. 247 © CAD Schroer GmbH 203 ....................................................................... 204 • The Protractor .............................................................................. • The Utilities Menu ............................MEDUSA4 Drafting UTILITIES This chapter describes the functions which are available when you choose Utilities from the menu bar.................................................................................................................... 210 • User Attributes ..... 234 • The Calculator.............................................................................................................. 237 • Instancing.................................. 244 • Add Current View as Preview ....................................................................................................... 241 • Add Preview to Sheet/Symbol ....

Calculator. It is used to create lines of a specific direction and length. The Trail File function enables you to store and retrieve a sequence of operations. For details see “Trail File” on page 237. For details see “Un-number & Re-number” on page 217. opens the Point Functions dialog. opens the User Attributes dialog. opens the Protractor dialog. which you can use to insert part numbers into text strings..MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities The Utilities Menu The figure below gives the options of the pulldown menu Utilities available in the menu bar.. is used to execute simple arithmetic operations.. For details see “The Calculator” on page 235... Trail File. Point Functions. For details see “Copy to Clipboard” on page 234. User Attributes. Number opens the Number dialog... Copy to Clipboard copies selected elements into the buffer for using this copy in other application programs. Figure 151 The Utilities Pulldown Menu Protractor. Moving the cursor into a numeric input field and calling up the calculator the result of the operation is automatically returned to the field.. 204 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dialog is used to specify the appearance of a point in a line. For details see “User Attributes” on page 212. The dialog is used to assign a specific name and value (User Attributes) to an element or group.. For details see “Using the Protractor to Create a Line Segment” on page 206.. For details see “Point Functions” on page 210.

Add current view as prieview this option adds the existing screen view to MEDUSA sheet/symbol as preview. for example a zoomed detail of a sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Utilities Menu Instancing. For details see “Instancing” on page 241. An object can be an element. The chosen directory will be used.g. © CAD Schroer GmbH 205 . Change Directory changes the current directory. Accelerators and Mapkeys This entry enables you to set accelerator keys (shortcuts) and map keys for MEDUSA functions. is used to place objects along a line. e. a group of elements or a symbol. For details see “Add Preview to Sheet/ Symbol” on page 244. Add preview to sheet adds a preview to a sheet. It can be used to create a more suitable preview than the auto generated one.. For details see “Add Current View as Preview” on page 245. For details see “Accelerator and Map Keys” on page 247.. when loading a sheet or a symbol. if you press the Current directory button of a file browser. when it is saved.

. Using the Protractor to Create a Line Segment You can create line segments with a specified direction: • by using fixed values for angles in steps of 45 degrees. You also can enter specific values in these fields. To the right of them you find input fields displaying the prompted values. tools to query: .the incremental angle . The query tools are available as soon as the dialog appears. Please note: The setting tools can only be used if you create a line and if you already set the starting point for that line. from the Utilities menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities The Protractor You can use the Protractor to: • create lines of specified length in a specified direction. To display the Protractor dialog select Figure 152 The Protractor Dialog Protractor..the base angle . incremental angles or a distance between two points. • query base angles. or • entering free values in the input fields. At the border of the dialog numbers and arrows are given for setting a direction of currently created or edited line (the so called setting tools). 206 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or if you are in the mode for editing an existing line.the distance Input fields sets the incremental angle to the specified values sets the incremental angle to the specified value according to the direction of the arrow (in steps of 45°) In the middle of the dialog you find tools which are used to query values (query tools).

4. The base angle and the incremental angle have been added. To set the end point of the line: • probe anywhere in the sheet. Click the Apply button MEDUSA creates a line segment 60 units in length at an angle of 35° from the horizontal. 120°.) work in this way.. Any other of the setting tools ( Entering Free Values 1. 6. 7. If you call the Protractor dialog again. 2. MEDUSA creates a second line segment 60 units in length at an angle of 55°. Leave the entered values in the input fields and repeat step 2 and 3. 3. . Set any value in the input fields back to 0. 60°. 4. Set any values of the input fields to 0. 2. You see a line attached to the cursor. Please note: The values in the input fields are not reset by closing. The setting tools of the protractor are activated now. 3. 5. Type for example 35 in the Base angle input field 5.. Probe in the sheet to set the starting point of the line . Choose one of the line creation tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray. Choose for example the tool. 9. The Base angle input field displays a value of 45°. Probe in the sheet to set the starting point of the line. the last defined values are displayed in the input fields. The line is forced to the specified angle and it is designed in the desired length. The line can be shortened or extended by moving the mouse. Move the cursor within the drawing area. Choose one of the line creation tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray. / 30°. Click on Cancel to close the Protractor dialog. Enter for example 60 in the Distance input field to define the length of the segment. Press Return or click Apply. 6.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Protractor Using Fixed Values in Steps of 45 Degrees 1.. 8. © CAD Schroer GmbH 207 . Type for example 20°in the Incremental angle input field and click Apply. The direction of the line is fixed to an angle of 45° or 135°. or • enter a value in the Distance input field to specify the length.. 7.

For drawing the next point that existing element is used.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities The Extend to Segment Pulldown Menu You can make some settings relating to the extend of line segments using the pulldown menu as shown in the figure below. Off The point of the line you currently draw does not snap to any existing element. The line can be an existing line or a virtual line. Figure 154 The Query Tools Specify an incremental angle by probing two points on the sheet Incremental angle input field Specify a base angle by probing two points on the sheet Specify distance by probing two points on the sheet Base angle input field Distance input field Query a Base Angle This tool enables you to query the angle of a line based on a horizontal line. On Same as Near but the search radius has no effect here. Using the Protractor to Query Angle and Distance The protractor offers some tools which can be used to query the values of angles or distances by probing two points on the sheet. The distance between probed point and element depends on the hit radius defined in Options > Defaults. 208 © CAD Schroer GmbH . In both cases the angle is defined by probing two points on the sheet. which is next to the current cursor position. the point of the line you draw snaps automatically to the prolongation of the element or to the element itself. The automatism described above is switched off. ”Hit Radius” on page 189. For details see “Options”. tab Radii / Arc Fac. The appropriate input fields display the requested values. Figure 153 The Extend to Segment Pulldown Menu Near If you probe on the sheet near an existing element. the base angle.

Probe two points on the sheet The distance between the two point is promptly displayed in the Distance input field. the Specify distance by probing two points on the sheet tool 1. The value of the base angle is displayed in the Base angle input field. 1. 2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 209 .MEDUSA4 Drafting The Protractor Figure 155 Example of Specifying an Base Angle two probe points on a free place of the sheet define the direction of a virtual line point 2 two probed points on an existing line define its direction point 2 point 1 base angle 0° existing line point 1 base angle 0° virtual line 1. Probe two points on the sheet to specify the direction of a line. 2. Click on the Specify an incremental angle by probing two points on the sheet tool . As described before you can either probe two points on an existing line or two free points (defining a virtual line) on the sheet. 2. Click on the tool. The Incremental angle input field displays the corresponding value. Query an Incremental Angle This tool enables you to query an incremental angle by probing two points on the sheet. Click on the Specify an base angle by probing two points on the sheet tool . Query a Distance You can query a distance between two points in the sheet by using . Probe two points on the sheet to specify the direction of a line as shown in the figure above.

Point functions are divided into the following ranges: Ranges 0 1 .50 51 . Choose Point Functions. you could change a point without any function to an arrowhead. For example.. The point function is denoted by a number from 0 through 255 and a name having up to six characters.39 40 . If you are not creating or editing a line the dialog is grayed out. Every point in a line has an associated point function.255 Point functions Null point function Default set of point functions User-assignable point functions Reserved for future MEDUSA development User-defined point functions If you change the point function. For detailed Information about the Line Properties dialog see “Lines”. For changing a point function: 1. Figure 156 Point Functions Point function 8 Point function 11 Point function 25 Point function 34 Please note: You can change point functions using either the Utilities menu or the Line Properties dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Point Functions The physical appearance of a point in a line is specified by its point function. The symbols inside the Point Functions dialog are enabled. 2.. Some examples of the appearances of different point functions are shown in Figure 156. such as an arrowhead or a cross. that is. If you are not already creating or editing a line move the cursor to the point that you want to change and then double click left. the appearance of the point is changed.100 101 . it is not marked in any way. ”Line Properties” on page 370. The point function at each point is used to define a symbol drawn at that point. When you first create a point it is given a null point function. The current point marker appears at the chosen point indicating that you can now change the point. 210 © CAD Schroer GmbH . from the Utilities menu.

If you do not want to apply further point functions click the Close button. The dialog also can remain open while you go on working on your sheet. 4. Choose a point function by clicking the appropriate button.Examples Null point function Use this if you do not want a point function at the selected point 3. The number of the point function appears in the Point function field (see Figure 157) and the point function on the sheet changes immediately. © CAD Schroer GmbH 211 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Point Functions Figure 157 The Standard Point Functions Dialog .

If the element is on sheet level. 1. e. a line) again into the dialog Changes the current element to his parent.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities User Attributes To get the possibility to select special elements or groups within a sheet you have to assign attributes to these elements/groups named User Attributes. this switch will be deactivated. empty row to the dialog Deletes the currently selected row from the dialog Deletes all data rows from the dialog and reads the attribute data from the current element (e. Figure 158 The User Attributes Dialog In the following the functions of the dialog buttons are explained: Adds a new. It`s not possible to reach the sheet level element Stores the data of the selected dialog box lines into a cache.g. The User Attributes dialog appears. Choose the Query User Attribute tool from the Utilities menu.g for a later copy to other elements 212 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Display having Selected an Element without Attribute b. the dialog is cleared. Name and Value fields are blank as shown in Figure 159. Figure 159 User Attributes Dialog . If you select more than one element.Display having Selected an Element with Attribute c. Name and Value. but does not close the dialog Closes the dialog without any changes Below the buttons the dialog displays a table containing three columns for Type. If you select another single element.e. Figure 160 User Attributes Dialog . Selecting Elements a. the dialog is updated on the fly. line). If you select one single element to which a user attribute has been assigned already. © CAD Schroer GmbH 213 . the attribute values of this element are shown in the dialog box. the dialog displays only the Element Type of the selected element (i. No attribute values are shown because of the different set of attributes each element can have.MEDUSA4 Drafting User Attributes Reads the cached data and merges them into the current dialog data Writes the dialog data to the current set of elements (one ore more element(s) and closes the dialog Same as OK. If you select an element to which no user attribute has been assigned so far.

4. Choose a Datatype from the pulldown menu (Figure 158). real and string. Press the button . 2. 2. Select the requested entry in the table.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities To Assign a First Attribute 1. that the data are merged to possible existing attributes of each of the selected elements. The dialog is cleared. To Add Additional Attributes to a Set of Element 1. Type a name into the Name input field. 2. 3. The attribute is assigned to the element. Type the name of the attribute in the column field Name and the attribute value in the column field Value. Now. That means. 2. Press either the OK or Apply button. A new empty line is added to the dialog. at any time you select the element and choose the Query User Attribute tool from the Utilities menu. the User Attributes dialog will display any attribute assigned to this element. To Change a User Attribute 1. Its attribute values are shown in the dialog. Enter a value into the Value input field. 4. Modify the name or value in the input fields. You can insert up to 6 alphabetic or numeric characters. The input option is determind by the datatype you chose before. Click OK to assign the attribute to the selected element and quit the dialog. 3. Click Apply to accept the modifications. The attribute is written to the set of elements. Type the name of the attribute in the column field Name and the attribute value in the column field Value. 3. 214 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The attributes dialog supports the datatypes integer. A new empty line is added to the dialog. Press either the OK or Apply button. 4. Select more than one element. To Add Additional Attributes to a Single Element 1. 3. 5. Click Apply to assign the attribute to the selected element and let the dialog opened for further actions. Select a single element. Press the Add a user attribute to dialog button . The table displays the changed user attribute.

The row is removed from the dialog. Reset the Dialog If you made changes within the dialog without applying these and you press the Reset button the dialog is cleared and the attributes of the current single element are read again. If the current element is on sheet level. the dialog remains empty. . Click either the OK or the Apply button to accept the erasure. Change to the Parent Element The button Show the attribute(s) on the parent element switches from the current single to its parent element and updates the dialog for showing the attributes of the parent element. © CAD Schroer GmbH 215 . 3. Press the Merge/add attributes from temporary space to dialog button . missing ones are added. Its attribute values are shown in the dialog. 3. Therefore you can select the complete row by click on the numbered column at the start of the row or select one cell of the row. 2. Press the Delete a user attribute from the dialog button . a. Select a single element. Copy Attributes to a Cache 1. If there are no attributes. Paste Attributes to Element(s) Cached attribute data can be copied to one single element or to a set of elements. Select a single element. if some exist. The cached data is merged to the dialog data. 2. Existing attributes are overwritten. b. Select the attributes you want to copy. 2. Select the row with the attribute that you want to delete by clicking in the numbered column at the start of the row or select a simple cell of the row. The selected attributes are copied to the cache. use Shift+LMB (left mouse button) to select a block of rows or Ctrl+LMB to select different single rows. if some exist. they are displayed in the User Attributes dialog. To select more than one line. Select one single element. 1. That means.MEDUSA4 Drafting User Attributes To Delete a User Attribute 1. 4. Its attributes are shown in the dialog. If some attributes exist. Press the Copies dialog data to temporary space button . the button is deactivated. it is not possible to go to the sheet element (M10).

you can only merge the cached data to the elements. Press the button OK or Apply to write the date to the element(s). missing ones are added.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities If you select more than one element. 3. ”User Attributes” on page 347). that the existing element attributes are not replaced by the dialog content. Please note: You can also call the User Attribute dialog by using the Query and edit user attributes button in the status area (see “Status Area”. that means. 216 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Existing attributes are overwritten.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 217 . Choose the Number option from the Utilities pulldown menu. Figure 162 Number Dialog It provides following input fields: Search String Controls for which text shall be searched on the complete drawing.MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Un-number & Re-number MEDUSA provides the possibility to search on a drawing for text strings and numerals. Figure 161 Number Option in the Utilities Pulldown Menu The Number dialog is displayed. consecutive part numbers on a sheet.g. This enables you to create e. and replace them with consecutive numbers. which follow defined strings.

a wildcard (e. First existing numerals on the sheet are replaced with the wildcard.e. Figure 163 Textstyle Pulldown Menu of Number Dialog String defines the text string to search for (e. In the lower area of the dialog definitions for the search direction are made. Vertical Direction The search is performed in the defined primary search direction either from bottom to top( ). A. and replaces the wildcards. in order to replace it with new numbers (see Un-number and Re-number below). which are added to the defined text String. vertical ( ) or horizontal ( ).MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Textstyle Via the arrow you can display a pulldown list of all available text styles and choose one of them. Primary Direction You can choose between searching in x.g. from top to bottom ( ). Re-number The Re-number command scans the complete drawing for text. with consecutive numbers. This is done by scanning the complete drawing for numbers. #. Horizontal Direction The search is performed in the defined primary search direction either from left to right ( ) or from right to left ( ). which are added to this string.g. which begins with the defined string. Each single numeral of the numbers is replaced with the defined Wildcard. ABC) Wildcard Here. 218 © CAD Schroer GmbH . In a second step this wildcard is searched.or y-direction. i.$) can be entered. The dialog provides following buttons: Un-number The Un-number command prepares defined text strings for the Re-numbering.

) Please note: Un-numbering as well as re-numbering searches for text of the defined style only! Number The Number command executes the Un-number and Re-number command automatically in succession. etc. tex3. the last character of each string is replaced with consecutive numbers. Help displays the documentation to the dialog. which begin with the defined string. it is searched for texts. tex2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 219 . Then.MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number If no wildcard is defined. (For example: If the search string is text. Cancel Quits the dialog. the result will be tex1.

On basis of drawing Figure 164 firstly the parameters of the search direction will be explained. after pressing the Re-number button. 220 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 165 Search String Settings In each case the examples show the result of numbering with the appropriate different settings.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Examples The result of different settings shall be clarified with some examples. A wildcard is not entered. Figure 164 Basic Sheet Text of style slot and string A will be searched.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Primary Direction: Horizontal Figure 166 Search Direction: horizontal-bottom up-from left Figure 167 Result Primary Direction: horizontal Horizontal Direction: from left (to right) © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertcal Direction: bottom up 221 .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Figure 168 Search Direction: Horizontal-bottom up-from right Figure 169 Result Primary Direction: horizontal Horizontal Direction: from right (to left) 222 © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: bottom up .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Figure 170 Search Direction: Horizontal-top down-from right Figure 171 Result Primary Direction: horizontal Horizontal Direction: from right (to left) © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: top down 223 .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Figure 172 Search Direction: Horizontal-top down-from left Figure 173 Result Primary Direction: horizontal Horizontal Direction: from left (to right) 224 © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: top down .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Primary Direction: Vertical Figure 174 Search Direction: Vertical-bottom up-from left Figure 175 Result Primary Direction: vertical Horizontal Direction: from left (to right) © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: bottom up 225 .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Figure 176 Search Direction: Vertical-bottom up-from right Figure 177 Result Primary Direction: vertical Horizontal Direction: from right (to left) 226 © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: bottom up .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Figure 178 Search Direction: Vertical-top down-from left Figure 179 Result Primary Direction: vertical Horizontal Direction: from left (to right) © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: top down 227 .

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Figure 180 Search Direction: Vertical-top down-from right Figure 181 Result Primary Direction: vertical Horizontal Direction: from right (to left) 228 © CAD Schroer GmbH Vertical Direction: top down .

MEDUSA recognizes the highest number and uses that as a seed number. Figure 182 Basic Sheet with existing Numbers 15 and 24 Following settings have been made in the Number dialog: Figure 183 Example © CAD Schroer GmbH 229 . That is. the re-numbering starts with the number. An example will clarify that. which follows the highest existing number. Down right on the basic drawing text C has been replaced with number 15 and B with 24.MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number Seed Number If there are already numbers on the sheet.

Figure 184 Result 24 has been recognized as highest existing number on the sheet. with it. 230 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the re-numbering starts with number 25.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Pressing the Re-number button effects the result shown below.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number A next example gives the result. only numeric characters (345) It shall be searched for String text followed of a number.TEXT) • strings. a String (text) and a Wildcard (#). B. For clarification the relevant strings are highlighted in the drawing.text. Figure 185 Basic Sheet You can find on the sheet: • the string text in lower case followed by different numbers • the string TEXT in upper case followed by different numbers • the string Text in upper and lower case followed by different numbers • the string text in lower case with prefixed numbers • strings. only alphabetic characters (A. In this case the basic sheet contains following texts. With re-numbering the numbers shall be replaced with consecutive numbers. © CAD Schroer GmbH 231 . if both is set within the Search String fields.

Figure 186 Search String Settings: String and Wildcard Pressing the Un-number button effects the following result: Figure 187 Result of the Un-number Command Any numerals. You can see. were replaced with the defined wildcard (#). which follow the text string text. any other numerals and strings have been ignored.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Following entries are required in the Number dialog. Only text written with small letters has been considered. that the search has been taken place case sensitive. 232 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Figure 188 Result of the Re-number Command The wildcards have been replaced with consecutive numbers. © CAD Schroer GmbH 233 . which follow the text string. the drawing is ready for re-numbering. the wildcards shall be replaced with consecutive numbers. is irrelevant. The number of wildcards. With the next step.MEDUSA4 Drafting Un-number & Re-number With it.

) 234 © CAD Schroer GmbH . (The function complies with the Copy function in the Edit menu respectively the use of Ctrl+C in the windows system.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Copy to Clipboard The Copy to Clipboard tool enables you to store selected elements into the buffer of the operating system. Then you can use the stored elements in another application programs.

Open a numeric input field. Click on the according buttons of the Calculator to achieve the desired arithmetic operation. Move the cursor into one of the numeric input fields. Click on the Calculator tool Figure 189 The Calculator inside the menu Utilities. Click the right mouse button to open a popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Calculator The Calculator MEDUSA offers a calculator for simple arithmetic operations. 1. 2. The result is displayed in the calculator input field. © CAD Schroer GmbH 235 . choose the Creates boxes . 2.defined by opposite corners tool from the Lines + Edit tooltray. In addition to the possibility to display the calculator via the Utilities menu MEDUSA enables you to call it up on all numeric input fields. For example. For opening the calculator: 1. 3.

. The result is automatically returned to the input field. 236 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Figure 190 Numeric Input Field with Popup Menu 4.. “The Calculator” 5. Enter the desired arithmetic operation.. Click on Calculator. The calculator appears as shown in Figure 189.

.. Close Trail File closes a record. For details see “Replay the Trail File” on page 239.MEDUSA4 Drafting Trail File Trail File The Trail File function enables you to store any work step at and up to a particular time and reproduce it in the correct succession. It can be useful for debugging.bac. The file extension is . Figure 191 The Trail File Pulldown Menu Record Trail File opens the Record Trail File dialog for starting to record action steps you do on the sheet. Select Trail File. Details are given in “Compare Files” on page 240. Replay Trail File opens the Replay Trail File dialog where you can run recorded work steps. in the Utilities menu to open the following pulldown menu. For details see “Record a Trail File” on page 238. This step is a requirement for finishing a record and for replaying the recorded file! Compare Files compares two files under specific aspects. © CAD Schroer GmbH 237 . Following actions are not noted any longer. You can open this file with a usual text editor. Therefore MEDUSA creates a text file containing the Bacis-commands in the order of execution.

This is probably not intended. Any action on the sheet which is executed from this time on is stored into the defined Bacis-file until you stop recording by closing the trail file. If you choose File Selector a dialog opens with the entries of a usual file browser. After closing the file browser the filename is transmitted to the input field of the Record Trail File dialog. To start the record click on Record Trail File from the Utilities menu. Close the dialog using the OK button. 5. The value Decimal places defines the number of positions after the decimal point for these coordinates. The Record Trail File dialog appears. which means up to 15 decimal places. Enter a filename in the Filename field with the extension . test.bac) or use the button File Selector for choosing a path and/or file name. 3. The record is completed and the Bacis-file is saved. The recorded Bacis-file contains commands with coordinates. Enter a Macro Name in the according input field. 4. The entry is mandatory. Close the Trail File To stop the record click on Close Trail File from the Utilities menu.g.MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Record a Trail File 1.bac (e. This entry is optional. The Macro name is written in the first line of the recorded file. The record starts. in which you can select the directory and the file name. Please note: Every action is recorded. 238 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Enter a value for the Decimal places. Figure 192 The Record Trail File Dialog 2. If you left out this definition coordinates are stored with maximum precision. So when you draw elements and you do not exit the appropriate tool before stopping recording. a replay of this trail file ends up in an active drawing tool. If the Macro Name fails MEDUSA cannot open this file.

. 4. for example a new one. Figure 193 The Replay Trail Entry Box 3. If you choose File Selector a dialog opens with the entries of a usual file browser.. © CAD Schroer GmbH 239 . button. 2. in which you can select the directory and the file name. Choose Replay Trail File from the Utilities menu. The Replay Trail File dialog appears. After closing the file browser the filename is transmitted to the input field of the Replay Trail File dialog (Figure 193).MEDUSA4 Drafting Trail File Replay the Trail File For recalling the commands of a saved Bacis-file do the following steps: 1. Open a sheet. Click on OK in the Replay Trail File dialog. Now you can enter a file name or click on the File Selector. The recorded actions are repeated in the saved order.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Compare Files
For comparing Bacis-command-files or any other ASCII files, open the Compare Files dialog via the Trail File pulldown menu.
Figure 194 The Compare Files Dialog

You find the following sections in the Compare Files dialog:
Filenames

This section gives the names of Bacis-files which shall be compared. Enter the file names which shall be compared behind the fields File 1 and File 2. You also can use the button File Selector for opening a dialog with the entries of a usual file browser, in which you can select the directory and the file name. After closing the file browser the filename is transmitted to the input field of the Compare Files dialog
Comparison Type

defines how the comparison will be performed. You can compare files bit by bit (Exact), regarding to the Numeric values, and concerning the results on the Sheet. Decimal places is the number of positions after the decimal point as it was defined for recording.
Comparison Action

defines the kind of comparison.

240

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Instancing

Instancing
With Instancing... MEDUSA provides a tool to place objects along a line. Objects can be single elements, a group of elements or symbols loaded from a file. 1. Create a line by using one of the line creation tools. This is the element at which an object will be instanced. 2. Choose, for example, the Creates box tool from the Lines + Edit tooltray and draw a box. This is the element that should be placed on the line. 3. Select the created box and open the general pulldown menu by clicking on the right mouse button. 4. Choose Copy and probe on the element to set a datum point. The selected box is stored in the MEDUSA buffer. 5. Select the line. 6. Click on the Instancing... tool of the Utilities menu. Two arrows appear at the beginning and end of the selected line showing the direction of creating the line. The Instance Along a Line dialog (Figure 195) is opened. Please note: The Instancing... tool is only activated if you select a line on the sheet.

Figure 195

The Instance along a Line Dialog

7. Open the Instance pulldown menu and choose Paste buffer for defining the box, which is stored in the buffer, for instancing. 8. Click Apply. The box is placed along the line. Where and how many times the element is placed, depends on the settings which are explained in the following sections.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

241

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities
You can also use a saved symbol as an element which should be placed along the line. 1. Open the Instance pulldown menu and choose Symbol file. The entry is displayed in the input field. The Symbol file input field and the Browser button are now enabled.
Figure 196 The Instance Input Fields of the Instance Along a Line Dialog

2. Click on the Browser button to open the File Select Dialog. 3. Select the symbol file you wish to use inside the File Selector dialog and click double. The filename is written to the Symbol File input field of the Instance Along a Line dialog. You can define start and end point for instancing along a line.
Figure 197 The From/To/ Direction Input Fields of the Instance Along a Line Dialog

From

specifies the point of the line where the first object is placed. By opening the pulldown menu via the arrow you can define Start of line, End of Line, To point and Probed point. According to the selected option the arrow on the line is placed at the appropriate position. If you choose Probed point all entries in the dialog are disabled until you probed a point on the line.
To

specifies the point of the line where the last object is placed. The same options as given for From are available.
Direction

specified the direction of placing an object. You can choose between Forward and Backward. According to the chosen direction the arrows on the selected line are displayed. You can define number and arrangement of the objects for instancing along a line.
Figure 198 Input Fields for Setting Number and Arrangement of the Instance

Copies

specifies the number of the objects.

242

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Instancing
Spacing

defines the distance between the objects.
Offset

specifies the distance between the line and an object.
Angle

specifies the angle by which an object is placed rotated related to its datum point.
At vertices

places an object automatically at any corner of the line.
Orient to normal

has the effect to align the object automatically with the line. You can define the corner normal for instancing objects along a line.
Figure 199 The Corner Normal Pulldown Menu

Corner normal

With this option you can define if an instanced object is aligned according to the orientation of the Incoming edge, Outgoing edge, or the Average of both edges, incoming and outgoing edge. The functionality of this option becomes obvious only, if the line consist at least of three line segments with different orientations.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

243

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities

Add Preview to Sheet/Symbol
A sheet/symbol can have a preview image stored in the sheet/symbol. This will be displayed in the Open sheet dialog, when you choose the Open option from the File menu. The preview can be added either by a. using the Add preview to sheet option of the Utilities menu. It works only for the current sheet. or b. using the MEDutil command preview. The MEDutil command takes a filename to add a preview to. The filename may contain wildcards. If you add the -R option to the preview command and specify a directory (the complete path is required), a preview will be added automatically to any MEDUSA sheet/ symbol located in this directory or subdirectory. The preview, which is added by using the Add preview to sheet option from the Utilities menu, will be auto generated, unless a file of extension .png with the same name as the sheet exists in the same directory. In this case the .png file is used as preview. You can also activate the switch Add preview on sheet save on the Defaults /Switches dialog, which is opened via Options > Defaults, so that a preview is added automatically to a sheet at any time when saving (see also chapter ”Options”, section “Switches - Control User Options” on page 181).

244

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Add Current View as Preview

Add Current View as Preview
The Add current view as preview option from the Utilities menu provides the possibility to add the existing screen view to a sheet as preview instead of the auto generated preview. It may be an advantage, if this view is more suitable as preview than the auto generated version, for example a detail of a sheet. Please note: The file, to which the preview is to be added, must not be open in MEDUSA. With this you can add any arbitrary view to a sheet.

1. Choose the Add current view as preview option to display the Add Preview dialog.
Figure 200 Add Preview Dialog

2. Select the MEDUSA file to which you want to add the current screen view as preview. 3. Quit the dialog pressing the Add button. The current view is added to the selected sheet. When you open a file via the File menu (File > Open) the Open Sheet dialog displays a preview for each file. In the following example the preview for the file gear.she was generated automatically. The preview for the file gear_1.she is a screen view showing a detail which was added to the sheet.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

245

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities
Figure 201 The Open Sheet Dialog showing the Previews

246

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Accelerator and Map Keys

Accelerator and Map Keys
MEDUSA provides the possibility to set up accelerator and map keys for nearly every function and tool you can access either in the menu, the toolbar and in the tooltrays.

Accelerator Keys
Accelerator keys are the shortcuts like Ctrl+C or Ctrl+V you know from other applications. In MEDUSA you easily can assign frequently used functions and tools to shortcuts. Choose Accelerators and Mapkeys to display the following dialog. You find two tabs, Accel and Mapkey. By default the tab Accel is open. The dialog contains a window which displays a table with three columns, showing Accel, Function and Icon. Please note: By default at first the dialog is displayed so that the column showing the icons is hidden. Disperse the dialog via the left mouse button, so that any column of the table is visible.

Figure 202

The Accel Mapkey Editor Dialog: Tab Accel

As you scroll through the list, you find many accelerator keys which are already assigned to MEDUSA functions by default.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

247

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities
For changing an accelerator key assignment do the following steps: 1. Click left on the line inside the list whose key shall get another function assigned. Below the list the accelerator key, the assigned function and its icon is displayed. 2. Click left on the button Choose a button to map in the bottom of the tab Accel. The field displaying the function text is cleared. 3. Choose a function or tool, for example, by clicking left on a button in the toolbar. The description of the chosen function or tool is displayed inside the field which was cleared in the last step. Also the icon changes to the new function. However it can be, that the function you choose is already assigned to a shortcut. In this case the accelerator field below the list changes and displays the already existing shortcut definition. If you still want to assign the function to the chosen accelerator key, you have to remove the assignment first and then add a new assignment (see below). 4. Click left on the button Assign. The assignment is changed and the new function text and icon is displayed inside the list of available accelerator keys. 5. Apply your settings by clicking OK or Apply. The changed accelerator key assignment can be used now. For changing the accelerator key, do the following: 1. Click left on the line inside the list whose key shall be changed. Below the list the accelerator key, the assigned function and its icon is displayed. 2. Click left into the field giving the accelerator key combination below the list. 3. Press another key combination on your keyboard, e.g. shift+k. If the key combination is new, the field is updated according to the pressed keys and it displays, for example, Shift+K. Each string belonging to the combination starts with an uppercase letter. The function text remains unchanged If the key combination already exists, the appropriate function text is given for it and the existing key combination is displayed in small letters. You have to restart changing the accelerator key. Go back to step 1. 4. Click left on the button Assign. The assignment is changed. 5. Apply your settings by clicking OK or Apply. The changed accelerator key can be used now. For removing an accelerator key, do the following: 1. Click left on the line inside the list whose key shall be removed. Below the list the accelerator key, the assigned function and its icon is displayed. 2. Click left on the button Remove. The assignment is removed from the list of accelerator keys. 3. Apply your settings by clicking OK or Apply. The removed accelerator key cannot be used anymore.

248

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Accelerator and Map Keys
For adding an assignment of an accelerator key to a function or tool do the following steps: 1. Click left into the field giving the current accelerator key below the list. 2. Press a key combination on your keyboard, which is not defined till now, e.g. shift+q. The field below the list is updated according to the pressed keys and it displays, for example, Shift+Q. Each string belonging to the combination starts with an uppercase letter. The function text remains unchanged. 3. Click left on the button Choose a button to map in the bottom of the tab Accel. The field displaying the function text is cleared. 4. Choose a function or tool, for example, by clicking left on a button in the toolbar. The description of the chosen function or tool is displayed inside the field which was cleared in the last step. Also the icon changes to the new function. However it can be, that the function you choose is already assigned to a shortcut. In this case the accelerator field below the list changes and displays the already existing shortcut definition. If you still want to assign the function to the chosen accelerator key, you have to remove the assignment first and then add a new assignment (see below). 5. Click left on the button Assign. The assignment is added and the new definition is displayed inside the list of available accelerator keys. 6. Apply your settings by clicking OK or Apply. The added accelerator key can be used now. For using an accelerator key, do the following: 1. Move the mouse cursor into the drawing area. Ensure that the drawing area is active, for example, by clicking into the drawing area somewhere. 2. Press a key combination on your keyboard, e.g. shift+q. The assigned function is executed according to the key definition.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

249

MEDUSA4 Drafting Utilities Mapkeys
Mapkeys are another way of building shortcuts for frequently used functions and tools. Against accelerator keys, a map key consists of letters. 1. Choose Accelerators and Mapkeys to display the following dialog. You find two tabs, Accel and Mapkey. By default the tab Accel is open. 2. Click left on the tab Mapkey.
Figure 203 The Accel Mapkey Editor Dialog: Tab Mapkey

As you scroll through the list, you find some mapkeys which are already assigned to MEDUSA functions by default. Now you can change assigned functions, change key combinations, remove mapkeys and add new key assignments. The procedures for editing, removing, changing and adding mapkey definitions are similar to those for “Accelerator Keys” on page 247. If your cursor is over the drawing area, and if you press a letter key on your keyboard, MEDUSA automatically detects this as the beginning of a map key.

250

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting

BACIS1 AND WINDOWS

Bacis1
The Bacis1 command and programming language is explained in: • the Bacis1 Design Commands Guide and • the Bacis1 Guide This chapter gives only an overview of the entries available inside the Bacis1 item of the menu bar.
Figure 204 Bacis1 Menu Switches into Bacis1 Mode All menu items are disabled and you can enter Bacis1 commands inside the input command line

Switches off Bacis1 Mode

Windows
This chapter shows the Windows functions available in the menu bar which enable you to change the current drawing and to close an opened file.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

251

MEDUSA4 Drafting Bacis1 and Windows
Figure 205 The Windows Pulldown Menu

Select

Opens a list with any loaded file. The example below shows four opened sheets. The filename of the current sheet (KEILRIEMENSCHEIBE) is grayed out.
Figure 206 The Select List

Show Console, Hide Console

displays/undisplays the console/DOS box. The console is hidden by default.

252

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting

LICENSES

This chapter explains the items available in the menu Licenses.
Figure 207 Licenses Menu

Show Licenses

displays the licenses which are already activated inside the console.
USC Commands (DARS)

activates the entries related to USC commands in the menu Bacis1.
Parametric Symbol Load

activates the tool for loading parametric symbols. For details see the Parametric User Guide.
2D Parametrics

activates the license for 2D Parametric. With this also Parametric Symbol Load is activated. For details on 2D Parametrics see the Parametric User Guide and the Parametric Reference Guide.
Parts Library

activates the MEDParts product. The tool for running MEDParts is in the Complete set of tooltrays, tooltray Creation Tools, toolset for loading symbols. Further information is given in the book Parts Library Guide.
Raster Backdrop

activates the license for Raster Images. For details see the Raster Image User Guide.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

253

MEDUSA4 Drafting Licenses
3D Batch

activates the license for 3D Batch. For details see the 3D Design User Guide.

254

© CAD Schroer GmbH

........ 260 © CAD Schroer GmbH 255 .............. 257 • Using the Help Button in Dialogs ....................................... 258 • Context Sensitive Help.. • Overview ........ 256 • Using the Help Menu of the MEDUSA Menu Bar .....................MEDUSA4 Drafting HELP This chapter explains how to get help on any feature in the MEDUSA window.............. 259 • The Message Line .................................................................................................................................................................

See “Using the Help Button in Dialogs” on page 258. • Pressing the F1 key or Help key on a SPARCstation or on windows systems opens the online documentation. • Clicking the Help button in the lower right corner of a dialog. 256 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Help Overview You can obtain help on: • Almost any part of the MEDUSA menus or window • Using a dialog • Using the active tool • The contents of the current tooltray • The current version of MEDUSA • The MEDUSA online documentation viewer You can retrieve help as follows: • Choosing the Help menu on the right of the menu bar. See “Using the Help Menu of the MEDUSA Menu Bar” on page 257.

Move the pointer (cursor) to the word Help at the right end of the menu bar. Click your left mouse button to choose the item and close the menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 257 . then click your left mouse button. Please note: If you decide to choose no item.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Help Menu of the MEDUSA Menu Bar Using the Help Menu of the MEDUSA Menu Bar The Help menu is a pulldown menu which contains the following menu options: Figure 208 Pulldown Menu of Help Documentation Displays the MEDUSA documentation in a browser. (The menu bar is the narrow strip at the top of the screen. 3. Click your left mouse button to open the menu. On Keys Displays the accelerator and map keys. 4.) 2. Move the pointer to one of the menu items. move the pointer outside the area of the menu. as well as copyright and trademark information. On Help Displays this chapter. How to get help from the menu: 1. On Version Displays brief information on the version of MEDUSA that you are currently running.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Help Using the Help Button in Dialogs To obtain help on a dialog: 1. 258 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Move the mouse pointer (cursor) to the Help button in a dialog. Click left on the Help button. MEDUSA starts the viewing tool for the online documentation and displays the appropriate page. 2. Figure 209 Part of a Dialog Showing the Help Button The Help button is highlighted once the pointer is positioned over it.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Context Sensitive Help Context Sensitive Help MEDUSA help is provided as HTML. • To get help on a dialog press the F1 key. In both cases the defined browser is initiated and loads the corresponding page of the documentation. © CAD Schroer GmbH 259 . • To get help on a special tool button move the cursor over the button and press the F1 key.

Look at the message line. Press either F1 or the Help key on the keyboard. Slowly move the pointer over the tools in the tool tray. c. The message line displays brief information about each tool in turn. It gives you brief information on how you use the tool. b. 3. Getting Information on Using the Active Tool 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Help The Message Line The message line is part of the status area and it gives: • Information on the function of the currently displayed tool. The online documentation is opened at the appropriate page. 2. Look at the message line. b. Getting Information on the Tools in a Tool Tray 1. 260 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. or • Information on how to use the active tool. It displays a brief message about the highlighted tool. Clicking the left mouse button. Moving the pointer back into the drawing area. Choose any tool by: a. Move the pointer back to the tool in the tool tray. Move the pointer to one of the tools in the tool tray. If this information is insufficient: a. Moving the pointer to a tool. The active tool is still highlighted. The background color of the tool changes once the pointer is positioned over it.

.. 287 • Tree Table Toolbar ................................................... 270 • Measure Toolbar ........... 262 • Adjust the Contents of the Toolbar.............................................. 263 • Toolbar Management ........ • Toolbar Overview ....................................................................................... 265 • Utilities Toolbar......................................... 286 • Tree Navigation Toolbar ................................................ 289 © CAD Schroer GmbH 261 ............MEDUSA4 Drafting TOOLBAR This chapter introduces MEDUSA users to the toolbar... 266 • View Toolbar .................................................... 288 • Selection Toolbar ........................................................................................................................... 272 • Scale View .................................................................................................................................. 267 • Storing and Restoring Windows................................................................................................................ 278 • Line Navigation Toolbar ..................... 268 • Zoom Selection ..................................................... 264 • Sheets Toolbar ............................ 271 • Measure ..................................................................................................................................................

positioned below the menu bar. The following figure shows the toolbar after starting MEDUSA the first time. The following list gives all the items which are available: • Sheets Toolbar • Utilities Toolbar • View Toolbar • Measure Toolbar • Line Navigation • Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar • Tree Navigation Toolbar • Tree Table Toolbar • Selection Toolbar For details on adjusting the items displayed in the toolbar see “Adjust the Contents of the Toolbar” on page 263.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Toolbar Overview The toolbar. For choosing an item from the toolbar point to the button and click the left mouse button. Figure 210 The Toolbar Sheets Utilities View Measure Line Navigation Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar Please note: Your toolbar can differ from that one given above if the System Administrator changed the settings for the contents of the toolbar. provides frequently-used functions. The figure above gives only some of the available toolbar items. 262 © CAD Schroer GmbH . By default you find items like opening and saving sheets. For managing the toolbar like displaying its items in its own windows or at other positions inside the MEDUSA window. zoom functions and line navigation. see “Toolbar Management” on page 264.

Move the cursor on Toolbars. Click left on the toolbar you want to hide or display. 3. 4. The following pulldown menu opens: Figure 211 View Pulldown Menu The check mark in front of an entry shows you that the appropriate toolbar entry is visible. For adjusting the toolbar items using the menu bar do the following: 1. A pulldown menu opens offering the items of View. If there is no check mark the appropriate toolbar entry is not displayed. The pulldown menu disappears and the toolbar is changed according to your selection. Click the left mouse button. © CAD Schroer GmbH 263 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Adjust the Contents of the Toolbar Adjust the Contents of the Toolbar You can adjust the contents of the toolbar to your needs by adding and deleting items. Move the cursor upon the entry View in the menu bar. 2.

Click and hold the left mouse button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Toolbar Management The different items inside the toolbar can be displayed in its own windows and you can place them wherever you want. If the cursor position is close to the border of the MEDUSA window the toolbar item is placed at the current position. As long as you move the mouse a rectangular shape of the toolbar item is attached to the mouse cursor. If you release on another item the other item is shifted to the left. Move the mouse. It becomes thick if you move the cursor over the drawing area or outside the MEDUSA window. 3. An example is given in the figure below. to the right. Move the mouse cursor on the vertical line. 4. up or down depending on the space. If the cursor position is over the drawing area or outside the MEDUSA window the toolbar item is displayed in its own window. Inside the toolbar in front of each item you find a vertical line which indicates that the following items can be moved. Your display should look like following: Figure 213 Move Utilities Toolbar 2. If you do so for the Utilities Toolbar you should see a little cross with arrows indicating that the item can be moved. Figure 212 Utilities Toolbar For moving a toolbar item: 1. It is drawn thin as long as you move the rectangle near the border of the MEDUSA window. Release the left mouse button. Please note: Disabled toolbar items cannot be moved. 264 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Save all modified sheets is a modification of the Save function. The following figure shows the tools available in the Sheets Toolbar: Figure 214 Sheets Toolbar Close Current Sheet Save all modified sheets Save As Save Open New Pulldown menu for selecting the sheet size Close Current Sheet is a modification of the Close function from the File menu. It saves all modified sheets of the current MEDUSA session at once.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sheets Toolbar Sheets Toolbar The Sheets Toolbar provides frequently used items for opening and saving sheets. © CAD Schroer GmbH 265 .

”Groups” on page 334 for details. The Selects elements or named groups at sheet level tool limits the selection to lines. which selects any element. Figure 215 Utilities Toolbar The Deletes all the selected elements tool deletes selected elements. The functions of the tools in this menu are shown in the following table: Table 5 Selection Tools Tool Function The Selects lines tool limits the selection to lines only.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Utilities Toolbar The Utilities Toolbar provides the selection tools and the tool for deleting selected elements. text and prims (not contained in groups) and groups at sheet level. For more about selection see the chapter “Select” on page 97. See “Status Area”. See “Select”. 266 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For this your cursor has to be over the drawing area and then press the Shift key and click the right mouse button. ”Selecting Elements by Area” on page 115 for details. To change the selection tool click left on the arrow to the right of the Selects elements of any type tool or the tool itself. Some of the selection tools are also available as popup menu. The Select sheet-level named groups tool limits the selection to elements that belong to sheet level groups. The default selection tool is the Selects elements of any type tool You can change the selection tool to refine the choice of elements that can be selected. The Selects named groups tool limits the selection to elements that belong to groups. The group and all its elements are selected. The Selects prims tool limits the selection to prims. The Select dimensions tool limits the selection to dimensions. ”Groups” on page 334 for details. The Select Stipple tool limits the section to Stipple elements The Select Crosshatching tool limits the selection to crosshatch elements The Select elements by area tool displays the Select elements by area dialog. The Select text elements tool limits the selection to text elements. The selection tools pulldown menu opens. The group and all its elements are selected. See “Status Area”.

Zoom out zooms out of the sheet by a fixed factor. An example is given in “Zoom Selection” on page 270. Opens the previous window. Redo is used for canceling actions and do them again. Zoom in is used for zooming into the sheet to an area you define by drawing a rectangle. Alternatively. © CAD Schroer GmbH 267 . To zoom. Opens the previous window is only available if you already zoomed in at least one time. press and hold down the CTRL key. Undo. Figure 216 View Toolbar From left to right the following tools are available inside the View Toolbar: Refresh Graphics redraws the drawing area. Stores and restores windows by name is explained in “Storing and Restoring Windows” on page 268. Dynamic pan and zoom allows dynamic pan (using the left mouse button) and zoom (middle mouse button). press the right mouse button and move the mouse. Then also Opens the next window is available. To pan. View the full area of the sheet displays the whole sheet. Zoom on selected geometry zooms into the sheet until all selected elements are visible in the drawing area. then press the left mouse button and move the mouse forward and backward. use the CTRL key to pan and zoom dynamically. Opens the next window change the display of the drawing area according to zooming you did before. press and hold down the CTRL key.MEDUSA4 Drafting View Toolbar View Toolbar The View Toolbar provides frequently used tools for the display of elements inside the drawing area as well as the undo and redo functions.

When you restore this window view. Click the Save button. known as window views within a drawing and store them. For storing and restoring window views: 1. option Please note: You cannot store a window view with a name shown in the list Session or Sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Storing and Restoring Windows It is often useful to define several views of a sheet in order to work on different areas of the geometry. or you can save them with the sheet and use them again in another MEDUSA session. you can define views. you may want to create a window view showing a detail. inside the toolbar the Stores and Restores windows by name changes to . Once you saved a window view. MEDUSA automatically zooms into this area. The window view name appears in the Session entry box. indicating that there are already saved window views. 268 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Type a name into the Session entry box. The window view is deleted. 2. Therefore. Delete Select the name of the window view to be deleted from one of the lists and click the Delete button. Select the Stores and Restores windows by name The Windows dialog appears: Figure 217 Windows Dialog Save Delete Restore Refresh Show Position Sheet entry box Button for showing the list of window views stored with the sheet The buttons of the Windows dialog are explained in the following sections. Save To save the window view to use with any session: 1. option from the View Toolbar. 2. If you insert an already existing name you are prompted to choose another name. You can either store window views for the duration of the current MEDUSA session. For example. Zoom into the area that you wish to save with Zoom or Zoom on selected geometry.

Perhaps you need to display the whole sheet in order to see this information. Click left on an entry of the popup menu. then the window view saved with the sheet is opened. Select the required window view name from either the Session list or the Sheet list. 2. Click the right mouse button. left corner of each rectangle.MEDUSA4 Drafting Storing and Restoring Windows Restore You can display any saved window view: 1. When you press this button. 2. for example. MEDUSA automatically zooms into the area of the stored window view. Move the cursor to the Stores and Restores windows by name option. A popup menu opens showing all the stored window views. Press the Restore button. red rectangles are automatically drawn on the sheet defining the extent of each window view. option from the View Toolbar: Alternatively you can use the Stores and Restores windows by name 1. The window view names are displayed in the lower. Please note: If you open a sheet which has saved window views with the same name as the session window views. The appropriate window view is restored. Refresh The Refresh button redraws the graphics. after using Show Position. Figure 218 Store and Restore: Show Position © CAD Schroer GmbH 269 . 3. Show Position The Show Position button displays the locations of all window views that are saved with the sheet.

on the toolbar enlarges the area around currently selected For example. Figure 219 Window Section Before and After Zoom Selection: active group Before Zoom After Zoom 270 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Zoom Selection The Zoom on selected geometry tool drawing elements. if you select this tool when a group is active MEDUSA zooms into the area displaying all elements in the group in the window.

For details see “Measure” on page 272. For details see “Scale View” on page 278. Figure 220 Measure Toolbar From left to right the following tools are available inside the Measure Toolbar: Measuring functions provides the measuring capability without using the dimensioning tools. © CAD Schroer GmbH 271 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Measure Toolbar Measure Toolbar The Measure Toolbar provides the functions for measuring and using different scales in one sheet. Drawing areas with a special scale allows you to work at several different scales within a MEDUSA sheet.

• the distance between two points or the distance of the last two created points. Please note: If you start a tool. circles and circular arcs. and • certain angles. The Measure Dialog remains and you can restart the measure tool by using the button on the left side of the dialog tab page. 272 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Once you are finished measuring either select Exit tool from the right mouse button popup menu to exit the tool and leave the dialog open for later use. the measure tool is automatically deactivated.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Measure The measuring function is used to measure lengths. Select the Measure tool Figure 221 from the toolbar to display the Measure dialog: Measure Dialog The tools in this dialog can be used to measure: • line segments. distances and angles without having to create dimensions. either over three points or between two line segments.g. a line creating tool. e. or press the Cancel button to close the dialog. before you exit an activated measure tool.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 273 . Information about the selected line appears in the dialog. Define the precision of the measure tool in the field. Click the Properties button to display the Measuring Properties dialog. circle or circular arc. 2. radius. There is information about the start and end point as well as line length and position. If you selected a circle or circular arcs. data for the position of the center. The dialog is adjusted accordingly.MEDUSA4 Drafting Measure Precision of measurements You can define the precision of the measuring: 1. MEDUSA recognizes whether you have selected a line. diameter. then select the line segment you wish to measure. circumference and apex angle are also shown. Figure 222 Measuring Properties Dialog Measuring Line Segment Figure 223 Measure Dialog: Line Segments To measure a line segment. select the Line segments button from the top of the dialog.

position. from the top The dialog updates automatically as you probe new points. select the Distance between current and last points button of the dialog and leave the dialog open while you create your drawing. then select two points on the drawing. and so on. The dialog displays information about the distance. of the points. Measuring the Distance Between the Current Point and the Last Point Figure 225 Measure Dialog: Distance Between Last and Current Point To measure a line segment. the measuring continues until you stop this function. displaying the distance between the current point and the point probed at last. You can continue to select further points.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Measuring the Distance Between Two Points Figure 224 Measure Dialog: Distance Between Two Points To measure a the distance between two points. 274 © CAD Schroer GmbH . select the Distance between two points button from the top of the dialog.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 275 . The specification of the angle is decimal.MEDUSA4 Drafting Measure Measuring Angles You can measure an angle over three points or between two line segments. The value of the angle appears in the dialog. select the Measure between three points button from the top of the dialog. then select the two line segments. Measuring an Angle Between Two Line Segments Figure 227 Measure Dialog: Angle Between Two Lines To measure an angle between two line segments. The value of the angle appears in the dialog. select the Measure between line segments button from the top of the dialog. then select three points. Measuring an Angle Over Three Points Figure 226 Measure Dialog: Angle Over Three Points To measure an angle over three points. The second point must be at the apex of the angle.

If your element selection contains geometry consisting of single lines. Measuring 2D Properties of a Geometry Please note: Consider that calculations can be done only for closed geometry consisting of polygons. select the Query the properties of the line that you are editing button from the top of the dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Measuring an Edited Line Figure 228 Measure Dialog: Query Line To get the properties of a line that you are editing. Figure 229 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry 276 © CAD Schroer GmbH . no measuring is done. The dialog updates automatically and it shows information on the currently edited line segment.

The properties are listed inside the dialog. Figure 230 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry Output Additionally to the output the button for saving the properties is enabled.MEDUSA4 Drafting Measure To measure the 2D properties of a selected geometry: 1. Click left on the button on the left of the tab. 3. If you switch on the option Show axes of inertia and center of gravity. If you choose this button a dialog opens wanting you to define a file name. Select the elements building the geometry. 2. The following figure shows an exemplary result. Figure 231 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry Output in File © CAD Schroer GmbH 277 . Select the 2D properties of a selected geometry tab from the top of the dialog. Type a name with extension sxp into the edit field on top of the dialog and choose OK for saving the file. 4. they are displayed in the drawing area according to the selection of elements.

when special conditions are fulfilled. Define the view area. Create new Delete Modify Show all Refresh By Rectangle Current view Create View To create a new scale view do the following: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Scale View The Scale Views dialog allows you to work at several different scales within a MEDUSA sheet. Move your cursor over the drawing sheet. Edit the coordinates in the entry boxes if required. Click the Current view button. To do this: Use the View options to zoom into the area you require. • Use the current window to define the view area. select the second corner point. When the rectangle has the required size. To display the Scale Views dialog. As you move your cursor a rectangle expands from this first point. The scales defined for these views become active when you move your cursor over them. The coordinates of the corner points of this view appear in the Coordinate left below and Coordinate right top entry boxes. Click the left mouse button to define one corner of the view. The scale views are defined as specific areas on the sheet and they and their scale information are saved with the sheet. To do this: Click the By rectangle button. select the Drawing areas with a special scale tool Figure 232 Scale Views Dialog from the toolbar. There are several possibilities: • Define a rectangular area on the sheet. 278 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Type a name for the view in the Name entry box.5) 4. © CAD Schroer GmbH 279 . Figure 233 Error Messages Modify the Settings for Views Please note: You cannot change the name of a scale view. Edit the coordinates in the entry boxes if required. error messages appear (see Figure 233).digit (For example 0. The view area is highlighted inside the drawing area and the properties are automatically entered into the entry boxes. If any of the fields is filled out incorrectly or if it is left empty. Display the Scale Views dialog. 3. Click Create new. 2. To change the properties of a scale view: 1. Click the Modify button to apply the modifications. You can use the buttons By rectangle and Current view to modify the coordinates. The scale view is created and added to the list. 4. • Define the view area by entering the coordinates of the required area directly into the Coordinate left below and Coordinate right top entry boxes. Select the view name from the list. If you receive any error message edit the required fields and then click the Create new button again. 2. Define the view Scale using the following format: • digit:digit (For example 1:2) or • digit/digit (For example 1/2) or • digit.MEDUSA4 Drafting Scale View The coordinates of the corner points of this view appear in the Coordinate left below and Coordinate right top entry boxes. 3. Edit the scale and coordinates as required.

The text displayed at the bottom of the outline area gives the view name and its scale. “Display Scale Views” for an example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Delete Views To delete a view. Figure 234 Display Scale Views 280 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The view is deleted from the drawing. See Figure 234. select a view from the list and press the Delete button. Display Views Click the Show all button to display the outlines of all the scale view frames that are saved with the sheet. Please note: The view frames are only visible whilst the cursor is over the dialog or if the cursor is over the appropriate part inside the drawing area. Use the Refresh button to redraw the graphics.

Scaling off from the right mouse button popup menu. 2. However consider that the dimension value can © CAD Schroer GmbH 281 . The area defining the scale remains highlighted whilst its scale is active. you are automatically given the temporary scale of the view in which you are loading the symbols. The symbol size dynamically changes to correspond with the view area scale size as you move your cursor around the sheet. Dimensioning You do not need to switch the drawing-scale to dimension parts within the scaled view. Copy / Paste When you paste copied elements into a scaled view. it will continue to keep the view scale.Scaling on from the popup menu to turn it on again. During dimensioning you may extend the dimension line with the text beyond the scale view area.MEDUSA4 Drafting Scale View Working with Scale Views Please note: The temporary scale is always displayed in brackets in the scale field! Using the Scale of a Scale View globally If you wish to use the scale of a scale view in the entire drawing. you can do so by freezing it. Dynamic Scaling If you load symbols or if you paste copied elements you are able to switch dynamic scaling. This allows you to see how the symbol size alters according to the view scale. The view scale mechanism is switched off and the view scale can now be used temporarily for the entire drawing. Once dimensioning is active. If dynamic scaling is not required select Dyn. Loading Symbols When you load symbols. If dynamic scaling is turned off select Dyn. To switch off the temporary scale and reactivate the scaled views mechanism. 1. Select Deactivate ScaleView functions from the popup menu (right mouse button). select Activate Scale View Functions from the popup menu. Move your cursor into the scale view defining the scale that you wish to use. the scale will automatically change whilst you are in a scale view. the area scale is taken automatically.

For preventing a change of the dimension value you have the following possibilities: • Extend the scale view in that way. Figure 235 Scale Views 282 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar change when modifying the dimension later on because always the scale of the area is used. otherwise it is applied also to elements which are outside the scale view area. ”Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions” on page 543. that all dimensions are completely inside the scale view. • Edit the dimension and switch on the option Text Lock from the popup menu. Do not forget to switch it off again (by clicking on Text Unlock) after finishing the dimension modification. • You can freeze the scale view by moving the mouse pointer into the scale view area and then choosing the option Deactivate scale view functions from the popup menu. This option corresponds to all dimensions. Do not forget to switch it off again (by clicking on Activate scale view functions) after finishing the dimension modification. in which the nouse pointer is located. Details on the function Text Lock are given in “Dimensioning”.

Dynamic Auxiliary Lines While drawing dynamic auxiliary lines inside scaled views. The output of the measurements is to the correct scale. the entered values are according to the area scale. © CAD Schroer GmbH 283 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Scale View Measuring The Measure function (see the sections “Measure” on page 272) also works within scale views.

Create a scale view in the top right hand area of the sheet. • Use group lines and the Area Copy tool (refer to “Status Area”. 3. You have several options to do this: • If the selection is a group or a multiple selection. 2. Figure 237 Detail 284 © CAD Schroer GmbH . with the name detail x and the scale 1:1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Example: Detailing with Scale Views To detail the view below: Figure 236 Detailing with Scale Views 1. Select the Scale View tool from the toolbar. either copy the section using copy and paste or unload it as a symbol . Load the required detail graphics into this area. ”Groups” on page 334). The section is attached to the crosshair and can be inserted at the correct position.

Now it can be dimensioned without changing the temporary scale.MEDUSA4 Drafting Scale View Figure 238 Insert Detail into Scale View When inserting the detail into the scale view area. Figure 239 Detailed Scale View © CAD Schroer GmbH 285 . the scale is changed accordingly.

2. In order to move or delete a point choose one of the right tools. This section describes how you use the Line Navigation toolbar. Figure 240 Line Navigation Toolbar First point Last point Reverse in line direction of line in line Delete point Previous point in line Next point Move point in line 3. If the Line Navigation tool is not visible inside the toolbar: 1. 2. This is called line navigation. The popup menu for selecting tools which are displayed inside the tool bar are given. To use the Line Navigation tool: 1. This takes you to the specified point in the line and makes this point the current point. If you draw a new line or if you edit a line the Line Navigation buttons are enabled. Click left on the Line Navigation tool. The Line Navigation tool is available inside the toolbar by default. 286 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The popup menu closes and the Line Navigation tool is displayed inside the toolbar. Navigate around the line or reverse the line direction by clicking on the Line Navigation buttons given in Figure 240. Move the cursor upon the toolbar and click right. If no line is created or edited currently the buttons of the Line Navigation tool are disabled. Move the cursor to the line you want to work on and double left click. Please note: When the line edit icon is displayed in the status area.MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Line Navigation Toolbar While editing lines you navigate around the points in the line in order to change points or to find out its direction. you also can move the cursor to a point in the selected line and click middle (or press the Shift key and click left). This selects the line and puts it into edit mode.

The Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar provides most frequently used functions on trees and it is an excerpt of the Tree Navigation Toolbar. Goto Sheet Level.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tree Navigation Toolbar Tree Navigation Toolbar Two kinds of tree navigation are available inside the toolbar. ”Groups” on page 334. Next and Last element or group. Forward and Backward inside the hierarchy of a group. Previous. © CAD Schroer GmbH 287 . Figure 241 Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar Figure 242 Tree Navigation Toolbar Create Named Groups Level Navigation Hierarchy Navigation The following list gives all parameter of the Tree Navigation Toolbar: Create Named Groups provides the tools for creating named groups. For example. Hierarchy Navigation These buttons are used for navigating through the hierarchy of groups. if the last element or group is just selected inside the current level the Next button is disabled. If one of the buttons cannot be chosen it is disabled. For details on groups see “Status Area”. The following tools are available: Figure 243 Create Named Group Toolset Creates a Named Group containing the selected geometry Creates a Named Group Creates a Named Level 2 Group Creates a Named Level 1 Group Level Navigation These buttons are used for navigating through the elements and groups which are available on the same level and select them. From left to right you can navigate Up one Level. Down one Level. It is the Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar and the Tree Navigation Toolbar. From left to right the buttons navigate to the First.

Recreate. Show only selected elements in tree the tree display is reduced to the currently selected elements. This is. 288 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar Tree Table Toolbar The Tree Table Toolbar provides cut and paste inside the tree viewer and refreshing the display of the tree viewer. After pasting this button is disabled and you have to Cut from Tree again for enabling Paste into Tree. rebuild and reselect the whole tree redraws the tree display. Figure 244 Tree Table Toolbar From left to right the following tools are available inside the Tree Table Toolbar: Cut from Tree removes selected elements or groups from the tree and stores them into the buffer. Paste into Tree pastes the previously cut elements into the tree at the current selected position. useful for putting elements from different groups into one group. for example. ”Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336 and “Interacting with the Tree Viewer” on page 341. For details on the tree viewer see “Status Area”.

”Power Selection Tool” on page 106. Select Once avoids deselecting currently selected elements whilst dragging a selection rectangle. Select Once is used while adding selections using the Shift key. Sets the selection to alternate color displays all selected elements in alternative color. Figure 245 Selection Toolbar From left to right the following tools are available inside the Tree Table Toolbar: Select elements by type. Deselect Once is used while adding selections using the Shift key. After selecting this function all elements are deselected. Deselect Once avoids selecting currently deselected elements whilst dragging a selection rectangle. For not selected elements the alternative color is light grey. Deselect All deselects any selected element in the sheet. for selected it is violet. class and layer opens the Power Selection dialog. © CAD Schroer GmbH 289 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Selection Toolbar Selection Toolbar The Selection Toolbar provides frequently used tools for selecting elements. Any elements that are already deselected remain deselected while dragging over them again. Resets alternate color on the sheet sets the display of all elements on the sheet back on its standard colors. Any elements that are already selected remain selected while dragging over them again. For details see “Select”.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Toolbar 290 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

. 301 • Changing Styles and Style Properties.................................................... 304 • Style Definitions and their Effect on an Element ...... 296 • Using the Dashboard for Creating New Elements ...................... 310 © CAD Schroer GmbH 291 ....................................................... 295 • Using the Dashboard to Modify Properties ................................................................................................ 297 • Sub-Dashboard........ 305 • Style Tree.............................................MEDUSA4 Drafting DASHBOARD This section describes the dashboard and using styles: • Dashboard Overview .................................................... 306 • User-Defined Dashboard .................................................................... 293 • Using the Dashboard to Display Properties ...................................................... 292 • The Components of the Dashboard....................... 298 • Introduction to Styles.............

For example lines have style.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Dashboard Overview The Dashboard. When you select an element or a collection of elements. magnification. for • displaying property values for selected elements. Classes Each element class has its own particular set of basic properties. or when you start creating an element MEDUSA displays the appropriate dashboard. color. color. type. for example. thickness and a set of line segments. layer. which is below the menu bar. layer. whereas prims have style. thickness. type. There is a dashboard associated with each class to provide a powerful and easy to use interface to inquire and modify these properties. contains information about the properties of the MEDUSA geometry element that you are creating or modifying. You can use the dashboard for a number of different purposes. • setting property values for selected elements and • setting property values for the element you are creating. Figure 246 Line Dashboard properties Figure 247 style Text Dashboard layer color type thickness Figure 248 Prim Dashboard Figure 249 Dimension Dashboard Figure 250 Group Dashboard Figure 251 Crosshatching Dashboard 292 © CAD Schroer GmbH . rotation and picture.

Generic Buttons There are two generic buttons to the far left side of the dashboard. “Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions” on page 529 Default angular dimension format For details see ”Dimensioning”. “Creating Text” on page 563 Creates prims of specified type and properties For details see ”Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims)”. They provide the creation tools and the property dialogs. It creates an item of the appropriate class with the properties currently displayed on the dashboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting The Components of the Dashboard The Components of the Dashboard The dashboard consists of a row of input fields. The following tools are available in the pulldown menu: Creates lines of specified type and properties For details see ”Lines”. “Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions” on page 529 Dimensions the length of the arc For details see ”Dimensioning”. “Creating Basic Linear Dimensions” on page 512 Dimensions the radius of a circle For details see ”Dimensioning”. “Creating a Line” on page 353 Creates text of specified type and properties For details see ”Text”. This button is unique because it is always displayed and it provides a pulldown menu with which you can choose any of the available dashboards. “Creating Angular Dimensions” on page 525 © CAD Schroer GmbH 293 . The items in this row consist of the generic buttons and properties. “Adding Prims to a Sheet” on page 619 Default linear dimension format For details see ”Dimensioning”. Figure 252 Dashboard: Generic Buttons The creation button is the first button on the dashboard. pulldown menus and buttons which reflect the properties of the current element or elements.

subscript Height Justification single line button multi line button counter In case of texts. italic. “Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools” on page 633 Creates a table For details see ”Tables”. “Creating and Ending Groups” on page 338 The property button ment or elements. As an example. • Layer • Type • • • • • • • Color bold. “Creating Notes” on page 538 Crosshatches the selected areas For details see ”Area Fills”. “Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools” on page 633 Stipples the selected areas For details see ”Area Fills”. Most of the properties displayed inside the dashboard are also available inside the properties dialog available with the property button . below the dashboard you find the edit field for text (with an associated button that brings up a menu of special characters). “Creating a New Table” on page 593 Creates a named group For details see ”Status Area”. superscript. for text these fields are. section ”Administration”. 294 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Creates notes with horizontal orientation For details see ”Dimensioning”. underlined. “Creating and Editing MEDUSA Styles”). displays a dialog containing the full set of properties of the current ele- Properties Properties are fields in the dashboard which display the properties which are unique to the current class. from left to right: • Style (This property is explained in more detail in the Administration Guide.

if the current selection consists of a line and a text the dashboard displays only the Style. If several values of a property are found. Single Element Selection If a single element is selected MEDUSA displays the class of the current element and the appropriate dashboard. Thus. then that value will be displayed in the associated field on the dashboard. © CAD Schroer GmbH 295 . as for example do color and thickness. MEDUSA provides an empty option to display. Multiple Element Selection If two or more elements are selected there are two possible ways that MEDUSA displays the dashboard: • If all selected elements are of the same class. • If all selected elements are not of the same class. Layer and Color fields either with values if they are common to both elements or empty if not. MEDUSA displays the appropriate dashboard for this class and scans the properties of all the elements. If all elements share the same value for a particular property. then the associated dashboard field will be empty. If this dashboard field contains a pulldown menu. MEDUSA filters out the set of properties (see “Properties” on page 294) that all the elements share and displays the associated fields.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Dashboard to Display Properties Using the Dashboard to Display Properties The dashboard display depends on the selection of elements.

there is no way to unset a property. Then the values are applied on the current element. For example. but any value change made in properties dialog will not be seen in the dashboard until the Apply or OK is pressed. tolerance values for dimensions are confirmed either by pressing the Return or Tab key on your keyboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Using the Dashboard to Modify Properties If you enter or modify a value in a dashboard field it is immediately applied to all selected elements except it is a value. Modifying elements is described in more detail later in this guide (see “Changing Styles and Style Properties” on page 304). 296 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Please note: Any value changed in the dashboard will be seen in the properties dialog immediately. which has to be confirmed to use it. Therefore. Please note: If you select a value on a field which was previously displaying the empty option. that option is removed from the dashboard. The empty option will be reinstated if you make another selection that has a non-uniform set of values for that particular property.

Create the new element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Dashboard for Creating New Elements Using the Dashboard for Creating New Elements With the dashboard you can either create elements with new properties or you can create elements using properties of existing elements. 3. Styles are explained in more detail in the following section. 1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 297 . The line is created with the set properties. 4. Click the Create new icon (the far-left button in dashboard) to start the appropriate creation tool. Select the element whose properties you want to clone. Create the line by probing on the sheet. Creating a New Element with New Properties You can create a new element with any combination of properties by first setting the properties in the dashboard to the desired values and then call a Create button from the dashboard. 3. The dashboard changes to reflect the properties of that element. The new element is created with same property values as that one you originally selected. For now we choose a style which allows us to modify all fields. 2. For example. Choose Free style from the Style pulldown list. Select the Create Line icon from the dashboard. 2. Set Thickness and Color. Creating a New Element with Properties of an Existing Element The dashboard allows you to create a new element with the same properties as an element that already exists on the sheet. to create a line: 1.

dimensions and balloon texts. no other leaders of the selected dimension will be affected. then the properties for that leader line will be shown in the sub-dashboard. for example by a leader line. if defined) Please note: The following sections deal with dimensions and balloon texts only because there we have some specials in selecting sub-elements. Such groups are 2D Features. Subdashboards are available for: • 2D features like box and circle which have sub-dashboards for: • outline • center line • Dimensions which have sub-dashboards for: • Leader line • Dimension line • Dimension text • Balloon texts which have sub-dashboards for: • Quantity text • Item_number text • Part_number text • Issue text • Lines (circle and leader. Selection The entries displayed inside the sub-dashboard depend on the selection. In the figure below the left leader line was selected and its color was changed. If you change anything inside the sub-dashboard. In some cases sub-elements of the groups need to be changed and this can be done with the sub-dashboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Sub-Dashboard In MEDUSA there are elements which consist of several sub-elements and which are grouped. Single Selection If you select a dimension by a single mouse click. Therefore changes inside the sub-dashboard affect the sub-element(s) according to the kind of selection. MEDUSA detects automatically if a sub-dashboard is available for a selected element. 298 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

In the figure below the selected issue texts of both balloon texts can be changed at once. But then you can select the sub-elements from the pulldown list of the sub-dashboard. Figure 254 Example Sub-Dashboard: All Leader Lines Changed Sweep Select . also if you selected only one element.Single or Multiple Elements If you select elements by drawing a selection frame (sweep select). you can pick more issue texts from other balloons using the middle mouse button. the properties of the sub-dashboard will apply to all the leaders of the selected dimensions.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sub-Dashboard Figure 253 Example Sub-Dashboard: Single Leader Line Changed From Pulldown List (first entry on sub-dashboard) If you select leaders from the pulldown list. for example. the sub-dashboard is left blank. the issue text of one balloon using the left mouse button. In the figure below you can see that all leader lines are changed in its color. © CAD Schroer GmbH 299 . Figure 255 Example Sub-Dashboard: Empty Multiple Select of Single Sub-Elements (ONLY for balloon texts) If you pick.

which can be finished with the popup menu. The text has the original value again and the dimension is in edit mode. 300 © CAD Schroer GmbH . you cannot select more than one element from each dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Figure 256 Example Sub-Dashboard: Picked Several Issue Texts Please note: For dimensions. double click on the dimension and place the dimension new by probing on the sheet. choosing Exit Tool. Summary The sub-dashboard can display properties for: • a single selected sub-element from a group • all sub-elements of the type from the group • single selected sub-elements of the same type from multiple groups • all sub-elements of the type from multiple groups Restore Dimensions If you changed dimension texts and you want to get back the original text.

At a higher level the style can be used to record what the element on the sheet is supposed to represent. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to Styles Introduction to Styles All MEDUSA sheet elements have an associated Style. For example construction lines are thin dashed lines and they are created on their own particular construction line layer. so that different styles can have a distinctive graphical appearance. if the sheet is an electrical schematic drawing. the following styles: • center-line • solid thin For text there are for example: • circle • plain large Please note: Only if you have Administrator privileges in your MEDUSA session you can define new styles or edit existing styles. These properties are stored in a style named Construction. for lines there are. See the Administration Guide. amongst others. Purpose The purpose of the style is to encapsulate a set of properties. For example. If you have no Administrator privileges ask your System Administrator for defining the styles you need. the Low Voltage style could be defined to produce thin green lines while the High Voltage style could be defined to produce medium red lines. “Creating and Editing MEDUSA Styles” for explanations on adding new styles or modify existing styles. The style for an element is displayed on the left most field in the dashboard as well as on associated Properties dialogs. chapter ”Administration”. © CAD Schroer GmbH 301 . For example. MEDUSA comes with a set of generic pre-defined styles for the different types of elements. Style Properties Each style has a set of properties associated with it. then you might want to use line styles with the names Low Voltage and High Voltage.

Each of these tool buttons is associated with a particular style. Why use Styles? You can define all of your elements as free style. There are several reasons why it is recommended to use styles in MEDUSA: • Capturing Design Intent Associating the correct style with an element is a way of incorporating design intent in your drawing. Special Styles Free Style The Free style has all fields unlocked and so it gives you maximum flexibility for modification.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Pre-defined Tool Buttons MEDUSA comes pre-configured with a set of tools for creating elements with varying properties. Elements imported from old MEDUSA versions or external applications often have this style because the attributes of these elements are unlikely to exactly match any of the MEDUSA built-in styles. However. Choose the style you want to use from the Style pulldown list box. Default Style Every class of element has a default style associated with it. This style is built into MEDUSA and therefore it cannot be modified or deleted. For example. But with this the powerful functions offered by MEDUSA would not be utilized. it first sets the dashboard to the associated style and then allows you to start creating your new element on the sheet. and then set properties of each element individually as you require. 2. Select the appropriate type of creation tool from the dashboard. You can achieve this if you create a style for that element. When a tool is called. You can achieve an equivalent result by: 1. Your System Administrator can modify this style if desired. for example. if a line has a style High Voltage it provides more information to the end-user of the drawing than the style name Free. Similarly if there are different conventions within different subsections of your 302 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is the style that is displayed initially by the dashboard when MEDUSA is started first. • Improving Consistency and Maintaining Drawing Standards Industry or Company standards may require that certain elements on a drawing should be drawn in a certain manner. MEDUSA will not permit you to delete this style.

“Merge User Styles” on page 308).MEDUSA4 Drafting Introduction to Styles company you can also support this by asking your System Administrator to produce appropriate styles in order to distribute them to these subsections. if you define some new styles (or modify some of the existing definitions). you can regenerate it explicitly by using the styles command in MEDconfig. MEDUSA will do this automatically when it is next started. either in this session of MEDUSA. If any style files in the standard products or your user products are altered then this merged style file will be regenerated. MEDUSA will also use any styles which have been defined in user-defined products in the area <user-product>/m2d/styles. Style Files When MEDUSA starts up. you can achieve this by redefining the appropriate style definition. as well as any styles that you have defined for your personal use. Any elements that are subsequently created with this style will have the new set of attributes. If you are the Administrator. merged XML style file which represents all the styles defined in all the standard products together with any defined in user-defined products. © CAD Schroer GmbH 303 . MEDUSA provides a special tool which streamlines this process (for details see ”Style Tree”.xml.This file is stored in your project area as <userproj>/m2d/bin/styles. then they are stored in the project as individual XML files in <userproj>/user/<name>/styles. then you may want to define or modify some styles and make these new definitions available to all your MEDUSA users in your office or company. or alternatively. • Finally. it reads in all styles defined in the standard products. MEDUSA finds style definitions in several places. • Ability to Switch Drawing Representation If you need to switch the representation of certain elements on your drawing. MEDUSA creates a single. as well as any that your administrator may have defined and packaged in a user-project.: • Firstly the products come supplied with pre-defined styles which are stored in a directory <product>/m2d/styles. Note that for speed purposes. or any previous ones. • Secondly.

You can change the unlocked property attributes of an element while retaining the style. and you can • modify the properties of the element and leave the style the same. Depending on how the styles are set. 2. Select the Create New Line button on the dashboard. some property attributes are locked and others are unlocked. Set the style to solid thin. You can only change an attribute which is either not used in the current style or which is set as unlocked for editing. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Changing Styles and Style Properties You can modify the visual appearance of an existing element. The dashboard display changes to the new style and all the properties associated with it. The dashboard displays line properties. The style in the dashboard reflects the style of the selected element. If the list does not provide the style you want to use. Changing Element Styles For changing an element style: 1. Changing Element Property Attributes Your System Administrator can define whether users can alter different style property attributes. choose the entry More for opening the Style Tree window. The Create New Line button background color changes to yellow to reflect the fact that the attributes are different from those defined in the current style. For details see “Style Tree” on page 306. 3. 2. This is explained in more detail in section “Style Definitions and their Effect on an Element” on page 305. if a line is selected do the following for changing line properties: 1. First create some text on the sheet using the Plain small style and make sure it is selected. You can: • change the style of the element (which will then have the effect of changing all the properties of the element to match those of the style). 304 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The selected element has this new style now. Change the color. Choose a different style from the pulldown list box. Then open the popup menu and select Use Style.

The following sections describe how the properties of an element are affected when its style is changed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 305 . As in the previous example for the solid thin line the element properties are set to this locked value and in addition the associated fields in the dashboard and Properties dialog are disabled (greyed-out). • The property has a value in the style and it is locked. Color. MEDUSA supports this by allowing the System Administrator to define certain properties in the style to be locked to a particular value. In this example we assume that the System Administrator has created the style thick only that only contain thickness values. Layer.MEDUSA4 Drafting Style Definitions and their Effect on an Element Style Definitions and their Effect on an Element The properties of an element can be divided into the following groups related to a style: • The property is not used in the style • The property has a value in the style but it is left unlocked. Locked and Unlocked Properties Your MEDUSA Administrator may want to set a policy for certain styles to prevent the previous case occurring. Unused Properties All properties which are not used in the new style remain unchanged. Type) remain at their former values and the values become active indicating that they can be modified. Thus when changing the style between the predefined line styles solid thick and thick only the dashboard changes from: to: The unused fields (that is.

or by the button Sheet structure tree in the bottom of the MEDUSA window. texts. The following figure gives an example: Figure 257 Style Tree standard line styles special line styles styles for prims. crosshatching. dimensions and others 306 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Style Tree Each style available in MEDUSA is given in the Style Tree window which is available by the entry More in the pulldown list of styles inside the dashboard.

standard and decor styles (if available). The following sections explain how to use the Style Tree window. If you selected elements of different types like lines and texts Use Style is not active.xml. Popup Menu The Style Tree window provides a popup menu for adjusting the tree and the style pulldown list to your needs.MEDUSA4 Drafting Style Tree The Style Tree is structured by the classes of elements. Use Style applies the style on the selected elements. Remove Style from Favourites for removing a style from My Favourites (see “Remove Styles from My Favourites” on page 308). For details see “Merge User Styles” on page 308. The entry My Favourites contains the styles displayed inside the style pulldown list as available inside the dashboard and the property dialogs. Merge User Styles combines style files from the user project and user product directories. If you move the cursor over the Style Tree and click right the following popup menu opens: Figure 258 Style Tree Popup Menu The popup menu provides the following entries: Add Style to Favourites for adding the selected style to the group My Favourites (see “Add Styles to My Favourites” on page 308). © CAD Schroer GmbH 307 . After applying the style to the selected elements redraw the graphics to see the result. Save Style Tree saves the style tree into the current user project directory <user project>\user\<name>\styletree. which is the group My Favourites. Each class contains the styles for frequently used styles.

If you are the Administrator. Remove Styles from My Favourites For removing a style from My Favourites: 1. MEDUSA stores all these new definitions as separate XML files in your personal area in <userproj>/user/<name>/styles. Now you have two possibilities: a. Move the cursor on My Favourites and release the mouse button. Choose Remove Style from Favourites from the popup menu. The selected style is removed immediately from the favorites of the current style class and it is placed back either in the standard or special (if available) style group. Merge User Styles Please note: The option Merge User Styles is only available if you have Administrator rights. Select the style inside the tree. Define any new styles. using the Style Dialog (as explained in section “Changing Styles and Style Properties” on page 304). 2. Select the style inside My Favourites. b. they would not see your new style definitions. Please note: If drag and drop is used to add a style to a folder other than My Favourites. At this point. 2. or modify existing ones. The option Merge User Styles of the style tree popup menu allows to merge several style files into a single file in a new product directory. Choose Add Style to Favourites from the popup menu. 308 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard Add Styles to My Favourites For adding a style to My Favourites: 1. The following steps show you how to merge style files: 1. then it is removed from the original folder. then you may want to define or modify some styles and make these new definitions available to all your MEDUSA users in your office or company. if another user used MEDUSA from the same project. The selected style is added immediately to the favorites of the current style class.

After reconfiguring the project your new styles will be available for anyone with the next start of MEDUSA from that project. You do this as follows: 2. These files are not used now. A dialog appears entitled Merge user style files: Figure 259 Dialog Merge User Styles 5. If you have other MEDUSA projects which also want to share these same style definitions. 3. 7. Choose Merge User Styles from the popup menu. 4. © CAD Schroer GmbH 309 . Click OK. Select a node in the Style Tree (details on nodes are given in ”Status Area”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Style Tree When you are happy with these new definitions and if you want to provide them to your coworkers. Specify the name of your user Product directory. This is simply a directory name. 6. you can create a new user-product to store them. so you can delete them once you are happy that your new styles work as required. then you just need to add your new product into the product list and reconfigure it. MEDUSA creates a styles file in the following area: <Product directory>/m2d/styles/styles. In addition it also moves the definitions that were in your personal area (<userproj>/ user/<name>/styles) into the new area (<Product directory>/m2d/styles). “Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336). (which may be empty if you have not previously created a user-product). Consider that the directory has to exist. You now need to add this new product into your project and reconfigure the project. Open the Style Tree.xml This single file will contain all the new style definitions and modifications that you created in step 1.

the producer of the group as MEILI. the dashboard shown in Figure 261 is displayed. With this you can easily select and modify groups with same elements. If you select any group which matches these criteria. whose properties exactly comply with the properties of this hook. are associated to one group. For the hook an own dashboard has been defined. 260 Example of a Group for which a Dashboard is Created The example shows a weld-on hook. Figure 261 User Defined Dashboard The name of the group is specified as weld_on_hook. Please note: Dashboards can only be created by users with access to Admin Mode. associated with particular properties. 310 © CAD Schroer GmbH . All elements. the dashboard shows the information as defined for the appropriate user-defined dashboard.The hook has three user attributes which are displayed in the dashboard too.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dashboard User-Defined Dashboard Besides the usual dashboards provided in MEDUSA it can make sense to create user-defined dashboards for groups in order to specify certain selection criteria information which shall be displayed in the dashboard. If you select a group in your sheet. For details see the Administration Guide. which is shown in the figure below. An example of an appropriate use is shown in the following: Abb. such as lines and texts.

........................... 315 • Free Probe .. 316 • Grid Probe......................................... • Using Probe Specifiers............................ 326 • Datum of Selected Element Probe Specifiers ................................................................................................................. 323 • Tangent Probe............................................................................................................................................ 322 • Mid Segment Probe ............ 324 • Last Probe............................................ 321 • Center Probe...............................MEDUSA4 Drafting PROBE SPECIFIERS This chapter describes how to use probe specifiers to create new points or locate existing points.............................................................................................................. 312 • Auto Probe ..................................................................................... 319 • Segment Probe ............ 320 • Perpendicular Probe .............. 325 • Offset from Last Probe............ 327 • Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates ................ 317 • Intersection Probe.................................. 318 • Near Probe..................................................... 329 © CAD Schroer GmbH 311 ............................................................................................................................................................................................

They enable you to position points on the sheet at specific locations. The selected probe specifier becomes active. Move the cursor into the drawing area to use the probe specifier. Figure 262 Probe Specifiers Auto Free (snaps to grid if grid is active) Grid (snaps to grid) Intersection Near (nearest existing point) Segment Perpendicular Center (of nearest arc) Mid Segment Tangent Last (most recent) Offset from last (most recent) Datum Offset from datum Choosing a Probe Specifier When starting MEDUSA the first time usually the probe specifier Auto probe is used by default. For choosing another probe specifier: 1. 312 © CAD Schroer GmbH . They are described in detail in this chapter. The different probe specifiers are shown below. it creates a Free probe instead (see “Free Probe” on page 316). 2. Please note: If MEDUSA cannot create a point using the chosen probe specifier. Point to the probe specifier that you require and click left. They do this by instructing MEDUSA to search for a specific type of geometry.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Using Probe Specifiers The probe specifiers are located along the right edge of the tooltrays. for example at the intersection of two line segments.

By default. 2. Setting the Default Probe Specifier The Auto probe specifier (described in “Auto Probe” on page 315) is set as default when you start up MEDUSA. If chosen it turns to Auto: Default On.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using Probe Specifiers Please note: After probing into the drawing area the default probe specifier is active again. 2. choose Defaults from the Options menu. Set as Default sets the selected probe specifier as default for the rest of the session. To change the default: 1. Hit Radius When you use any of the probe specifiers (except for Free probe and Auto probe). a Free probe is created. © CAD Schroer GmbH 313 . the hit radius is 2 mm but you can change this as given in “Querying and Changing the Current Hit Radius” on page 313. Choose the Set as Default item from the popup menu (while the pointer is still positioned over the probe specifier). you have to position the cursor within a specified radius of the required geometry in order that MEDUSA finds that geometry. If you move the cursor above the probe specifier area the following popup is available: Figure 263 Popup Probe Specifier The popup provides the following entries: Auto Near On exchanges the entries Intersection and Near for automatic probing (see “Auto Probe” on page 315). Querying and Changing the Current Hit Radius 1. This radius is known as the hit radius. If the cursor is not within the specified radius when a probe is selected. Choose the tab Radii / Arc Fac. The chosen probe specifier becomes the new default and it is shown pressed in. Click left on the probe specifier that you want to make the default. To find out the current hit radius.

The Radii / Arc Fac tab provides following entries: Hit Radius specifies the radius which is required in order that MEDUSA finds a geometry.0 Coincidence Radius specifies that separate points are considered for coincidence unless they are separated by a distance greater than the coincidence radius. Intersection. Default: 2. Default: 2.5 Intersection Radius specifies the radius for finding an intersection point using an Auto probe specifier. 314 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Default: 2.5 Please note: The values have to be specified as screen units (and not sheet units).5 Segment Radius Radius for finding a segment point using an Auto probe specifier. Segment or Tangent probe specifiers.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Figure 264 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Fac 3. Perpendicular. Default: 0. Hit Radius is not valid for Free and Auto probe specifiers. Default: 2.0 Maximum Radius specifies the maximum radius of a point using Near. You can change the current hit radius by typing in a new value in the Hit Radius field and choose Apply. Default: 50.00 Near Point Radius specifies the radius for finding the nearest point using an Auto probe specifier.

dependent on which type of geometry is closest to the cursor. the Auto probe specifier is set as the default. Therefore. When you start up MEDUSA. you do not have to choose the Auto probe specifier. The order in which the probe is attempted is: • Intersection • Perpendicular • Tangent • Near • Segment • Free If none of the first five listed probe types can be used then a Free probe is selected. When you choose the Auto probe specifier MEDUSA searches to see which type of probe can be used. However.MEDUSA4 Drafting Auto Probe Auto Probe The Auto probe specifier creates a point by automatically selecting one of the six probes. you should note that it is most likely to produce the wrong result when the cursor is in an area of dense lines. You can position the cursor where you want the point to be placed and click left. Zooming is described in “View” on page 117. © CAD Schroer GmbH 315 . You can ensure that the correct type of probe is used by zooming into the area. The Auto probe specifier usually supplies the probe specifier you need.

A Free probe specifier creates a point at the current cursor position unless the grid is active. When the grid is active MEDUSA creates a point at the closest grid intersection. The coordinates of the point are then taken as the coordinates of the grid line intersection. See “Introduction to Grids” on page 136 for further information on creating free points at grid intersections. 316 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Free Probe The Free probe specifier allows you to create a point at any location on the sheet independent of any previously created point.

See “Activating and Deactivating a Grid” on page 145 for information on active and inactive grids. © CAD Schroer GmbH 317 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Grid Probe Grid Probe The Grid probe specifier lets you create a point that snaps to the nearest grid intersection even if the grid is inactive.

318 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 4. 3. allows you to create a point at the intersection of two existing This example shows how to create a line through points where two overlapping boxes intersect. Select the Intersection probe specifier . Move the pointer to the opposite corner and click left. Position the cursor near the intersection where you want to have the first point of the line and click left. 1. Figure 266 Using the Intersection Probe Specifier: 2 A point is created at the second position that you probe and a line is drawn between the two intersections. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Intersection Probe The Intersection probe specifier line segments. Figure 265 Using the Intersection Probe Specifier: 1 A point is created at the intersection nearest to the probed position. Select the Intersection probe specifier again.

This means that a Near probe specifier allows you to position a point at exactly the same coordinates as a point in an existing line or at the datum point of a text element or prim. © CAD Schroer GmbH 319 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Near Probe Near Probe The Near probe specifier allows you to create a new point at the nearest existing point.

Choose the Segment probe specifier. 1. Figure 267 Using the Segment Probe Specifier 320 © CAD Schroer GmbH . A point is created on the line as shown below.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Segment Probe The Segment probe specifier allows you to create a point on an existing line so that the new point lies as close to the cursor as possible. 2. Position the cursor close to the line and click left.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 321 . Using an appropriate probe specifier. Figure 269 Using the Perpendicular Probe Specifier: 2 A line is created perpendicular to the line that you probe in step 3. The following example shows you how to use the Perpendicular probe specifier: 1. 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Perpendicular Probe Perpendicular Probe The Perpendicular probe specifier allows you to create a perpendicular line between the current point and the line nearest the cursor. Move the cursor close to the position where you want the perpendicular line to end and click left. In this example use an Auto or Segment probe specifier: Figure 268 Using the Perpendicular Probe Specifier: 1 2. Choose the Perpendicular probe specifier. If you are creating the first point in a line or if you place a text or prim element and you use the Perpendicular probe specifier then MEDUSA uses the last point you probed on the sheet instead of the current point. create a point where you want the perpendicular line to start.

the probe locates the defined center point. see Figure 270. 3. If the perpendiculars do not intersect inside the arc no position is located. Click left. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Center Probe The Center probe specifier locates the center point of the nearest curved line segment. For other types of arcs a center point is inferred as the intersection of the two perpendiculars from the tangents at the ends of the arc. The probed point is the center of the circle or arc. Figure 270 Using the Center Probe Specifier for a Fillet 322 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The following example shows you how to use a Center probe specifier: 1. In this case the Free probe specifier is taken and a message is given inside the message area. For circles or arcs. Position the cursor close to the arc or circle for which you want to find the center point. Choose the Center probe specifier.

2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 323 . The following example shows how to use a Mid Segment probe specifier: 1. Choose the Mid Segment probe specifier.MEDUSA4 Drafting Mid Segment Probe Mid Segment Probe The Mid Segment probe specifier locates the middle of the straight or curved line segment nearest to the position that you probe. Position the cursor close to the line and then click left: Figure 271 Using the Mid-segment Probe Specifier A point is created in the middle of the line segment.

324 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The following example shows you how to use a Tangent probe specifier: 1. then MEDUSA uses the last point you probed on the sheet instead of the current point. Using the appropriate probe specifier. Figure 272 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 1 Current point Existing circle 2. 3. Select the Tangent probe specifier . Move the cursor close to the circle.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Tangent Probe The Tangent probe specifier allows you to create a point on the nearest arc or circle such that the line segment joining the new point is tangential to the arc or circle. create the point where you want the tangential line to start. Figure 274 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 3 Tangent line If you are creating the first point in a line or if you place a text or prim element and if you use a Tangent probe specifier. then click left. In the illustration shown below use the Free probe. Figure 273 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 2 Probe here A new line is drawn between the original current point and the circle which is a tangent at the circle.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Last Probe Last Probe The Last probe specifier locates the most recent current point. This enables you to create a number of lines that pass through the same point without having to define that point for each line. End it by choosing New Line from the popup menu. The current point marker is no longer displayed indicating that there is no current point. Create a line. 3. . 1. 2. Select the Horizontal Construction Lines tool . Select the Last probe specifier MEDUSA creates the construction line using the most recent current point as the datum. © CAD Schroer GmbH 325 . The following procedure demonstrates how to use the Last probe specifier to create a construction line through the most recent current point.

4.and y-direction from the most recent current point as the datum. The following figure shows an appropriate result. Please note: This probe specifier is only enabled. Create a line. Use 10 for both values and press Return. The following procedure demonstrates how to use the Offset from Last probe specifier to create a construction line 10 units away from the most recent current point. End it by choosing New Line from the popup menu. if you already selected one element. Type in the offsets for x. 2.and y-coordinates.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers Offset from Last Probe The Offset from last probe specifier locates the most recent current point and you can define an offset for probing from this point. This enables you to create a number of lines that pass the same point with a certain spacing without having to define that point for each line. If you define zero for the offset in x. Select the Creates horizontal construction lines tool . Figure 275 Example for Offset from Last Probe resulting horizontal construction line automatically created point marking the offset most recent current point used for the offset 326 © CAD Schroer GmbH .and y-direction the specifier works the same way as the Last probe specifier. 3. Select the Offset from last probe specifier . The current point marker is no longer displayed indicating that there is no current point. The Edit Coords dialog opens below the dashboard. MEDUSA creates the construction line using an offset of 10 units in x. 1.

Choose the Datum probe specifier. The selected line is deselected and the new line becomes selected. text. whose datum point shall be used for the starting point of the new element 2. To do this: 1. for example a create line tool. Datum Point Definition For line elements. or prim element that it contains. Please note: These probe specifiers are only enabled. Datum Probe Specifier The Datum probe specifier allows you to use the datum point of the selected element. Select an element on the sheet. For text elements and prims.MEDUSA4 Drafting Datum of Selected Element Probe Specifiers Datum of Selected Element Probe Specifiers The datum probe specifiers allow you to create a point directly at the datum point of a selected element or close to it at a certain offset. the datum point is the single point that is used to position that element on the sheet. if you already selected one element. For groups. Select an element on the sheet. the datum point is the datum point of the first line. © CAD Schroer GmbH 327 . Select a tool. To do this: 1. for example a create line tool. Offset from Datum Probe Specifier The Offset from datum probe specifier allows you place a point at a certain offset from the datum point of the selected element. The first point of the new element is created at the datum point of the selected element. 2. the datum point is the first point in the current line. for example to place a point in a line. Choose a tool. 3. whose datum point shall be used for the starting point of the new element.

4. Use 10 for both values and press Return. The Edit Coords dialog opens below the dashboard. Figure 276 Example for Offset from Datum resulting new point datum point of the line current cursor position with attached rubber band after pressing Return and moving the cursor this line was selected before applying the offset values 328 © CAD Schroer GmbH .The following figure shows an appropriate result. Type in the offsets for x. MEDUSA creates the first point of a new line using the defined offset of 10 units in xand y-direction from the datum point of the selected line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers 3. The selected line is deselected and the new line becomes selected.and y-coordinates. Choose the Offset from datum probe specifier .

the distance along the X-axis and the distance along the Y-axis of the point from the sheet origin. “Modifying a Grid” on page 147 for details of changing and resetting the origin. Figure 278 Enter Coords Dialog 1. Figure 277 shows an example of a point created using the cartesian coordinates. 0) 50 Y 100 X To enter coordinates directly use the Enter Coords dialog below the dashboard which opens after you selected a drawing tool like Creates thin solid lines. © CAD Schroer GmbH 329 . The new point is drawn and the entries inside the Enter Coords dialog are reset to zero. the drawing function finishes. MEDUSA stores points in terms of their coordinates on the sheet. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates When you create and edit MEDUSA elements you usually use cursor probes on the sheet. By default. that is. the sheet origin is located at the bottom left corner of the sheet and is given the coordinates (0. Press the button Return or choose the check mark for confirming your entries. 0) (X=0. Y=0). Please note: If you close the Enter Coords dialog by clicking the X button at the top right corner of the dialog. 0) but it is different if the current grid specifies a different origin. Figure 277 Cartesian Coordinates New point Sheet origin (0. By default the sheet origin is at the bottom left hand corner of the sheet (0. but you can also enter coordinates directly. Enter X and Y coordinates for defining a position on the sheet. See chapter ”Grids”.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Probe Specifiers 330 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

.......................................................................................................... 340 • Interacting with the Tree Viewer.............. 347 © CAD Schroer GmbH 331 ...........................................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting STATUS AREA This chapter describes the elements of the status area including detailed explanations on groups and the structure tree.................................. 337 • Creating and Ending Groups ........... 338 • Reparent Elements ....................................................................... 332 • Groups ......................... 341 • Query and Change Sheet Properties............................................. 346 • User Attributes ................................... 334 • Displaying the Tree Viewer ............................ 336 • Dock and Undock the Tree Viewer ........... • Overview Status Area ................................................

The pulldown menu looks like that one given in the following figure: Figure 281 Pulldown Menu Active Tool Last tools Active tool Message line gives a short information about the next step you can do related to the active tool and the current status of. After opening. the toggle button is reversed . It gives you information about executed commands and errors for example. If the area is opened. the arrow turns into a Close button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Overview Status Area The status area provides some useful information and buttons in order to ease designing. A click on the button closes the message area. The following figures show the contents of the status area given from left to right: Figure 279 Status Area Left Part Active tool Figure 280 Message line Status Area Right Part Toggle output message area/window tools User attributes Cursor position Element owner Sheet structure tree Scale Sheet properties The contents of the status area are from left to right: Active tool displays the current tool. The right tool opens a message window in the bottom right corner of the drawing area. for example. By default the output message area is closed. creating a new line. If you click left on the tool button and hold the mouse button for a little while a pulldown menu opens giving a history of the last used tools. Toggle visibility of output message area/window The left tool opens the output message area above the status area. 332 © CAD Schroer GmbH . which quits the window.

Sheet properties opens the Sheet Properties dialog. For details see “Query and Change Sheet Properties” on page 346.and y-coordinate of the current cursor position inside the drawing area. but never both at the same time. Element owner gives the current level on which. for example. User attributes opens the User Attributes dialog. elements are selected. For details see “Members and Owners” on page 335. For details see “Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview Status Area Figure 282 Message Window opened via right Toggle visibility of output message area tool You can display either the message area or the message window. © CAD Schroer GmbH 333 . If no element is selected usually you are on Sheet level. are closed. the right button appears red colored with a hint on an error message . For details see “User Attributes” on page 347. For details see “Query and Change Sheet Properties” on page 346. you can read the complete error message. Cursor position gives the x. Sheet structure tree displays the tree viewer. If both. When you open the window via the right arrow. the message area or the message window. Scale displays the scale of the sheet and the temporary scale for drawing in braces.

Figure 283 A Resistor The resistor consists of: • A prim (the resistor symbol) • Some associated text 334 © CAD Schroer GmbH . suppose you are designing an electrical circuit that contains a large number of identical resistors each represented as shown in Figure 283. You can create a new group and then add geometry to it or form a group from existing elements. Adding structure to your drawing in this manner makes it much easier to edit at a later date. They are useful if you want to manipulate a number of associated elements on a sheet as if they were a single entity. Introduction to Groups Groups are a powerful feature of MEDUSA used to collect geometry together so that it can be manipulated as a single entity. gives information on the definition of groups and it explains the meaning of owner and member referring to groups. To make it easy to understand what structure is within a sheet MEDUSA provides a structure browsing tree viewer tool to display and manipulate groups. For example. What are Groups? Groups are permanent collections of elements. Geometry may be added to groups and edited or deleted from the group.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Groups This chapter introduces into groups. or • all lines and text that make up a single view of a component. Examples of groups are: • a hole with its center lines and dimension lines. Since groups can have user defined names much intelligence can be built into the drawing.

in Figure 284 the sheet-level group Sheet is the owner of the group Title Block and therefore this group is a member of the owning group Sheet. then you create the elements making up the resistor and finally you close the group.MEDUSA4 Drafting Groups To create the resistor. A group may also be a member of another group. If you delete the group all the elements making up the resistor are deleted. one-off drawings. Figure 284 Example of Group Structure The Structure Tree of the figure above is explained in detail in “Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336. The group is called the owner of the elements which are its members. you first open the group (by creating or selecting it). For example. By creating all these elements as a group you can manipulate the elements as a single entity if the circuit needs to be changed. If you move the resistor all the elements inside the group are moved with it. For details on creating groups see “Creating and Ending Groups” on page 338. Members and Owners Elements which make up a group are referred to as members of the group. However in certain applications the use of groups is essential in increasing drawing speed and efficiency. Please note: You may not need to use groups if you design simple. © CAD Schroer GmbH 335 .

336 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Therefore all new elements are created on this level. If you select a node in the tree viewer the corresponding element(s) on the sheet are selected and highlighted. The tree viewer appears to the right of the main drawing area. The current node is determined as follows: • If there is no current selection the current node is at sheet level. • If the selection is multiple the current node is taken to be the nearest common owner of all the selected elements. Figure 285 The Tree Viewer If you select an element on the sheet. There are four different kinds of node in the tree viewer: Leaf Node Summary Node Group Node Sheet Node This is a single element such as the nodes named Solid in Figure 285 This is a collection of nodes of the same class. • If there is a single element selected the current node is the group which owns this element. In the example in Figure 285 the current node is the Revision Block group and the tree viewer reflects this by highlighting the corresponding node name. the corresponding nodes in the tree viewer are selected and highlighted.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Displaying the Tree Viewer To display or hide the tree viewer. It displays the hierarchical tree structure of the current sheet. Examples for this are the nodes named 2 Lines and 5 Texts in Figure 285 This is a group of summary nodes. Therefore all new elements are created in that group. If you create a new element it is created as a child of the current node. as illustrated in Figure 285. click the Sheet structure tree button . MEDUSA uses the concept of the current node. Examples for this are the nodes named Revision Block and Title Block in Figure 285 There is one node labelled Sheet which contains all other nodes.

Undocked You can re-size and place the dialog as you like. Figure 287 The Tree Viewer.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dock and Undock the Tree Viewer Dock and Undock the Tree Viewer The tree viewer can be displayed either docked to the MEDUSA graphical user interface or undocked to it. By default. in order to keep it when docking and undocking again. During a MEDUSA session the changed size and position will be stored internally. the tree viewer is docked to the MEDUSA graphical user interface. it can be placed anywhere on the screen. Figure 286 The Tree Viewer. © CAD Schroer GmbH 337 . If the tree viewer is displayed undocked in its own dialog. If you press the button Dock in the tree viewer dialog. the tree viewer will be docked again. Docked If you press the button Undock. the tree viewer will be undocked from the graphical user interface and it is displayed inside its own dialog.

In the dashboard the properties of a group are displayed. 3. The new name appears inside the status area immediately as you type. All selected elements are in the new group now. If you have the tree viewer visible (see “Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336) then you see that a new group is added to the structure. Any elements that you now create are automatically placed in this group. In the tree viewer you can see that the elements are moved into the new group. Select the elements in the drawing which should belong to the group. Additionally there you find information about changing the name of a group. “Using the Popup Menu” on page 342). You also can use the popup menu for creating a new group (”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”. In the dashboard the properties of a group are displayed. A new group is created. Creating a Group Containing Existing Elements 1. Type a group name into the appropriate text field. 3. Ensure that nothing is selected. 2. Click the Creates a Named Group tool from the toolbar.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Creating and Ending Groups Creating an Empty Group 1. 338 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. Type the name of the new group into the text field and click OK. . Select the Creates a Named Group containing the selected geometry tool A new group is created. “Using the Popup Menu” on page 342). You also can use the popup menu for creating a new group (”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”. Additionally there you find information about changing the name of a group.

Ending Groups When you have finished creating the elements in a group. To create a nested group: 1. Select the Creates a Named Group tool A new group is created. they are created inside the new group. You also can use the popup menu for creating a new group (”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating and Ending Groups Creating a Nested Group A nested group is a group which is created inside another group. Type the name of the new group into the text field and click OK. 3. Using the tree viewer. A new group is created inside the selected group. 2. from the toolbar. button on © CAD Schroer GmbH 339 . press the Go to Sheet Level the toolbar to return to sheet level. select the name of the group which shall contain the new group. In the dashboard the properties of a group are displayed. “Using the Popup Menu” on page 342). Additionally there you find information about changing the name of a group. If you now draw elements.

You have 2 possibilities: • Reparent inside the drawing area • Reparent inside the structure tree To reparent elements inside the drawing area do the following steps (in this case we assume that you want to move elements into a new group): 1. which is located in the status area below the drawing area. Now you can delete the line drawn in step 2. Click the Sheet structure tree button . Create a new group (see ”Creating and Ending Groups”. Click the Sheet structure tree button . Move the mouse cursor over the group name in which you want to move the elements and release the mouse button. 4. 7. To select several neighbored elements use the Shift key. Inside the structure tree the selected elements respectively its group names are displayed highlighted. 3. 3. It displays the hierarchical tree structure of the current sheet. Here you can check the following steps. 5. Choose an element inside the structure tree by clicking on the appropriate entry. The new line is only needed for defining the group in which you want to move elements later on. “Creating an Empty Group” on page 338) and draw a line in this group. Open the popup menu with a right click and choose Apply. Above the selection press the left mouse button and hold it. which is located in the status area below the drawing area. 2. by reparenting these elements. The new group is displayed inside the structure tree with the new line. The previously selected elements are displayed as deselected now. Inside the drawing area select the elements which shall be reparented. The elements selected in step 3 are moved to the new group. Open the popup menu with a right click and choose Reparent. The tree viewer appears to the right of the main drawing area. The elements are moved to the chosen group and the structure tree is updated.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Reparent Elements You can move elements from sheet level or from a group into any other group. 6. 4. 340 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. Inside the drawing area select the line of the new group (see step 2) for defining the group to which you want to move the elements selected in step 3. You can see this inside the structure tree because the reparented elements are displayed highlighted. To reparent elements inside the structure tree do the following steps: 1.

• Finally the tree viewer supports drag and drop – you can reparent an element or group by selecting the corresponding node on the tree. holding down the left mouse button and dragging the element or group into another node on the tree. You can: • ”Using the Mouse Directly” • ”Using the Popup Menu” • ”Using the Tree Navigation Toolbar” • ”Using the Tree Table Toolbar” Using the Mouse Directly You can use the ‘+’ and ‘-‘ boxes to the left of the node names to expand and collapse group nodes and summary nodes. • If you select a group node MEDUSA will select the group on the sheet and expand the node in the tree viewer. Figure 288 Expanding Groups and Moving Around The Tree Structure © CAD Schroer GmbH 341 . • If you select a summary node MEDUSA will select all the elements of that class in the current group.MEDUSA4 Drafting Interacting with the Tree Viewer Interacting with the Tree Viewer MEDUSA provides a variety of ways for you to interact with the tree viewer. • If you select the sheet node no elements are selected. Selecting the sheet node is the same as using the Deselect All function. • If you select a leaf node MEDUSA selects the corresponding element(s) on the sheet.

the group is created as a nested group within the current group). Properties displays the properties dialog for the currently selected elements. Paste used to cut and paste an entry of the structure tree. Type and Name of the selected group. Refresh updates the display of the tree. “User-Defined Dashboard” on page 310. 342 © CAD Schroer GmbH . You can change the name of the group using the Properties option (see below). Selecting this item opens the Group Properties dialog for defining the name of the new group. If a group name is selected the Group properties dialog opens: Figure 290 Group Properties Dialog The Group properties dialog gives you the Style. The popup menu functions are described below: Figure 289 Tree Viewer Popup Menu New Group creates a new group as a child of the current node (that is. Cut. Layer.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Using the Popup Menu Move the mouse cursor on the tree viewer and click the right mouse button to access the tree viewer popup menu. With Create dashboard you can create a user defined dashboard. For details see ”Dashboard”.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Interacting with the Tree Viewer Using the Tree Navigation Toolbar The Tree Navigation toolbar enables you to create new groups and to navigate the sheet structure. • Select the Creates a Named Group tool to create an empty group. Moves to the child node. • Select the Creates a Named Level 2 Group tool or Creates a Named Level 1 Group tool ate an empty group on the hierarchy level 1 or 2. If the toolbar is not visible. You can move backwards and forwards through this list with the last two buttons: Moves back to the last sheet position. to cre- MEDUSA stores a list of the sheet positions as you use the navigation buttons. When you create a new group the new group node appears in the tree viewer. use the Group pulldown menu on the left of the tree navigation toolbar. Moves to the previous node at the current level. you can open it. Always moves to the sheet node. by select it from the popup menu available with the right mouse button upon the toolbar (see also chapter “Toolbar” on page 261). Moves to the last node at the current level. Moves forward after you have used the ’back’ button. © CAD Schroer GmbH 343 . • Select the Creates a Named Group containing the selected geometry tool to create a new group containing the currently selected elements. Navigating Around the Tree Viewer The arrow buttons on the toolbar are used to navigate the sheet structure. as described below: Moves to the first node at the current level. Moves to the next node at the current level. Figure 291 The Tree Navigation Toolbar Creating Groups To create a new group. Moves up one level.

“Using the Popup Menu” on page 342. These tools are described below. Please note: If you cut one element and then cut another element only the last element is available to paste. “Using the Popup Menu” on page 342. Please note: The Paste button is disabled if no geometry is cut and if you already pasted the cut geometry. Alternatively. For pasting choose the Paste tool to paste items from the paste buffer. Paste You can paste the cut elements either to its original place in the tree structure or at the selected place inside the tree. The tree stores the cut elements in a paste buffer. it is automatically displayed. Figure 292 Tree Table Toolbar Cut Use the Cut button to remove the currently selected items from the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Using the Tree Table Toolbar The tree table toolbar provides cut. If the tree table toolbar is invisible. or the group pulldown menu as described in ”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”. use the Cut option on the right mouse button popup menu available if the cursor is above the drawing area (in this case the cut elements are attached to the crosshair of the cursor). paste and change display tools. Alternatively. use the Paste option on the right mouse button popup menu available if the cursor is above the drawing area (in this case the cut elements are attached to the crosshair of the cursor). You can paste them at another position in the sheet structure by selecting a node in the tree viewer and clicking the Paste button (see below). Change Display In the toolbar you find the following tools for changing the display of the tree: • Use the Show only selected elements in tree button to reduce the display of the tree to the selected elements only. when opening the structure tree (see “Displaying the Tree Viewer” on page 336). 344 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or the group pulldown menu as described in ”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”.

“Using the Popup Menu” on page 342. This ensures that the tree accurately represents the current sheet structure. rebuild and reselect the whole tree button to update the display of the tree. “Tree Table Toolbar” on page 288. For details on the toolbar see ”Toolbar”. use the Refresh option on the right mouse button popup menu as described in ”Interacting with the Tree Viewer”. © CAD Schroer GmbH 345 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Interacting with the Tree Viewer • Use the Recreate. Alternatively.

• Sheet Units (temporary).map file). 346 © CAD Schroer GmbH . It shows your current directory and the filename. Please note: The Filename is displayed for information only and cannot be changed. • The Layer Naming Convention field indicates whether layer names on your sheet conform to the default names set up in your project (in the layers. The Sheet Properties dialog opens: Figure 293 Sheet Properties Dialog You can change the: • Sheet Scale. • Sheet Size (and maximum sheet size).MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area Query and Change Sheet Properties You can find out about the properties of the current sheet and change them by choosing Query or change the properties of the current sheet from the status area.

Figure 294 User Attributes Dialog There are several states of the button Query and edit user attributes related to the current selection of elements: • If the selected elements can get user attributes but they have not till now. the button is grey . then the button looks like that: . © CAD Schroer GmbH 347 . the button is blue .MEDUSA4 Drafting User Attributes User Attributes You can open the User Attributes Dialog by choosing Query and edit user attributes from the status area. the button is red . • If the selected elements have no user attributes but they belong to a group with user attributes. • If the selected elements cannot get user attributes. • If the selected elements have user attributes. It displays the attribute data of a selected element and you can edit these.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Status Area 348 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

........................................ 404 © CAD Schroer GmbH 349 .................................................................................................................................. 377 • Point Functions ..................................................................................................................... 354 • Popup Menu While Drawing a Line..................................................................................................................................................... 390 • Navigating a Line ..................................................................................... 387 • Edit Line Popup Menu....................................................... 353 • Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates .................................................... 357 • Offset Lines Tools ..... 367 • Line Properties............................................... 384 • Overview of Edit Line Tools..... 355 • Closed Geometry .......... 370 • Line Point Properties.....................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting LINES This chapter explains the basic concepts that you need to understand in order to effectively create and edit lines.............................. 379 • Trace a Line Tool .................. 386 • Editing a Line ....... 351 • Creating a Line........................ • Overview of Create Line Tools .. 388 • Complex Line Editing ....................................................................................................................................... 350 • Line Geometry .......

350 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or thick. which are in the Lines + Edit tooltray. when using the tool Creates belt. medium. So the information you find in this chapter reduces to general explanations on the usage of the tools and the possibilities MEDUSA offers for them. no difference in creating a thin or group line. long dash lines Group lines Center lines Construction lines Delete all group lines Trace a line Ellipses Rectangles Circles Polygons Round-ended slots Round-ended angled slots Closed Properties dialog Belt Trace round selected elements SMART Drafting Closed line tools The usage of these tools and the possibilities of using supporting functions for drawing are described in this chapter. medium. medium.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Overview of Create Line Tools Figure 295 shows the standard line tools. medium. medium. Some of the tools do that what the tool tip gives. for example. short dash lines Thin. for example. This chapter does not contain explanations on each tool because there is. or thick. For other tools we recommend to read the hints given inside the message line. or thick solid lines Thin. or thick chain lines Thin. or thick dotted lines Thin. for example. Delete all group lines. Figure 295 Standard Line Tools Thin.

The current point is the point which is affected when you change the shape of a line. the current point is deleted. Any one of the other points in the line can however be made current. Whenever you choose an edit line tool. A single line can contain up to 1000 points. as described in “Navigating a Line” on page 404. The current point is shown as an arrow. The simplest line is defined by two points. When you add a point. When you delete a point.MEDUSA4 Drafting Line Geometry Line Geometry MEDUSA uses a series of points to define a line. the current point in the line will be the point nearest to the cursor when you select the line by double clicking.The first point defines the beginning of the line and the second point defines the end of the line. when you move a point. Many line operations in MEDUSA depend on: • Which point is the current point • The line direction (the direction the points within the line are numbered) Current Point While you are creating a line. the current point is moved. Figure 296 Current Point original line point 2 point 3 (current) point 1 point 4 point 3 moved 2 3 2 point 3 deleted 2 point added 3 4 1 4 1 3 1 5 Similarly. New points are always added after the current point. the current point is always the most recent point that you create. © CAD Schroer GmbH 351 . the new point is placed in sequence after the current point.

the sequence in which you specify the points defines the direction of the line. 352 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is shown in Figure 297. Figure 297 Line Direction 1 3 1 2 4 2 3 4 3 2 1 5 Knowing the direction of a line is important for adding a new point to the line as it affects the result that you achieve. beginning with point 1. When you create a line. The current point marker indicates the direction of the lines. Line direction and navigating a line is described in “Navigating a Line” on page 404.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Line Direction A line is a sequence of points.

Create the first point in the line using one of the following methods: • Position the cursor at the first point in the line and click left. While drawing you have the following possibilities: • The popup menu provides several functions for working on the current line. The first point is created and if you move the cursor a line is drawn dynamically as you move the cursor. (You may choose a probe specifier first which is described in “Using Probe Specifiers” on page 312. The drawn line remains selected. 3. or • choose Exit Tool to leave the line selected ready for the next operation.. which looks like a rubber band. If you want to finish the line. described in section “Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates” on page 354. indicating that there is now no current point and you cannot edit the line any longer. either • choose New Line or Close and New Line from the popup menu to draw another line. The current point marker is removed from the line. 4. Create the next point in the line: • If you choose to probe the position of the point. then click the left mouse button. • You can also use the Protractor at this stage. • As you work you can use any of the edit line tools shown in “Overview of Edit Line Tools” on page 386. • If required. Figure 298 Create Solid Lines Toolset For tools creating lines see the section “Overview of Create Line Tools” on page 350. 2. For details see the section “Popup Menu While Drawing a Line” on page 355. Choose one of the Create Line tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray.) • Type coordinates in the input area using the Enter Coords dialog. © CAD Schroer GmbH 353 . A point is created at the position of the cursor and a line is drawn between the first point and the new point.. from the Utilities menu (see page “Changing Point Functions” on page 380). For example the tool Creates thick solid lines.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a Line Creating a Line This chapter gives you some more information about the drawing facilities. you change the point function of each point by choosing Point Functions. This procedure describes how to create a line in MEDUSA: 1.

0) but it is different if the current grid specifies a different origin. the sheet origin is located at the bottom left corner of the sheet and is given the coordinates (0. Figure 300 Enter Coords Dialog 1. Please note: If you close the Enter Coords dialog by clicking the X button at the top right corner of the dialog. “Modifying a Grid” on page 147 for details of changing and resetting the origin.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates When you create and edit MEDUSA elements you usually use cursor probes on the sheet. MEDUSA stores points in terms of their coordinates on the sheet. the distance along the X-axis and the distance along the Y-axis of the point from the sheet origin. By default. See ”Grids”. that is. the drawing function finishes. Enter X and Y coordinates for defining a position on the sheet. Figure 299 shows an example of a point created using the cartesian coordinates. 0) Y 50 100 X To enter coordinates directly use the Enter Coords dialog below the dashboard which opens after you selected a drawing tool like Creates thin solid lines. 2. Figure 299 Cartesian Coordinates New point Sheet origin (0. 354 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The new point is drawn and the entries inside the Enter Coords dialog are reset to zero. By default the sheet origin is at the bottom left hand corner of the sheet (0. 0) (X=0. Press the button Return or choose the check mark for confirming your entries. Y=0). but you can also enter coordinates directly.

or entering coordinates directly (for details see “Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates” on page 354). Close Line connects the current point and the starting point of the line. The current point marker is set to the previous point. Move Point is used for shifting the point defined by the current point marker to another position. © CAD Schroer GmbH 355 . The following entries are given inside the popup menu: New Line finishes the currently drawn line and sets up the function for drawing the next line. the new segment is drawn and the whole line is closed again between the current point marker (given by the arrow tick) and the start point of the line. Figure 301 Popup Menu While Drawing a Line Please note: It depends on the stage of drawing which entries inside the popup menu can be chosen. The current line is still active and you can go on drawing this line. The line is finished and the function is set up for drawing the next line. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Popup Menu While Drawing a Line Popup Menu While Drawing a Line While drawing a line the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. If you go on drawing after probing the next point of the line. If this item is chosen you can probe the new point by clicking left inside the drawing area. Close and New Line connects the current point and the starting point of the line. if the tool is active but no point is positioned only the Exit Tool is available and the other tools are deactivated. Delete Point removes the current point.

the current point marker is placed at the neighbored segment and it is reverted. Flip switches the current arc to the opposite side of the virtual center point of the arc. For details see “Line Point Properties” on page 377. Undo. Redo Undo is used for canceling the last action. For details see “Line Properties” on page 370. for example created with the tool Create a fillet of specified radius from the tooltray Lines + Edit. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Flip is only enabled if the current line segment is an arc. The button Redo is activated after undoing the first time. • adjust the coordinates of the current point inside the tab Line Point Properties. Line Point Properties opens the Line Properties dialog which. You can undo several actions. Exit Tool quits the tool. Reverse Points in line is used for changing the line direction. 356 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If this option is chosen. allows you to: • adjust the style of the current line inside the tab Line Properties.

Figure 302 Closed Geometry Toolsets Toolset for ellipses Toolset for rectangles Toolset for circles Toolset for polygons Toolset for round-ended slots Toolset for round-ended angled slots Opens the Closed Geometry Properties dialog Each toolset for closed geometries contains several tools for the appropriate geometry. First you get information on usual closed geometry and at the end the ”2D Features” are given. For the steps you have to do look at the message line displayed in the status area. The tools are shown in Figure 302. or • the Creates group lines tool from the Creation Tools tooltray. The dashboard changes showing the line style you selected. For example rectangles can be drawn by probing either opposite corners or the center and a corner.MEDUSA4 Drafting Closed Geometry Closed Geometry This section deals with closed geometry. for example the Create thin solid lines tool from the Lines + Edit tooltray or • one of the construction tools. © CAD Schroer GmbH 357 . Set a working line style by choosing either: • the create line tool representing the line type you need. Creating Closed Geometry The following procedure describes an exemplary flow for creating a closed geometry: 1. Tools The closed geometry tools enable you to draw closed geometrical shapes. for example the Creates vertical construction lines tool from the Creation Tools tooltray. The tools differ in the way of drawing.

5. For example. 358 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Probe the opposite corner. 3. For finishing drawing you can either • choose another tool for drawing. if the tool is active but no point is positioned the functions Paste and Undo are deactivated. The rectangle is drawn. Figure 304 Popup Menu While Drawing Please note: It depends on the stage of drawing which entries inside the popup menu can be chosen. or • typing the coordinates inside the X Coord / Y Coord fields (see “Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates” on page 354). Figure 303 Enter Coords Dialog 4. Probe the first corner by either • clicking left inside the drawing area.defined by opposite corners . Choose one of the closed geometry tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray. The tool is still active for further drawing. For details see “Closed Geometry Properties” on page 360. Popup Menu for Closed Geometry While drawing a closed geometry the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. or • choose the Exit Tool from the popup menu (see ”Popup Menu for Closed Geometry”). The following entries are given inside the popup menu: Closed Geometry Properties opens the dialog for defining the properties of the closed geometry. For example choose the tool Creates boxes .MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines 2.

You can undo several actions. For details see “Base Angle” on page 361. negative values apply counterclockwise angles. Positive values apply clockwise rotation angles. The following popup menu is provided: Figure 305 Popup Menu While Pasting Rotate opens a text field below the dashboard for entering the value of rotation.MEDUSA4 Drafting Closed Geometry Paste After placing the first closed geometry you can repeat placing this geometry with the same properties. Undo is used for canceling the last action. Exit Tool quits the tool. © CAD Schroer GmbH 359 . For details see “Centerline and Centerline Overlap” on page 362. scaling on for switching it on again. The entry in the popup menu turns to Switch Center Lines Off in order to be able to switch off drawing centerlines. Switch Center Lines On If you choose this entry. Figure 306 Popup Menu While Pasting. Exit Tool quits pasting. centerlines are displayed on the closed geometry that you create. Entered values are applied either by using the Return key on your keyboard or the check mark. Rotate Option Undo cancels the last pasting. Base Angle determines the angle at which closed geometry elements are drawn on the sheet. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. After choosing this option it changes to Dyn. Dyn. scaling off switches off dynamic scaling in a scale view.

See also “Activate 2D Features” on page 364.either positive or negative . Figure 307 Closed Geometry Properties Dialog to display the Closed Geometry Properties dia- The following entries are given inside the Closed Geometry Properties dialog: Base Angle determines the angle at which closed geometry elements are drawn on the sheet. Assuming a base angle of 0 degree the first button defines the end on the top of a vertical centerline and on the left of an horizontal centerline. Add center lines at time of creation is the option for creating center lines for all closed geometry tools. Start Point Function. Center lines is the header for settings related to center lines. End Point Function Each button opens the Point Functions dialog for setting the appearance how a centerline finishes. Center lines overlap determines the amount by which the centerlines extend the outline of the element.in the Base angle field. For some examples see “Base Angle” on page 361.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Closed Geometry Properties Choose the Opens closed geometry properties dialog tool log. The edit fields on the right allow you to specify a point function by its number. 360 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The second button defines the ends vice versa (bottom and right). and click OK the base angle is set for all closed geometry tools except for the tools inside the set of round-ended angled slots. If you type a new angle . Create 2D Features enables drawing of closed geometries as 2D features.

from the popup menu and enter a new angle in the Angle field.MEDUSA4 Drafting Closed Geometry OK. Figure 308 Elements Created Using Different Base Angles Base angle 0 degrees Base angle 45 degrees Base angle -30 degrees To change the base angle: • Choose Base Angle.. © CAD Schroer GmbH 361 .00000 degrees by default. then enter the new value in the Base angle field and click left on OK. If you choose this entry centerlines are displayed on the closed geometry that you create. The base angle is set to +0. Apply. Cancel. The entry in the popup menu turns to Switch Center Lines Off in order to be able to switch off drawing centerlines. For details see “Centerline and Centerline Overlap” on page 362. Base Angle The base angle determines the angle at which closed geometry elements are drawn on the sheet as shown in Figure 308. The following closed geometry elements you create with the current active tool are drawn using the defined angle. Help work as usual. Please note: The base angle cannot be set for the toolset of round-ended angled slots. to display the properties dia• Choose the Opens the closed geometry properties dialog tool log.. If you change the closed geometry tool the base angle is reset to the default value (0).

Centerline and Centerline Overlap You can choose to display centerlines on the closed geometry that you create. The centerlines indicate the horizontal and vertical axis of the geometry rotated by the amount of the base angle as shown in Figure 308. Centerlines are displayed (or not displayed) for all following closed geometry element you create with the current active tool. If you change the tool the option is set to default which is that centerlines are off. Centerlines are displayed (or not displayed) for all subsequent closed geometry elements you create. Figure 309 Displaying Centerlines on Slots Slot created by probing end points Slot created by probing center point and an end point You can specify whether centerlines are displayed by the following methods: • Choose Switch Centerlines On/Off from the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines For all subsequent closed geometry elements you create. You can change this only inside the Closed Geometry Properties dialog by switching off the option Add centerlines at time of creation. then click the Add centerlines at time of creation button and click left on OK. “Elements Created Using Different Base Angles” on page 361. You can change this only inside the properties dialog by defining a new Base angle. 362 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the defined angle is used. the centerlines also pass through the center of the round-slot ends as shown in Figure 309. For the slot tools. • Choose the Opens the closed geometry properties dialog tool to display the Closed Geometry Properties dialog.

which are created at three Elements Creating Polygons The toolset for creating polygons provides the tool Creates polygons . If you want to draw a pentagon. to create a circle tangentially at three elements. e. Figure 310 Toolset for Creating Circles This tool enables you. The figure below shows an example for each of them. rectangles or circles.defined by a circumscribed circle. for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Closed Geometry Examples Creating Circle touching three Elements In the toolset for creating circles you find. Figure 311 Example of Circles. Figure 312 Example for creating polygons © CAD Schroer GmbH 363 . The elements may be lines or closed geometries. For both tools you can specify the number of sides in the dashboard.g. Figure 311 shows three examples. the tool Creates a circle touching three elements. beside others. enter the number 5 for Sides.defined by an inscribed circle and Creates polygons .

Figure 314 Dashboard 2D Features: Create Box 364 © CAD Schroer GmbH . on page 364) or activate the Creates 2D Features switch of the Properties of closed Geometry dialog (see “Closed Geometry Properties” on page 360. Figure 313 Dialog Switches. The following figures show the dashboard while creating and selecting a closed geometry by the example of a box. Option for Creating 2D Features Please note: Consider that you can save the activation of 2D Features when saving the defaults at the end of the MEDUSA session.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines 2D Features All closed geometries can be created as 2D feature. Figure 307). Activate 2D Features To enable drawing closed geometries as 2D features activate either the Create 2D Features option in the Switch dialog. This mode allows the shape and center lines to be grouped together. which is opened by using the Options menu (see Figure 313. they are especially explained in section “Creating Slots in 2D Feature Mode” on page 365. Smashing has the same effect as if the shape was created conventionally. The 2D Feature dashboard also has a sub-dashboard to allow properties of the shape (outline) and center-lines to be set. One exception thereby are the tools for creating slots. In principal it is possible by using all the tools. which are used to create closed geometries even you are not in 2D feature mode. Dashboard The 2D Feature dashboard has a tool to add or remove center-lines and a tool to smash the 2D Feature .

The parameters are the same as inside the dashboard. For a box the properties dialog looks like following: Figure 316 2D Features: Box Properties Please note: The display of the dashboard and the accordant properties dialog varies depending on the closed geometry which is created or selected. the tools for creating round-ended angled slots are deactivated. now instead only one toolset is available for creating slots.MEDUSA4 Drafting Closed Geometry Figure 315 Dashboard 2D Features: Select Box Please note: Consider that the smash tool is only active when selecting a 2D Feature. Properties The Properties button on the left of the dashboard opens the appropriate properties dialog for for the closed geometry. © CAD Schroer GmbH 365 . Creating Slots in 2D Feature Mode Once you are in 2D feature mode. It is not active while creating a 2D Feature. With this tool you can create either horizontal and vertical or angled slots.

when 2D feature has not been activated. in order to create the slot. By default the option Horizontal/Vertical is displayed in the Rotation field.. Choose one of the tools for creating slots and click into the drawing to place the starting point of the slot. the input field at the right side is enabled and you can either enter the desired angle directly or by defining a value using the arrows. With this setting you can only create horizontal or vertical slots. when this option has been chosen. in order to display the list of available options. • Custom Enter the desired angle in the appropriate field.. Open the Rotation pulldown menu. Figure 318 Dashboard of a round-ended Slot In addition to the Width and Length field it displays the Rotation field and an input box for entering a numerical value. angled slot . The slot can now only be extended toward the given angle. 4. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Figure 317 Tools to Create Slots in 2D Feature Mode 1. Now you can place the slot at any angle on the sheet. tool . Choose one of the following options: • Free The slot is attached to the cursor and can be freely rotated around the starting point. Figure 319 Rotation Pulldown Menu Horizontal/Vertical creates horizontal or vertical slots (default setting) Free creates free rotatable slots. Custom creates a slot at a specified angle. 366 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dashboard of a closed geometry as 2D feature is displayed. this option complies with the Creates a round-ended. 3. which is firstly deactivated. Place a second point on the sheet.

a line is attached to the cursor again and you can place it with another offset on the drawing. 3. When you move the mouse. when you move the mouse. Now you have the possibility to set the desired offset either: • By moving the mouse: Move the mouse as long as the line has the desired offset. Draw e. Select the rectangle. 2. or • By entering a offset value into the input field: Enter either a positive or negative offset value in the Offset field and apply with the Return key. 5. By moving the mouse you can create the line with an offset outside the rectangle (positive offset) or with an offset inside (negative offset) the rectangle. © CAD Schroer GmbH 367 . You can repeat the procedure now as often as you want by inserting a new value.g. The line is created with the desired offset to the selected element on the sheet. Now. you see a line attached to the cursor parallel traced around the selected rectangle. 1. when you press the right mouse key. Press the left mouse key to place the line on the sheet. which can be used to create a parallel line with a defined offset to a selected element. Top left of the drawing area the input field is displayed. 4. After having placed the line on the drawing the following popup menu is provided.MEDUSA4 Drafting Offset Lines Tools Offset Lines Tools MEDUSA provides three tools. In the following the handling is exemplified with the first tool in detail. The input field displays the accordant offset value. Choose the Creates a line with angular corners traced around the selected element tool . Figure 320 Tools to create an Offset Line to a selected Element The tools from left to right are: • • • Creates a line with angular corners traced around the selected element Creates a line with chamfered corners traced around the selected element Creates a line with filleted corners traced around the selected element In principle all three tools work in the same way. a simple rectangle by using one of the tools to create lines.

Figure 322 Example of the Offset Filter ON/OFF Option If the option is set to Offset Filter OFF. Example: If two straight line segments of a line. Undo the placed line is removed and you can place a new one. the Offset line has no intermediate points. and you activate the option Offset Filter ON.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Figure 321 Popup Menu after having placed an Offset Line on the Sheet The following options are available: Reverse Offset changes a line created with a positive offset to a line with negative offset and vice versa. Reselect suspends the process and you can select another element. from which you want to create an offset line. superfluous points are ignored for the offset line. to which you want to create an offset line. If Offset Filter is ON. The current tool remains active. contain intermediate points. the offset line also contains intermediate points. Exit Tool quits the tool 368 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Offset Filter ON/OFF controls. whether the offset line takes points from the original line which are not needed.

Figure 324 Examples of different Cut Values for a square Angle The following figure shows another example with an acute angle. Figure 325 Example for an acute Angle © CAD Schroer GmbH 369 .414 for a square angle (square root). a second The Cut value determines the position of the cut from the base line. The default value is 1. Figure 323 Input Fields while Creating an Offset Line with Chamfered Corners .MEDUSA4 Drafting Offset Lines Tools When you use the Creates a line with chamfered corners traced around the selected element tool input field Cut is displayed next to the Offset field after selecting an element.The examples below show the evolution of the cut when changing the value from 0 to 1.

Color The color used to draw the line. For superlines you have additional entries as given in “Line Types” on page 372. Layer The layer determines on which layer of the sheet a line is drawn.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Line Properties Line properties determine what the line will look like on the sheet. You can edit and add colors to the set of default colors. Thickness is the line thickness. 370 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Type changes the appearance of a line. Figure 326 Line Properties Dashboard Style Style Layer Color Type Thickness A style is a collection of properties that define what a line will look like. For details on the dashboard see the chapter “Dashboard” on page 291. Please note: The number of properties displayed for a Style depend on the line Type. For example. you can create a line style so that all lines created using this style have the same color and they are placed on the same layer. and the layer on which it is placed. Changing the layer does not have a visible effect. The available line types are given in “Line Types” on page 372. There are 8 different line thicknesses. See “Line Styles” on page 371 for more information. For changing line properties see “Changing Properties” on page 374. See “Layers” on page 151 for more detailed information on layers. All lines have the following properties: • Style • Layer • Color • Type • Thickness The properties of lines are displayed in the dashboard. except the layer is set to be invisible.

color and thickness of a line.you can change these properties • Not used and not locked . a line style may specify the line type. Style Variants Each property of a line style can get a certain status. 3. For example.you cannot change these properties These properties are grayed out in the dashboard and in the Line Properties dialog. If you change any of the properties of the line so that it is a variant from the standard style. then the generic button of the dashboard changes to yellow. The dashboard shows the style and the properties of the selected line. • Used but not locked .any change of such a property is applied but the style is not recognized as variant and so the button of the dashboard turns not into yellow You can always change any property of the line which is not used by the style. then: 1. then the background color of the generic button of the dashboard changes to yellow to show that this is a variant. including its variation. If the line is a variant. © CAD Schroer GmbH 371 . For changing properties see “Changing Properties” on page 374. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Line Properties Line Styles A line style is a collection of one or more line properties. Select the line whose style you wish to use. Select the generic button of the dashboard . Create points to define the line. Using a Style Variant If you want to use the style of an existing line. Line styles are defined by your System Administrator who can tell you what the styles should be used for. This is: • Used and locked .

aspect and shear. Decor lines have additional properties. which are width.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Line Types Figure 327 and Figure 328 show the available line types of MEDUSA separated to standard line types and modifiable decor lines. pitch. Figure 327 Standard Line Types 372 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

© CAD Schroer GmbH 373 . “Creating Group Lines” on page 436.MEDUSA4 Drafting Line Properties Figure 328 Decor Line Types The following figure shows the frequently used line types again: Figure 329 Frequently Used Line Types Long Dash Solid Short Dash Chain Dotted Construction Group Area Construction and group area line types have specific uses. For details on them see “Construction Lines” on page 471 and ”Transformation”.

You also can change line properties for several selected lines at the same time or while drawing a line. the layer on which they are stored. All possibilities are described in the following sections. Figure 330 Line Properties Dialog 374 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click on the Properties button on the left of the dashboard. 2. if your site may have special conventions which control how lines are created for particular projects. Select the new value for the property from the list of values displayed. Click left on the property you want to change (or click the arrow next to it. Select the line you want to change. Please note: You may not be able to change line properties. If you change any of the properties of the line then the background color of the generic buttons (to the far left of the dashboard) changes to yellow to show that this is a variant style. The entries inside the Line properties dialog are the same as described for the dashboard on page 370. Select a line on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Changing Properties You can change properties for a selected line either by using the dashboard or using the Line properties dialog. The Line properties dialog is displayed. The chosen property is changed for the selected element. for example. The dashboard changes to show the properties of the selected element. 3. 2. if one is present) in the dashboard. Using the Line Properties Dialog For changing properties with the Line properties dialog do the following steps: 1. A variant style is a style which has one or more properties that are altered from the original style settings. Properties which are locked for editing appear grayed out in the dashboard. Using the Dashboard To change a property of a line directly inside the dashboard: 1.

Using the Popup Menu You also can change line properties while creating or editing a line by using the Properties entry of the popup menu. 6. The line properties are displayed (it looks similar to the Figure 330. Click right for displaying the popup menu. To use the popup menu: 1. “Line Properties Dialog” given above).MEDUSA4 Drafting Line Properties 3. The changes are applied to the selected element. 6. Switch off the Lock option in the line of the property you want to change. Now you can adjust the unlocked line properties inside the Line Properties dialog. Click left on the Properties entry to open the Line properties dialog. 4. If any entry you want to change is disabled (grayed out) click left on the button Style. If you choose OK the changes are applied too but additionally the dialog is closed. and press Apply. Select one of the Create Line tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray. 5. If you choose Cancel the changes are not applied and the dialog is closed. Create the first point by probing inside the drawing area. Click left on the button Close to quit the Style Creation Dialog. The Style Creation Dialog opens: Figure 331 Style Creation Dialog 4. 7. Make the changes you require. Select another style from the Style pulldown menu. Apply the new style to the currently drawn line. 5. Click left on the tab Line properties. © CAD Schroer GmbH 375 . 2. 7. Click left on the button Modify to apply the changes. 3. For example the tool Creates thick solid lines.

then the appropriate field is left blank. Please note: If a field does not have identical values for all selected lines then that field is left blank. If the lines do not have identical values for a particular property. Change one or more properties using the dashboard or the Line Properties dialog. The properties of the selected lines are displayed on the dashboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Changing Properties of More than One Line You also can change the properties of several selected lines at the same time. 376 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. The chosen properties are changed for all selected elements. 1. Select the lines you want to change.

For details see “Point Coordinates” on page 378. The coordinates are always displayed as cartesian coordinates. Line Functions Defines the geometry of the line segment that leads to the point. © CAD Schroer GmbH 377 . You cannot edit this field. Weight The Weight column shows the weight given to the invisible control point that determines the shape of an arc. The available entries are given in “Line Functions” on page 378. Assuming that a line is created or edited you can display the Line Properties dialog as follows: • Select Line Point Properties from the popup menu. • If you have the Line Properties dialog displayed then just click on the Line Point Properties tab. • Click on the Properties button on the left of the dashboard. Point Functions defines the appearance of the point.MEDUSA4 Drafting Line Point Properties Line Point Properties You can display details about the properties of all points in a line. Y Horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point relative to the sheet origin. The weight of all other points is set to 1. The weight of a point is how much the arc is pulled towards the control point. You can change the weight using the Modify the weight of the selected tangent arc tool. For details see “Point Functions” on page 379. You can change these functions if you are editing the line. Figure 332 Line Point Properties Dialog The Line Point Properties dialog displays: X.

3.. 5. Some examples of line functions are: Line Functions Lin Clo Ant Arc Inv Nul Cir Con Cen Descriptions Straight line segment Circular arc clockwise Circular arc counter clockwise Tangent point arc Invisible line segment Control point for a circular arc Circle. option from the popup menu. 2. 0). You cannot edit this field. Line Functions The Line functions column shows the line functions defining the geometry of the line segment that leads to the point. The coordinates are always displayed as cartesian coordinates. first point on circumference. Select the Line Point Properties. Ensure that the selected line is in edit mode (that is. By default the sheet origin is located at the lower left corner of the sheet at (0. The position of the sheet origin is dependent on the grid origin. (See “Modifying a Grid” on page 147 for further information. Click Apply. first point is center. The position of the top right corner of the sheet depends on the size of the sheet selected. Edit the value. a horizontal A4 sheet is 297 mm by 210 mm so the top right corner of a metric sheet would be the position (297. For example. Please note: You can only edit this information if the line is currently created or edited.210) dependent on the sheet scale. the current point is displayed and a dynamic line is displayed between the current point and the cursor).) To change the X or Y coordinate: 1.. second point on circumference Control point for a tangent point arc Circle. Double click left in the X or Y coordinate field. second point is center 378 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 4.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Point Coordinates The X and Y columns give the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the point relative to the sheet origin.

50 51 . If you create an additional point in the leader line at the intersection of the two lines and then specify a gap point function. that is. the appearance of the point is changed. For example. such as an arrowhead or a cross. The point function at each point is used to define a symbol drawn at that point. Figure 333 Point Functions Point function 8 Point function 11 Point function 25 Point function 34 Using Gap Point Functions The gap point function can be used for a number of applications. Point functions are divided into the following ranges: Ranges 0 1 . a leader line pointing to a part of an object crosses an existing line and makes the drawing confusing. For example. When you first create a point it is given a null point function. Every point in a line has an associated point function.100 101 . you could change a point without any function to an arrowhead.39 40 . it is not marked in any way. Some examples of the appearances of different point functions are shown in Figure 333. The point function is denoted by a number from 0 through 255 and a name having up to six characters. Figure 334 Application of the Gap Point Function Leader line may cause ambiguity Use of gap point function at point 2 reduces risk of amb © CAD Schroer GmbH 379 . a part of the leader line becomes invisible and prevents ambiguity.255 Point functions Null point function Default set of point functions User-assignable point functions Reserved for future MEDUSA development User-defined point functions If you change the point function.MEDUSA4 Drafting Point Functions Point Functions The physical appearance of a point in a line is specified by its point function.

In MEDUSA the following conventions are used for arrowheads: • Arrowheads facing right in the Point Functions dialog create arrowheads pointing in the current direction of the line • Arrowheads facing left in the Point Functions dialog create arrowheads pointing against the current direction of the line Arrowheads with point functions 30 through 33 inclusive are drawn with their bases on the required points. from the Utilities menu..MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Arrowhead Point Functions The direction in which an arrowhead points depends on the line direction. If you are not creating or editing a line. Figure 335 Point Function Arrowheads Changing Point Functions You can replace an existing point function with one of the predefined symbols shown in “Standard Point Functions” on page 381 although the point functions used at your installation may be different to these. Changing Point Functions Using the Utilities Menu 1. the dialog is grayed out. Figure 335 shows the effect of different point functions on an L-shaped line. Choose Point Functions. You can change point functions using either the Utilities menu or the Line Properties dialog.. 380 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Choose a point function by clicking the appropriate button. The current point marker appears at the chosen point indicating that you can now change the point. 3. The symbols inside the Point Functions dialog are enabled.MEDUSA4 Drafting Point Functions Figure 336 Standard Point Functions Disabled 2. The number of the point function appears in the Point function field and the point function on the sheet changes immediately. If you do not want to apply further point functions click the Close button. 4. The dialog also can remain open while you go on working on your sheet. If you are not already creating or editing a line. © CAD Schroer GmbH 381 . move the cursor to the point that you want to change and then double click left. Figure 337 Standard Point Functions Null point function Use this if you do not want a point function at the selected point.

3. 6. Open the pulldown menu via the arrow button by using the left mouse key. furthermore you are able to assign functions between 35 . To make the point current. Figure 338 Using Line Properties Dialog to Change Point Functions 5. If you are not already creating or editing a line. Select the desired point function/symbol in the list. move the cursor to the point that you want to change and then double click left. to which you want to assign another point function. These point functions do not have icons in the standard product and are displayed as plain numbers.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Changing Point Functions Using the Line Properties Dialog To change point functions using the Line Properties dialog: 1. from the popup menu. Using Named Point Functions The Point Functions pulldown menu displays only the point functions as symbol which are in the range from 0 to 34. However. The pulldown menu provides the Other option at the end of the list. 7. press the OK button to close the Line properties dialog. Select Line Point Properties. The menu lists the point functions as symbols.255 to a point. The current point marker appears at the chosen point indicating that you can change the point now. change other point functions.. The point function on the sheet changes promptly. 4. The Line properties dialog opens displaying the tab Line Point Properties. 382 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click the Apply button.. If required. When you have finished. click left into the Point Functions input field of this point. 2. These are provided with the standard product.

If you click OK. Point functions 101 through 255 may also contain special symbols. 3. If no symbol has been assigned to the number.Others Option If you want to assign another function to a point than any from the standard set. the dialog remains open for further entry. Press the Apply button. the number is displayed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Point Functions Figure 339 Point Functions-Pulldown Menu . You can use these point functions to draw any special points required at your installation. proceed as follows. Select the Other entry in the Point Functions pulldown menu. 1. it is displayed in the table now. 2. Ask your System Administrator if any of these or any other point functions have been used. Press Return. Please note: You should determine the symbols (if any) that are given if you select point functions 40 through 50. © CAD Schroer GmbH 383 . Replace it with the number of the desired point function by typing the number into the field. based on the point functions in the default set. The point function is displayed on the drawing. These point functions can be defined as any symbol and do not have to be based on the default set of symbols. If a symbol has been assigned to the number. 4. the point function is displayed on the drawing and the dialog closes. It is assumed that the line is still in edit mode.

The line may be both an open or closed geometry. when you probed the first point on the sheet. and ends at the last point. after that set a second point. While you are in line edit mode choose the Trace a line tool . The use of the Trace a line tool will be demonstrated with an example of a level. Choose one of the Create line tools. 384 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 1. 2. Please note: The Trace a line tool is only activated. which you probed on the outline (Figure 340.and Endpoint 3. Figure 340 Setting Starting point-. you defined with the second point. which defines the drawing direction.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Trace a Line Tool MEDUSA provides a tool in the Lines + Edit tooltray which can be used to trace a complex line quickly and comfortably. First probe on the outline profile to set the starting point of the new line.g. left side). Direction. e. and at last probe the end point of your new line. You wish to trace partially the outline of the level. The line is traced promptly from the starting point in the direction.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 385 . The new line is still selected and can be edited.MEDUSA4 Drafting Trace a Line Tool Figure 341 Traced Line 4. In our example (Figure 341) the traced line has been moved to the right by using the Move option from the right mouse popup menu. Exit tool via the right mouse popup menu.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Overview of Edit Line Tools Figure 342 shows the edit line tools which are available in the Lines + Edit tooltray. Create or remove chamfer Rotate segment Create circular arcs or circles Hide or show line segment Delete point Change circular arc to tangent point arc Fillet lines Chamfer lines The tools in the tool sets are described briefly below (see “Complex Line Editing” on page 390). Figure 342 Standard Edit Line Tools Change segment length Fit or remove smooth curve Divide segment Create or remove fillet Rotate segment Create or remove tangent point arcs Reverse points in line Move point Change tangent point arc Trims/Extends end segments of lines Move Segments Extend line Orthogonalize line Split or join lines. 386 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

to one or more line segments. The current point marker appears against one of the points in the line. to create a fillet. You can use either the items in the popup menu for basic line editing or the tools in the Lines + Edit tooltray for more complex editing tasks. The second way for editing: 1. The first way for editing: 1. • Use the editing tools from the Lines + Edit tooltray described in “Complex Line Editing” on page 390. • Use the Enter Coords dialog for defining new coordinates of the current point (see “Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates” on page 354). The edit line icon appears in the status area to show that you are now editing the selected line. you can edit a line by: • Adding a point to the line • Deleting a point from the line • Moving a point • Using the line editing tools. For editing a line you can choose between two methods. For example. Now the current point can be edited. Now the current point can be edited. or to change the length or angle of a segment You can edit a line at any time. The edit line icon is displayed in the status area showing that you are now editing the line. You have the following possibilities: • Use the editing entries in the popup menu. The current point marker appears against one of the points in the line. 3. for example. Move the cursor over the line you want to edit and click left. Choose Edit from the popup menu by clicking the right mouse button. The line becomes selected and it is displayed highlighted. Move the cursor to the point in the line that you want to edit and double click left. or to the whole line. You have the same possibilities as described above for the first way of editing.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing a Line Editing a Line You can make changes to a single point. Choose the Select tool from the toolbar. 2. For details see “Edit Line Popup Menu” on page 388. © CAD Schroer GmbH 387 . during or after its creation.

or entering coordinates directly (for details see “Entering Points using Cartesian Coordinates” on page 354). For example. The current line is still active and you can go on editing this line. Delete Point removes the current point. If this item is chosen you can probe the new point by clicking left inside the drawing area. If you go on drawing after probing the next point of the line a new segment is drawn and the whole line is closed again between the current point marker (given by the arrow tick) and the start point of the line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Edit Line Popup Menu If a line is in edit mode a popup menu is available by clicking right. The Edit Line popup menu offers the following options: New Line finishes the currently edited line and sets up the function for drawing a new line. Close Line joins the first and last points in the line with a line segment. Move Point is used for shifting the current point to another position. Close and New Line joins the first and last points in the line with a line segment and it finishes the current line leaving you ready to start a new line. if the current point is the end point of an arc the Flip entry is enabled. Figure 343 Popup Menu While Editing a Line Please note: It depends on the stage of drawing which entries inside the popup menu can be chosen. The current point marker is set to the previous point. 388 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. for example created with the tool Create a fillet of specified radius from the tooltray Lines + Edit. Undo. If this option is chosen the current point marker is placed at the neighbored segment and it is reverted.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Line Popup Menu Flip changes a clockwise arc to a counterclockwise arc. Reverse Points in line changes the line direction. You can undo several actions. • adjust the coordinates of the current point inside the tab Line Point Properties. For details see “Line Point Properties” on page 377. © CAD Schroer GmbH 389 . Exit Tool quits the tool. Flip is only enabled if the current line segment is an arc. Line Point Properties opens the Line Properties dialog which allows you to: • adjust the style of the current line inside the tab Line Properties. The button Redo is activated after undoing the first time. For details see “Line Properties” on page 370. Redo Undo cancels the last action.

shortens the length of the current segment by the half of its current length. Figure 344 Change Segment Length Tools From left to right. For explanations on these tools see “Miscellaneous Tools” on page 399. the tools are: Extend by factor extends a line by a certain factor. or you can select a factor from the popup menu shown below. Figure 345 Extend by Factor Popup Double segment length doubles the length of the current segment. There are some tools which do not need edited elements.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Complex Line Editing This chapter explains some complex line editing tools available inside the Lines + Edit tooltray shown in the “Overview of Edit Line Tools” on page 386. the line segment between the current and previous point). Halve segment length. Complex line editing is. 390 © CAD Schroer GmbH . for example: • Changing the length of a line segment • Changing a line segment to a specified angle • Adding an arc to a line segment For editing lines. These tools are always available and they can be applied on lines without switching into edit mode. You can either type a value for the factor into an entry box which appears. select a line and then click left on the edit line tool you want to work with. Change Segment Length These tools allow you to change the length of the current line segment (that is.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 391 . • Move your cursor until the entry boxes show the required increment or absolute length and click left. You can either: • Enter an Increment value by which to extend the line (positive or negative). Figure 347 Smooth Curve Tools From left to right. Figure 346 Extend Line Tools From left to right. • Enter an Absolute length for the line (positive or negative). the tools are: Extend line allows you to extend or reduce the length of the current line segment by typing into the entry box which appears below the dashboard. The values in the entry boxes automatically update as you move your cursor. the line segment between the current and previous point).MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Extend Line These tools allow you to extend the length of the current line segment (that is. the tools are: Fit a smooth curve through the current line creates a smooth curve through all the points of a selected line. Extend line to probed segment allows you to extend or reduce the length of the current line segment. so that the line meets another line segment Fit or Remove Smooth Curve These tools allow you to fit or remove a smooth curve through all the points of a selected line. Remove the curve fitted through the current line is the reverse function of Fit a smooth curve through the current line.

This angle gives the maximum deviation of a line segment from the horizontal or vertical. step 5. No sloping segment remains. You have the following possibilities: • Enter the number of resulting segments in the entry box appearing below the dashboard.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Orthogonalize Line These tools allow you to replace sloping segments with horizontal and vertical segments inside the current line. • Probe the current segment to split it at a certain point. Divide segment into two splits the current segment into two equally-sized pieces. • Choose a value from the popup menu. Orthogonalize whole line changes the segments of the whole line into horizontal and vertical lines. the tools are: Divide segment into specified number of divisions or at selected point splits the current segment into a certain number of equally-sized segments. Divide Segment These tools allow you to divide the current line segment. 9 entries are available from 5 to 45. 392 © CAD Schroer GmbH . in order that it will be orthogonalized. Figure 348 Orthogonalize Line Tools From left to right. Segments which have larger deviation angles will not be orthogonalized. the tools are: Orthogonalize line within set tolerance changes the current line into horizontal and vertical lines according to the defined tolerance angle. For defining the tolerance angle you have two possibilities: • Type a value into the edit field below the dashboard. Figure 349 Divide Line Tools From left to right.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 393 . This new point is the last point in one line. the tools are: Create a fillet of specified radius deletes the current point and replaces it with two new points describing the start and end of the fillet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Split or Join Lines These tools allow you to split and join lines. Create or Remove Fillets These tools allow you to create and delete fillets. and the line is split into two. After choosing the tool an entry box appears below the dashboard for entering the radius of the fillet. Use the line navigation tool to examine the lines further (see “Navigating a Line” on page 404). which remains selected for editing. Join current line to selected line When you use this tool. The difference to Create a fillet of specified radius is that the second point of the fillet is not the virtual center of the fillet arc but the crossing point of the tangents in the start and end point of the fillet arc. The duplicated point is deleted. a new point is created at the current point. the current line is joined to the line you select by probing inside the drawing area. the tools are: Split segment about selected point If you select this tool. Type in the value and either press the button Return on your keyboard or click left the check mark behind the entry field. Create a (tangent-point) fillet of specified radius deletes the current point and replaces it with two new points describing the start and end of the fillet. Remove fillet deletes the fillet segment and replaces the original point. Use the Line Navigation tool to see this. and the complete line remains selected for editing. The line appears unchanged when you use this tool. The old current point is the first point in the other line which becomes deselected. Figure 350 Split and Join Line Tools From left to right. Figure 351 Fillet Tools From left to right.

Rotate segment. Please note: Any other segments attached to the current point will also rotate.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Create or Remove Chamfers These tools allow you to create and delete chamfers. They allow you to rotate the current line segment around the previous point. Figure 353 Rotate Segment Tools From left to right. third and quarter for Fraction. Rotate Segment These tools are given in two separate tool sets. triple. or • use the popup menu which provides the values quadruple. double. After choosing the tool an entry box appears below the dashboard for entering the lengths (1st Length and 2nd Length) for the chamfer. the tools are: Rotate segment by fraction rotates the current segment by a specified value for fraction of the enclosed angle which is defined as angle between current and last segment. halving angle rotates the current segment by half of the angle against the previous segment. You can either: • type a Fraction into the entry box which appears and press Return. Figure 352 Chamfer Tools From left to right. 394 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or • move the cursor until the line is positioned correctly and click left to place the new point. half. the tools are: Create chamfer deletes the current point and replaces it with two new points describing the start and end of the chamfer. Remove chamfer deletes the chamfer segment and replaces the original point. Type in the values and either press the button Return on your keyboard or click left the check mark behind the entry field.

Instead of the second probe you also can type in the Radius or Diameter inside the edit fields appearing below the dashboard after probing the end point of the arc. Create circle creates a circle around the current point. Circular arc through three points creates an arc beginning at the current point. They allow you to create arcs or circles at or around the current point. Use one probe to define a point on the circle © CAD Schroer GmbH 395 . and a second probe to define the vertex of the arc. doubling angle rotates the current segment by doubling the angle against the previous segment. and a second to define a point on the arc circumference. The popup menu allows you to draw the arc at the opposite side of the center by choosing the entry Flip. Use one probe to define the end point of the arc. or • move the cursor until the line is positioned correctly. Rotate segment by -90 degrees rotates the current segment clockwise by 90 degrees. Use the first probe to define the end point of the arc. Use one probe to define the end point of the arc. or • select one of the options (90 degrees. parabolic or conic arcs beginning at the current point. Rotate segment by +90 degrees rotates the current segment counterclockwise by 90 degrees. the tools are: Create tangent point elliptical arc Create tangent point parabolic arc Create tangent point conic arc These tools create elliptical. -90 degrees) from the popup menu. Rotate segment by specified angle rotates the current segment counterclockwise by the value for an angle using degrees. and click left. Figure 354 Create Arcs and Circles Tools From left to right. and a second to define the center point of the arc. Create Arcs or Circles These tools are given in two separate tool sets. 45 degrees. -45 degrees. Center point circular arc creates an arc beginning at the current point.MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Rotate segment. To specify the new angle either: • type an Increment or an Absolute angle into the entry box which appears below the dashboard and press Return.

Create segments tangential to surfaces creates an arc which starts and ends tangential at two probed surfaces. 396 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines circumference. Instead of probing you also can type in the Radius or Diameter inside the edit fields appearing below the dashboard. Figure 356 Tangent Arc Dialog and an Example for the Resulting Tangential Arc displayed arc after applying the settings given in the dialog above Choose the options and Apply for displaying the result. After choosing the tool look at the message area for the further steps to do. Choose OK for final confirmation of the arc you want to use. The following figure gives an example: Figure 355 Example for Creating Segments Tangential to Surfaces edited line first probed surface second probed surface mouse pointer with attached rubber band After probing the tangent points the Tangent Arc dialog comes up.

or by probing on the sheet (on the line specified in the example below). move the current point marker to the tangent intersection point of the arc and choose this tool. the tools are: Modify the weight of the selected tangent arc changes the weight of the selected tangent arc. You can now change the weight either by entering a value in the text field below the dashboard. The application of this tool © CAD Schroer GmbH 397 . Figure 357 Change Arc Tools From left to right. To apply this tool. edit a line with a tangent point arc.MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Change Arcs These tools allow you to change the shape of an existing arc. Figure 358 Example Modify Weight of Tangent Arc Change curve of the selected tangent arc changes the curve of a tangent arc by probing on the sheet.

Following figure shows the result: Figure 360 Example Convert Circular Arc to Tangent Arc center point of a circular arc circular arc tangent arc converted from circular arc tangent point of the tangent arc mouse cursor with rubber band at tangent point 398 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 359 Example Modify Curve of Tangent Arc Convert the selected circular arc to a tangent point arc converts a circular arc to a tangent arc.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines works similar to the tool Modify the weight of the selected tangent arc except that you cannot enter a certain value. The following figure illustrates how to work with this tool.

and to join them. Figure 361 Other Tools Reverse Points in Line Change current point into 1st point Move Point Hide or Show the line segment Delete Point Miscellaneous Tools This section contains the explanations on tools which are available independent from editing a line or not. Movement is restricted by neighbored segments in order to prevent destructed shapes and indefinite situations. Figure 362 Miscellaneous Tools From left to right. to fillet any corner of connected line segments with a defined radius. edit the line and use the tools described in “Create or Remove Fillets” on page 393. © CAD Schroer GmbH 399 . not connected line segments. to insert a fillet between single. and b. For details see “Fillet Lines” on page 401. Note that this tool does not work on arcs.MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Other Tools The following tools are either self-explaining or they are also available in the popup menu (see “Edit Line Popup Menu” on page 388). the tools are: Trims/extends end segments of lines trims or extends non-selected straight line segments against all or selected boundary lines of any shape. Fillet lines This tool enables you a. For details see “Trim/Extend End Segments of Lines” on page 400. which are arranged in an angle to each other. Chamfer lines This tool works in the same way as the tool Fillet Lines. For details see “Chamfer Lines” on page 403. if desired. Move segments moves the selected segment. For details see “Moving Segments” on page 403. If you want to fillet an arc with an adjoining segment. except that instead of fillets chamfers are created.

Pick-N-Drop is used for picking an end point of a line and move the point to its final trim/ extend position which is defined by crossing points with other segments on the sheet. Undo cancels the last action. If you move the cursor inside the selected boundary any line which can be trimmed/extended and which is close to the cursor is displayed as being trimmed/extended. This option is only available in Pick-N-Drop mode. It is disabled until the first Undo is done. It is enabled after picking an end point in case of Pick-N-Drop mode. Apply is used for terminating boundary lines selection. Only one of these options is available. For applying trimming/extension click left as you see the trimming/extension result. You can cancel several actions you did last time. Ignore Boundaries is used for switching off the ability to select a boundary used for placing a line end point after trimming. If the mode Pick-N-Drop is selected Trim and Extend are disabled. Exit Tool quits the tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Trim/Extend End Segments of Lines After selecting the tool Trims/extends end segments of lines the following popup menu is available: Figure 363 Trim/Extend Segments Popup opens the dialog Options opens the Line Trim/Extend dialog which provides the following entries: Trim or Extend against a selected boundary. 400 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Redo does again the last canceled action. Re-pick end point is used for picking another end point.

Consider that a Radius of zero creates a corner. After selecting the tool Fillet lines first enter the radius for the fillet inside the edit field below the dashboard and press Return or click left on the check mark behind the edit field. For filleting a single corner click on it with the left mouse button. By default this option is deactivated. Exit Tool quits the tool. Each click on this option toggles its activity. In this case a checkmark is displayed. It is disabled until the first Undo is done.MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Fillet Lines After selecting the tool Fillet lines the following popup menu is available: Figure 364 Fillet Lines Popup Join and Insert is used for filleting line segments and connecting them. © CAD Schroer GmbH 401 . indicated by the check mark . If Trace Old Line was active before. By default this option is switched on. Redo does again the last canceled action. Now you can either select connected or non-connected line segments for filleting. switching on this option deactivates Trace Old Line. If Join and Insert is switched on. if they are not connected (details are given below). If the fillet does not fit it remains unchanged and a message appears. • Connected Line Segments: You can fillet a single corner or several corners at the same time. By default this option is deactivated. The option is activated by clicking on it. Create Tangent Arcs is used for changing standard arcs (fillets) into tangent arcs create them of that ilk. Trace Old Line keeps the selected line segments and puts additionally a new line consisting of the selected segments (or shortened or extended versions of them) and the filleting arc on the sheet. You can cancel several actions. Trace Old Line is deactivated and can be chosen not until Join and Insert is switched off. Undo cancels the last action.

it will be displayed blue. You can select only two line segments. filleting is performed in the same way as for the option Join and Insert except that the selected line segments are kept. fillteting is aborted and a message appears. Figure 365 Example of Inserting Fillets between Line Segments and Joining the Lines A B C Row A shows the input line segments. After selecting the first line segment. 402 © CAD Schroer GmbH . filleting is aborted giving a message. • If both options are off. If a fillet does not fit. Only if a segment would be shortened to zero. joining and filleting lines is performed according to the selected option Join and Insert or Trace Old Line. • If the option Trace Old Line is on. As soon as you release the left mouse button. The result is a single line consisting of the selected line segments (perhaps extended or shortened) and the new filleting arc. • Non-Connected Line Segments: Non-connected line segments can be joined and filleted using the middle mouse button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines For filleting several corners of a line in one work step. the appropriate corner remains unchanged. We distinguish three cases: • If the option Join and Insert is on. If the radius is too high and the segments would be shortened for inserting the fillet. any corners are filleted at the same time. The following figure shows some examples. line segments are either extended or shortened in order to add the filleting arc. fillets are only inserted. press the left mouse button and select any desired corners by drawing a selection frame. when the radius causes the selected line segments to be extended. After selecting the second segment.

or • typing values inside the edit fields below the dashboard. The line direction is counterclockwise and the value of the 2nd Length is twice as big as that one of the 1st Length. Chamfer Lines A chamfer is defined by two values. Fillets are adjusted automatically in its radii while moving the mouse cursor. The original rectangle is visible. The final position of the segment can be determined either by: • clicking left inside the drawing area. 1st Length and 2nd Length. The single line segments are not modified and remain unchanged. The edit fields provide either coordinate entries (for x and y axis) or a radius value (for fillets and chamfers). In the example below all corners of the rectangle were chamfered. Moving Segments Moving segments is done by clicking left on the segment you want to move and then moving the mouse cursor. The succession of using these values depends on the line direction. Figure 366 Example for Inserting Chamfers © CAD Schroer GmbH 403 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Complex Line Editing Row B shows the inserted fillets when using option Trace Old Line. In this case the selected line segments were removed and a new line is created. Row C shows how the fillets are inserted and the line segments are joined to one line. when the mode Join and Insert is used.

For details on the toolbar and its customization see “Toolbar” on page 34. If you draw a new line or if you edit a line the Line Navigation buttons are enabled. This takes you to the specified point in the line and makes this point the current point. The popup menu for selecting tools which are displayed inside the tool bar are given. To use the Line Navigation tool: 1. you can move the cursor to a point in the selected line and middle click (or press the Shift key and left click). This section describes how you do this using the Line Navigation tool. Navigate around the line by clicking on the Line Navigation buttons given in Figure 367. Figure 367 Line Navigation Buttons Move point First point in line Previous point in line Reverse direction of line Next point in line Delete point Last point in line 404 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Line Navigation Tool You can navigate along a line that you are creating or editing to find out its direction or move to a particular point using the Line Navigation tool available inside the toolbar by default. Click left on the Line Navigation tool. Move the cursor to the line you want to work on and double left click. 2. Please note: When the line edit icon is displayed in the status area. Move the cursor upon the toolbar and click right. If the Line Navigation tool is not available inside the toolbar: 1. If no line is created or edited currently the buttons of the Line Navigation tool are disabled. This selects the line and puts it into edit mode. The popup menu closes and the Line Navigation tool is displayed inside the toolbar.MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines Navigating a Line A major part of editing lines involves navigating around the points in the line in order to select points. 2.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Navigating a Line Reversing the Line Direction Reversing a line numbers the points in the opposite direction. If you add a new point at the cursor position you would end up with one of two shapes depending on the direction of the line. Dependent on Line Direction 3 2 4 1 3 4 5 2 5 1 Please note: When you reverse a line the point functions may change because some of them depend on the line direction (e.g. See your System Administrator for further information. You can: • Choose Reverse Points in Line from the popup menu (when the cursor is positioned in the drawing area). Figure 368 Result after Point Added. The shape of the line is not changed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 405 . • Click the Reverse Points in Line button in the Line Navigation tool. arrows). Reversing the line direction is useful when you are adding a new point to a line or making changes to line segments. “Line Navigation Buttons” on page 404. • Click the Reverse Points in Line button in the Lines + Edit tooltray. See “Overview of Edit Line Tools” on page 386. This application of reversing the direction of a line to add points is demonstrated in Figure 368. See Figure 367. There are three ways to reverse a line (assuming that currently a line is created or edited). You can only reverse the line direction when you are creating or editing a line. See “Editing a Line” on page 387.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Lines 406 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

................................................................ 421 • Restore Profiles ................ Hidden Lines and Crosshatching........................MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D MODELING This chapter describes how to use MEDUSA’s 2D modeling functionality..................... 422 © CAD Schroer GmbH 407 ............... 420 • Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes.................................................................................. 415 • Popup Menu.................................. 408 • Centerlines... 416 • Project End Elevations of Shafts and Holes .................................... 412 • Edge Projection....................................... 419 • Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts ...................................................................................................... 409 • Sweeping Profiles ... • Introduction to 2D Modeling ................... 417 • Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts .................................

you can quickly produce orthogonal views within a 2D drawing from the minimum of geometry. The following modeling operations enable you to produce orthogonal views from an initial geometric view: • Profile extrusion • Shaft volume of revolution • Sectioned shaft volume of revolution • Sectioned hole volume of revolution • Volume of revolution end view • Edge projection 2D Modeling Tools The following figure shows the 2D modeling tools. you can then create orthogonal views of the geometry contained in the initial view. Figure 369 2D Modeling Tool Sweeps profiles Projects end elevations of shafts Rotates profiles to form shafts Rotates profiles to form sectioned shafts Projects surfaces from profiles Projects end elevations of holes Restores profiles Rotates profiles to form sectioned holes 408 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Introduction to 2D Modeling With MEDUSA’s 2D modeling functionality. which you can find in the Lines + Edit tooltray of the Complete set of tooltrays. Once you have created an initial view. using existing drafting facilities.

Create hidden lines If this option has a check mark hidden lines are drawn. Hidden Lines and Crosshatching A Properties dialog associated with each 2D modeling tool (except Create surfaces from profiles and Restore Profiles) allows you to define whether you wish to create centerlines or hidden lines as default when you use the modeling tool. The properties dialog opens which looks similar to that one in the figure below. Select Properties.MEDUSA4 Drafting Centerlines. Hidden line style is only available if Create hidden lines is chosen. 2.. © CAD Schroer GmbH 409 . Defaults resets the properties to the default values. If this option has a check mark sectioned areas are drawn crosshatched. Hidden Lines and Crosshatching Centerlines... To display the Properties dialog for a tool: 1. It sets the line style of hidden lines. Create crosshatching Only available for the tool Rotate profiles to form sectioned shafts tool described in “Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts” on page 420. Figure 370 Sectioned Shaft Properties Dialog The following parameters and buttons are offered: Create centerlines If this option has a check mark centerlines are drawn. Please note: When using the 2D modeling tools. Help work as usual. For examples see “Create Crosshatching” on page 411. Move your cursor over the tool in the tooltray. For examples see “Create Centerlines” on page 410. OK. hidden lines. Cancel. 3. Press the right mouse button to display the popup menu. you can override the defaults using the centerlines. and crosshatching options in the popup menus. For examples see “Show Hidden Lines” on page 410.

An example of showing and hiding normally hidden lines is illustrated in Figure 372. Figure 371 Showing Centerlines Direction of view Selected geometry Created centerlines Axis of rotation Direction of view Show Hidden Lines Select the Show hidden lines choice box to draw lines that would normally be hidden from view direction. When you select this choice box.MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Create Centerlines Select the Create centerlines choice box inside the properties dialog to define the centerpoint of any 2D modelled view with centerlines. 410 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the Hidden line type text entry box becomes active. The default style is L1. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 371. Enter the line style that you want to use for hidden lines.

An example of showing crosshatching is illustrated in Figure 373.MEDUSA4 Drafting Centerlines. Hidden Lines and Crosshatching Figure 372 Showing and Hiding Normally Hidden Lines Show hidden lines Axis of rotation Direction of view Selected geometry Axis of rotation Omit hidden lines Create Crosshatching Select the Create crosshatching choice box to create crosshatching with the sectioned shaft volume of revolution operation. Figure 373 Showing Crosshatching Axis of rotation Selected geometry Result © CAD Schroer GmbH 411 .

Figure 375 Popup Sweep Profiles The popup menu provides the following entries: 412 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Sweeping Profiles Profile sampling is a 2D modeling operation that produces an orthogonal view from selected geometry. The orthogonal view created is that which you would see by looking at the selected geometry from a specified view direction. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 374. Figure 374 Example of Profile Sampling Sampling distance Swept view created from selected geometry View direction Selected geometry Popup Menu While Sweeping a Profile While sweeping a profile you use the popup menu available by clicking the right mouse button.

View Direction.. Exit Tool quits the tool. step 45 © CAD Schroer GmbH 413 . This view is used for sweeping the profile. hidden lines will be drawn for the resulting profile. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. opens the View Direction dialog. Undo is used for canceling the last action. While sweeping a profile open the popup menu by clicking the right mouse button and choose the View Direction. If you click left on Create hidden lines. entry for displaying the View Direction dialog.. Create centerlines The check mark in front of this entry shows that drawing centerlines is switched on which is the default setting.. For details see “View Direction Dialog” on page 413. View Direction Dialog The View Direction dialog allows you to specify the direction from which you look on the profile. If you click left on the entry Create centerlines the check mark disappears and the option is deactivated.MEDUSA4 Drafting Sweeping Profiles View Direction sets up MEDUSA for probing two points for the direction of view. For defining the view direction you can either choose an arrow or insert a value for an angle.. You can undo several actions. a check mark appears in front of the entry and the option is activated. Figure 376 View Direction Dialog The dialog offers the following entries: Arrow field is used for defining the view direction by fixed angles from 0 to 315 degree. The first probed point is the from point (see the message area for Enter from point) and the second point is the to point (the message area displays Enter to point). Create hidden lines Drawing hidden lines is off (default).

Select one of the View Direction items from the popup menu in order to define the view of the geometry which is swept. 3. 2. According to the choice of step 3 you can either • make two probes whilst the first one is the from point and the second one is the to point. 414 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For example. or • type a numerical distance in the Distance edit field appearing below the dashboard. For example. The arrowhead points to the profile. Performing Profile Sampling You perform profile sampling by doing the following steps: 1. Make a probe to define the datum point which defines where to begin the sampling (the message area displays Enter datum point). It is like you would stay at this position and look into the direction of the profile. 4. View Direction shows the value for the angle defining the view direction. You can either • make another probe to define the distance.MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling degree. the horizontal arrow on the left pointing to the right means that the profile is swept from the left. For details for defining the view direction see “Popup Menu While Sweeping a Profile” on page 412 and “View Direction Dialog” on page 413. 5. Define the depth point which defines the distance for which the sampling is made (the message area displays Enter depth point). Specify the angle and distance of the extrusion. Now MEDUSA knows from where to see the geometry for sweeping the profile. 270 degree is used for sweeping the profile from the bottom. 6. Select the geometry on which you want to perform profile sampling. The profile is swept from the desired view direction at the defined datum point with the specified depth. or • choose an arrow or type in the angle of extrusion inside the View Direction field. Choose the Sweep Profiles tool .

An example of edge projection is illustrated in Figure 377. Choose the type of view you wish to create from the popup menu. 4. Select the geometry on which you want to perform edge projection. You can choose either • Horizontal View to create edges perpendicular to the horizontal viewing direction from the selected data (this item is the default). 2. which is considered to be of zero thickness. 3. The edge projection is placed inside the drawing area at the position you defined. You can create points of interest on the face to aid subsequent construction. or • Vertical View to create edges perpendicular to the vertical viewing direction from the selected data. Figure 377 Example of Edge Projection Selected geometry View direction To perform edge projection: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edge Projection Edge Projection Edge projection is a 2D modeling operation that creates a face from an object. Make a probe to specify the datum point. The line created is that which you would see by looking along a specified view direction at the edge of the selected geometry. The edge projection is displayed attached to the mouse cursor. © CAD Schroer GmbH Edge projection 415 . or • Oblique View to make two probes in the drawing area to specify the direction of viewing (whilst the first probe is the from point and the second one is the to point). Choose the Project surfaces from profiles tool .

416 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Create centerlines The check mark in front of this entry shows that drawing centerlines is switched on which is the default setting. Create crosshatching Only available for the tool Rotate profiles to form sectioned shafts described in “Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts” on page 420. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. These tools are described in: • “Project End Elevations of Shafts and Holes” on page 417 • “Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts” on page 419 • “Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts” on page 420 • “Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes” on page 421 While rotating a profile the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. If you click left on Create hidden lines. You can undo several actions.MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Popup Menu The popup menu described in this chapter is valid for all the tools which create rotation profiles. Exit Tool quits the tool. elevations and sections. If you click left on the entry Create centerlines the check mark disappears and the option is deactivated. Undo is used for canceling the last action. Figure 378 Popup Rotate Profiles The popup menu provides the following entries: Axis of Rotation defines the rotation axis by making two probes in the drawing area (whilst the first probe is the from point and the second one is the to point). a check mark appears in front of the entry and the option is activated. Create hidden lines Drawing hidden lines is off (default). hidden lines will be drawn for the resulting profile.

2. 6. For details see “Popup Menu” on page 416.MEDUSA4 Drafting Project End Elevations of Shafts and Holes Project End Elevations of Shafts and Holes End elevation is a 2D modeling operation that produces an orthogonal view from selected geometry. “Shaft End View” and Figure 380. Use the popup menu to define whether you want to create or omit centerlines and hidden lines. The end elevation is placed at the specified datum point. Select the geometry on which you want to create an end elevation. Make two probes in the drawing area to define the axis of rotation (the first probe is the from point and the second one is the to point). “Hole End View” on page 418 this is the left-hand geometry in each case. Figure 379 Shaft End View © CAD Schroer GmbH 417 . The end elevation is attached to the mouse cursor and you can move it in x-direction to the left or right. 5. You can use end elevation to produce end views either of a shaft or a hole. 4. 3. To create an end elevation: 1. Choose either the Project end elevation of shafts tool or the Project end elevation of holes tool . Select Axis of Rotation from the popup menu. The orthogonal view created is that which you would see along the axis of rotation by revolving the selected geometry around a given axis to produce a solid shaft. Move the end elevation to its target position and click left to specify the datum point. In Figure 379.

MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Figure 380 Hole End View 418 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

“Example of Rotating a Profile to Form a Shaft” you need not to do this because the upper two points can be used for defining the axis of rotation. The selected geometry is rotated at the rotation axis you defined and you get the desired result. The orthogonal view created is that which you would see by revolving the selected geometry around a given axis to produce a solid shaft. 2. Make two probes in the drawing area to define the axis of rotation whilst the first probe is the from point and the second one is the to point. 6. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 381.MEDUSA4 Drafting Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts Rotate profile to form a shaft is a 2D modeling operation that produces an orthogonal view from selected geometry. If needed draw the axis of rotation at the geometry you want to work on. Figure 381 Example of Rotating a Profile to Form a Shaft To perform rotating a profile to form a shaft: 1. Choose the Rotate profiles to form shafts tool . For example. Use the popup menu to define whether you want to create or omit centerlines and hidden lines. Hidden Lines and Crosshatching” on page 409. in Figure 381. For details on the popup menu see “Popup Menu” on page 416. 3. Select Axis of Rotation from the popup menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 419 . 5. See also “Centerlines. 4. Select the geometry which you want to rotate.

Hidden Lines and Crosshatching” on page 409. 5. See also “Centerlines. 3. 420 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Use the popup menu to define whether you want to create or omit centerlines. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts Rotate profiles to form sectioned shafts is a 2D modeling operation that produces an orthogonal view from selected geometry. For details on the popup menu see “Popup Menu” on page 416. The orthogonal view created is that which you would see by revolving the selected geometry around a given axis to produce a solid shaft that has been sectioned along its central axis. hidden lines and crosshatching. An example of this is illustrated in Figure 382. Choose the Rotate profiles to form sectioned shafts tool . Select the geometry which you want to rotate. Select Axis of Rotation from the popup menu. 4. Make two probes in the drawing area to define the axis of rotation. Figure 382 Example of Sectioned Shaft Volume of Revolution Axis of rotation Selected geometry Result To rotate a profile to form a sectioned shaft: 1. The selected geometry is rotated at the rotation axis you defined and you get the desired result.

2. Select two points in the drawing area to define the axis of rotation. Hidden Lines and Crosshatching” on page 409.MEDUSA4 Drafting Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes Rotate profiles to form sectioned holes is a 2D modeling operation that produces an orthogonal view from selected geometry. The selected geometry is rotated at the rotation axis you defined and you get the desired result. © CAD Schroer GmbH 421 . 5. See also “Centerlines. Select the geometry which you want to rotate. Choose the Rotate profiles to form sectioned holes tool . An example of this is illustrated in Figure 383. 3. 4. Use the popup menu to define whether you want to create or omit centerlines and hidden lines. Figure 383 Example of Sectioned Hole Volume of Revolution To rotate a profile to form a sectioned hole: 1. For details on the popup menu see “Popup Menu” on page 416. Select Axis of Rotation from the popup menu. The orthogonal view created is that which you would see by revolving the selected geometry around a given axis to produce a sectioned hole.

422 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is also given in the message area by the entry Choose a component. The Restore Profile dialog remains open but the entries are disabled (except the buttons Cancel and Help) until you select a further component. At this stage you can select components only. As long as no profile is selected all entries are disabled except the buttons Cancel and Help. 3. The original geometry is displayed again.MEDUSA4 Drafting 2D Modeling Restore Profiles You can restore profiles after performing the following 2D modeling operations: • ”Sweeping Profiles” • ”Edge Projection” • ”Rotate Profiles to Form Shafts” • ”Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts” • ”Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes” The Restore profile tool deletes the geometry that has been created using 2D modeling facilities and retrieves its original profile. Select the modeled geometry whose profile shall be restored by clicking left near to it inside the drawing area. To restore a profile: 1. 2. Click Continue to replace the component with the original geometry. Choose the Restore profile tool The following dialog opens: Figure 384 Restore Profile Dialog .

............................................................. 424 • Transformation on Selected Elements ....................................................................... • Overview ...................................... 432 • Create Arrays ................. 434 • Boundary Groups................................ 441 • Connect and Clear Lines ............. 431 • Magnify Elements ........................................................... 432 • Transformation of Text Elements......MEDUSA4 Drafting TRANSFORMATION This chapter describes the tools in MEDUSA which enable you to transform elements......... 440 • Move Selected Points .................................................. 427 • Mirror Elements ... 442 © CAD Schroer GmbH 423 ..................................................................................................................................... 436 • Dynamically Aligning Geometry Along a Line ................................................. 425 • Move Elements......................................................... 425 • Rotate Elements ............................................................................................................................................ 439 • Move Geometry by Grid Spacing ............... 429 • Shear Elements ..............

you can move. Figure 385 Transformation Tools Move selected elements Mirror selected elements Shear selected elements vertically Magnify selected elements Transform points enclosed by group lines Create freehand group line Move selected points Connect lines Rotate selected elements Duplicate and mirror selected elements Shear selected elements horizontally Create an array of elements Create group line box Delete all group lines Dynamically align and move geometry by grid space Clear lines 424 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Transformation tools are located in the Creation Tools tooltray. rotate. mirror and so on. For example. Many of the tools allow you to transform the selected elements or to make a copy of them and transform the copied elements. Transformation tools also include the creation and deletion of group lines because these lines are used for marking several elements which then can be transformed the same way. and they are shown in Figure 385.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Overview Once you select elements you can transform them.

available with a right click on the drawing area. Using the Popup Menu in the Drawing Area In the popup menu. 2. Place the selected elements by clicking left into the drawing area. The selected elements are attached to the crosshair. In MEDUSA you have two possibilities to move elements: • using the popup menu. available in the drawing area. Move Elements Selected elements can be moved on the sheet. 3. © CAD Schroer GmbH 425 . Select elements on the sheet. Figure 387 Popup Menu Option Move And so it works: 1. Figure 386 Tools for Transforming Selected Elements Please note: If no element is selected the tools in the figure above are disabled. Now you have the possibility inside a further popup menu to choose another datum point or to exit the function. Choose the option Move from the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements Transformation on Selected Elements This chapter gives you an overview of the transformation tools which are applied on already selected elements. and • using the toolset in the tooltray Creation Tools. there is a move function for easy handling.

Select elements on the sheet. The tool name is self-explaining therefore we left out a further description. Figure 388 Move Toolset From left to right you find the tools Move the selected elements. This entry is disabled if the current move tool is already Duplicates and moves the selected elements with an optional repeat. Duplicates and moves the selected elements and Duplicates and moves the selected elements with an optional repeat. Exit Tool work as usual. Duplicate and Move switches to the tool Duplicates and moves the selected elements. Choose one of the tools for moving as given in Figure 388. This entry is disabled if the current move tool is already Move the selected elements. 2. Now you can move the elements.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Toolset Additionally you can duplicate the selected elements and you can repeat the movement of duplicated elements. Multiple Duplicate and Move switches to the tool Duplicates and moves the selected elements with an optional repeat. The following sections give you information on the popup menu and the steps for moving elements. Undo. “Move Toolset”. If you want the elements to be duplicated or repeated use the popup menu for switching the function (see “Popup Menu of the Tools” on page 426). This entry is disabled if the current move tool is already Duplicates and moves the selected elements. How to Move Elements 1. Popup Menu of the Tools If you chose one of the move tools the following popup menu is available: Figure 389 Popup Menu of the Move Tools Move switches to the tool Move the selected elements. 426 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

The tool name is self-explaining therefore we left out a further description. Rotate Elements Selected elements can be rotated on the sheet. If you chose Duplicates and moves the selected elements with an optional repeat the edit field Repeat opens below the dashboard. Move the mouse and then probe the position where you want the elements to be moved.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements 3. The copied elements are duplicated by the inserted value (minus one because you already placed one copy). Figure 390 Rotate Toolset From left to right you find the tools Rotates the selected elements. Popup Menu If you chose one of the rotation tools the following popup menu is available: © CAD Schroer GmbH 427 . Please note: While performing the movement of elements the message line displays information about the steps you can do at the current state of movement. The elements are attached to the cursor. The following sections give you information on the popup menu and the steps for rotating elements.and y-value by which the current selected elements shall be moved inside the edit fields By X and By Y below the dashboard and press the button Return or click on the check mark behind the edit fields. Type in the number for repeating the duplication of the selected elements. In this case: a. If you chose one of the duplication tools the selected elements are copied to the target position. Finally click left for placing the elements. Similar to moving elements you can duplicate and repeat rotated elements. b. Duplicates and rotates the selected elements and Duplicates and rotates the selected elements with an optional repeat. Move the elements by using one of the following possibilities: • Type in the x. If you chose Move the selected elements the selected elements are moved immediately to the defined target position. Click left on the check mark behind the edit field or press Return. • Click left near the selected elements to define the datum point of the selection.

2. If you chose Rotates the selected elements the selected elements are rotated immediately. Type in the number for repeating the duplication of the selected elements. If you type in a value and click on the check mark or press Return rotation is finished. After this the selected elements are attached to the cursor and as you move the cursor you can see the effect of rotation. There are two ways to go on: • Type in the value for the angle. This entry is disabled if the current rotation tool is already Rotate the selected elements. Click left on the check mark behind the edit field or press Return. This entry is disabled if the current rotation tool is already Duplicates and rotates the selected elements. If you chose one of the duplication tools the selected elements are copied and rotated. • Probe the angle. Exit Tool work as usual. If you want the elements to be duplicated or repeated use the popup menu for switching the function.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Figure 391 Popup Menu of the Rotation Tools Rotate switches to the tool Rotate the selected elements. Now you can define the angle by which the elements are rotated. Probe the rotation axis (in the message line it is datum point). How to Rotate Elements 1. 428 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Below the dashboard the edit field Angle allows to define the rotation angle. Undo. If you chose Duplicates and rotates the selected elements with an optional repeat the edit field Repeat opens below the dashboard. If you probe a second time you define the angle by which the elements are rotated. This entry is disabled if the current rotation tool is already Duplicates and rotates the selected elements with an optional repeat. Multiple Duplicate and Rotate switches to the tool Duplicates and rotates the selected elements with an optional repeat. If you probe rotation the first probe specifies the start of the angle. “Rotate Toolset”. In this case: a. Select elements on the sheet. Duplicate and Rotate switches to the tool Duplicates and rotates the selected elements. b. Choose one of the tools for rotation as given in Figure 390. 3.

vertical or oblique direction. For example. Mirror Oblique switches to the appropriate mirror tool. if the first copy is rotated by 12 degree then the second one is rotated by 24 degree. Figure 392 Mirror Toolsets From left to right you find the following tools: • • • • • • Mirrors the selected elements vertically Mirrors the selected elements horizontally Mirrors the selected elements obliquely Duplicates and mirrors the selected elements vertically Duplicates and mirrors the selected elements horizontally Duplicates and mirrors the selected elements obliquely The sections below give information on the popup menus and the steps for mirroring elements.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements The copied elements are duplicated by the inserted value (minus one because you already placed one selection). Popup Menus If you chose one of the mirror tools the following popup menu is available: Figure 393 Popup Menu of the Mirror Selected Elements Tools Mirror Vertical. the third one is rotated by 36 degree and so on. Mirror Horizontal. Each copy uses the rotation angle related to the previous copy. The tool which is currently selected is disabled. © CAD Schroer GmbH 429 . Please note: While performing the rotation of elements the message line displays information about the steps you can do at the current state of rotation. Mirror Elements Selected elements can be mirrored on the sheet either in horizontal. Similar to moving elements you can duplicate and repeat mirroring.

in the figure above the tool Mirrors the selected elements vertically is currently selected. the dimension text is mirrored.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation For example. Duplicate and Mirror Horizontal. The following example shows the effect. Mirror Lock controls whether dimension text is transformed during a mirror process. for example. in the figure above the tool Duplicates and mirrors the selected elements vertically is currently selected. If you chose one of the duplicate and mirror tools the following popup menu is available: Figure 395 Popup Menu of the Duplicate and Mirror Selected Elements Tools Duplicate and Mirror Vertical. Duplicate and Mirror Oblique switches to the appropriate mirror tool. The tool which is currently selected is disabled. the dimension text is not mirrored. If Mirror Lock is activated (default setting). Figure 394 Example of the Mirror Lock/Mirror Unlock Functionality Undo. If Mirror Lock is not activated. Exit Tool work as usual. 430 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

2. or shear and repeat elements. the selected elements are displayed mirrored immediately. “Popup Menu of the Tools” on page 426. Now you can mirror the elements. The tools on the right shear horizontal. “Mirror Toolsets” on page 429). shear and duplicate elements. Please note: While mirroring of elements the message line displays information about the steps you can do at the current state of mirroring. Figure 396 Shear Toolsets On the left you see the tools for shearing in vertical direction. specify the angle or ratio by which the elements are sheared. It is similar as given in “Move Elements“. “How to Rotate Elements” on page 428. and define the number of repeats. The shear tools provide a popup menu which allows to switch between the tools of a toolset. Each toolset allows you just to shear elements. Shearing elements has the same work flow as it is for rotation. You select elements. Select elements on the sheet. After probing. Similar to moving elements you can duplicate and repeat shearing. © CAD Schroer GmbH 431 . define the datum point. if required. choose the tool. If you want the elements to be mirrored by another axis use the popup menu for switching the function (see “Popup Menus” on page 429). Choose a tool for mirroring (see Figure 392. Click left inside the drawing area to define the position for the virtual axis at which the selected elements are mirrored. vertical or oblique direction. For details on the work flow see “Rotate Elements“. Shear Elements Selected elements can be sheared on the sheet either in horizontal. If you chose a duplication tool the elements are copied otherwise they are moved. 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements How to Mirror Elements 1.

Duplicates and magnifies the selected elements and Duplicates and magnifies the selected elements with an optional repeat. You only need to insert factors between o and 1. define the datum point. The magnify tools provide a popup menu which allows to switch between the tools of the toolset. For details on the work flow see “Move Elements“. The following dialog opens: The Array dialog has the following items: Sheet Units. specify the magnification factor.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Magnify Elements Selected elements can be magnified on the sheet. choose the tool. Similar to moving elements you can duplicate and repeat magnified elements. It is similar as given in “Move Elements“. 432 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Magnifying elements has the same work flow as it is for movement. “Popup Menu of the Tools” on page 426. Please note: Magnifying can also be used for scaling down. Grid Units defines the kind of units used for X step and Y step. You select elements. “How to Move Elements” on page 426. For defining an array choose the Array tool Figure 398 Array from the Creation Tools. Create Arrays Selected elements can be copied and arranged as arrays by defining rows and columns and the steps for placing the selected elements. if required. The tool name is self-explaining therefore we left out a further description. and define the number of repeats. Figure 397 Magnify Toolsets From left to right you find the tools Magnify the selected elements.

For example. Apply place the selected elements as an array. Figure 399 Example © CAD Schroer GmbH 433 . if you want to change an already placed array Undo the last placement using the popup menu before applying your changes again. Y step defines the spacing between the placements of the selected elements. In case of Apply the dialog remains open. In case of OK the dialog is closed. OK. Whenever you apply placing an array a new one is created.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements X step. So. Help work as usual. Number in Y defines the number of placements of the selected elements in x-direction (columns) and y-direction (rows). Number in X. Cancel. if you define 100 for the X step and the selected element is a rectangle then the spacing between the left bottom points of the placed rectangles is 100 units.

an originally horizontally created text. Rigid The text is handled in the same way as other elements. which you want to transform.g. The activated option is appears disabled in the context menu. Legible The text remains legible after the transformation. which is mirrored along an axis. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Transformation of Text Elements If you select a text element. you can open the following context menu by clicking the right mouse key on some of the transformation tools. regardless of its legibility. Figure 400 Popup Menu during Transformation of Text Elements The options Legible. Fixed The direction of a text is kept how it has been saved. on your sheet. Fixed and Rigid control the display of a text after an appropriate transformation. which is transformed with the rotation tool. a text. E. For example. remains always horizontally aligned. 434 © CAD Schroer GmbH . is also displayed mirror-inverted. a text is mirrored along an axis but it is not displayed mirror-inverted.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation on Selected Elements Figure 401 Example © CAD Schroer GmbH 435 .

you find information on boundary groups also in chapter “Select“. do not create any curved line segments. Because the selection of elements or parts of elements enclosed by boundary groups is special. The group line is defined using a special group line type. “Interacting with the Tree Viewer” on page 341).MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Boundary Groups A boundary group is a collection of elements (lines. or copying. Figure 402 Tools for Boundary Groups Toolset for manipulating boundary groups Creates group lines Creates group line boxes Deletes all group lines Comparison with Other Methods of Grouping Boundary groups are intended to set up temporary collections of elements. for example. You can manipulate a boundary group. unlike groups in the tree structure which are used to associate permanent collections of elements (for details see “Status Area“. groups. Creating Group Lines There are two ways of creating group lines: • Freehand (point by point) using the Creates group lines tool • Using the Creates group line boxes tool Please note: When you draw a group line freehand. dimensions and prims) contained within a group line. Only group lines consisting of straight line segments are valid. Overview of the Tools The following figure gives you an overview of the tools which create and delete group lines and which transform boundary groups. texts. “Selecting Elements by Boundary Groups” on page 113. rotating. You can define group lines whenever you require and delete them after you have used them. 436 © CAD Schroer GmbH . by moving.

You have the usual possibilities provided with the popup menu while drawing a group line. The other points defining the element are not affected by any operation that you carry out on a point group. Figure 403 Group Box and Freehand Group Lines Please note: It makes no difference whether the elements in the group are at sheet level or in a permanent group (see the section “Groups” on page 334).MEDUSA4 Drafting Boundary Groups Both methods for creating group lines work the same way as drawing any other type of line or as drawing an ordinary rectangle. Some examples of group lines are shown in Figure 403. The graphic below shows that by the effect of moving a point group in order to shear the elements partially: Figure 404 Moving a Point Group Deleting Group Lines To delete all group lines. © CAD Schroer GmbH 437 . select the Deletes all group lines tool . you create a point group. When you enclose some of the points of an element with a group line.

Figure 405 Tools for Manipulating Boundary Groups Rotate Mirror vertically Shear horizontally Move Mirror horizontally Magnify Shear vertically For transforming points and elements which are inside a group line: 1. Choose Switch Dimension Update On from the popup menu in order to keep affected dimensions correct (when quitting MEDUSA and saving the defaults. Choose one of the tools for manipulating boundary groups. Figure 406 Popup Menu for Transform Groups Items for switching to the other transformation tools for update dimensions of the selected elements 2. this setting is saved too). The working steps depend on the tool you chose and they are similar to those explained for the appropriate transformation tool given in the following sections of “Transformation on Selected Elements” on page 425: • “Move Elements“. If you want to change the transformation tool now. 3. as rotation axis if you chose the tool Rotates the points enclosed by group lines . Now you can go on with the transformation. “How to Mirror Elements” on page 431 438 © CAD Schroer GmbH . use the popup menu. “How to Move Elements” on page 426 • “Rotate Elements“.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Transform Boundary Groups You can manipulate boundary groups using any of the tools shown in the graphic below. All group lines and all elements which are crossed or inside the group lines become selected inside the drawing area. “How to Rotate Elements” on page 428 • “Mirror Elements“. for example. Probe the datum point used for the transformation.

To cancel the scaling. For example. open the Temporary Properties dialog. Select a datum point around which the selected elements are transformed. A copy of the selected elements is displayed attached to the crosshair. Select the geometry that you wish to align. complete circles or even ellipses. © CAD Schroer GmbH 439 . Move the cursor around the sheet. Switch on dynamic aligning by using Dyn. 6. 3. Click left to place the elements on the sheet. the geometry attached to the crosshair contains the current scale. close to other elements until the elements are aligned as required. The selected geometry is copied and the original geometry remains unchanged. Such line segment can be straight. circular arcs. Figure 407 Popup: Dynamic Aligning and Scaling Now you are able to align the selected elements at any existing line of the sheet. 2. Select the Aligns geometry along a line tool . 5. If you want to change the properties of the selected geometry use the right mouse button to open the Temporary Properties dialog (for details on this dialog see “Symbols“. select Unscale and then scale of the geometry is not considered anymore. To dynamically align elements: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dynamically Aligning Geometry Along a Line Dynamically Aligning Geometry Along a Line You can dynamically align elements on existing line segments. 4. aligning on from the popup menu. “Temporary Symbols” on page 446).

The tool. It displays the settings of the X and Y spacing of the current grid. when you already selected the geometry. moving the geometry is not possible by using the tool . Choose Grid > Grid Properties in the menubar. is located in the shown toolset . Accordingly you can enter an arbitrary factor and move the geometry in the direction according to the selected arrow. which shall be moved. which is used to do this. 440 © CAD Schroer GmbH . display the current grid via the menu option Grid > Show current Grid. Enter e. The tool is only active. the MovebyGrid dialog is disabled. In order to clarify the mode of operation of the tool. i. The selected geometry is moved rightwards in x-direction by 3 grid spacings. factor 3 and click on the rightmost arrow.g. Figure 409 MovebyGrid Dialog . With this setting. Figure 408 Grid Properties Dialog with Settings of Spacings 3. by 3 x 5 = 15 sheet units. In this example the grid spacings of both the x and Y direction amounts 5 sheet units. 1. When the Polar option in the Grid Properties dialog is activated (see Figure 408).MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Move Geometry by Grid Spacing MEDUSA provides the possibility to move a geometry by a specified factor of the current grid spacing in a defined direction. The Grid Properties dialog opens. Choose the Moves geometry multiple of a grid offset tool The MovebyGrid dialog appears. 4. 2.e.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 441 . The selected elements become highlighted but only the points which were inside the selection frame will be affected by moving. Select the points that you wish to move by drawing a selection frame. Please note: After choosing the tool the message line below the status area shows you at any state of the function. Choose the Move the selected points tool . The selected points are attached to the cursor. b. You can either move complete elements.MEDUSA4 Drafting Move Selected Points Move Selected Points Selected points of elements can be moved on the sheet. Specify the delta x and/or delta y value by which you want to move the points and press the Enter key. The points are moved. Two input fields are displayed in the upper left corner of the drawing area where you can specify a delta x and a delta y value . what to do next. Probe on the sheet to define the target point of movement. To move selected points: 1. 2. For further movement you need to select points again. so go on with step 2. which do not move. some points of one element. MEDUSA provides two different possibilities to move the points: a. The elements remain selected. Probe on the sheet to define the datum point. you see rubber-band-like lines which are connected to the element points. As you move the cursor. or points of several elements.

non-explicit connecting situations are omitted (e. When you deactivate Join tangent point arcs.. in order to have only one point at a place. All lines on the sheet are evaluated. When you move the cursor over the tool and click the right mouse button a popup window opens showing a Properties. but remain as separate line segment.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transformation Connect and Clear Lines With MEDUSA you can remove points. item which opens the JoinLine Properties dialog. The use of this tool results in a reduction of the amount of data when importing DXF files. too. if the direction can not be determined clearly). these arcs are not enclosed within a line. which are used to control the joining of lines to one line on the whole sheet accordingly. Figure 410 Connect and Clear Lines Toolsets From left to right the following tools are displayed in the figure above: Connect lines to one new line Lines which have overlapping end points are connected to one line.dat file (for details see the Customization Guide). By default the Only join lines on same level in same group and Join tangent point arcs.g. Closed lines and circles are not considered. Connect the current line with adjoining lines Same as Connect lines to one new line Clear lines but the tool is executed on the selected line only. This becomes apparent in improved performance. Since all lines are verified the execution time of the function can be several seconds with larger drawings. Since the tool works fully automatic. This tool deletes points placed one above the other in connected line segments.. Clear the current line Same as Clear lines but points are cleared for the selected line only. Only line segments of the same type and on the same level and layer are connected. You also can connect single lines with overlapping points in order to create a poly line. Figure 411 JoinLine Properties Dialog Within the dialog you can select different settings. 442 © CAD Schroer GmbH . which lay over each other. The switches are set in the defaults. too switches are activated.

.................... 444 • Overview of Symbol Tools.................... 455 • Moving a Symbol’s Datum .............................................................. 457 • Named Symbols........ 451 • Symbol Size ................................................................................................ 450 • Transforming Symbols .......................................... 458 © CAD Schroer GmbH 443 ........................................................................................................................... 446 • Symbol Properties.............. 456 • Reversing Symbol Property Changes...............................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting SYMBOLS This chapter describes the use of symbols and explains how you can change its properties...................... • Introduction to Symbols ... 445 • Temporary Symbols .............................................................

MEDUSA offers the possibility to work with two different kinds of symbols: • standard symbols • diagram symbols 444 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Introduction to Symbols A symbol consists of elements from a sheet that have been stored in a symbol file. A symbol may be a single element or a number of elements. There can be up to 30 symbol libraries on your system. or onto the same sheet. This file can then be used to load the stored elements onto other sheets. For symbol libraries available on your system consult your System Administrator. You may also be able to create symbols and store them in a library assuming that you have write permission to the directory. Symbol Libraries Symbol libraries are directories where regularly-used symbols are stored. Temporary and Named Symbols Symbols are distinguished according to their use: • Symbols that you require only for a short time during one MEDUSA session are called temporary symbols. • Symbols that you want to keep for a period of time are called named symbols. You can load a symbol onto your sheet from a symbol library. or where extensive use is made of standard symbols such as in electrical schematics and logic diagrams. The availability of standard symbol libraries considerably reduces the work required to create such a drawing and also ensures a uniform drawing standard. Symbols are a powerful instrument of quickly creating a new drawing where a high degree of repetition is involved.

Information on the function is given in the Parts Library Guide. They are available inside the Creation Tools tooltray of the Complete set of tooltrays.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview of Symbol Tools Overview of Symbol Tools The symbol tools described in this chapter are shown in Figure 412. © CAD Schroer GmbH 445 . after you have chosen the appropriate license. Figure 412 The Symbol Tools Save temporary standard symbol Save named standard symbol Parts Library Save diagram symbol Select diagram symbol Load temporary symbol Load named symbol Explode Parts Create diagram symbol The Parts Library tool will be activated.

Select a Save temporary symbol tool from the Save temporary symbol toolset in the Creation Tools tooltray of the Complete set of tooltrays. Figure 414 Save Temporary Symbol Toolset The Save temporary symbol tools numbered 1 through 3 save the symbol under the corresponding temporary symbol number.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Temporary Symbols Temporary symbols are created during a MEDUSA session and they are stored on the hard disk (usually in the path defined by the environment variable HOMEPATH). Select the elements you want to save as a symbol. To save a temporary symbol: 1. If this option is chosen it changes to Current Level in order to reset storing the information of the current level with the symbol again.. Perform Saving You can save up to 99 temporary symbols. displays the Symbols dialog. Names of temporary symbols are created automatically and cannot be defined by the user as it is for named symbols (see “Named Symbols” on page 458). 446 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. Saving a Temporary Symbol Popup Menu While saving elements as temporary symbol clicking right provides the following popup menu: Figure 413 Saving Temporary Symbol Popup Menu The popup menu provides the following entries: Sheet Level is used for ignoring the level information of the symbol while saving. The Save temporary symbol tool numbered ?.. Exit Tool quits the tool.

4.MEDUSA4 Drafting Temporary Symbols Figure 415 Symbols Dialog Use this dialog to enter the number with which to save the symbol. Figure 416 Loaded Symbol Popup Menu The popup menu provides the following entries: © CAD Schroer GmbH 447 . Select Exit Tool from the popup menu to finish saving. Probe the sheet to define the datum point for the symbol. Loading a Temporary Symbol While loading a temporary symbol you can change its properties. 3. Popup Menu After chosen a Load temporary symbol tool the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. The temporary symbol is stored. Therefore first the popup menu is given before explaining how to load a temporary symbol.

The Load temporary symbol tool numbered ?. Dyn. aligning on. For rotation of 180 and 270 degrees use this entry twice or three times.. Revert reverses all transformation you did on the loaded symbol. Dyn. Mirror Vertical. Perform Loading To load a temporary symbol: 1. You can undo several actions. If you choose the symbol again the original datum point is used again. Temporary Properties opens the Load symbol Temporary Properties dialog (see “Symbol Properties” on page 450). displays the Symbols dialog shown in Figure 415. Use DLL translation If this option is chosen elements are changed according to the settings in the file ddltrans.dat. 448 © CAD Schroer GmbH . scaling off is used for scaling the symbol to the current scale on the sheet. Move Datum by Probing is used for changing the datum point of the symbol temporary. Mirror Horizontal is used for mirroring the symbol at the y (Mirror Vertical) or x axis (Mirror Horizontal). Dyn. Undo is used for canceling the last action. Exit Tool quits the tool. Figure 417 Load Temporary Symbol Toolset The Load temporary symbol tools numbered 1 through 3 allow you to load the symbol that is saved under the corresponding temporary symbol number. If switched on the entry changes to Current Level in order to use the level saved with the symbol. If you switch off scaling with Dyn. scaling off. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. aligning off is used for aligning the symbol to an element on the sheet.. Sheet Level defines that the symbol is placed on sheet level. “Symbols Dialog” on page 447. Dyn. then the scale stored with the symbol is used. Select a Load temporary symbol tool from the Load temporary symbol toolset in the Creation Tools tooltray of the Complete set of tooltrays. scaling on.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Rotate by 90 rotates the current symbol by 90 degrees.

4. 3. If you want to transform the symbol use the popup menu (see “Popup Menu” on page 447) or the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog (see “Symbol Properties” on page 450). © CAD Schroer GmbH 449 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Temporary Symbols 2. If the Symbols dialog is open. The symbol is placed at the probed position. Probe the sheet to position the symbol. enter the number of the temporary symbol you want to load. It remains attached to the cursor for further placement.

from the popup menu to display the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog: Figure 418 Load Symbol Temporary Properties Dialog The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog allows you to: • Transform a symbol by rotating. . Changes that you make to the properties of a symbol apply only until you select another tool. see “Moving a Symbol’s Datum” on page 456.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Symbol Properties Once you have loaded a symbol. for example Rotate by 90 degrees and Move Datum by Probing. 450 © CAD Schroer GmbH . • Move a symbol’s datum. If you load the symbol again it is loaded with the properties it was originally created with. Some of the more commonly changed symbol properties are also accessible directly from the popup menu itself. shearing. select Temporary Properties. Please note: While the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog is displayed. To change the properties of a loaded symbol. • Specify whether the symbol is loaded scaled using the current sheet scale or unscaled. you can undo any changes to the symbol on the cursor by clicking the Untransform button.. • Specify the layer on which symbol’s elements are loaded by entering the layer offset (incrementally from the symbol element’s existing layer(s)) into the Layer Offset field. you can change its properties before you place it on the sheet.. see “Symbol Size” on page 455. magnifying or mirroring. This undoes the transformation but leaves the values defining the transformation displayed in the dialog. see “Transforming Symbols” on page 451.

as opposed to the popup menu or transformation tools. • Legible changes both the orientation and justification of the text but leaves it readable when viewed from bottom and right of the drawing. shearing. • Rigid retains the original justification and orientation of the text. or magnifying a symbol that contains text. after you have loaded it but before you place it on the sheet. You can control the effect that property changes have on text using the text field on the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog which is the field with the pulldown menu to the right of the Rotate field. You can also transform a symbol after you have placed it on the sheet using the transformation tools. The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog also gives you greater control over how you transform a symbol. mirroring. This chapter gives you following information: • ”Modifying a Symbol that Contains Text” • “Rotating a Symbol” on page 452 • “Magnifying a Symbol” on page 452 • “Shearing a Symbol” on page 453 • “Dynamic Alignment” on page 454 Modifying a Symbol that Contains Text If you are rotating. Available options are: • Fixed changes the position of the text if necessary and retains the orientation. You do this using the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog (see Figure 418) or the transformation options on the right mouse button popup menu. The options allow you to specify what will happen to the text when you modify the symbol. For example. be aware that the text is changed too. is that you can carry out several transformations at once.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transforming Symbols Transforming Symbols You can transform a symbol. © CAD Schroer GmbH 451 . it allows you to rotate a symbol by a specified angle. justification and original scale of the text. as opposed to the popup menu which only allows you to rotate a symbol in increments of 90 degrees. The advantage of using the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog (see Figure 418) to transform a symbol.

2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Rotating a Symbol You can rotate a symbol to any angle that you require.. Load the symbol that you require. Specify whether you want any text in the symbol to be Legible. or Rigid. To do this: 1. Select Rotate by 90 from the popup menu. Enter the magnification factors that you want to apply to the symbol into the Magnify X field.. 5. from the popup menu. Fixed. Click OK. 5. To rotate a symbol using the popup menu: 1. from the popup menu. The symbol is rotated about its datum point. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet... or both fields. 7. 3. 452 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. 4. or Rigid. 2. Fixed. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Magnifying a Symbol You can magnify a symbol along its X-axis and Y-axis. The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog is displayed. Enter the angle into the Rotate field. 4. Load the symbol that you require and select Temporary Properties. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Select Temporary Properties. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. 3. Y field. 3. To rotate a symbol using the Load Symbol Temporary properties dialog: 1. 6. 4. Click OK. Specify whether you want any text in the symbol to be Legible. 6. 2. Load the symbol that you require. The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog is displayed.

Shearing a Symbol You can shear a symbol to the left or to the right. Select Mirror Horizontal or Mirror Vertical from the popup menu. Specify whether you want any text in the symbol to be Legible. Specify whether you want any text in the symbol to be Legible. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. Load the symbol that you require and select Temporary Properties. Click on either or both of the Mirror horizontal button or Mirror vertical buttons.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transforming Symbols Mirroring a Symbol You can mirror a symbol horizontally and vertically. 2. 2. Load the symbol that you require and select Temporary Properties. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. 7. Click OK. Fixed. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Enter the shear factor either by: • Typing the ratio in the Ratio field • Typing the angle in the Angle field To shear the symbol to the left enter a negative value for the shear factor. The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog appears. 3. 5.. from the popup menu. 6. Fixed. or Rigid. 4. 3. Choose Angle or Ratio from the button to the right of the shear fields to specify the shear factor. or Rigid.. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Load the symbol that you require 2. 3. Click OK. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. To mirror a symbol: 1. 5. To mirror a symbol using the popup menu: 1. 4. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog appears... © CAD Schroer GmbH 453 . To do this: 1. 4. from the popup menu. 6.

For getting back the orientation input conditions use Revert from the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Dynamic Alignment You can dynamically align loaded symbols with other geometry on the sheet before placing the symbols on the sheet. Select Dyn. Use the popup menu to exit the tool or place another copy of the symbol on the sheet. 3. 4. you can align the symbol until it is in the desired position. Figure 419 Dynamically Aligning Symbols To do this: 1. Alignment On from the popup menu. 454 © CAD Schroer GmbH . As you move your cursor around the sheet the symbol dynamically alters its orientation to align perpendicular to any adjacent geometry. You can place the symbol with the same orientation in another location. Please note: Once the function is activated. Click left to place the symbol on the sheet. Load the symbol that you require 2. After deactivating the function the orientation from last alignment remains.

select Dyn. While this result is desirable when the symbol is a scale drawing of a real object. It does not have any impact when loading the symbol into a drawing without scaled views. To turn this function off. If you select Dyn. regardless of the sheet scale. it may not be desirable when you are using schematic symbols. a symbol created and saved on a sheet with a scale of 1:10 and then loaded onto a sheet with a scale of 1:100 is loaded at the same size that it was created originally. a symbol is loaded onto a sheet the same size as it was originally created. For details see chapter Controlling the Effect of the Sheet Scale on Symbols You can control the effect of the sheet scale on symbols by clicking the Unscale button in the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog. which should normally be drawn at the same size. then it will be drawn ten times larger when loaded onto a sheet with a scale of 1:1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 455 . When you do this. Dynamic Scaling This function may be used in connection with scaled views (see “Scale View” on page 278). the sheet scale is ignored and the symbol is loaded at the same size that it was originally created. Scale On from the popup menu the loaded symbol is automatically and dynamically sized according to the scale of the view.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbol Size Symbol Size By default. For example. Scale Off from the popup menu. If a symbol is created on a sheet with a scale of 1:10.

• Enter grid units into the By grid fields.. Load a symbol. after you have loaded it. Please note: You can return a symbol’s datum back to its original position by clicking the Move Datum button in the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog. Probe the position where you want to move the datum. Specifying the Coordinates of the New Datum 1. then choose Temporary Properties. Specifying the New Datum by Probing 1. • Enter polar coordinates into the Polar fields. For further information. Click Apply or OK. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Moving a Symbol’s Datum When you create a symbol. Load the symbol that you require. The symbol is attached at the cursor using the new datum position. 4.. 3. 456 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Temporarily place the symbol on the sheet by clicking left into the drawing area. Specify the new position for the datum by entering values into the fields below the Move datum button according to the following definitions: • Enter cartesian coordinates into the By fields. The symbol is made active again with the cursor at the new datum position. Click the Move datum button. but before you place it permanently on the sheet. Choose Move Datum by Probing from the popup menu. 3. from the popup menu. 2. 4. You can change the datum for a symbol. you specify the datum that will be used to position the symbol when you load the symbol onto a sheet. refer to “Reversing Symbol Property Changes” on page 457.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Reversing Symbol Property Changes Reversing Symbol Property Changes You can reverse some or all of the changes that you make to a symbol’s properties before you place the symbol on the sheet. Select Temporary Properties. You can: • Reverse all property changes made to a symbol • Untransform a symbol • Move a symbol’s datum back to its original position Reversing all Property Changes for a Symbol If you make changes to the symbol properties. The advantage of using Untransform over the Defaults button is that the values defining the transformation are still displayed. so you can transform the next symbol before you place it on the sheet by clicking the Untransform button again. That is. click the Untransform button in the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog. select Revert from the popup menu. from the popup menu. and then decide that you want to return the symbol to its original state. To do this. Untransforming a Symbol You can untransform a symbol before you place it on the sheet. Click the Apply button.. To do this: 1. Moving a Symbol’s Datum Back to its Original Position You can move a symbol’s datum back to its original position before you place the symbol on the sheet and still retaining the other property changes. The symbol’s datum is reverted to its original position. © CAD Schroer GmbH 457 . The Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog is displayed. you can undo any property changes that you may have applied using the Load Symbol Temporary Properties dialog. 2. The edit fields for defining a new datum point are enabled but do not insert anything. All changes are undone and the original symbol properties are reinstated. Click the Move Datum button. 3..

The Load Named Symbol dialog is a graphical manager and has a preview function. The following dialog appears: Figure 420 Symbol Manager Dialog from the Creation Tools Dock Symbol Manager dialog to graphical user interface New directory Change to current directory One directory up Back to last directory Refresh Moving this bar sizes the width of directory and file list Preview windows 458 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Named Symbols Named symbols are similar to temporary symbols except that the user can define the name of a symbol. To open the Load Named Symbol dialog select the Load Named Symbol tool tooltray. Symbol Manager The Symbol Manager enables you to load named symbols into your current drawing.

2. Loading Named Symbols To load a named symbol either: • Double click left on the desired filename. Symbols are displayed in the preview windows. Once a symbol is loaded you can use any of the transform options of the popup menu to transform the symbol before you place it on the sheet. the symbol is attached to the cursor crosshairs. To preview a certain symbol click on the desired preview window with the middle mouse button. 4. The symbol is displayed in the preview window.MEDUSA4 Drafting Named Symbols Previewing Symbol Files You can view the symbols prior to selection. After loading. • Click on one of the preview windows with the left mouse button. Use the browser part of the dialog to select the directory that contains the required symbol files. • Select a filename and click OK. This ensures that you choose the correct symbol. 3. If there are more files than preview windows select a file name from the lower part of the list to display other symbol files in the preview windows. Ensure that the Preview button is not pressed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 459 . 3. You can either preview symbols in all preview windows or in selected windows only: Previewing in all preview windows: 1. There are only symbols names displayed in the preview windows. You can quit the symbol manager using the Cancel button. Use the browser part of the dialog to select the directory that contains the required symbol files. If there are more files than preview windows select a file name from the lower part of the list to display other symbol files in the preview windows. Click left on the Preview button. 2. Previewing in individual preview windows: 1.

Figure 421 Filter Pulldown-Menu Please note: No preview is displayed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Symbols Loading DXF Symbols The standard MEDUSA symbol manager enables you to open DXF symbols as well as STHENO or MEDUSA symbols. 460 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Select the desired file type from the list as shown in the following figure.

............................................. 465 • Loading and Inserting a Temporary Diagram Symbol...................................... 468 • Selecting and Deleting ....... 466 • Loading and Inserting a Named Diagram Symbol . 463 • Saving ......MEDUSA4 Drafting DIAGRAM SYMBOLS Additionally to the standard symbol tools MEDUSA provides a diagram mode for basic applications in the schematics construction....... 462 • Creating .................................................................................................................... 469 © CAD Schroer GmbH 461 ................................................... • Overview .......... This chapter describes the use of the Diagram Symbols........................................ The symbols for this are called Diagram Symbols................

462 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 422 Overview of Diagram Symbol Tools Save diagram symbol Select diagram symbol Create diagram symbol A diagram symbol consists of a group which contains graphics. • Named Diagram Symbols which you want to keep for a period of time by using the Named diagram symbol buttons. Any other elements may be included. a datum prim and one or more connection point texts. You can work with self created diagram symbols but also MEDUSA provides a catalog of complete diagram symbols which can be loaded. Agreed to the standard symbols you can create and load: • Temporary Diagram Symbols that you require only for a short time by using the Temporary diagram symbol buttons.MEDUSA4 Drafting Diagram Symbols Overview The tools to create these symbols can be found in the Creation Tools tooltray shown in Figure 422.

Crosshairs and connector text remain at the cursor. 6. Type the text for the first connection point. 2. The dashboard displays the properties of the connector text. The active cursor is positioned in the text field for input. If the text should be not visible set the character size to zero. Promptly the text attached to the cursor is replaced by the new text. Choose the Create diagram connector text tool. for example a rectangle. by using the Lines + Edit tooltray. Figure 423 The Create Diagram Symbol Tools Create diagram connector text Create diagram datum prim 3. For help placing the diagram connection texts and the diagram datum prim later on switch on center lines.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Creating To create a diagram symbol you need a graphic element. a datum prim and at least one or more connection point texts. © CAD Schroer GmbH 463 . Please note: It is mandatory to make an input in the text field.in the field to create a second connection point. Type a new text. Probe the new connection point text on the element. Figure 424 The Text Dashboard Text input field Character Size 4. Switch to the Creation Tools tooltray. 5. 7. for example P1. The mouse cursor changes to a crosshair while moving within the drawing area. You can find there the Create diagram symbol tools. Create an element. The entered text attaches crosshairs. for example P2. Click left to place the first connection point on the element. 1.

464 © CAD Schroer GmbH .Select Exit Tool from the popup menu. Figure 426 Creating a Diagram Datum Prim Position of placing the datum prim 10. Click on the element to define a diagram datum prim. one with three texts requires two or three intersection lines and so on. Please note: A symbol with two connection point texts in line with its datum can be inserted into a straight line. All three components required to create a diagram symbol are available now.MEDUSA4 Drafting Diagram Symbols Figure 425 Creating Connection Point Texts Connection point text 8. Choose the Create diagram datum prim tool. 9.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 465 . Figure 427 Save Diagram Symbol Tools Save temporary diagram symbol 1. Figure 428 The Save Named Symbol Dialog Type the file name in the File Name field and choose the directory in which you wish to save the file.. diagram connection texts and diagram datum prim) which you wish to be saved as a diagram symbol. Click the arrow to open the popup menu which is shown in Figure 427. Choose the Save diagram symbol toolset. 3. The available tools allow you to save a symbol as a temporary or named symbol. For saving a diagram symbol there are special tools.. Select all three components (rectangle.. a temporary diagram symbol click on the desired Save temporary diagram symbol tool. a named diagram symbol choose the Save named diagram symbol tool. For saving a. The procedure of saving a temporary diagram symbol is equal to saving a standard symbol. The Save named symbol dialog is displayed as shown in the following figure. b.99 Save named diagram symbol 4. 1. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Saving Saving Corresponding to the standard symbols you can save diagram symbols either temporary or named. For loading a diagram symbol use the same tools as for loading standard symbols.

You have now created: a. The symbol aligns itself at a line. If any component is missing an error message is displayed in the output message area. a named diagram symbol Please note: Saving a diagram symbol is only possible if all three components are available. a temporary diagram symbol or b. Move the cursor over the line where you wish to insert the symbol. While moving the cursor over the drawing area the temporary saved diagram symbol is attached to the cursor with a cross over it.MEDUSA4 Drafting Diagram Symbols 5. Select Exit Tool from the popup menu to finish saving. 1. A special auto orient and insert mode is entered during loading the diagram symbol. Loading and Inserting a Temporary Diagram Symbol For loading a temporary diagram symbol use the Load temporary symbol tools. 466 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 429 Load Temporary Symbol Toolset The diagram symbol is loaded. Figure 430 Diagram Symbol Attached to Cursor 2. Click on the arrow to open the popup menu which is shown in Figure 429 and choose one of the tools. The symbol is not crossed out any longer.

the two crossing segments must be owned by two different lines. Probe on the line to place the diagram symbol as required. The loaded symbol remains on the cursor. 3. Disable Diagram Mode loads the diagram symbol as usual symbol. Between the two connection points the line is interrupted. Next Figure 433 Diagram Symbol after Placement Please note: If you want to place a diagram symbol with 3 or 4 connection points at a intersection of lines. You are able to insert it again until you select Exit Tool from the popup menu. Popup Menu while Placing and Prev Orientation are used to change the orientation of the symbol in a line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Loading and Inserting a Temporary Diagram Symbol Figure 431 Diagram Symbol Over Line Effect of the Auto Orient Mode The following popup menu is available: Figure 432 Diagram Symbol. You cannot place a diagram symbol with 3 or 4 connection points at a crossing where a line intersects itself. The symbol is inserted into the line. Both are deactivated. © CAD Schroer GmbH 467 . if the symbol cannot be placed.

Click on the Load named symbol tool .MEDUSA4 Drafting Diagram Symbols Loading and Inserting a Named Diagram Symbol 1. Load the desired symbol Placement works in the same way as in “Loading and Inserting a Temporary Diagram Symbol” on page 466. 2. a. Select one of these symbols or b. choose the directory where you have saved your diagram symbols and select one. The Load Named Symbol dialog appears. MEDUSA offers a number of diagram symbols In the diagram symbols folder ready for use. 468 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

the Delete option from the popup menu available with the Select a diagram symbol tool or from the toolbar. © CAD Schroer GmbH 469 . The selected diagram symbols are removed. Select a diagram symbol by using a. Deleting Delete a diagram symbol using a. The Select a diagram symbol tool allows diagram symbols to be cut. Select one or more symbols. pasted. 2. the Delete button from the keyboard. the Deletes all the selected elements function c. or available in the popup menu of the selection b. copied. the Select sheet-level named group tool tools button inside the toolbar. . the Select a diagram symbol tool from the Creation Tools tooltray.MEDUSA4 Drafting Selecting and Deleting Selecting and Deleting Selecting 1. the interrupted lines are restored automatically. Please note: An incomplete symbol cannot be selected. or b. moved and deleted keeping up the intelligent behavior which is characteristic for diagram symbols.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Diagram Symbols 470 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

..... 480 • Offset Construction Lines..........MEDUSA4 Drafting CONSTRUCTION LINES This chapter shows the different kinds of construction lines and how to create and delete them...... 474 • Reusing the Current Datum Point ............................................................................................. 486 • Confining Construction Lines to a Specific Area .. 488 • Transported Construction Lines ................................................................ 481 • Deleting and Hiding Construction Lines...................... 496 • Creating Dynamic Construction Lines.......................................................................................... 473 • Creating Construction Lines............ 492 • Dynamic Construction Lines .......... 500 © CAD Schroer GmbH 471 ............................................................ 472 • Construction Line Tools................. 489 • Projected Construction Lines .............................................. • Introduction ................................................................................

“Parameters for Construction Line Extent are:” on page 183. either in free space. construction lines extend to the limits of the current window. i. it is often convenient to set up temporary construction lines. either one at a time or in sets of parallel lines You can place construction lines exactly where you want them. When you no longer require the construction lines. You can either create: • Freehand construction lines point by point in the same manner as standard lines • Automatic construction lines. or in relation to the points of an existing line. MEDUSA therefore provides a range of tools that enable you to create different types of construction lines.) For the following chapters it is assumed that the default settings are kept.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Introduction In conventional drafting.e. Extent You can change the default settings for the extent of construction lines using the Construction Line options in the Switches dialog (Options > Defaults > Defaults > Switches). (For details see ”Options”. such as circles and angled lines. you can hide them or delete them. You can use the construction lines as a basis on which to make the actual drawing. 472 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Construction lines extend to the limits of the current view window.

Figure 434 The Construction Lines Tooltray horizontal construction line offset horizontal construction line oblique construction lines free construction line or orthogonal construction line between two points construction line through two probed points construction line perpendicular to two points tangential construction circles construction circles construction line bisecting two line segments Figure 435 Tools for Projecting Construction Lines vertical construction line offset vertical construction line offset oblique construction lines crossed construction lines offset construction line from two probed points construction lines traced around selected element construction lines through tangential points of circles construction boxes construction lines projected from profiles construction lines projected from a section line switch on/off transportation lines create transportation or section line © CAD Schroer GmbH 473 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Line Tools Construction Line Tools The tools to create construction lines are provided in the Creation Tools tooltray.

474 © CAD Schroer GmbH . A horizontal/vertical construction line is drawn on the sheet through the point you selected. Once you have specified the datum point. “Tools and Toolset for Creating Single Construction Lines” work in the same way as described before. others create multi-segment lines with invisible segments. Any other tools shown in Figure 436. some of which are shown in Figure 436. The point you select is called the datum point.120 and 150 degrees Creating a Single Construction Line To create a construction line: or 1. The selected point becomes the datum point which can be used for further drafting (see “Reusing the Current Datum Point” on page 480). and specifying a point through which the construction line will pass. Select a point on the drawing which the construction line shall pass and click left. Figure 436 Tools and Toolset for Creating Single Construction Lines Creates horizontal construction line Creates vertical construction line Creates construction lines at 0 and 90 degrees Creates construction lines at 45 and 135 degrees Creates construction lines at 30. Create additional construction lines on the sheet by repeating step 2 and step 3. 2. 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Creating Construction Lines You can create construction lines by selecting a construction line tool. If necessary choose a probe specifier. Choose either the Creates horizontal construction lines tool the Creates vertical construction lines tool . 4. you can create additional construction lines through this point.60. Some tools create construction lines as single segment lines.

Select the Creates oblique construction line tool . In both cases the angle of the construction line is fixed on 45.00 degrees.00 degrees and cannot be modified. If it is the first time you draw an oblique construction line in the current MEDUSA session the default entry is 45. Move the cursor into the Angle input field and type the requested angle value. An angle entry box appears in the top left of the drawing window. The other tools of the toolset for creating oblique construction lines (Figure 437) work the same way on principle but without calling up the angle entry box. Figure 438 Angle Entry box 2. The length of the construction line is restricted by the currently displayed drawing area (see also “Introduction” on page 472). below the dashboard. The selected point becomes the datum point which can be used for further drafting (see “Reusing the Current Datum Point” on page 480). © CAD Schroer GmbH 475 . A construction line is drawn on the sheet through the probed point at the specified angle. Figure 437 Creates Oblique Construction Line Toolset Creates construction lines at +45 degrees Creates oblique construction line Creates construction lines at -45 degrees 1. Select a point on the drawing through which the construction line is to pass and click left.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Construction Lines Creating an Oblique Construction Line For creating an oblique construction line MEDUSA offers a toolset which contains three different tools. 3.

2. Choose the Creates a construction circle defined by a center point and radius tool. you can see that a circle line consists of several straight segments. which can be used to create construction circles tangential to lines (straight lines. below the dashboard. Type a value either in the Diameter input field or in the Radius input field 4. Click the check mark behind the entry fields or press the button Return on your keyboard. The construction circle appears on the sheet corresponding to the requested dimension. Each of the construction circles is built in this way. Figure 439 Tools to Create Construction Circles Creates a construction circle defined by a center point and radius Creates a construction circle defined by diameter end points 1. 476 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Choose Exit Tool from the right mouse popup menu to quit the tool. Figure 441 Toolset for creating Construction Circles tangential Creates construction circle tangential to two lines Creates construction circles tangential to a line in two steps Creates construction circles tangential to a line in three steps The tools work as follows: It is assumed that a line already exists on your sheet. Repeat Step 2 to Step 4 to create another construction circle. Like other circles MEDUSA creates segment lines instead of real circles in order to reduce the time for redrawing the graphics. Creating Construction Circles tangential MEDUSA provides a toolset containing tools. An entry box appears in the top left of the drawing window. 6. 5. Probe in the sheet to set the center point of the circle. Figure 440 Diameter and Radius Entry Box 3. If you zoom in.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Creating a Construction Circle MEDUSA offers some tools for creating construction circles. circles etc.).

2.and YCoordinate are displayed. When you move the mouse. Define the size of the circle and place it at the desired position by doing one of the following: • Move the mouse. you see a construction circle attached to the cursor which is aligned tangential to the line. but the size of the circle will be kept. When you move the mouse. Creating Construction Circles tangential in three Steps Using this tool you also create a construction circle tangential to a line. Radius and the X. When you move the mouse. Choose the Creates construction circle tangential to a line in two steps and click left on the line. Two examples of construction circles in different positions are shown below. By moving the mouse. 3. In the top left corner of the drawing area input fields for Diameter. • Enter a value for Diameter or Radius in the accordant input field to define the size. Choose the Creates construction circle tangential to two lines tool. and press Enter. you see a construction circle attached to the cursor which is tangential aligned to both lines. Define the size of the circle by doing one of the following: • Move the mouse. Move the circle to the desired position and click left to place it. When you move the mouse. Unlike to the tool described before. enter a value for Diameter or Radius and press the Enter key. until the circle has the desired size and position. © CAD Schroer GmbH 477 . • Move the circle to the desired position by using the mouse. Click left on the first line and subsequently on the second. In the top left corner of the drawing area input fields for Diameter. 2. Radius and the X. 1. size and position of the circle are set in two steps.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Construction Lines Creating Construction Circles tangential in two Steps 1. • Enter a value in the Diameter or Radius input field and press the ENTER key. one after the other. Creating a Construction Circle tangential to two Lines Using this tool you can create a construction circle tangential to two lines. 1. Choose the Creates construction circle tangential to a line in three steps tool and click left on the line.and Y-Coord fields to define the position. You can still move the circle along the line using the mouse. and click left. 2.and YCoordinates are displayed. and click left. the circle changes it’s position along both lines and at the same time it’s size. Now the circle is sized. For clarity the cross-hair is left out. enter values in the X. you see a construction circle attached to the cursor which is aligned tangential to the line. the size of the circle and its position along the line are changed. until the circle has the desired size.

Creating Construction Line tangential at two Circles MEDUSA provides a toolset containing tools. Figure 443 Toolset for the Creation of tangential Construction Lines Creates construction lines through tangent points of two circles Creates construction line tangential at two circles The first tool works as follows: 1. The circle jumps automatically to the position. Choose the Creates construction lines through tangent points of two circles tool. the tangent at the two circles and the perpendiculars through the tangent points. 478 © CAD Schroer GmbH . • Enter a value in the Diameter or Radius input field and press ENTER. 3. input fields for Diameter and Radius are displayed. which can be used to create construction lines tangential at two circles. which is possible with the defined size. and click left. Promptly both appear as construction line on the sheet. Define the size of the circle and place it on the desired position by doing one of the following: • Move the mouse to find the desired position and with it the size.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Figure 442 Examples of Construction Circle in different Positions In the top left-hand corner of the drawing area. Click on the first and then on the second circle. 2.

Figure 445 Example of the Creation of a Tangent as Construction Line Creating a Bisection Line MEDUSA provides a tool. They can intersect themselves but need not do this. The tangent is created on the sheet as construction line at the two circles. Click on the first line segment and then on the second. Choose the Creates construction line bisecting two line segments tool .MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Construction Lines Figure 444 Example of the Creation of Construction Lines through Tangent Points The second tool works as follows: 1. 2. 1. in this case the construction line is placed axial between the two parallels. They also can be arranged parallel. 2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 479 . which can be used to create the bisection line between two straight line segments. Choose the Creates construction lines tangential at two circles. Click left on the first and then on the second line. The bisection line is promptly created. The line segments can be created in any angle to each other.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Reusing the Current Datum Point Once you have placed a construction line on the sheet. 480 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. 5. According to the selected orientation a construction line appears which crosses the datum point you created with the first construction line (step 1). 3. you can create another construction line of the same or a different orientation through the same datum point. Create a single construction line as described on page “Creating a Single Construction Line” on page 474. 4. Click the right mouse button to display the popup menu for the active tool. 1. Figure 446 Popup Menu while Creating Construction Lines The menu contains items corresponding to the different orientations of construction lines. When you have finished creating construction lines. Repeat step3 to create other construction lines through the datum point. select Exit Tool from the right mouse button popup menu. Choose an option from the popup menu.

The Create offset construction lines at -45 degrees tool (in the same toolset as the Create offset oblique construction lines tool). The Create offset oblique construction lines tool.offset: -20 Datum Point Construction Lines Horizontal . This section explains the offset definition and how to create offset construction lines. The Create offset vertical construction lines tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Offset Construction Lines Offset Construction Lines You can offset construction lines from a datum point using the tools shown below: The Create offset horizontal construction lines tool. The Create offset construction lines at +45 degrees tool (in the same toolset as the Create offset oblique construction lines tool). Offset Definition By default: • A vertical construction line is offset to the right (positive side) of the datum point • A horizontal construction line is offset above (positive side) of the datum point Using Negative Offsets You can enter a negative value in the Offset field to offset a line on the other side. Figure 447 Positive and Negative Offsets Vertical .offset: 20 Vertical .offset: 20 Datum Point Datum Point Horizontal .offset: -20 Datum Point © CAD Schroer GmbH 481 .

MEDUSA creates a construction line offset from the specified point. you can reverse the side on which the offset appears by choosing the Reverse Offset menu item from the popup menu for the tool (when the cursor is positioned in the drawing area). Enter the offset distance by typing a value into the Offset and the Angle field (in case of creating oblique lines). If you want to probe on the sheet do not do this. one to the left side of the datum point and the second one to the right side of the datum point.offset: *20 Datum Point 20 20 Negative Offset Positive Offset Creating an Offset Construction Line 1. choose a probe specifier. Two construction lines will appear at the same time. Please note: If you press Return or if you click on the tick button the construction line is drawn immediately using the current datum point.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Reversing the Offset After creating a construction line. 3. prefixing the value with an asterisk (*). if necessary. Choose one of the tools shown above and. Probe on the sheet to define the datum point for the construction line. Figure 449 Offset/Angle Entry Box 2. or The last entered offset/angle value is valid until you modify it. The Offset entry box appears below the dashboard. 482 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Entering a Positive and Negative Offset You can enter a positive and negative offset of the same value. Figure 448 Positive and Negative Offset Created at the Same Time Vertical .

using the same datum. you can create more construction lines. then enter the new offset value (but do not press Return) and then probe on the sheet for the new datum.MEDUSA4 Drafting Offset Construction Lines 4. but using a different datum. If you created a oblique offset construction line you can also enter a new angle. © CAD Schroer GmbH 20 20 Oblique Offset Example 30° 483 . create more offset construction lines of the same type.offset: 20 -45 degrees . Now you can either a. select Exit Tool from the popup menu to quit the tool or b. by entering a new value in the Offset field and then pressing Return. Figure 450 Vertical and Horizontal Offset Examples Vertical . For details see “Creating More Offset Construction Lines” on page 483.offset: 20 Figure 451 45 Degree Offset Examples +45 degrees .offset: 20 angle: 30 Creating More Offset Construction Lines Using the Same Datum After you have created an offset construction line.offset: 20 45° Figure 452 Oblique .offset: 20 Datum Point Construction Line Offset 20 Horizontal . Using a New Datum If you want to create another offset line of the same type.

a. b. Depending on the defaults. For example. Creating Series of Offset Construction Lines You can create series of construction lines by specifying the interval between the lines (incremental offset) or the absolute distance from the datum point (absolute offset). if the default is for incremental offsets.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines If you created an oblique offset construction line you can also enter a new angle. Figure 453 Example of Offset Vertical Construction Lines Incremental Offset Absolute Offset 60 60 30 90 You can create the construction lines shown in Figure 453 in two ways. you will not need to specify the a or the i. You enter absolute offsets for the construction lines as: a60 a90 The letter a denotes absolute values and specifies that the dimension is taken from the datum. 484 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the entry of the i is dispensable.It will have no effect on any following incremental number. The tools described in “Offset Construction Lines” on page 481. Please note: The Administrator can set a default for your project either for incremental or absolute offsets. The example below shows the offset entry if the default is set to an incremental offset. You enter the incremental offsets for the construction lines as: i60 i30 The letter i denotes incremental offsets. you only need to specify a when you want to use an absolute offset You can also combine incremental or absolute values with using the asterisk (*) to enter multiple positive and negative offsets.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 485 . Offset *60 *30 30 60 60 30 If the default for your project is absolute offsets then you have to type *60 *i30 to achieve the result shown above.MEDUSA4 Drafting Offset Construction Lines Figure 454 Example for Incremental Default Offset Default setting: incremental offset.

You have two possibilities to cancel this action: a. Choose Undo from the popup menu by clicking the right mouse button. Choose Undo from the Edit menu. Deleting a Single Construction Line To delete a single line: 1. or b. Select the line you want to delete using the Select tool 2. Deleting all Construction Lines To delete all construction lines: 1. b. Click the Deletes all temporary construction lines tool .MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Deleting and Hiding Construction Lines Construction lines are drawn on a single layer of a MEDUSA sheet. You can remove the construction lines either by deleting them or by hiding them. Choose the Deletes all the selected elements tool from the toolbar. 486 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or from the toolbar. MEDUSA deletes the selected construction line. Please note: You can also delete several selected construction lines. “Overview of Selection Methods” on page 98 explains the different methods for selecting elements. Choose Delete from the Edit menu. 2. Now you have two possibilities to delete the line: a.

For detailed information about the Layer Management dialog see ”Layers”.. Deactivate the Visible switch by clicking on the check mark. from the toolbar (if this is not 5.MEDUSA4 Drafting Deleting and Hiding Construction Lines Hiding Construction Lines You can hide construction lines by making the construction line layer invisible. Redraw the view by clicking on the Refresh Graphics tool done automatically. 1. Click OK to apply the setting and quit the dialog.) The construction lines are now hidden but not deleted. Open the Layer Manager dialog via Layers > Layer Manager. 3. By default the tab Layer Properties is displayed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 487 . in the menu bar. Figure 455 The Layer Manager Dialog: Tab Layer Properties Switch to set the selected visible or invisible 2.. “Layer Properties” on page 156. In order to make the construction lines visible again proceed as described before and activate the Visible switch. 4. Select the Construction lines Layer from the layer list.

Figure 456 Example Confine Construction Line 1 2. Finally redraw the sheet at full size. The construction lines do not extend beyond the area of the previous window. First zoom in to the area in which you want to work.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Confining Construction Lines to a Specific Area You often need construction lines to help designing small or detailed parts of a sheet. Figure 457 Example Confine Construction Line 2 3. Then draw the construction lines you require. Lines extending from one side of the sheet to the other may complicate areas where the lines are not required. Remember that construction lines extend to the limit of the current view window. Figure 458 Example Confine Construction Line 3 488 © CAD Schroer GmbH . To prevent such long construction lines zoom into the sheet so that the area you want to work on fills the screen. unless you changed the default settings of the construction line extent in the Switches dialog (see also “Introduction” on page 472). The following steps give an example on limiting construction lines to a certain area: 1. Now draw the required construction lines.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Transported Construction Lines Transported Construction Lines In conventional drafting you can set up temporary construction lines running from one drawing elevation to another. Figure 459 Tools to Switch Transportation Lines On and Off switch on switch off transportation line You can deactivate all of the transportation lines at once. You can do this using transportation lines. • If the transportation line is deactivated start and end point squares are empty. A dashed line appears on the sheet. Probe in the sheet to enter the start point of the transportation line. Probe once again to enter the end point. © CAD Schroer GmbH 489 . • If the transportation line is activated start and end point squares are filled out. 2. Start and end point of the transportation line are marked with small squares. 1. This process involves transporting ordinary construction lines to different locations on a sheet. That is you can create construction lines between elevations that are perpendicularly adjacent. Transportation lines 1. (see also Figure 435. (see Figure 435) These tools are only enabled if the transportation line is selected otherwise they are disabled. Open the Defaults dialog via Options > Defaults from the menu bar. You can activate or deactivate a transportation line via the Switch on/off transportation line tools. You can also project construction lines into elevations that are not perpendicularly adjacent. Choose the tab Switches. “Tools for Projecting Construction Lines” on page 473) 2. Choose the Creates transportation lines tool from the Creation Tools tooltray. 3.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Figure 460 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches By default the Enable Transportation lines option is activated. Please note: In this case start and end point squares are still filled out. To reverse the action and activate the transportation lines again click the Defaults button of the Switches tab. 3. There is no transportation line active any more. 4. 490 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Delete the check mark in the field and quit the dialog by clicking the Close button. So you cannot recognize active or inactive transportation lines by there start and end point.

Figure 461 The Deflection Angle of Transported Construction Lines The construction line intersects the Transportation line at q angle The transported construction line is deflected at q angle to the transportation line Transportation line Transported Construction line Construction line Using Transported Construction Lines as Construction Aids When you have transported construction lines to different locations on the sheet. The deflection angle is equal to the angle of the intersection between the construction line and the transportation line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Transported Construction Lines Deflection Angles When a construction line intersects a transportation line. you can use these lines as a basis on which to make a new drawing elevation. Figure 462 shows an example of a construction line that has been transported to different locations on a sheet. the resulting transported construction line is projected at a deflection angle. Figure 462 Transporting a Construction Line Transportation line Transported Transportation line construction line Second intersection First intersection Transported construction line Vertical construction line created at this point © CAD Schroer GmbH 491 . that is switched ON.

You can project construction lines: • Horizontally.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Projected Construction Lines You can project orthogonal construction lines from existing design geometry and use the resulting construction lines to create other drawing elevations. or obliquely through a profile • From a section line through part of the design • From a rotated section line through part of the design Projecting Construction Lines Through a Profile When you project construction lines through a profile. Move the mouse pointer into the drawing area and click right to open the popup menu. vertically. 492 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 463 Projecting Construction Lines from a Profile To create construction lines through a profile: 1. Choose the Projection construction lines from profiles tool . 2. 3. construction lines are projected through points of interest on the selected geometry that would be seen as edges when viewed from the projection direction. Select the profile. Figure 463 shows an example.

Vertical Vertical lines are created considering each important point of the profile. and through each vertex in the section line (except the end points). c. Figure 465 Creating a Single Sectional View © CAD Schroer GmbH 493 . 5. Click Exit tool to discard the tool. b. construction lines are projected through each intersection of the section line with the associated geometry. Horizontal Horizontal lines are created considering each important point of the profile.MEDUSA4 Drafting Projected Construction Lines Figure 464 Popup Menu For Projection Construction Lines from Profiles 4. Projecting Construction Lines Through a Section When you project construction lines through a section line. Figure 465 and Figure 466 show the use of the default projection angle of 90 degrees. Select: a. Oblique and specify the direction of the construction lines by entering a from and to point or entering an angle via Utilities > Protractor Construction lines are created according to the specified direction.

You can also project construction lines from rotated section lines: 1. Create a horizontal. Select the Projects a rotated construction line from a section line tool 494 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. .MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Figure 466 Creating a Multi-plane Sectional View The plane break line (B-B) is also projected as an aid to offset crosshatching. You can ignore the plane break line during crosshatching if you prefer as shown in Figure 467: Figure 467 Crosshatching a View (Ignoring the Plane Break Line) To create construction lines through a section line: 1. Construction lines are projected through each intersection of the section line with the associated geometry. Select the Project the construction lines from a section line tool . Choose the New section line tool . 3. 3. Choose the New section line tool . Create a line which intersects the profile by setting first a start point. 2. vertical or oblique line which intersects the profile by setting start and end point of the line. a second point where the line changes its direction and at last an end point.

Figure 468 Projected Construction Lines From a Rotated Section Line projected rotated construction line section line Please note: The Projects the construction lines from a section line/rotated section line tools are only enabled if a section line is selected. © CAD Schroer GmbH 495 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Projected Construction Lines The construction lines are projected as shown in the following figure.

opens the X-Line Setup dialog. ”Point Recognition”. ”Properties”.tool must be switched on deletes all construction lines on the sheet. Figure 469 Dynamic Construction Lines Tools Popup Menus For dynamic construction lines the following popup menus are on the right mouse button: Figure 470 Popup Menus Popup when cursor positioned over tool Deletes auxiliary Lines Popup when cursor positioned over drawing area . ”Offset” and ”Keyboard Buttons” related to dynamic construction lines.. ”Fixed Point Definition”. For details see “Properties” on page 497. perpendicular or crossed to lines. The use of these tools is explained later in “Creating Dynamic Construction Lines” on page 500. Undo removes the dynamic construction lines last created with this tool. Exit Tool terminates the function.. You can use the tools shown below to automatically draw dynamic construction lines tangential. ”Angle”. 496 © CAD Schroer GmbH . In this chapter you get information on the topics ”Popup Menus”. circles and arcs. Properties.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Dynamic Construction Lines MEDUSA also provides extremely powerful tools for producing dynamic construction lines.

dynamically along the line or stops at the point found last. the cursor display changes to a T (=Tangential) or inverted T. The points that are recognized depend upon the type of element that is within the search radius. through which the auxiliary line is drawn. When these are found.. As each suitable point is found. and the possible construction line that could be created at that point. This moves. is always indicated as a small box. from the popup menu which appears Figure 471 XLine . © CAD Schroer GmbH 497 . until the next point is found. the point.Setup Dialog Search Radius indicates the size of an area around the cursor in which MEDUSA uses to search for and detect other geometry. 2. • With lines.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dynamic Construction Lines Properties To display the X-Line Setup dialog: 1. When no geometry is found within the search radius.Setup dialog as described above. • With circles. the display of the point switches over to Fre for a free point. tangent points are defined as suitable locations. With your cursor positioned over any of the Dynamic Construction Lines tools click the right mouse button. Angular increment width indicates the angle offset with which the dynamic construction lines are constructed from a fixed point.. In order to fix points press the Ctrl Key of your keyboard to define the fixed point (see “Keyboard Buttons” on page 499). Select Properties. the cursor display changes to show the point. MEDUSA automatically recognizes suitable points at which the construction lines may be created as you move your cursor around the drawing. Point Recognition When you select a Dynamic Construction Lines tool. The search radius for finding points is configurable via the XLine . depending on the adjusted point function.

Move your cursor until the line you want is displayed and click left. 3. crossed. Figure 473 Example Dynamic Construction Line construction line Fixed Point Definition 1. With these tools the field for the Offset input is actived in this state and you have to move the cursor into the Angle field in order to enter a value. Press and hold the Ctrl key to define a datum point. Select an auxiliary line tool. 5. Angle and Offset entry boxes appear at the top left corner of your drawing area. Use the XLine .MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Angle When you select one of the tools either the tangential or perpendicular Dynamic Construction Lines tool. as shown in Figure 472. Once you have identified the location leave the mouse in that position and type to enter the desired angle into the Angle entry box. 4. Move the cursor into the proximity of the correct point of tangent. When you select the tool Dynamic Construction Lines. to create an auxiliary line to this circle tangential under 130°: 1. 3. Notice that the data in the angle entry box updates dynamically. 498 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. The field is activated and the input can take place directly. The construction line is created. The dynamic construction line is created at the specified angle. only the Angle field appears. Figure 472 Dynamic Construction Line Angle and Offset Entry Boxes For example. Press Return. 2. As you move your cursor you will notice that sample construction lines are displayed at 20 degree intervals through the datum point. Move your cursor over the drawing until the display shows a free point.Setup dialog as described in section “Properties” on page 497 and define the Angular increment width as 20.

This is dynamically shown on the screen as you move your cursor around the drawing. Offsets can be negative or positive. To create an offset construction line: 1. the line is shown offset from the cursor crosshairs. Pressing Shift helps you to create tangents between circles and circular arcs. The construction line is created with the desired offset under the specified angle. © CAD Schroer GmbH 499 . Type the desired value in the Offset field (see Figure 472. A negative value places the line on the opposite side of the recognized point to the cursor. As you move the mouse pointer over the drawing.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dynamic Construction Lines Please note: If you define a datum point on a circle the line is drawn through the circle center. The Offset input field is activated as soon as you select one of these tools. Offset Tangential and perpendicular dynamic construction lines can also be drawn with offset. A positive value creates the line on the same side of the recognized points as the cursor. Figure 474 Positive and Negative Offsets positive offset negative offset Keyboard Buttons Ctrl Shift Pressing Ctrl fixes the datum point as described in section “Fixed Point Definition” on page 498. 2. If you want to create a further line with another offset. “Dynamic Construction Line Angle and Offset Entry Boxes” on page 498) and select a point on the drawing. you have to move the cursor into the Offset field again in order to be able to insert a new value.

If you changed the setting during the session. the last used value is displayed. The Angle and Offset input fields appear below the dashboard. 3. Tangential Dynamic Construction Line The Dynamic auxiliary line. Move the pointer close to the line you would like to work on.00. 2. The default setting of both values is 0. 4.00. Click the left mouse button to create the construction line. perpendicular or crossed to an element at a certain datum point. Click left on the Dynamic auxiliary line. The tool detects the line closest to the cursor and snaps to the closest point on the line. Figure 475 Tangential Dynamic Construction Line Dynamic Construction line current point of line cursor position 500 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is described in the following sections. The dynamic construction line is always displayed dynamically and tangentially to the found line. tangential tool creates a dynamic construction line which is tangential to the selected geometry. tangential tool. 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Creating Dynamic Construction Lines You can create dynamic construction lines tangential. enter 0. The focus is set on the Offset field. If another value is set than the default one. You can switch between the input fields by using the tabkey.

perpendicular tool creates a dynamic construction line. This function works in the same manner as explained in “Tangential Dynamic Construction Line” on page 500 with the difference that only an Angle input filed is displayed. One of the construction lines is tangential to the selected geometry.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Dynamic Construction Lines Perpendicular Dynamic Construction Line The Dynamic auxiliary line. perpendicular to the selected geometry. crossed creates two dynamic construction lines which are perpendicular to each other. © CAD Schroer GmbH 501 . Figure 476 Perpendicular Dynamic Construction Line current point of line auxiliary line cursor position Crossed Dynamic Construction Line The Dynamic auxiliary line. This function works in the same manner as explained in ”Tangential Dynamic Construction Line”.

Creating Dynamic Construction Lines Parallel to Angled Lines with Offset You can quickly produce offset lines in both directions for diagonal lines: 1. Now move the cursor until it is slightly above the line and click the left mouse button again. Figure 478 Example Dynamic Construction Lines with Offset 1 4. 3. Move the cursor close to. tangential tool. it is offset above the line. A second offset construction line appears. but this time. An offset construction line appears below the line. 2. Enter an offset value in the input field . 502 © CAD Schroer GmbH . and click the left mouse button. but below the diagonal line.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines Figure 477 Crossed Dynamic Construction Line auxiliary line 1 current line point auxiliary line 2 Cursor position Usage of Dynamic Construction Lines The following sections give you some examples for using the dynamic construction lines. Select the Dynamic auxiliary line.

Move the cursor close to the first circle. tangential tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Dynamic Construction Lines Figure 479 Example Dynamic Construction Lines with Offset 2 Creating Construction Lines Perpendicular to Diagonal Lines To create construction lines perpendicular to diagonal lines: 1. Move the cursor close to the diagonal line and click the left mouse button. Select the Dynamic auxiliary line. Figure 481 Example Dynamic Construction Line as a Tangent between 2 Circles 1 © CAD Schroer GmbH 503 . As soon as the tangent is found. press and hold down the Shift key. perpendicular tool. Enter an offset value of 0 in the input field . 2. 3. 2. Select the Dynamic auxiliary line. Figure 480 Example Dynamic Construction Lines Perpendicular to Diagonal Outlines Creating Dynamic Construction Lines as Tangents Between Two Circles To create a construction line tangential to two circles: 1. 3.

Keep Shift pressed and move the cursor close to the second circle until the required tangent point is found. Figure 483 Example Dynamic Construction Lines as a Crossed Tangent Between 2 Circles 1 Deleting Dynamic Construction Lines This function deletes all construction lines from the drawing. 504 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Crossed tool. 2. Please note: Remember. 5. Figure 482 Example Dynamic Construction Line as a Tangent Between 2 Circles 2 Creating Dynamic Construction Lines as Crossed Tangents Between Two Circles 1. Now you see a further tangential mark T at the second arc or circle. you can select the Undo option from the Edit menu and select the Delete all construction lines option from the Undo list. Repeat steps 2 to 5 of the previous example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Construction Lines 4. if you want to restore accidentally deleted construction lines. Click the left mouse button to create the tangent between both circles. Select the Dynamic Auxiliary Line.

.................................... 558 © CAD Schroer GmbH 505 ........ 542 • Welding Symbols ........................MEDUSA4 Drafting DIMENSIONING This chapter contains background information and procedures for creating and editing dimensions................................... 534 • Creating Isometric Dimensions ........................................................................... 531 • Creating Half Symmetrical Dimensions ....................................................................................... 529 • Circle and Arc Dimension Properties ................................... 507 • Setting the Default Dimension Standard ...................... 538 • Feature Control Frames and Datum ............................. 530 • Creating Symmetrical Dimensions............... 508 • Properties...................................................... Styles and the Dashboard ................................................................................................................... 552 • Surface Finish Symbols .................................................................................................... 506 • Dimensioning Standards .......... • Dimension Tools.. 511 • Creating Basic Linear Dimensions. 516 • Creating Angular Dimensions ................ 539 • Editing Dimensions ............................. 525 • Angular Dimension Properties .......................................................................... 536 • Creating Notes ........................... 512 • Linear Dimension Properties.......... 527 • Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions ............................................... 533 • Creating Datum Offset Dimensions .............................................................

Most are variations of the dimension types and they are explained in this chapter. Figure 484 Dimension Tools Datum Coordinate Diameter Angle Offset from a datum and Datum named group Isometric Feature Control Datum Arrange and explode dimensions Load welding symbol Edit dimensions Chain Radial and Offset Radius Arc length Symmetrical Half symmetrical Note Free Feature Control Frame Gaps in overlapping dimension leader lines Load surface finish symbol 506 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dimension tools are provided in the Text + Dimension tooltray. as well as ancillary dimensioning tools.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Dimension Tools There are many types of dimension available in MEDUSA. such as geometric tolerancing and Feature Control Frames.

Figure 485 illustrates the difference between ISO and ANSI standards. Figure 485 Dimensioning Standards © CAD Schroer GmbH 507 . For example. which determine the format of the dimensioning. The dimensioning may also be subject to internal company standards.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Standards Dimensioning Standards In conventional drafting. which may define the way in which dimensioning values are presented. dimensioning is generally drawn to recognized national or international standards. MEDUSA allows you to create dimensions to one of five standards. namely: • ANSI • ISO • BSI • DIN • JIS The dimensioning standard that you use determines how the dimensioning is presented.

To set the default dimensioning standard select the Defaults … option from the Options menu. The Defaults dialog appears displaying the tab Dimension by default.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Setting the Default Dimension Standard You can select a dimension style and standard to use as default when you create dimensioning. Figure 486 Defaults Dialog: Tab Dimension 508 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

For an example see modifying the dimension standards. If this option is set.bat. Update Standard uses the current settings as the standard for dimensioning. Blob symbol of the starting point when using coordinate dimensioning. The Defaults dialog appears. Parameters for the DIN Tolerance Text Height section are: Normal sets the text height for the tolerance according to the text high of the dimension. Parameters for Dimension Text are: Normal displays dimension text with normal font weight (default setting). Clicking left on the button Symbol opens the Special Characters dialog. Select the Defaults … option from the Options menu. din. Arrows and Gaps shows the definitions for arrows and gaps for the selected Standard. It is used internally. boldness of plotted dimensions can be set to a certain value by defining environment variables inside the login. see below. You can change the settings by clicking left on the appropriate button and choose a new symbol from the Point Function dialog (see ”Lines”. Clicking left on the button Symbol opens the Special Characters dialog. Diametric Letters and symbols for defining the Prefix and Suffix of the dimensioning text for diametric dimensioning. ansi. Escape is a placeholder for the display of the formats. 1. jis and iso. Cancel. © CAD Schroer GmbH 509 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Setting the Default Dimension Standard You find the following entries inside the Dimension tab: Standard Enables you to select from one of the standards: bsi. you can modify the dimension standards. Help Apply applies the settings currently shown in the dialog. below. or create a personal copy of a modified standard. If you wish. For details see the Administrator Guide. chapter “Setting up Boldness for Plotting Dimensions“. The buttons on this tab are: Apply. Radial Letters and symbols for defining the Prefix and Suffix of the dimensioning text for radial dimensioning. Cancel closes the dialog without making any further changes. Small sets the text height for the tolerance smaller than the text high of the dimension. ”Point Functions” on page 379). Bold displays dimension text with font weight bold.

510 © CAD Schroer GmbH . default standard whenever required. You can then revert to the original. If you select Cancel the current standard dimensioning settings are lost.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning 2. The dialog asks if you wish to save or discard these changes. Click: • Apply to apply a modified version of the dimensioning standard to the sheet. Please note: If you click Update standard. 4. • Update standard to reset your personal copy of that particular standard. 5. explaining that you have changed the defaults. a dialog appears. Select the tab Dimension. Modify the standard as required. If you select Save then the current standard is used in any MEDUSA session. select arrows of a different style. Select the dimensioning standard you wish to use. the current settings become standard and they will be used whenever you select that standard. Next time you start MEDUSA the old default settings are used again. When closing the session after selecting any of these options. for example. 3.

for example. Styles and the Dashboard All properties of any dimension may be set by using the appropriate dialog. Any particular dimension set-up may be stored as a style. with a name for instant re-use. an example is given in Figure 487. Select the Style button at the bottom of the dialog and use the style system to create a new style. ”Changing Styles and Style Properties” on page 304. the most commonly accessed attributes are displayed on the dashboard. Figure 487 Dashboard: Dimensioning The dashboard and the Properties dialogs are used to display properties and set them. To create a new dimension style use the properties dialogs. You can: • Add a diameter symbol to the dimension text • Specify the number of decimal places • Position the text outside the dimension line • Select a different dimension style • Access the full dimension properties • Create a new dimension in the last selected dimension style Properties may be set before the dimension is positioned.MEDUSA4 Drafting Properties. Further details of creating styles are given in ”Dashboard”. Styles and the Dashboard Properties. both for single dimension and multiple dimension types. Linear Dimension Properties © CAD Schroer GmbH 511 . To store a style MEDUSA has to be in administrator mode. during positioning and after a dimension has been positioned. According to the kind of dimension following dialogs are available: • Linear Dimension Properties dialog (see “Linear Dimension Properties” on page 516) • Angular Dimension Properties dialog (see “Angular Dimension Properties” on page 527) • Radial Dimension Properties dialog (see “Circle and Arc Dimension Properties” on page 530) • Arc Dimension Properties dialog (see “Circle and Arc Dimension Properties” on page 530) As with other MEDUSA entities. the dialog (see “Linear Dimension Properties” on page 516) to set up the various properties of your new dimension.

The leader lines extend and the dimension line moves to wherever you position the cursor. 5. 6. the direction will change depending on the cursor position. chain or datum format. For a parallel 512 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If you wish to specify the direction of the dimension. Choose one of the linear dimension tools (see Figure 488) from the Text + Dimension tooltray. 2. For a vertical dimension. Repeat step 4 until you have selected the last point for dimensioning. • If this is the last point you want to dimension. click right and select from the popup menu. Figure 488 Linear Dimension Formats Procedure To create linear dimensions: 1. and then click left. Otherwise. Move the cursor to the next point that you want to dimension. Choose a probe specifier (optional). 3. For a horizontal dimension. coordinate. move the cursor to the left or the right of the dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Creating Basic Linear Dimensions You can create linear dimensions in one of three formats. • If this is not the last point you wish to dimension. The dimension appears on the cursor. move the cursor above or below the dimension. Figure 488 shows an example for each format. click the middle mouse button. 4. click the left mouse button. Move the cursor to the point on the line where you want to start the dimension.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 513 . For details on the entries inside the popup menu see “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513. “Example of Parallel Dimension” on page 514). If Parallel is chosen it becomes disabled (see Figure 490.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Basic Linear Dimensions dimension. move the cursor so it is either inside or outside both the horizontal and vertical regions described. You can remove the whole dimension by choosing Undo from the popup menu. Parallel snaps dimensioning to a parallel line against a virtual line between the first and second point probed for dimensioning. Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear While dimensioning the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. 7. Figure 489 Popup Menu For Linear Dimensions The following entries are available: Horizontal snaps dimensioning to the horizontal direction. If it is chosen it becomes disabled. The dimension is created. Move your cursor to the place where you wish to position the dimension text and then click left. Vertical snaps dimensioning to the vertical direction. If it is chosen it becomes disabled.

Figure 491 Example of Perpendicular Dimension specified end point of the dimension (virtual) line datum point for a symmetrical dimension right angle 514 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Figure 490 Example of Parallel Dimension (virtual) line datum point for a symmetrical dimension specified end point of the dimension Perpendicular creates the dimension at right angles with a (virtual) line crossing the datum point and a specified end point.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 515 . This option is useful for dimensioning a single segment. Exit Tool quits the tool. You can undo several actions. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. Undo is used for canceling the last action.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Basic Linear Dimensions Automatic snaps dimensioning to that direction which comes closest to the current position of the cursor related to the points probed for the dimension. Probe points is used for snapping probing inside the drawing area to the next point of an element. If Automatic is chosen it becomes disabled inside the popup menu. This option is enabled only before probing the first point for dimensioning. Properties opens the Linear Dimension Properties dialog. If this option is chosen Probe line is enabled. This option is enabled only before probing the first point for dimensioning. Probe line is used for snapping probing to the next line segment of an element. For details see “Linear Dimension Properties” on page 516. If this option is chosen Probe points is enabled.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Linear Dimension Properties You can use the Linear Dimension Properties dialog to create or edit the default linear dimension properties. The Linear Dimension Properties dialog has two tabs: • ”Style and Format” (see below) and • „Text and Arrows“ explained on page 520. The buttons are explained on page 524. option from the popup menu. Style and Format Figure 492 Linear Dimension Properties: Style and Format Tab The entries of this tab are explained on the following pages.. and then select the Properties. 516 © CAD Schroer GmbH . To display the Linear Dimension Properties dialog.. select a dimension line.

from left to right it is: • No tolerance values but only tolerance code is given • Tolerance shown as limits of dimension • Tolerance shown as dimension plus variations • Tolerance shown as dimension plus symmetrical variation The lower row defines the style of the dimension. see ”Editing Dimensions”. see “Dimension and Tolerance Format” on page 518. © CAD Schroer GmbH 517 . The Standard option is merely the same functionality as can be accessed by using the popup menu when editing a dimension. The options. “Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions” on page 543. The upper row defines how tolerance values are displayed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Linear Dimension Properties Dimension and Tolerance Style Figure 493 Dimension and Tolerance Style Buttons The Dimension and Tolerance style buttons control the manner in which the basic dimension value is displayed. from left to right are: • Normal dimension (no identification marking of dimensions) • Absolute dimension (marked by a rectangle) • Unscaled dimensions (underlined) • Test dimension (marked by a sausage) Please note: To change the calculated value of an unscaled dimension. Standard Figure 494 Standard The Standard option allows to change the standard for selected dimensions.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Dual Dimension Figure 495 Dual Dimension Buttons The Dual dimension buttons allow dimensions to be simultaneously displayed in metric and imperial units. radius .dat (see the Customization Guide. Defaults. Prefix. metric threads and chamfers 45° affect both prefix and suffix. The basic display is always in sheet units and the dual display is in the other. The setting is valid if using dual dimension alongside primary dimension. It is also possible to specify user defined prefixes and suffixes in the defaults.dat). If you switch to ANSI and use the buttons. The point of having the buttons is that they set the prefix and suffix to the values defined in the used dimension standard. Suffix The Prefix and Suffix fields control any fixed text surrounding the numerical dimension data. To define a prefix or suffix. Dimension and Tolerance Format Figure 496 Dimension and Tolerance Format Options This area controls the numerics and text parts of the dimension. you see the prefix disappears and the suffix is set to DIA or R. The options. from left to right are: • Toggle dual dimensioning On/Off • Dual dimension beneath primary dimension • Dual dimension other side of witness line • Dual dimension alongside primary dimension • Spaces is the value defining the space MEDUSA will leave between primary and dual dimension components. User Interface. either: • The common options Default linear dimension format . Linear dimension format for diameter . This distance is in sheet units. • Select an option from the Prefix or Suffix pulldown menu 518 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

select the Limit/Fit choice box. Test percentage is active when a Test Tolerance Usage is selected. It is limited to the range 0 to 100. and then type the required information into the text entry box. Value The dimension value itself is automatically calculated from the drawing. and if it is set to zero then the test percentage text block is not displayed in the dimension. You can enter the values manually or you can select the Auto tolerance choice box to allow MEDUSA to calculate them. The button is grayed out until you select the Limit/Fit choice box. click the Symbol button. may be entered for any dimension style which displays them. This function is only available. Figure 498 Example Test Dimension © CAD Schroer GmbH 519 . Dual Dual tolerances may be specified for dual dimensions that display tolerances. To display this lookup table. To define and display limit and fit values. select the Value choice box and type the required dimension value in the text entry box below the choice box. If Auto Tolerance is used then the values are calculated automatically. in the form of upper and lower limits. To change the calculated value for the dimension. select the Look up table button. If required. click in the entry box. when MEDMECH product is included in the productlist of your project.MEDUSA4 Drafting Linear Dimension Properties • Type a value into the Prefix or Suffix entry box To enter special symbols into the Prefix or Suffix entry box. Limit/Fit Limit and Fit values may be entered for any dimension style which uses them. If Auto Tolerance is selected you must define a Limit and Fit in order for the calculation to be performed. and select the required symbol from the Symbol dialog. you can select the text from a lookup table which shows all company standard options. Figure 497 Limits and Fits Dialog Tolerance Tolerances.

These options are mostly used when creating new styles. it repositions the text outside the leader lines. This Text position area allows the user to override these defaults. If there is not sufficient room. The options from left to right are: • Position Auto (default) • Force Inside • Force Outside 520 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Text and Arrows The Text and Arrows tab on the Linear Dimension Properties dialog controls the graphical display properties. Figure 499 Linear Dimension Properties: Text and Arrows Text Position Figure 500 Text Position buttons MEDUSA automatically calculates whether there is sufficient space within the leader lines to accommodate the dimension text.

or using dual dimensioning on a metric sheet. you have several extra options. © CAD Schroer GmbH 521 . but large dimensions are often displayed in feet. By default the layer Dimensions is selected. Options from left to right are: • Automatic direction selection • Horizontal • Vertical • Parallel • Perpendicular Imperial Text Figure 503 Imperial Text Options When dimensioning an imperial sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Linear Dimension Properties Layer Figure 501 Layer selector Allows the dimension to be positioned on an alternative layer. Drawings tend to be constructed in inches. Options available from left to right are: • No units • Display as inches • Display as feet and inches • Display as feet You can also choose to display imperial dimensions using fractions. Direction Figure 502 Direction buttons Allows the selection of the direction of geometry being dimensioned to be set.

the following types of dimension are available from left to right: • Coordinate dimension • Datum dimension • Chain dimension • Symmetrical dimension • Half a symmetrical dimension • Dimension offset from a datum Spacing Figure 505 Dimension Spacing Option You can use this area to control the spacing between witness lines for dimensions which have multiple witness lines. Text Format Figure 506 Text Format Options This area provides control over the physical display of the dimension text. 522 © CAD Schroer GmbH . You can choose the text height (in sheet units) and a special scale for a particular dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Dimension Type Figure 504 Dimension Type Options A wide variety of dimension types are available in MEDUSA.

The basic set-up for arrows and gaps is a function of the dimension standard. 15. Arrows and Gaps Figure 507 Arrows and Gaps Options You can set the point functions for arrows and gaps. which appear on leader and witness lines. Values lower than Null are impossible. Formats for primary and dual part of dual dimensions are arranged to display the required number of decimal places. arrow to the set Graphics heads. Decimal places which are non zero are always displayed for example. also with a different number being displayed for the dual part of a dual dimension. Click left the icon displaying the sign that you want to change and a dialog of all point functions appears.MEDUSA4 Drafting Linear Dimension Properties You can format the dimension with any number of decimal places. gaps and texts will be enlarged by the factor 2. For example. Select the required point function. gaps and texts of the selected dimension Scale value (default is 1.000 or 15. see “Dimensioning Standards” on page 507. Properties like the text format are not changed.00).75.00. Scaling is valid for the graphical display only. if you set the value to 2. 15. Graphic Scaling Figure 508 Graphic Scaling Option Graphic Scaling changes arrow heads.5. to suit special requirements. There is a toggle option to control the display of trailing zeros on exact dimensions. If a Null is entered an error message is given. © CAD Schroer GmbH 523 . So with a dimension format set to show three decimal places you can choose whether to display 15.

Reset The Reset button updates the properties of the dialog to reflect the various defaults. Help This button opens the online documentation. Style This button is only active in Administration Mode. Cancel This button closes the properties dialog. 524 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The settings are not applied on the selected dimension. section Creating and Editing MEDUSA Styles. For details see the Administration Guide.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Buttons OK and Apply The buttons apply the current settings on the selected dimension. chapter Administration. Ok additionally closes the dialog.

Please note: If you use the three-point method to define your dimension. it is important to probe all the points either in a clockwise or counterclockwise manner to form the dimension. To change the dimension from an internal angle to an external angle. move the cursor across one of the leader lines and the dimension changes. you use a number of probes to define different elements of the dimension. depending upon the dimensioning tool you selected. Popup Menu While Dimensioning Angles While dimensioning angles clicking the right mouse button gives you different kinds of popup menus: © CAD Schroer GmbH 525 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Angular Dimensions Creating Angular Dimensions You can dimension the internal or external angle between: • Two existing line segments • An existing line segment and a specified reference line • Two angled lines that do not intersect. The three methods of dimensioning angles are shown in the figure above. All other methods are not restricted. Figure 509 Creating Angular Dimensions When you create angular dimensions. Examples of different dimensions are shown in Figure 509. or vice-versa then. before placing the final point.

Exit Tool quits the tool. Figure 510 Popup Menu for Angular Dimensions Properties opens the Angular Dimension Properties dialog. Undo is used for canceling the last action. You can undo several actions. 526 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Undo and Exit Tool. • If the last probe was made and the dimensioning value is visible at the cursor the popup changes as given in the following figure. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning • As long as you probe points to specify the angle which shall be dimensioned the popup provides the entries Properties. They are also in the popup menu given below. For details see “Angular Dimension Properties” on page 527.

Figure 511 Angular Dimension Properties: Style and Format Tab Figure 512 Angular Dimension Properties: Text and Arrows Tab © CAD Schroer GmbH 527 . For details on the other entries see the relevant descriptions in “Linear Dimension Properties” on page 516.MEDUSA4 Drafting Angular Dimension Properties Angular Dimension Properties The angular dimension properties are similar to linear dimension properties. There are no dual dimensions and the format options are different. Text Format is explained in “Text Format” on page 528. The main difference is in formatting.

minutes and seconds 528 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Text Format Figure 513 Angular Dimension Text Format Options Angles may be displayed in the following formats: • Degrees • Degrees to the required number of decimal places (0-3) • Degrees and minutes • Degrees.

4. The dimension text is placed on the sheet. © CAD Schroer GmbH 529 . A radial dimension line appears on the sheet. The dimension text is placed on the sheet. Move the cursor to the position where you want the dimension text. and length of an arc • The radius of a circle or arc when the center of the circle or arc is outside of the sheet. Dimensioning the Radius of a Circle 1. Move the cursor to the position where you want the dimension text. 3. Probe the position on the arc where you want the dimension line to start. Probe the position on the arc where you want the dimension line to end. 2. Choose the tool Create radial dimension . 3. 2. Dimensioning Arcs 1. then click left. 3. 2. diameter. 5. Specify whether you want the dimension text inside or outside of the dimension line by probing inside or outside of the arc. A diametric dimension line appears on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions Creating Circle and Arc Dimensions You can dimension: • The radius and diameter of a circle • The radius. Probe the position on the circumference of the circle where you want the dimension’s leader line to exit. then click left. Choose the Dimensions the diameters of circles and holes tool . Dimensioning the Diameter of a Circle 1. Position the dimension on the sheet by moving the cursor and then click left. Probe the position on the circumference of the circle or arc where you want the dimension’s leader line to exit. The dimension appears on the cursor. Choose the Dimension the length of the arc tool .

Undo is used for canceling the last action. Probe the position where you want the dimension text to be. Popup Menu While Dimensioning Circles and Arcs While dimensioning circles and arcs clicking the right mouse button opens the following popup menu: Figure 514 Popup Menu for Dimensioning Circles and Arcs Properties opens either the Radial Dimension Properties or Arc Dimension Properties dialog. Choose the Dimensions the offset radius tool . 3. Probe the position on the arc. Exit Tool quits the tool. You can undo several actions. The dialog is opened with the right mouse button and it has the same contents as for linear dimensions therefore see chapter “Linear Dimension Properties” on page 516 for details. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. 4. Circle and Arc Dimension Properties Also for circle and arc dimension properties can be displayed and changed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Dimensioning a Radius with an Off Sheet Center 1. 530 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For details see “Circle and Arc Dimension Properties” on page 530. 2. where you want the dimension line to start. Probe the position to place the end of the dimension line and then click left.

Choose a probe specifier (optional). The dimension is created attached to the cursor. 2. The probed point defines the symmetry datum point to which the dimension relates to. The dimension is placed on the sheet. Choose Exit tool from the popup menu to quit the tool. Please note: Note that the leader lines extend and the dimension line moves to any point you position the cursor. the dimension line extends symmetrically to both sides of the specified point. When you move the cursor. Figure 515 Example of a Horizontal Symmetrical Dimension X datum point for the symmetrical dimension can be placed anywhere on the line To create the symmetrical dimension you have to choose Horizontal from the popup menu For creating symmetrical dimensions. You can use the different entries to change the orientation of the dimension. Repeat the described procedure to dimension further points 7. Move the cursor to the point on the line where you want to end the dimension line and click left or click middle if you wish to dimension more than one point. Choose the Symmetrical dimension tool . do the following steps: 1. © CAD Schroer GmbH 531 . 3. Position the cursor at the centerline of the line that you want to dimension and click left. 4. Move the cursor to the point where you wish to position the dimension and click left. 6. The popup menu accords to that one explained in “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513. 5. While dimensioning a popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Symmetrical Dimensions Creating Symmetrical Dimensions MEDUSA provides a tool to create dimensions which are symmetrical to a specified point.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning If you call up the Linear Dimension Properties dialog by using the Properties entry from the popup menu. you find symmetrical in the Style field at the bottom of the dialog. Figure 516 Cutout of the Properties Dialog 532 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

2. You can use it to change the orientation of the dimension. Choose the Half a symmetrical dimension tool .MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Half Symmetrical Dimensions Creating Half Symmetrical Dimensions MEDUSA provides a tool to create half a dimension. The text denotes the whole symmetrical geometry even though only one half is designed. 6. The dimension is placed on the sheet. do the following steps: 1. Choose a probe specifier (optional). you find half symmetrical in the Style field at the bottom of the dialog. The dimension appears attached to the cursor. 5. You created now the datum point of the half symmetrical dimension. Position the cursor where the start point of the line that you want to dimension meets the centerline of the geometry and click left. Move the cursor to the point where you wish to position the dimension and click left. Move the cursor to the end point of the line that you want to dimension and click left or click middle if you wish to dimension more than one point. You can dimension further points by repeating the described procedure until you quit the Half a symmetrical dimension tool. 4. If you call up the Linear Dimension Properties dialog by using the Properties entry from the popup menu. 3. While dimensioning the right mouse popup as described in “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513 is available. Figure 517 Example of a Horizontal Half a Symmetrical Dimension To create this horizontal half symmetrical dimension you have to choose “Horizontal” from the popup menu X datum point for the half symmetrical dimension For creating half symmetrical dimensions. The dimension is created attached to the cursor. Figure 518 Cutout of the Properties Dialog © CAD Schroer GmbH 533 .

534 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 519 The Datum Offset Dimension Creation Tools Creates a datum named group for an offset datum dimension tool Dimension offset from a datum The Creates a datum named group for an offset datum dimension tool creates a group with a datum prim and text to define the datum position. Figure 520 Example of Offset Dimensioning horizontal offset dimension offset datum vertical offset dimension For creating a datum offset dimension. You do this by using the tools creating a datum offset dimension. The Dimension offset from a datum tool creates the dimension with regard to the datum point. do the following steps: 1. It is important that you know the exact location of the datum prim on the sheet as the start of the dimension line will be based on this location.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Creating Datum Offset Dimensions You can dimension an element when only half of the element is drawn on the sheet. or when the location of an element is important with regard to another point which is not on the sheet. Choose the Creates a datum named group for an offset datum dimension tool A coordinates input field is displayed top left in the drawing area. .

When you move the cursor on the sheet. the dimension text changes according to the distance between the offset datum to the current mouse pointer position. 8. The datum prim and the inscribed X. You can use it for changing the arrangement and properties. Choose the Dimension offset from a datum tool 5. 6. 9. . Repeat the described steps to create another datum offset dimension or quit the tool. Move the cursor to the position on the sheet where you want to place the datum prim and click left. Click left on the point of the element where you want to end the dimension. This acts as the datum for the dimensions. or click middle if you wish to dimension more than one point. 4.and Y coordinates appear crosshair attached to the cursor. The datum prim and the coordinates for the datum location are placed on the sheet. Place now the dimension on the sheet by moving the cursor to the requested position and click once more left. While creating the dimension a popup menu is available. © CAD Schroer GmbH 535 . 7. Enter the coordinates for the datum into the X Position and Y Position fields (you can use the Tab key to move from the X field to the Y field) and press the Enter key or click on the checkmark to apply the entries. A dimension appears attached to the cursor. For details see “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513. Probe the datum prim on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Datum Offset Dimensions Figure 521 The coordinates input field 2. 3.

Choose the Creates isometric dimensioning tool . Figure 522 Axonometric Dimension Dialog standard isometric buttons to set the dimension to the desired orientation base angle input field the default value is 45 degrees angle input fields The dialog contains the following entries. You can use the isometric defaults or enter your own angle values. “Isometric Default Angles” on page 537 Base angle activates the base angle input field. Scale dimensions the dimension text shows the true length of the line according to the scale of the sheet. 536 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Isometric sets the angles for the dimension to the standard isometric defaults (see also Figure 523. The Axonometric Dimension dialog box is displayed as shown in the figure below. Define angle activates the angle input fields for entering your own angles. The default entry is 45 degrees but you can also enter a different value. The orientation of the dimension complies with the entered angle. do the following steps: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Creating Isometric Dimensions For creating a isometric dimension.

Click the standard isometric button that you require. click the Scale dimensions button. activate either the Base angle or the Define angles option. or click middle if you wish to dimension more than one point. © CAD Schroer GmbH 537 . Move the cursor to the end of the dimension and click left. 4. If you want the dimension text to show the true length of the line rather than the length of the line shown on the sheet. set the checkmark for the Isometric option. 3. To dimension further points move the cursor to the point that you want to dimension and click left. Enter the angles that you require into the appropriate fields. if you change the base angle or if you specify your own angles for the dimension or leader lines. The default value for the base angle is 45 degrees. 7. Figure 523 Isometric Default Angles The angle of the leader line is 150 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is 30 degrees The angle of the leader line is 210 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is 90 degrees The angle of the leader line is -90 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is 30 degrees button The angle of the leader line is 30 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is -30 degrees The angle of the leader line is -30 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is 90 degrees The angle of the leader line is -90 degrees and the angle of the dimension line is 30 degrees 2. 9. If you want to specify your own angles for the dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Isometric Dimensions The angles stated in Figure 523 are the isometric defaults. 6. 10. They are relative to the horizontal. 5. Move the cursor to the start for the dimension and click left. Place the dimensions on the sheet by moving the cursor to the requested position and click left. If you want to use the isometric default angles. The angles will be different to those shown below. 8.

The notes consist of a leader line and a text. Point to the position of the arrow of the leader line for the note and click left. Position the text of the note by moving the cursor. 4. 538 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 5. To place the text click left. The entry Properties opens the Note Properties dialog which is shown in the figure below. The note tools create groups. While creating a note a popup menu is available which is similar to those ones of dimensioning. For details see “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513. Figure 525 The Note Properties Dialog You can change the Style. the Layer on witch the note text is created. 3. do the following steps: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Creating Notes MEDUSA provides a toolset containing different tools to create notes. the text Height. 2. The tools differ in the alignment of text and leaderline. You can therefore select the whole group using the select group tools. the Text entry. The dashboard displays a text input field. the Type which is plain. Figure 524 The Creates Notes Tools opens the toolset Creates notes with: horizontal orientation vertical orientation parallel orientation For creating a note. Choose one of the create note tools. boxed or underlined. Type in the text of the note.

Choose the Creates a Feature Control frame datum tool . Creating a Feature Control Frame Datum 1. Figure 526 The Feature Control Frames and Datum Tools Creates a Feature Control frame datum Creates a feature control frame toolset opens the toolset The Creates a free feature control toolset provides tools which differ in the alignment of text and arrow. click left into the edit field. Figure 527 The Feature Control Frame Datum Popup Menu Rotate 90 Degrees. rotates the symbol to 90 degrees anti-clockwise. 2. appears attached crosshair on the cursor. Place the symbol by probing on the element that should be set in correlation to another one. If you want to change the text. which contains a specified text. Undo is used for canceling the last action. While creating a feature control frame datum following popup menu is available. Exit Tool quits the tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Feature Control Frames and Datum Feature Control Frames and Datum To specify the shape tolerance and the position tolerance you use two different tools from the dimension tooltray. type it on the keyboard. 3. Below the dashboard an edit field opens for changing the text. A symbol. Clicking again on the entry repeats the rotation. © CAD Schroer GmbH 539 . If the edit field is not active.

6. 3. Choose one of the Creates a feature control frame tools shown in Figure 526. Figure 529 The feature Control Frame Popup Menu Horizontal switches on the Creates horizontal Feature Control Frame tool. If you move the cursor the leaderline extends. Probe on the position where the arrow of the leaderline should point to. Figure 528 Example: Dashboard During Creating a Horizontal Feature Control Frame style entry when using the creates horizontal feature control frame defines the size of the text text input field: to enter the text displayed in the frame opens the Special Character Dialog 2. Click left to place the text frame. Choose the desired symbol and click left.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Creating a Free Feature Control Frame 1. Click on the icon in the dashboard to open the Special Characters dialog. 7. The dashboard is displayed as shown above. Before placing the text frame you can open the following popup menu. Feature control frames can also contain special characters. Free switches on the Creates a free Feature Control Frame tool. 5. The symbol is inserted into the text input field and the dialog disappears. 540 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Vertical switches on the Creates vertical Feature Control Frame tool. Repeat the steps described above to create other feature control frames or quit the tool. 4. Type the text of the feature control frame in the text input field.

This symbol can be replaced by another symbol under the same name. © CAD Schroer GmbH 541 . Supplementary Information The symbol for the feature control datum is located in <medusa>\med2d\m2d\symbol\fcdat.MEDUSA4 Drafting Feature Control Frames and Datum Right Angled switches on the Right angled Feature Control Frame tool. Properties opens the Note Properties dialog. For details see “The Note Properties Dialog” on page 538 Undo and Exit Tool work as usual.sym.

Figure 530 Linear Dimension Example Quick Selection Tools The quick selection tools are used for selecting any part of a dimension. you can: • Change the length of a dimension line • Change the length and position of a leader line • Reposition the text • Add additional dimension segments • Delete an existing segment • Delete the entire dimension For editing a dimension consider the following figure which shows the different parts of a dimension. dimension text (B) and dimension line (C). as explained in “Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions” on page 545. Please note: Having chosen one of the tools you are in the modify mode. If you want to move a leader line or the position of the dimension text. You see leader line (A). use the methods explained in “Edit a Dimension Part” on page 543 542 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Editing Dimensions Once you have selected a dimension. leader lines or dimension lines. For each tool only one element can be selected at the same time and a popup menu is available. which allows changing points of lines and text values. Figure 531 Quick Selection Tools for Dimensions From left to right the tools select dimension texts.

In each phase of editing dimensions a popup menu provides further editing possibilities: • Having selected the whole dimension and then Edit from the general popup menu. Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions This popup menu is available when the whole dimension was selected and Edit was chosen from the general popup menu. • If you selected the dimension text (B) you can move the text on the dimension line to a new position. the ”Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions” is available. According to your selection you have the following possibilities now: • If you selected the leader line (A) you can probe a new point for changing the points which are dimensioned. • Having chosen a part of a dimension. the “Popup Menu 2 for Editing Dimensions” on page 544 is available. Select the part of the dimension you want to change either by: • position the cursor over the part of the dimension and double click left. • If you selected the dimension line (C) you can probe a new point for changing the spacing of the dimension text to the dimensioned points. choose Edit from the popup menu and then click left on the part of the dimension. Figure 532 Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions © CAD Schroer GmbH 543 . 2. or • click left on a dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Dimensions Edit a Dimension Part To edit a dimension part: 1.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Change to BSI. Modify allows you to change each sub-element of a dimension either as text or line.. The current mode is grayed out. Text Lock disables adding and deleting leader lines with Add and Delete. ANSI. Change to ANSI. in order that the dimension text corresponds to the scale of the scale view further on (see also ”Toolbar”. DIN. after removing the other dimensions are adjusted for correct appearance of the whole chain.. Undo is used for canceling the last action. For details on deletion see ”Deleting Whole Dimensions” and “Deleting a Part of a Dimension” on page 546. Delete allows you to remove one leader line. We recommend not to do that because the dimension can get wrong. Add allows you to add one further leader line by probing the new point which shall be dimensioned against the first point in the dimension chain. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. ”Dimensioning” on page 281). circle and arc dimensions. After selected Modify the “Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions” on page 545 is available. Once this option was chosen it turns to Text Unlock for reverting the setting again. This option is disabled for angular. Figure 533 Popup Menu 2 for Editing Dimensions Horizontal . which outstand a scale view and which are to be modified. ”Scale View”. Change to ISO sets the dimension text to be in BSI. Change to DIN. For details see “Adding a Segment to an Existing Dimension” on page 545. Exit Tool quits the tool. You can undo several actions. In scale views you can lock dimensions. Popup Menu 2 for Editing Dimensions This popup menu is available when the position of a line or text of a dimension will be changed. JIS or ISO standard. For details on 544 © CAD Schroer GmbH .. If a leader line is removed from the middle of a dimension chain. Automatic are the snap modes of the dimension. Change to JIS. an error message is given (see “Possible Messages while Changing Dimensions” on page 546). If the dimension is a single one.

Figure 534 Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions If you select a sub-element of a dimension. Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions This popup menu is available when a line or text value of a dimension will be changed. For details on deletion see ”Deleting Whole Dimensions” and “Deleting a Part of a Dimension” on page 546. 4. 5. 3. Select the dimension. “Popup Menu While Dimensioning Linear” on page 513. It depends on the current selection. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Dimensions the modes see ”Creating Basic Linear Dimensions”. If no sub-element is selected Edit switches back into first edit mode for dimensions and the popup menu as given in “Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions” on page 543 is available again. Exit Tool quits editing the dimension. Choose Edit from the popup menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 545 . Exit Tool quits editing the dimension. an error message is given (see “Possible Messages while Changing Dimensions” on page 546). If the dimension is a single one. If a dimension line is removed from the middle of a dimension chain. after removing the other dimensions are adjusted for correct appearance of the whole chain. You automatically use the format and standard of the existing dimension line. Edit changes into the appropriate edit mode either for texts or lines. Move the cursor to the position where you want to define the new dimension line. Reselect is used for selecting another part of the dimension. Delete deletes either the whole dimension or a dimension line. Edit Adding a Segment to an Existing Dimension To add a further dimension to a line that is already dimensioned: 1. Choose Add from the popup menu. Click left to create the dimension.

by choosing first Edit from the global popup menu and then Modify from the edit popup menu. and click left. Example 1 . Possible Messages while Changing Dimensions If you change a dimension. 2. Select the dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Deleting Whole Dimensions To delete whole dimensions: 1. Select the dimension. Move your cursor over the leader line you want to delete. If a dimension is damaged after the change. if you deleted the leader line of a simple single span dimension. if the entries Never or Always for the option Save Damaged Dimensions in the dialog Defaults. Deleting a Part of a Dimension To delete a part of a multi-segment dimension: 1.Changing a Sub-Element of a Dimension For example. different messages can appear. Choose Delete from the popup menu or use the X icon on the toolbar. you get the following message after exiting the tool. tab Dimension. 4. “Dimension Defaults” on page 186). The according dimension segment is deleted. after quitting the modification tool. Figure 535 Message when Changing Dimensions 1 546 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. Choose Delete from the popup menu. The messages are not displayed. it will be checked whether the structure of the dimension is correct. were chosen (see ”Options”. 3. Choose Edit from the popup menu. if the middle segment of a chain dimension is deleted). The dimension is deleted. The other parts of the dimension are altered if necessary to display the adjusted dimension values (for example.

in the dialog Defaults. choosing Edit from the global popup menu and then. the change of the dimension will be undone and the status before your change will be restored. the option Save Damaged Dimensions is set to Never and in future no more messages will be displayed. If you choose Retain. click on a leader line. editing the dimension will be quitted. following message is given: © CAD Schroer GmbH 547 . by selecting the dimension.Changing an Already Changed Dimension Again If you re-edit an already changed dimension. following message is given: Figure 536 Message when Changing Dimensions 2 If you choose Cancel. click on a leader line. for example. Example 2 . However you also cannot change a dimension anymore. The correct dimension structure existed before the change can only be restored. All changes you made on the dimension since then will be undone. your change will be applied and the dimension will be damaged. Future changes of a dimension will be applied always. Example 3 . choosing Edit from the global popup menu and then. by selecting the dimension. tab Dimension. If you choose Revert. your original. if in the dialog Defaults you set back the option Save Damaged Dimensions to Prompt. most recent correctly structured dimension will be restored. “Message when Changing Dimensions 2” on page 547 will be displayed with the next change and you can revert the dimension back to its original structure.Changing a Dimension of an Earlier Revision of MEDUSA If you load a sheet with damaged dimensions that were created in an earlier revision of MEDUSA and if you want to change a dimension. the option Save Damaged Dimensions is set to Always and in future no more messages will be displayed. because the correct dimension structure will always be re-created automatically. If you have additionally switched on the option Do not ask again. for example. Then the message given in Figure 536. If you additionally have switched on the option Do not ask again in the dialog Defaults. tab Dimension.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Dimensions If you choose Cancel.

Then select Edit from the global popup menu and Modify from the edit popup menu to change this dimension. which provides essential information. 548 © CAD Schroer GmbH . can no longer be found on the sheet. This dialog will also appear if the dimension selected cannot be reconstructed even using the latest valid information. if the dimension is an Off Sheet Datum dimension (see “Creating Datum Offset Dimensions” on page 534) and the Off Sheet Datum group. For example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Figure 537 Message when Changing Dimensions 3 After pressing Ok you can re-select the dimension. reconstruction is impossible.

The following figure shows an example for a coordinate dimension whose texts overlap each other on the left hand side: Figure 538 Example for Arranging Coordinate Dimensions 1 If you select this dimension now and click left on the Arrange coordinate dimensions text tool the leader lines are adjusted and each of the texts is readable. The Arrange coordinate dimensions text tool lines in that way that texts become legible.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Dimensions Arranging Coordinate Dimensions Text For coordinate dimensions it may happen that the single dimensions are as close together that rearranges the leader its texts overlap each other. Figure 539 Example for Arranging Coordinate Dimensions 2 © CAD Schroer GmbH 549 .

to add . Select dimensions. For this MEDUSA provides a toolset which enables you to create and remove gaps in dimension leader lines. Gaps are added to the dimensions using the defined gap parameters 550 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 540 Example Explode Dimension Gaps in Overlapping Dimension Leader Lines After finishing dimensioning it can happen that dimension leader lines overlap or cross each other. With this tool the dimension. MEDUSA provides the Explode dimensions tool as one element. in which a dimension was exploded in its segments in order to add tolerance values to the middle dimension. Furthermore it contains a tool for setting gap properties. is split into its segments.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Explode Dimensions If you want to explode a dimension. The following figure gives an example. 2. for example. consisting of several measures in order. After choosing this tool each segment is a single dimension and you can change each of them individually. For adding gaps in single selected dimension leader lines: 1. created a fit value. Figure 541 The Gap Tools opens the toolset Process whole sheet for gaps Create gaps in overlapping dimension leaders Remove gaps from dimensions Set parameters for dimension gaps tool You can either create gaps in individual selected leader lines or for all leader lines on a sheet in one step. Choose the tool Create gaps in overlapping dimension leaders.

Default value is 4. Possible point functions for Gap Function are 2 to 5. The point functions can be seen in a dialog available by Utilities -> Point functions. Choose the tool Process whole sheet for gaps. 2. All dimensions on the whole sheet are automaically selected and gaps are added to the dimensions using the defined gap parameters Removing gaps works the same way as given for adding. Choose the tool Set parameters for dimension gaps tool. 5. Gap Function defines the spacing for the inserted gaps which is available as a point function. 4. For setting parameters for gaps. Choose OK for applying the settings. Now the defined parameter are used. © CAD Schroer GmbH 551 . Select dimensions.MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Dimensions For adding gaps in dimension leader lines on the whole sheet: 1. • Natural defines that the gaps are inserted wherever it fits. • Vertical defines that the gaps are inserted in vertical lines. The following modes are available: • Horizontal defines that the gaps are inserted in horizontal lines. Type a value for the Gap Function. do the following: 1. The following dialog opens: Figure 542 Set Gap Parameter Dialog 3. Define the Gap Mode. if you add gaps to dimensions.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Welding Symbols You can create welding. Figure 543 The Welding Symbol Input Dialog upper text input fields Text input fields 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 lower text input fields Input field for a symbol name Opens a pulldown menu which listed the existing named symbols Part 1 defines the symbol for the beginning of the line. Part 2 serves auxiliary symbols which gives hints on the run of the seam. Other symbols are hidden behind the icons and can be displayed by clicking on the arrows. The welding symbol consists of different parts which can be put together dynamically in a dialog window. Click on the arrow opens the following popup menu. The dialog contains text input fields and icons. Click on the Load welding symbol tool to open the Welding symbol input dialog. It remains alterable on the cross hair until the second mouse click.and soldered joint symbols conforming to the current standard. 552 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click on the arrow opens the following popup menu. Figure 544 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 1 One mouse click (left mouse button) on the desired symbol sets it as point function into the welding symbol.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Welding Symbols Figure 545 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 2 One mouse click on the desired symbol sets it into the welding symbol. You can enter additional specifications in the upper and lower text field. Figure 548 Welding Symbol Popup 4a popup for the selection of additional symbols additional symbol upper basic symbol Part 5 defines the lower basic symbol which specifies the kind of the seam. Click on the arrow opens the following popup menu. Figure 546 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 3 One mouse click on the desired symbol sets it into the welding symbol. Click on the arrow opens the following popup menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 553 . Click on the arrow opens another popup menu for the selection of an additional symbol. Figure 547 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 4 One mouse click on the desired symbol sets it into the welding symbol. Part 3 defines the reference line of the seam. Click on the arrow opens the following popup menu. As soon as you have chosen the basic symbol a further button appears above. Part 4 defines the upper basic symbol which specifies the kind of the seam.

You can enter additional specifications. Figure 550 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 5a lower basic symbol additional symbol popup menu for the selection of additional symbols Part 6 Clicking on the icon for shifted seams enables it and two text input fields become available. Click on the arrow opens another popup menu for the selection of an additional symbol.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Figure 549 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 5 One mouse click on the desired symbol sets it into the welding symbol. Figure 551 Welding Symbols 6 Part 7 Clicking on the arrow opens a popup menu with two symbols which activate additional text input fields. They can be used for the specifications of the welding process. 554 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Which input field (fields) appears depends on your choice of the symbol. As soon as you have chosen the basic symbol a further button appears below.

For the entry in the Process field you can also call up a selective list which contains the current standards of welding and soldered process. The name is written into a list which can be displayed by using the arrow. there are four input fields available where you can enter free text.MEDUSA4 Drafting Welding Symbols Figure 552 Welding Symbols 7 If you select the fork. You have to enter the name in the input field and click the Save button at the bottom of the dialog. Figure 553 Welding Symbols 7a/7b and the Welding Process List opens the list to the right which contains the current standards of welding and soldered process Named Welding Symbols After creating a welding symbol you can save it under a defined name. © CAD Schroer GmbH 555 . Clicking on one entry of the list sets it into the input field.

Delete removes a selected named welding symbol out of the session buffer. Reset removes any entries in the Welding symbol. you can put the file weldsym.xml. If you Discard. Save stores a created welding symbol under a defined name in the session. saved a named symbol or deleted a named symbol) and close MEDUSA. After compiling and placing a symbol in the sheet the entries for this symbol will remain in the dialog box until you click on the Reset button. Exit closes the dialog. Please note: If you want to make your welding symbols system wide available. Consider that saving is always done in the user directory only. the named symbols are saved permanently into the directory <project>\user\<username>. 556 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the following dialog opens: Figure 555 Dialog: Save or Discard a Named Welding Symbol as Default If you confirm with Save. and you can use them in further sessions.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Figure 554 List of Named Welding Symbols Selecting a named welding symbol out of the list displays the according saved symbol in the dialog window. Probing on the sheet sets the start point for the loaded symbol. the welding symbols stored in this session will be lost. so you have to copy the file weldsym.xml into the path <customer_product>\m2d\src and/or <project>\user\common.g.input dialog.xml manually into the customer product or <project>\user\common path. file weldsym. Please note: If you made changes to the session buffer (e.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 557 . Figure 556 Right Mouse Button Popup Menu Please note: The alignment can be set only before setting the endpoint of the welding symbol.MEDUSA4 Drafting Welding Symbols Rotating a Welding Symbol You can rotate a selected welding symbol by choosing one of the four available options of the right mouse button popup menu.

no production process is regulated symbol with crossline.MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Surface Finish Symbols MEDUSA enables you to create surface finish symbols with or without coordinating lines. Choose one of the Load surface finish symbol tools to open the Surface Finish Symbol dialog. The specific statements concerning for example roughness height etc. You can choose between the following icons. surface is created by machining 558 © CAD Schroer GmbH . basic symbol . Select one of the symbols which define the process. Figure 557 The Load Surface Finish Symbol Toolset Load surface finish symbol tool (without leading line) Load surface finish symbol tool 1. Figure 558 The Surface Finish Symbol Dialog Buttons to define the symbol for the process Defines size of symbol Symbol for the process appears according to the choice of the button above Settings to define the process Removes the entries from the dialog 2. are entered in the Surface Finish Symbol dialog. To create a surface symbol two different Load surface finish symbol tools are available.

4. It is possible to specify certain user defined parameters like the text styles for small and large surface symbols in the defaults.dat (details are given in the Customization Guide. Enter the desired values for Roughness factor. Move the cursor over the point where you wish to place the symbol. Click left to drop the symbol on the sheet. the surface is produced via non-cutting processing 3. 8. Please note: The surface symbol (without leading line) can be placed free on the sheet. • If you use the Load surface symbol tool you have first to probe on the line. the symbol will be aligned at this line. in order to place the symbol. if a line is close-by. 5. Defaults.dat). • If you use the Load surface symbol tool (without leading line) tool. a line is not required. a circle is added to the symbol which is displayed in the dialog. Direction of crease. the created symbol attaches cross hair on the cursor and is automatically oriented orthogonal to the line on which it is dropped. 2nd Roughness factor. Figure 559 Detail of the Surface Finish Symbol Dialog 6. However. If the definition shall be used on the complete surface. © CAD Schroer GmbH 559 . If a Load surface symbols tool is active. User Interface. The created symbol attaches on a rubber band cross hair on the cursor and is always horizontal. Click on the Close button to quit the dialog. clicking the right mouse button over the drawing area opens the following menu. Manufactoring process. 7. activate the Use on complete surface option. Machining allowance and 3nd Roughness factor. Define the size of the symbol by choosing either small or large.MEDUSA4 Drafting Surface Finish Symbols symbol with circle. In this case.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dimensioning Figure 560 The Surface Symbol Popup Menu 0 degree. this option will be active and the popup menu displays the item Current level.e. if the symbol is close to a line. within the current group. Exit Tool quits the tool. it will be aligned at the line and the setting of degrees will be ignored. Default setting is Current level. Sheet level.However. In this case the item Sheet level is displayed. When you click on Sheet level. 90 degree. 560 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Current level defines whether the surface symbol is created on the current level. i. 180 degree. or on sheet level. Undo allows you to take back the last processing step. 270 degree rotates the symbol according to the choosen degrees. Input opens the Surface Finish Symbol dialog.

......................................................... 570 • Editing Text ................... 586 • Unicode Text .................................................................... 569 • Using Text Styles...... This chapter includes: • Overview ....................................................................................................... 587 © CAD Schroer GmbH 561 ............................................................................................................................... 563 • Text Properties ............................. 562 • Creating Text.... 574 • Multi-Line Text................................ 565 • Replacing Text Properties ......................................................... 572 • Special Characters................................................................ 579 • Text Translator ..........................................MEDUSA4 Drafting TEXT This chapter explains the basic concepts that you need to understand in order to effectively create and edit text............................................................................................................................................ 575 • Balloon Text ..................................

The following figure shows the text tools. Create new Item Number Balloon Reads all balloon texts to a table For details see “Balloon Text” on page 579.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Overview You can create plain texts and text with special features. Please note: Text appearance may also be affected by settings in the Defaults dialog. Creates large plain text Creates medium plain text Creates small plain text These tools create text with feature Creates text enclosed in a circle Creates text with a visible datum point Creates underlined text Creates boxed text Creates text enclosed in a box with rounded ends Create boxed text arrows creates arrows for multiline texts which have a text box. The Tab key on your keyboard cannot be used in text entry fields in MEDUSA. ”Create Arrows at a Text Box” on page 576. Replaces the properties of the selected text with the properties of another text element For details see “Replacing Text Properties” on page 569. 562 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 561 Text Tools From left to right the following tools are available: These tools create text without any feature. for details see “Multi-Line Text”.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 563 .. opens the Text properties dialog explained in “Text Properties” on page 565.. New Text. Properties. Fixed Size is applicable on multiline text only (see “Multi-Line Text” on page 575).MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Text Creating Text This section shows you how to comment your drawing by adding text elements. Exit Tool quits the tool. If you choose this entry. Popup Menu While Creating Text After choosing a text creation tool a popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. By default this option is off. deletes any entry in the text input field and you can type a new text. Figure 562 Create Text Popup Menu The following entries are given: Rotate 90 Degrees rotates the text by 90 degrees counterclockwise. Undo cancels the last action. it is switched on indicated by a check mark ...

The text appears immediately at the crosshair. The following figure is similar to that what you should see now: Figure 563 Text Dashboard dashboard text entry field crosshair opens the Special Characters dialog 2. Move the cursor to an empty area on the sheet. MEDUSA displays the text on the sheet. 4. Click left to place the text. The text remains on the cursor so you can place it again. so you can type in a text now. This is explained in detail in “Text Properties” on page 565. You can change the properties of the text you are creating at any time.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Perform Creating Text 1. 564 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Any time you change the text MEDUSA automatically updates the text on the cursor. The dashboard displays the properties of the chosen text tool and the cursor changes to a crosshair. If you change the text tool the properties of the text change but the text itself. Please note: You can easily delete unwanted text by selecting it and then choosing Delete from the Edit menu or from the popup menu. The field for entering the text is active. the Create small plain text tool . Select one of the text creation tools from the Text + Dimension tooltray. 3. This is because MEDUSA retains the current text until you change it or exit from MEDUSA. or by selecting the Delete tool from the toolbar. for example. If you want to change the text properties use the popup menu. remains unchanged. which you typed in at last. Type a text in the text field or insert ”Special Characters” with the button .

or by using the wheel. underlined text. Italic. Height When you create text it is created at a standard height.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Properties Text Properties In addition to the standard properties. texthigh. Underline. or to text entered after the change is made. you can select more than one text element. Justification Changes the vertical or horizontal justification of the text. This is used. textlow). Italic. Superscript. As for lines. if available. layer and style you also find some specific properties as given in the figure below.5. italic. both texts are displayed one over each other. Subscript is used for placing text parts high and low (e. text elements have specific properties. Figure 564 Dashboard: Text Properties Superscript Italic Bold Underline Subscript Height Justification Single line Multi line Counter upper-/lowercase The dashboard provides the following specific settings and properties for texts: Bold.g. © CAD Schroer GmbH 565 . Superscript. You can change this by entering a new height in the Height field and then pressing the Return key on your keyboard or by clicking on the arrows to increase or decrease the height value by steps of 0. and then use the dashboard or the dialog to change properties Dashboard If you chose a text creation tool or if you edit text the dashboard displays the text properties. Text properties are available either in the dashboard or in the text properties dialog. for example. Besides the standard properties like type. for writing tolerances. on your mouse. Underline These options apply the usual text decoration and they can be used together for getting a bold. Please note: For the settings Bold. Subscript and Height changes will only affect the text selected when the change is made. If you add Superscript text followed by Subscript text.

Figure 565 Text Properties Dialog 566 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For details see “Multi-Line Text” on page 575.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Single line. Multi line allows you to define texts which have only one line and texts which have more than one line. Dialog Text Properties As well as changing the properties of a text element using the dashboard you can also use the dialog to change the properties of selected text. Url is activated only when the currently selected text was defined with an URL. For details see “Multi-Line Text” on page 575.or lowercase font.. Lowercase (TT->tt) . upper-/lowercase is the toolset for changing selected text into upper. Counter The first number found inside a text is counted up (+n) or down (-n) by the factor defined in the text field (default value is 1). a new line is created and according to the number of lines the text field gets a scroll bar. If you are in Multi line mode and if you press Return on your keyboard.. option from the popup menu. The available . To open the Text Properties dialog select the text you want to change or select a text tool from the Text & Dimensions tooltray and then click on the Properties tool on the left of the dashboard or select the Properties.This button launches the defined URL inside the default internet browser. tools are Uppercase (tt->TT) Textbox is activated only for multiline texts. Uppercase (tt->Tt) .

If the button Style is disabled you are not in Administrator mode and therefore you can change properties temporary only. To move the text datum and the associated text to a specific location. Layer determines which layer of the sheet the text is drawn on. If text is selected. Normally you should not change the layer on which a text element is created as your site may have special conventions which control how layers are used for particular projects. X Position. You can also edit and add to the default colors. Thickness This option sets the unbold value of the text. Color determines which color is used to draw the text element. See “Using Text Styles” on page 570 for more information. Changing the value does not have a visible effect (unless the layer is set not to be visible). For example you can create a text style so that all text elements using that style are drawn in one color and are placed on a specific layer. change the values in the X Position and Y Position fields and click Apply. © CAD Schroer GmbH 567 . Some text types are shown below: Figure 566 Text types: Font defines the font used for the text. Text that is set to bold using the dashboard is thicker than this value. the values in these fields represent the location of the text datum. Y Position The X Position and Y Position entry boxes define the position of the text datum on the sheet. You choose between eight thicknesses to draw the text. Select the required font from the list of available fonts. Type changes the appearance of the text element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Properties Please note: Disabled properties cannot be changed. The options on the Text Properties dialog are: Style A text style is a collection of properties.

from Single line in Multi line mode. which have only one line and texts which have more than one line. allowing you to position the text with precision. Single line. any selected text moves relative to the datum point to the position you chose in the justification panel. If you edit text and if you are in Multi 568 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Multi line allows you to change texts. When you click Apply on the Text Properties dialog. By default the datum point is positioned in the center of the text element. This option is deactivated for single line text. So if a text is already rotated and you want it rotated more you have to insert the whole angle for rotation again. determines how the text is aligned relative to the datum point. Spacing is the line spacing for multiline text. Justification determines how changing the height of the character affects its width. Shear defines the amount by which the font is sheared. The angle of rotation is relative to the horizontal and it is an absolute angle. Aspect Gap Gap defines the distance between each character in the font (depending how the font is defined by your System Administrator). Aspect. click one of the other buttons on the justification panel. Width defines the width of the text string. Figure 567 Text Justification Panel The selected position on the justification panel defines the datum. The datum shown in the figure above is the center position. To remove any shear from the text enter a shear value of 0. The datum point remains in the same place on the sheet unless you change the X Position or Y Position values as well. Shear may not be available or visible unless switched on in the Defaults dialog. You can change this by entering a new height in the Height field. The text datum is positioned at the intersection of the cross on the cursor. Height When you create text it is created at a standard height.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Rotate The Rotate field in the Text Properties dialog determines the amount by which a text element is rotated. An alternative way of specifying this is to set the gap and aspect ratio. To change the justification of the selected text element.

delete the Url text string and apply the text properties. For example. e. The properties are applied to the selected text. you can simply apply them to other text elements on the sheet. Url is activated only when a True Type font is used either for the whole text or a part of it. Select the text with the properties you want to replace. Please insert an URL text with protocol. You do not have to select text of the same type. the dashboard button inside the default internet browser. After launches it entered an URL in the Url text field and applied it. http://www. 3. 1. Select the Replace text properties tool from the Text + Dimension tooltray in the Complete set of tooltrays. 2. If they look correct.MEDUSA4 Drafting Replacing Text Properties line mode and if you press Return on your keyboard a new line is created and according to the number of lines the text field gets a scroll bar. you can replace the properties of boxed text with properties derived from text enclosed in a circle. For deleting an URL from a text. Replacing Text Properties When you use the Replace text properties tool you do not need to know what the properties of any text element are. © CAD Schroer GmbH 569 . For details see “Multi-Line Text” on page 575. Select the text with the properties you want to use. For details see “Multi-Line Text” on page 575. Please note: Replacing text properties uses only the properties of the whole text and ignores any changes made within the text.cad-schroer.g. Textbox is activated only for multiline texts.de.

color and height of text. In the style field you find the entry More. 2. a text style may specify the text type. Select the text element(s) you want to change. Changing Text Style Using the dashboard 1. 4. which opens the style tree on the right of the drawing area providing all available styles. Select the required style from the dashboard. In the tree you can select a style with the popup menu entry Use Style (for details see “Dashboard”. Probe the sheet to position the text. 2. For example. A text style is a collection of one or more text properties. Text styles are defined by your System Administrator who can tell you what each style should be used for. Enter text in the text entry field of the dashboard. Creating a Text Element with a Style To create a text element with a given style: 1. “Style Tree”. ”Style Tree” on page 306). Either choose one of the text creation tools or select the Creates text tool from the tool set to the left of the dashboard. Figure 568 Dashboard: Text Style Style 3. 570 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Using Text Styles Text styles work in a similar way to line styles. The text style remains current until you: • Select a different text style • Use a text creation tool that sets the text style. Select the text style you want from the dashboard.

Select the text element(s) you want to change 2.you can change these properties You can also change any properties of the text that are not set by the style. If you want to copy the style of an existing text including its variation then: 1. Select the required style from the list of available styles in the style field and click Apply. Changing Properties of a Text Style A text style can include properties that are: • Set and locked . Select the Create text tool . © CAD Schroer GmbH 571 .you cannot change these properties These properties are grayed out in the dashboard and in the Text Properties dialog. If the line is a variant then the Create text tool changes to yellow. 3. • Set but not locked . A variant style is a style which has one or more attributes that are altered from the original style settings. Select Properties from the popup menu or click on Properties tool on the dashboard. Enter text in the text buffer. 3. 2. The Text Properties dialog is displayed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using Text Styles Using the Text Properties dialog 1. Probe the sheet to position the text. The dashboard shows the style and properties of the selected line. Select the text whose style you wish to use. If you change any of the properties of the text then the background color of the Create text tool changes to yellow to show that this is a variant style. 4.

choose one of the text creation tools in the Text + Dimensions tooltray as given in Figure 561. Changing the Text Content You can change the content of a text element using the text edit field in the dashboard: Figure 569 Dashboard: Text Entry field For editing text: 1. Select some text in the drawing area and choose Edit from the popup menu. Repeat Texts If you edited text you can place the same text again. b. The text is displayed inside the text entry field. 1. and it gives some hints on working with multiple selections of text. 2. If you want only the text string to be repeated without using its properties. If you want to repeat the text. It is highlighted so that it is replaced if you type in the new text. You also can edit text by double clicking on it. “Text Tools” on page 562. If you want the text to be repeated with its current properties then choose the Create text tool from the dashboard. The text is attached to the crosshair of the cursor. Type the new text. 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Editing Text This chapter shows you how to edit and copy text. The dashboard changes and the text entry field displays the selected text. 572 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The text is automatically updated on the sheet. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text and click the left mouse button. The previously selected text is placed and you have copied it now. go on placing it at other positions. Now choose a text creation tool: a. 3. Select a text inside the drawing area.

• You can select different texts and replace all the texts by typing in the empty text edit field. pressing the single-line button will change them into single-line texts. © CAD Schroer GmbH 573 . Figure 570 Example Text Count Multi-line .MEDUSA4 Drafting Editing Text Multiple Selections of Text This section gives you some explanations in the case of selecting several texts. Texts which are placed side by side are put into different multi-line texts. multi-line texts or a mixture of them. ”Dashboard” on page 565) work independently on all the selected texts even if they are different. The numbers were counted up at the same time using the counter button +1. • You can select different texts and change the properties without losing the text string. in case they are positioned over each other in y direction. General • If the texts are the same. pressing the multi-line button will collect them into a single multi-line text. either singleline texts. the text string will be displayed inside the text edit field otherwise it is blank. the example below shows three different single texts. • If you have one or more multi-line texts selected.Single-line • If you have a number of single-line texts selected. • If you have a mixed selection of single-line and multi-line texts and press the multi-line text button it will not change the multi-line texts but it will collect all the single-line texts into a multi-line text in case that they are not positioned side by side. Increase/Decrease Numbers • The increase/decrease buttons (see “Text Properties”.

2. Place the text on the sheet. 3. Enter a text and place the cursor at the position where you want to have the symbol. Choose Exit Tool from the popup menu. 6. Click the button for a symbol. Figure 572 Special Characters Dialog 4. Select a text creation tool like Create small plain text tool from the Text + Dimension tooltray. 5. Press the Symbol button on the dashboard to display the Special Characters dialog. 574 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Special Characters You can add special characters. such as those shown in Figure 571 to a text element: Figure 571 Examples of Special Characters in Text Elements To add a special character: 1. MEDUSA inserts the symbol at the position of the cursor in the text entry box.

Move the cursor to an empty area on the sheet. the Create small plain text tool . You have two possibilities: • If the option Fixed Size from the popup menu is switched on ( tion in the sheet. Click left on the Multi-Line button . 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Multi-Line Text Multi-Line Text Multi-line text is handled a little different to single line text. Create Multi-Line Text For creating multi-line text. The text appears immediately at the crosshair. place. The following sections show you how to create. 3. The field for entering the text is active. do the following steps: 1. click left at the posi- © CAD Schroer GmbH 575 . where you want to position the text. Type a text in the text field and press Return for creating several lines. edit. The following figure gives an example of a multi-line text: Figure 573 Multi-line Text Example opens the Special Characters dialog enlarges edit field text entry field multi-line text attached to crosshair 4. for example. 5. Place the text. so you can type in a text now. save. The dashboard displays the properties of the chosen text tool and the cursor changes to a crosshair. ). You can also insert ”Special Characters” with the button . reload and modify multi-line text. Select one of the text creation tools from the Text + Dimension tooltray. Any time you change the text MEDUSA automatically updates the text on the cursor.

If you want to place single line text again. when you choose the tool Create Boxed Text Arrows The entries are used for the following tasks: . As you move the cursor the width of the text changes and line breaks adjust automatically. Click left to place the text. The first line of the multi-line text remains in the text entry field. The text also remains on the cursor so you can place it again. all deletion entries are disabled. Click left to define the width of the text. Create a Text Box around Multi-line Text If you want to create a text box around multi-line text. This option is disabled.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text • If the option Fixed Size is off. During creation or editing of text box arrows (see next section) the text box will be always visible. Create Arrows at a Text Box The tool Create Boxed Text Arrows creates and edits arrows emanating from a text box. do this: a. MEDUSA displays the text on the sheet. The multi-line text remains in the buffer until you change the current text. Generally you use the left mouse button for creation and the middle mouse button for edit operations. choose the button . if you add or edit single-line text. click left inside the option Text box inside the dashboard while adding or editing multi-line text. The right mouse button provides the following popup menu: Figure 575 Popup Menu of the Create boxed Text Arrows Tool By default. b. Figure 574 Dashboard for Multi-Line Text (right part only) The text box can be visible (checkmark is set) or invisible. 576 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Delete intermediate points . Figure 576 Example for an arrow with two intermediate points Canceling to draw an arrow is done with a left click in the text box. Create Arrows Use the left mouse button to draw an arrow starting from the text box and pointing outwards. if you draw a new arrow.by editing an arrow and choose Delete Arrow. the tip becomes attached to the mouse cursor and you can move it to another position (see ”Moving Arrow Points”). moving the current arrow point is aborted. Change the point function of all arrowheads . This option opens the usual point function dialog for selecting the new point function used for arrow heads of the arrows of the current text box. • If you start drawing with the left mouse button. Delete all arrows . start drawing from its tip.entry Arrowheads. the tip becomes a kink. or click left on the text inside a text box.entry Delete All. Moving Arrow Points Use the middle mouse button to pick and move any arrow kink point. • If you start drawing with the middle mouse button. After you have picked an arrow kink point. Please note: If you are editing the first arrow point (the one that is on the box) there is auto clip- © CAD Schroer GmbH 577 . If you press the left mouse button. With the first left click you place the start point and with a further left click you place the end point of an arrow.MEDUSA4 Drafting Multi-Line Text • • • • Delete a Single Arrow . The two options Delete All and Delete Box require the text box to be selected. Extend an Existing Arrow To extend an arrow. For kink or knee points use the middle mouse button. edit an existing one. use the middle mouse button again for placing the point at the new position. A text box is selected.by moving the point and choose Delete Point.

Use the Undo button from the toolbar. While moving the text box the tips of the arrows remain at its positions. The operation cannot be canceled.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text ping and you can only move the point where it is valid to do so while you are guaranteed that the new arrow will not cross the box. Please note: You can start the Create Boxed Text Arrows tool by double clicking on an arrow point. also directly from the selection tool Move the Text Box while Dragging Arrows Use the middle mouse button to pick a multi-line text in the centre and press the middle mouse button again to drop where desired. 578 © CAD Schroer GmbH . if you want moving to be undone.

Part Number is a user defined number. Lowest.MEDUSA4 Drafting Balloon Text Balloon Text Balloon texts are used for numbering elements inside your drawing. The default © CAD Schroer GmbH 579 . Issue is a user defined number for the version of components marked with the balloon text. By default this value is 1. After clicking on one of these buttons the entry for Item Number is updated. next or highest Item Number. By default there are the placeholders #####. Highest finds the lowest. for example. to mark components on your sheet. Symbol file provides a pulldown list for selecting the symbol used for the balloon text. For creating balloon texts MEDUSA provides the Create new Item Number Balloon tool which opens the following dialog: Figure 577 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog The dialog has the following parameter and buttons: Item Number gives the number of the balloon text to place next. By default this value is 1. Quantity is a user defined number for the amount of components marked with the balloon text. Next.

8. If the option Leader line is on probe into the drawing area for placing the end point of the leader line. if the option Leader Line is chosen. 2. Multisheet check enables a consistency check for balloon texts on all sheets of a loaded working set. Pointer is only available. 3. Creating Balloon Texts For creating balloon texts: 1. Please note: The following explanations use the standard symbol b1 for balloon texts. 7. The balloon text is attached to the cursor. Cancel. The Create Item Number Balloon dialog opens (see “Balloon Text Properties” on page 583). Select the Create new Item Number Balloon tool . you can define the pointer in the field below by choosing one of the arrows. The balloon text is placed on the sheet. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text and click left. Now the second balloon text is finished and you can go on placing further texts. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text and click left to place it. For this do the steps 6 to 8 again until all balloon texts are placed. 6.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text symbol is named b1. For details on using and defining symbol files for balloon texts see “Use Symbols for Balloon Texts” on page 583. If the option Leader line is on probe into the drawing area for placing the end point of the leader line. Leader line applies a leader line to the balloon text. If this option is chosen. 580 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The item number changes to the next number. Adjust the other settings to your needs. Choose the button Next in the Create Item Number Balloon dialog. 5. Help work as usual. 4. Click left on the button Lowest to ensure that the lowest available number is used. Now the first balloon text is finished and you can go on placing the next text. Pointer provides several buttons which are used to attach different arrows to the leader line.

Adjust the other settings to your needs. 9. The Part Number field is filled with the name of the selected design object. Now the second balloon text is finished and you can go on placing further texts. The fields in the dialog are deactivated. Select the Create new Item Number Balloon tool The Create Item Number Balloon dialog opens (see “Balloon Text Properties” on page 583). in the Create Item Number Balloon dialog the text field background for Item Number changes its color from white to either yellow or red. Click left on the design object which shall get the next balloon text. 6. its name is automatically inserted into the Part Number field of the Create Item Number Balloon dialog. 3. The balloon text is placed on the sheet. Procedure (assuming that the option Leader Line is off): 1. 5. Now the first balloon text is finished. If you want to abort selecting the next design object. The fields in the dialog are activated again. Select a design object on the sheet. For this do the steps 6 to 9 again until all balloon texts are placed. . Creating Balloon Texts for Design Objects If you want to create balloon texts for design objects. The balloon text is attached to the cursor. 2. Choose the button Next in the Create Item Number Balloon dialog. For the next design object click right and choose Reselect from the popup menu. The item number changes to the next number. Error Messages while Creating Balloon Texts If there is an error while creating balloon texts. Click left on the button Lowest to ensure that the lowest available number is used. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text and click left. 7. Move the cursor to the position where you want to place the text and click left to place it. 8. choose Continue from the popup menu. 4.MEDUSA4 Drafting Balloon Text If you deleted some balloon texts and you want to place some new texts which shall use the numbers of the deleted texts use the buttons Lowest and Highest inside the Create Item Number Balloon dialog to find and use them. Additionally the © CAD Schroer GmbH 581 .

Balloon Text Dashboard As you create or edit balloon text the dashboard shows its properties.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text tooltip displays what conflict occurred. the current Item Number is already used in a balloon on the sheet. if the background color is yellow. Figure 579 Sub-Dashboard for Lines of Balloon Texts 582 © CAD Schroer GmbH . For example. Figure 578 Dashboard Balloon Texts For the entries see ”Balloon Text Properties” below. All elements of selected balloon texts can be changed in the sub-dashboard.

0001) that are found in the symbol folder in the MED2D product are listed in this menu. In the balloon create dialog (see Figure 577.MEDUSA4 Drafting Balloon Text Balloon Text Properties As you create or edit balloon text the dashboard provides the tool Properties opening the following dialog. This is done automatically during the creation of the symbols by the system admin- © CAD Schroer GmbH 583 . These symbols should have corresponding entries in defaults. For details on creating a part list see “Tables”. ”Creating a Parts List” on page 600. With this all data of balloon texts are read and written to a file.dat. Figure 580 Balloon Text Properties The figure shows the properties dialog and a balloon text. The standard symbol is b1 but also any symbol files called balloon_template_????. Use Symbols for Balloon Texts MEDUSA provides the ability to create balloons from custom symbol file with custom edit fields. “Create Item Number Balloon Dialog” on page 579) there is a Symbol File pulldown menu to choose the balloon symbol. The lines show you which entry of the dialog is which part of the balloon text.sym (where ? can be any character. e.g. Creating a Table from Balloon Texts If you created balloon texts. you can write these texts automatically into a table by using the Reads all balloon texts to a table tool .

The custom fields in the creation dialog (Figure 581) also appear in the Balloon properties dialog (see Figure 582) and in the Parts Balloon Table (see “Tables”. section “Create Balloon Text Symbols“.dat. 584 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 581 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog. ”Creating a Parts List” on page 600). When such a symbol is chosen. Example Symbol Please note: Symbols which shall be used as balloons can only be created by the system administrator. chapter „Administration.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text istrator. the Create Item Number Balloon dialog changes showing custom edit fields as defined in defaults. For details on this see the Administrator Guide.

Figure 582 Balloon Text Properties.MEDUSA4 Drafting Balloon Text For demonstration of using symbols as balloons MEDUSA is installed with one additional balloon symbol called balloon_template_nbsp.sym which can be found in the directory med2d\m2d\symbol. Example Symbol © CAD Schroer GmbH 585 .

Relating to the Text Translator two different buttons are available in the Text + Dimension tooltray. Figure 583 Text Translator Tools Opens the Translation Parameters Dialog Opens the Database Dialog For detailed information about the Text Translator please see the MEDUSA Text Translator Guide. 586 © CAD Schroer GmbH .MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Text Translator The Text Translator of MEDUSA enables you to translate text on MEDUSA sheets into different languages.

For example: -. ”Defaults .dat: This define the font number and the full system name of a font.Overview” on page 173).map: This gives the font numbers and the display name for the font in the user interface.MEDUSA4 Drafting Unicode Text Unicode Text General MEDUSA can use system true type fonts for the display of text. The Unicode fonts are defined by two files: • unicodefont.The Unicode font numbers start at a 1000 FONT_LABEL 1000 "Arial" FONT_LABEL 1001 "Time New Roman" FONT_LABEL 1002 "MingLiU" FONT_LABEL DEFAULT "Arial" unicodefont --> Arial --> Times New Roman --> MingLiU Unicode text can be used for any piece of MEDUSA text. The font used by part ballons or feature control frames can be set by editing the appropriate symbol. The file is loaded into 2D using the font command. Please note: It is possible that the underlying OS does not support all the Unicode characters in file and directory names or text in a file so care must be used in using Unicode in MEDUSA text that may be used for this purpose. For example: 1000 Arial 1001 Time New Roman 1002 MingLiU This file is found in m2d\src and the MEDconfig ufont command compiles it to m2d\bin in the project.Format : FONT_LABEL <number> <name> -. • unicodefonts. You can set the default MEDUSA font to the defined Unicode text by the Options -> Defaults -> Common dialog (see “Options”. -. A Unicode (true type font) has font number of 1000 or greater.This is the unicode fonts file. © CAD Schroer GmbH 587 . The font for a table can be set using the properties dialog or the dashboard.

Usage To enter Unicode character it may be necessary to use the operating system input method (IME). • You can convert a text created from Unicode to normal MEDUSA and vice versa but the font may not have the character to display.MEDUSA4 Drafting Text Limitations • Only the MEDPLOT_QTPLOT and MEDPLOT_QTRASTER drivers support Unicode text. 588 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

....................................... 598 • Creating a Parts List ..................... 593 • Edit Tables ................ 597 • Properties.......................................... • About CSV Format Files ............................................................................ You can enter data directly in the table or you can load data from Comma Separated Values (CSV) files............MEDUSA4 Drafting TABLES MEDUSA provides the creation of tables. 600 © CAD Schroer GmbH 589 .................... 591 • Creating a New Table............. 590 • Overview Table Creation Dialog...............................................................................................................................................

Telephone Mr P Eye.4 The table data shown in Figure 584.3.Age. and need to ensure that this comma is not used as a separator. and that's it 590 © CAD Schroer GmbH . and that's it" and would expand to show the following field: The quotation mark goes here" and the comma goes here. A CSV file contains lines of text which are divided into data elements using commas.49. For example.2075 9320 Mr B Rutus. • To include a quotation mark in the middle of a field. each in its own table cell. put in two consecutive quotation marks.3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables About CSV Format Files Comma Separated Variable (CSV) files are used to specify tables of information.33.Address. the CSV file appears as follows: 1.6494 8371 Ms O Oyle.33 Sun Lane.2. A field that needs to have a quotation mark and a comma in the middle would be created like this: "The quotation mark goes here"" and the comma goes here. Each data element represents a table cell. and 4. to represent the elements 1.2. “Table Creation Example” on page 591 would be created like this: Name.1 The Heights. begin and end the field with quotation marks.54.4443 2398 Occasionally you may need to put a comma into one of the data elements (or fields). • To include commas in fields.7 Frazer Street.

”Save Tables” on page 595. see “Creating a New Table”. Set table justification This toolset provides justification of the table to the left bottom. Save Data as is used for saving the table to a new CSV file. Save Data is used for saving the table to a CSV file. If several cells are selected which do not make a complete row or column only the containing text is deleted and the cells remain empty. If a complete row or column is selected it is deleted completely from the table. For displaying the Table Creation dialog click left on the Create a Table tool Text + Dimension tooltray. in the middle or to the right. For details see “Creating a New Table” on page 593. Delete Selection removes the selected table text. Figure 584 Table Creation Example located in the On top of the dialog the following buttons are provided given from left to right: New Table creates a new table. Load Data is used for loading a CSV file. ”Justify Text” on page 595. left top. ”Load Tables” on page 596. right bottom © CAD Schroer GmbH 591 . Mid justify selection. This entry is available if you loaded a table from a file or if you already saved the table with Save Data as.MEDUSA4 Drafting Overview Table Creation Dialog Overview Table Creation Dialog This section gives you an overview of the Table Creation dialog. Right justify selection is used for justifying the text inside the table cell either to the left. Left justify selection. For details see “Creating a New Table”. For details see “Creating a New Table”.

Cancel. Properties is the tab for defining the properties of the table text and the table lines. Help work as usual. For details see “Properties” on page 598. ”Edit Parts List Tables” on page 600). For details see “Properties” on page 598. In case of Apply the dialog remains open. Style is only enabled if you are in Administrator mode. In case of OK the dialog is closed. The Table Creation dialog provides the following tabs: Data entry is the tab providing the rows and columns of the table. For information on using this tab see “Creating a New Table” on page 593. Synchronize table with balloons on sheet updates table according to the currently available balloon texts on the sheet (see “Creating a Parts List”. 592 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Style Button for setting the Use and Lock options in order to change the table style. According to this setting the table is attached at the crosshair of the cursor while placing. Apply is used for applying the current table to be placed.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables and right top corner. In the bottom of the Table Creation dialog you find the following buttons: OK.

If you want to change the table you can do so editing in the Table Creation dialog. the Set table justification to top left tool . The table in the Table Creation dialog changes immediately to the new number of rows and columns. 2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 593 . for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Table Creating a New Table For creating a new table open the Table Creation dialog by clicking left on the Create a Table tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. Select Ok or Apply. 4. 5. Choose the tool New Table from the top of the dialog. 3. For filling the cells of the new table click left into a cell and type the text. The following window opens: Figure 586 Create Table Dialog The left edit field shows the number of rows and the right one the number of columns. Click left on the button OK to apply the settings. If the table is ready for placement you can define the datum point by using the Set table justification tools. 6. Click left at the position inside the drawing area where you want to place the table. Choose the amount of rows and columns. Then you have to choose Ok or Apply again to update the attached table to the changes you made. The dialog opens providing the Table Data tab showing the default table: Figure 585 Table Creation: Data Entry 1. The table is attached to the crosshair of your cursor.

For selecting a complete row click left on the row button in front of a table line. Add and Delete Rows and Columns If the cursor is on the table inside the Data entry tab of the Table Creation dialog then a popup menu is available to add and delete rows and columns. 2. 594 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click left on the first cell and hold the mouse button. To delete rows or columns. click Insert Row or Insert Column respectively. click Delete Row or Delete Column respectively. If no cell is selected rows and columns are deleted from the end of the table.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables Selecting Text For justifying or deleting text you can select several table cells at the same time. Columns are added to the left of the currently selected table cell. Move the mouse to the last cell you want to select. If no cell is selected rows and columns are added at the end of the table. Release the mouse button. As you move the mouse the selected cells become highlighted. For selecting certain cells: 1. for example. All selected cells are highlighted. Figure 587 Create Table Popup Menu To add rows or columns. now. Rows are added above the currently selected table cell. you can justify them. You can either select complete rows or columns. If you want to select a column click left on a column button on top of the table. If a cell is selected the current row or column is deleted. or you can select certain table cells. 3.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Table To append a row below the existing rows click on Append Row. Justify Text Text can be justified either to the left. explained in “About CSV Format Files” on page 590). Save Tables Tables can be saved as comma separated files (CSV files. On top you find the currently selected file name. 1. Click left on one of the justification tools. To insert a column right from the existing columns click on Add Column. In the figure above no file is selected and the directory is given only. middle or right of the edit field by the following tools: Figure 588 Justify Text Tools For justifying text: 1. Select the table cells whose text shall be justified. If the current table is new: . To sort a column move the cursor on the appropriate column and choose Sort Up or Sort Down. 2. Choose the Save as tool The following dialog opens: Figure 589 Save Table Data Dialog The dialog provides the usual entries for a Save as dialog. The text is justified according to the chosen justification tool. © CAD Schroer GmbH 595 .

596 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 2. 2. The dialog closes and the table is loaded into the Table Creation dialog. Choose Overwrite for saving the table. To load data from a CSV file into the table: 1. Click left on the button Save. Type in the new Filename or select a file from the Filename list to overwrite this file. 3. On top you find the last used file name. explained in “About CSV Format Files” on page 590). If the table was loaded from a file or if you already saved the table the Save tool In this case: 1. Choose the Load data tool for opening the following dialog. Click left on the button Open. The following message comes up: Figure 590 Overwrite Message is available.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables 2. Figure 591 Load Table Data Dialog The dialog provides the usual entries for a Load dialog. Load Tables Tables can be loaded as comma separated files (CSV files. Choose the Save tool . Cancel closes the message and aborts saving. 3. The dialog closes and the table is saved to the chosen file. Type in the new Filename or select a file from the Filename list.

With this the Table Creation dialog is opened and the selected table is loaded to it. or • load a table from a file (see “Creating a New Table”. MEDUSA provides the common functions for editing table cell entries. 2. The shortcuts given in the figure above behind the functions are available on Windows systems. ”Add and Delete Rows and Columns” on page 594 changes to the following popup menu: Figure 592 Popup Menu While Typing into Table Cell As you see. • Double click left on a table cell highlights the current value. For other operating systems they can differ. ”Load Tables” on page 596). paste and clear. Click left on the Create a Table tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. Now you can either • select a table in the sheet by clicking left on a part of it. © CAD Schroer GmbH 597 . So this section is limited to the special features in MEDUSA. If you type in now. As you type in text or values inside the table cell the usual popup menu of the table dialog as given in “Creating a New Table”. copy. the value is replaced with the new entries. As you type in. For opening a table in the Table Creation dialog: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Tables Edit Tables Editing tables work as in most common text processing programs. You can cut. as well as undo and redo actions. Please note: You also can double click left on a table inside the sheet. The selected table is displayed in the Table Creation dialog. the current value is overwritten. The possibilities of editing is given in the following list: • Click left on a table cell allows you to type a new value.

Cancel. Font defines the style of the text inside the cells and the used font (Quick Text by default). Apply. If this option is chosen the edit field below is enabled for specifying the value for the height of the row. File entry separator defines the sign used for separating the column entries for each table row. Text Type. Text Color. the thickness and the height. You can define the text type. Line Color. Use row height is the option for defining a row height which differs from the default value. Line Type.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables Properties The Properties tab allows you to specify various style options for the table. Help work as usual. its color and the thickness. Table layer defines the layer of the table. 598 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Text Thickness. You can define the type. The Properties tab of the Table Creation dialog provides the following buttons: OK. its color. Text Height. Line Thickness defines the style of the lines surrounding the cells. It is used for the case of storing the table as a CSV file (see “About CSV Format Files” on page 590 and “Save Tables” on page 595). Figure 593 Table Creation: Properties The Properties tab of the Table Creation dialog provides the following parameter: Style is the name of the table style.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 599 . If you set the Lock option for an entry. Now you can set the properties for the table in the Table Creation dialog. Please note: The changed options are not applied until you have chosen Modify in the Style Creation Dialog although you see the changes in the Properties tab of the Table Creation dialog when you set or unset the Lock options. Setup the Use and Lock options for text and line properties to your need and apply the settings with the button Modify. If you are in Administrator mode and if you want to change locked or unused properties. If all options are set Close the dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Properties Style is only available if you are in Administrator mode. click left on the button Style for opening the following dialog: Figure 594 Style Creation Dialog a. b. the appropriate parameter inside the Properties tab is disabled.

Choose the Reads all balloon texts to a table tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. Configure Column Titles The titles of the table columns can be configured with the help of the file <medusa>\MED2D\M2D\SRC\ball2tab. sheet In the top right corner of the opened table dialog you find the tool Synchronise table with balloons on which refreshs the table with new information to reflect changes in the sheet while keeping the existing table column widths and sorting options. If you uncomment a line. Choose Apply. Edit Parts List Tables A parts list table can be edited by clicking left on it in the graphics area and then choose Properties from the popup menu. Save the sheet in order to store the parts list table with the sheet. 2. 600 © CAD Schroer GmbH . explained in “About CSV Format Files” on page 590) as described in “Save Tables” on page 595.Procedure For creating the parts list do the following steps: 1. 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Tables Creating a Parts List You can create a parts list table using the balloon texts of your sheet. the entry overwrites the appropriate default column header for balloon texts. The table creation dialog opens containing all ballon texts of your sheet. The table is attached to the cursor. Click left on the sheet to place the table.and therefore they are not used for a parts list table by default.cfg Each column in the table has one entry in the configuration file. You also can save the table to a comma separated file (CSV file. 4. You can change properties now. The default configuration file looks like this: --col1 --col2 --col3 --col4 = = = = Position Name Number Issue The lines start with a comment sign -.

MEDUSA4 Drafting

FIT AND BORE HOLE TABLES

• Fit Tables................................................................................ 602 • Bore Hole Tables.................................................................... 606

© CAD Schroer GmbH

601

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables

Fit Tables
Please note: Fit Tables is only available with the advanced version of MEDUSA, which can be started with the option -advanced. For details on starting MEDUSA see “Starting MEDUSA” on page 23.

This section shows you how to create and edit tolerance (fit) tables.

Creating Fit Tables
This function provides the possibility to create automatically a table of fits and limits. You can decide, whether all fits and limits from the sheet or only certain dimension, which you select, should be transferred into the table. 1. In order to create a fit table choose the Creates a table of fits from whole sheet or selection tool from the Text and Dimension tooltray. The Fit table properties dialog is displayed.
Figure 595 Dialog Fit Table Properties

The following table properties can be defined: • General You can select between the options Column title on top and Column title on bottom.

602

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit Tables
• Format Two different table formats are available: Format 1 contains the columns Fit size, Max. extent and Min. extent. Format 2 contains the columns Nominal width, ISO, under-allowance and over- allowance. 2. After choosing the kind of column title and the table format choose the button OK. The dialog Table Creation opens.
Figure 596 Dialog Fit Table Properties

By default the tab Table Data is displayed showing three or four columns depending on the selected format. Inside the table either all the fits in the sheet or only those ones of selected dimensions are entered. Now you can also define the properties of the table. For details see “Properties” on page 598. 3. Choose OK or Apply to place the table on the sheet. The table is displayed attached to the crosshair of the mouse cursor. 4. Click left on the sheet to place the table. If the table is placed the tool is exited automatically.

Editing Fit Tables
You can edit the table contents and the properties of the table. 1. First select one or several fit tables. 2. Inside the popup menu choose the entry Properties. The dialog Table Creation opens. now you can change the table contents, tab Table Data, or the properties of the table. For details see “Edit Tables” on page 597.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

603

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables
Please note: A double click on a tolerance table also opens the dialog Table Creation.

Example
The following figure shows examples of tables with different settings.
Figure 597 Example for Fit Tables

604

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit Tables Distributed Example Fits XML File
With the release of MEDUSA an example file is delivered, which contains some fit definitions. The file fits.xml can be found in <installation directory>\med2d\m2d\src\ by default. Please note: Consider that we cannot guarantee correctness and completeness for any definition in <installation directory>\med2d\m2d\src\fits.xml. The user has to create its own file to ensure correct and complete fit definitions.

Because the creation of this file is a little bit exhausting a Bacis2 conversion program is available, which generates a new fits.xml from, for example, an old MEDAS-X file. The Bacis2 command is:
fittab_import_fit2xml (fileinput, fileoutput, format)

where: fileinput is the path to the source file fileoutput is the path to the target file format is either !ascii or !csv If the source file is processed, empty and comment lines (lines starting with two dashes --) are ignored. For the import of a MEDAS file the command can look like this:
fittab_import_fit2xml ("c:\tmp\mytol.dat", "c:\tmp\fits.xml", !ascii)

How to start MEDUSA with a console in which you can type in the Bacis2 command is given in “Starting MEDUSA” on page 23.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

605

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables

Bore Hole Tables
Please note: Bore hole tables are only available with the advanced version of MEDUSA, which can be started with the option -advanced. For details on starting MEDUSA see “Starting MEDUSA” on page 23.

Drilling table tools allow constructing engineers to easily create bore hole tables. As a function of freely positionable reference coordinate system (RCS) all relevant data of a drilling (coordinates, diameter, tolerance data, comments) can be displayed at minimum expenditure in clear tabular form. Thus a pedantic and an unclear measuring of the individual drilling is omitted completely, as well as the manual gathering of the necessary information. With the arranged information the creation of e.g. CNC programs is substantially accelerated, since the information is to be found fast and is represented clearly.

Creating a Table
A drilling table consists of a reference coordinate system (RCS), which can be positioned freely on the sheet, and a base table. The RCS and the table are thereby connected by an identification number, which is displayed both in the symbol of the reference coordinate system and in the table foot. The flow of creating a table is divided into two work procedures, positioning the RCS symbol and positioning the base table (those are the first two lines of the table consisting of the table designation and the column headings for the data lines). Step 1 - Position the RCS Symbol Click the button Create a new table
Figure 598

to open the following dialog:

Create a new table

In this dialog you have the following adjustment possibilities:

606

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Bore Hole Tables
Table number

is the identification number between the RCS and the table.
Name of origin of coord System

is the text, which is written below the symbol of the RCS together with the table number.
Name of Table

Together with the table number the table designation is entered into the foot of the table. All lines of the dialog can be edited as desired up to issuing the symbol for the RCS by clicking the left mouse button. The RCS symbol is attached to the cross hair. Modifications within the first two input lines on the symbol are adjusted dynamically. The first two input lines are blocked after dropping. Furthermore the RCS symbol can be manipulated. Via the right mouse button a popup menu is available, in which you can select the following angular adjustments:
Figure 599 Popup While Creating a New Table

0 degree

The symbol is represented parallel to the axles of the absolute world-coordinate system.
+30 degree

Outgoing from the current angle the symbol is turned around +30°.
-30 degree

Outgoing from the current angle the symbol is turned around -30°. If you select one of the options, the adjustments will transfer dynamically to the symbol placed at the crosshair. The option Properties opens a further dialog, which enables you to adjust a free Absolute angle.
Figure 600 Properties

© CAD Schroer GmbH

607

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables
The adjustment is assumed and the dialog is closed via the OK button. Select Apply, if you would first like to see the location of the angle symbol placed at the cross hair and select OK afterwards.Via Cancel you may close the dialog without taking over the adjustments. Step 2 - Position the Base Table In the second step, the base table is placed on the sheet, if the RCS is defined via issuing the symbol. A frame attached to the cross hair, with the dimensions of these two lines, clarifies the width of the later table. The table designation in the dialog can be edited up to issuing the base table via clicking the left mouse button. Up to the point in time of issuing the base table you can terminate the procedure by either using the option Cancel in the dialog Create new table or in the popup menu via Exit tool, without effects to the sheet. Example The following figure shows an example of a placed RCS and a new drilling table.
Figure 601 Example Drilling Table 1

Adding Drillings to a Table
Adding a drilling to a table is divided into the following steps: • the selection of reference coordinate system (RCS)

608

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Bore Hole Tables
• the selection of the desired drilling • the positioning of a marking arrow with an identification number for the drilling Step 1 - Select Reference Coordinate System (RCS) 1. Choose the tool Add data to table . 2. Click into the proximity of the RCS-symbol, to which the drilling is to be assigned. The RCS symbol as well as the appropriate table are represented emphasized. At the same time the dialog Edit Data of circle is opened:
Figure 602 Add Data to Table

The data fields of the dialog can be edited now, except for the circle specific instructions x-/y-coordinate and Diameter. Step 2 - Select Drilling 3. If you now click the desired drilling, it will also be represented emphasized. However, it is not yet transferred to the procedure as a selected drilling. You thus still have the possibility of selecting another drilling then the represented emphasized drilling (e.g. in the case of concentric drillings). If you select another drilling, it is then emphasized and the preceding is again normally represented. 4. In order to transfer the drilling to the procedure of adding it to the table, select Apply from the popup menu via the right mouse button.
Figure 603 Popup While Adding Data to Table

© CAD Schroer GmbH

609

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables
Step 3 - Position Arrow 5. With the next mouse movement, a rubber band line starting from the range of the drilling to the current crosshair position will appear. This line represents the first part of a marking arrow, at whose end the Circle number that was indicated in the dialog, is offered. 6. Via one click with the left mouse button, you determine the position of this section of the marking arrow. Now the identification number of the drilling is aligned to the cursor. Thereby, the adjustment takes place parallel to the axles of the world-coordinate system. The number is aligned accordingly, depending upon the position of the cross-hair. 7. Close the procedure for the current circle/hole with one click of the left mouse button after you have found the desired alignment. The data of the dialog is then entered as a new line into the table. You can now process further drillings or terminate the procedure via OK in the dialog or Exit tool from the popup menu. You may terminate the procedure without effects on the sheet, up to issuing the alignment of the identification number via Cancel in the dialog or via Exit tool in the popup menu.
Figure 604 Example Drilling Table 2

610

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Bore Hole Tables Editing Drilling Data
You can edit the data of a drilling entered into a table, excluded x-/y-coordinates and diameters, . with the tool Update circle data in table The dialog Edit data of circle will open. Its data entries are empty until you select a drilling.
Figure 605 Edit Data of Circle

If you select a drilling now, the associated reference-coordinate system (RCS), as well as the table row will be displayed emphasized.The data from the table row are read into the dialog and can be edited now. With OK you terminate the procedure and the data of the table and at the marking arrow are updated. The dialog is closed. If several drillings need to be edited, select Apply for each edited drilling Here the sheet data of the current drilling is also updated, however, the function remains active and can be continued with the selection of the next drilling. This drilling must thereby not belong to the same RCS. Select Cancel from the dialog or Exit tool from the popup menu, in order to terminate the function without effects on the sheet. The following example shows the data of a selected drilling. The changes were already applied.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

611

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables
Figure 606 Example Drilling Table 3

Updating Individual Tables
In the course of the life cycle of a drawing various modifications are made to the geometry. In the available case, e.g. drillings are shifted, modified or deleted in the diameter. Further, the position and the angle position of reference-coordinate system (RCS) can changed. Likewise, drillings can be removed from the table. Also, accidents by inadvertent deletion of a section of the database of a table are conceivable. The modification of setup adjustments sometimes also make updating necessary. In all these cases, updating of the database of a table is necessary. To do so use the tool Update single table . After the selection of a reference-coordinate system (RCS), the database is first checked during the updating run. All data records, which are no longer complete, are deleted. A prerequisite is however that the elementary structure, created under “Creating a New Table” on page 593, is intact. (If the structure was damaged, an error message will appear. For further information please read the chapter “Cleanup” on page 614.)

612

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting Bore Hole Tables
The data of the updatable entries are thereafter again calculated, concerning geometry. User inputs (tolerance data etc.) are not changed thereby. Basis of the updating are the adjustments in the user parameters or in the general defaults.

User-adjustable Parameters
The appearance of the drilling tables is determined by a multiplicity of parameters, from which the user can adapt a section to his needs. All parameters adjustable by the user are summarized in the dialog Setup coordinate table which is . available with the tool Setup
Figure 607 Setup Coordinate Table

The dialog provides the following parameters:
Sorting

Determines the sequence of the drilling entries in the table. • Ascending The drilling entries are sorted in ascending order, the smallest drilling number is situated directly over the column inscriptions. • Descending ditto, only in reverse succession
Layer

Here you can adjust a layer number for all drawing items of the table. If the number is outside of the area 0...1023, the new value is rejected and the old value is preserved.

© CAD Schroer GmbH

613

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables
Places

Here you can set the number of post-decimal places for the representation of the coordinate specification in the table.
Line type table / Line type arrow

Enter the desired type of line for the table and arrow lines here.
Text types: Table / Arrow

Enter the desired type of text for the table and arrow lines here.
Text height

Here you can set the text heights for the table designation (lowest table line), the column designation and the lines with the drilling entries.
Column width

Here you can enter the width of each column. Please note: The following restriction applies in this version of the tools for line types and text types: A check whether the adjusted type for the application is admitted in groups of the type SET, S2T and S3T does NOT take place. Incorrect adjustments can lead to unpredictable results.

If you choose the button Default, the pre-defined settings for tables are loaded and your customized definitions inside the dialog will be overwritten. If the current settings shall be taken, leave the dialog with the button OK. Cancel rejects the current settings. In both cases the dialog is closed.

Cleanup
The created elementary structure of the table must be error free for the updating of an individual table. Important system information is lost if this structure became damaged, for example by the deletion of the symbol for reference-coordinate system (RCS) or by deletion one of the two first table rows. In such a case only the manual deletion of the entire group structure of the table remains. Please use the MEDUSA functionalities for the deletion of groups for a "clean" deletion. A deletion of only the visible drawing items does not have the complete removal of the group structure from the sheet as a consequence. The deletion of the group structure of the table does not have influence on the system information, which is linked with the drillings. As long as a drilling has such system information, it cannot be added to a table. Therefore, the task of the Cleanup functionality is it to delete the system information linked to the drillings and to release the drilling again. After choosing the tool Cleanup , a safety query takes place before the start of Cleanup:

614

© CAD Schroer GmbH

Select Cancel in order to terminate this function. © CAD Schroer GmbH 615 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Bore Hole Tables Figure 608 Warning: Start Cleanup Select OK if you want to execute the Cleanup run and then click the symbol of the RCS to be cleaned up.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Fit and Bore Hole Tables 616 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

........ for example............................. are used to represent commonly-used shapes......... 627 © CAD Schroer GmbH 617 ............................ tolerance symbols......................... 619 • Transforming and Deleting Prims............................................................... 622 • Prim Properties .............. • Introduction .......................... 618 • Adding Prims to a Sheet .............................. 623 • How MEDUSA Stores and Updates Prims.... or prims......................................MEDUSA4 Drafting PREDEFINED GRAPHICAL SHAPES (PRIMS) Predefined graphical shapes......

In its simplest form. a prim consists of one or more line elements that define a commonly used shape.MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) Introduction Prims are a special type of element that are used to represent predefined graphical shapes. Prims are similar to symbols although you cannot edit the geometry of a prim once it is displayed on the sheet. For this reason you only can use a prim which is predefined. 618 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Move your cursor to the position for the datum point and click left. This point is used to position the prim on the sheet. Change the properties of this prim if required. see “Adding Standard Prims” on page 619 • Choosing a prim from a prim library. like text elements. “Standard Prim Tools” on page 619 show the position of the datum points for standard prims. Figure 609. 3. For details see “Prim Properties” on page 623. contain a single reference point known as the datum point. If you change to another prim for adding by selecting the tool from the toolset then the properties of the prim revert to the default properties. Choose one of the standard create prim tools from the Text + Dimension tooltray of the Complete set of tooltrays. © CAD Schroer GmbH 619 . As long as you do not change the prim tool the currently set properties are also used for further placements of the prim. The prim is displayed attached to the cursor with the prim datum at the center. Now you can either: • cancel the last prim by choosing Undo from the popup menu or • place another prim on the sheet by repeating steps 2 and 3. 2. Adding Standard Prims To add a standard prim to a sheet: 1. see “Adding a Named Prim” on page 620 Positioning a Prim Using the Datum Point Prims. The datum point of a prim is marked inside MEDUSA with a little cross. Figure 609 Standard Prim Tools The cursor changes its shape to an elongated cross. You cannot reference any other point on the prim.MEDUSA4 Drafting Adding Prims to a Sheet Adding Prims to a Sheet There are two ways that you add a prim to a sheet: • Using a prim tool. This is also if you choose the same prim as before.

This is to help you position the prims accurately on the sheet. In order to select a prim. then you can choose a prim from a library using the dashboard. Use the pulldown menu to select the required prim library and select the required prim from the dialog. you have two possibilities: a. Please note: You can only click the prim button in the dashboard if the prim has a Superprim property. from the Text + Dimension tool1. If Superprim is not displayed. 620 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dashboard displays the prim entries: Figure 610 Dashboard: Prims Properties Prim Style Prim button 2. If you do not have the right prim tool. The prims are shown with their datum points represented by small crosses. Choose default as the style if it is not already selected. 1. Click the prim button in the center of the dashboard. change the Prim style to default. as shown above. The Prims dialog appears: Figure 611 Prims Dialog The prims shown in the dialog are not necessarily to scale. 3. This is shown in the grayed out field to the right of the Prim button. Choose the Creates prims of specified type and properties tool tray.MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) Adding a Named Prim Prims are stored in separate directories referred to as prim libraries. The cross is not shown on the sheet.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 621 . The prim is placed on the sheet. option from the popup menu and use the Prim Properties dialog to change the prim properties (see “Prim Properties” on page 623. Figure 612 Popup Menu While Placing Prims Properties opens the Prim properties dialog. Move the cursor to position the prim datum. Exit Tool quits the tool.. You can undo several actions. 4. 3. For details see “Prim Properties” on page 623. Please note: The input of the code in the Prim text field is independent from the prim library displayed in the dialog! Popup Menu While Placing Prims While placing a prim the following popup menu is available by clicking the right mouse button. Either • select the Properties.. In both cases the chosen prim is attached to the cursor. You can add other prims by repeating steps 3 through 6. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. Enter the prim code directly into the text field and click either the Prim button or the Return key. and click left. Change the properties of this prim if required.MEDUSA4 Drafting Adding Prims to a Sheet b. Undo is used for canceling the last action. 2. or • use the prim dashboard to change the prim properties.

The selected prims are deleted. To do this you use any of the transform tools for rotating. ”Selecting with the Mouse” on page 101. You can manipulate a prim in a number of ways but you cannot shear it. Transforming Prims You can magnify.MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) Transforming and Deleting Prims A prim is treated as a single element. See “Transformation” on page 423 for further information. or mirroring. Deleting Prims To delete a prim: 1. moving. Choose Delete from the Edit menu or from the popup menu. rotate. 622 © CAD Schroer GmbH . or move prims as for any other element. Select the prim(s) using the Select prims tool or the Select tool using any of the selection methods described in ”Select”. so you can manipulate it more easily than the complex pattern of lines it represents. 2.

The default value is 0. Thickness. 3. 2. 5. pap and tri. and Type and additional properties that are specific to prims which are described below. dot. If you use the arrows for changing this values it changes step wise up or down by five (e. Rotation gives the value (units are degrees) by which a selected prim rotates. Layer.00).00. default and the standard styles blo.00.MEDUSA4 Drafting Prim Properties Prim Properties Prims have the standard properties of Style. For details see ”Prim Properties”.00.g. If you use the arrows for changing this value it changes step wise up or down by one (e. dtm. Magnification is the value for increasing or decreasing the default size of the prim. ”Adding a Named Prim” on page 620. ear. ”Dialog” on page 624.00. Available styles are Free. Color. The default value is 1. 10.00).g. Prim Style gives the style of the selected prim. Prim button opens the Prims dialog for selecting another picture for the current prim. For details see ”Adding Prims to a Sheet”. Figure 613 Prims Dashboard Properties Prim Style Prim button Magnification Rotation The following list explains the parameter as named in the figure above: Properties opens the Prim properties dialog. In front of the dashboard the Creates prims of specified type and properties tool is displayed. the dashboard displays its properties. Prim properties are available in the dashboard (see ”Dashboard”) and in the Prim properties dialog (see “Dialog” on page 624). Dashboard If you have chosen a prim tool or if you selected a prim inside the drawing area. © CAD Schroer GmbH 623 . Changing properties is given in “Changing Prim Properties” on page 625.

The default value is 1. 624 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The Prim properties dialog appears and you can make the changes you require. Layer. If you use the arrows for changing this values it changes step wise up or down by one (e.00. ”Adding a Named Prim” on page 620.00. Thickness are the standard properties X position.g. 10. 2. Y position gives the coordinates of the datum point of the selected prim. Picture opens the Prims dialog for selecting another picture for the current prim.00). The default value is 0. Color.MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) Dialog To use the Prim properties dialog select the prim you want to change and click left on the Properties tool on the left of the dashboard.g. For details see ”Adding Prims to a Sheet”. If you use the arrows for changing this values it changes step wise up or down by five (e. Rotate Rotate the prim by entering the angle of rotation. Magnify Enlarge or reduce the size of the prim by entering the magnification factor. Type gives the type of the selected prim. 3.00.00. Figure 614 Prim Properties Dialog The following entries are found in the dialog: Style. 5.00).

Select a prim on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Prim Properties Changing Prim Properties There are several methods for changing prim properties. For details see ”Prim Properties”. Go on with step 4 in the next section. if one is present) in the dashboard. If any entry you want to change is disabled (grayed out) click left on the button Style. The Prim properties dialog opens. Using the Dashboard To change a property of a prim directly inside the dashboard: 1. 2. ”Dialog” on page 624. on the left of the dashboard. The chosen property is changed for the selected element. 3. Type inside the edit field a new value for the property or select the new value from the list of values (available by the arrow). Using the Popup Menu To use the popup menu: 1. Using the Properties Dialog For changing properties with the Prim properties dialog do the following steps: 1. The Style Creation Dialog opens: © CAD Schroer GmbH 625 . 2. 3. Click left on the property you want to change (or click the arrow next to it. Select a prim on the sheet. 3. Click right for displaying the popup menu. The dashboard changes to show the properties of the selected prim. Select the prim you want to change. Click left on the Properties entry. 2. Click on the Properties tool The Prim properties dialog is displayed.

Make the changes you require and press Apply. the changes are not applied and the dialog is closed. 626 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Click left on the button Close to quit the Style Creation Dialog. Now you can adjust the unlocked prim properties inside the Prim properties dialog. 6. Switch off the Lock option in the line of the property you want to change. 5. the changes are applied too but additionally the dialog is closed. If you choose Cancel.MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) Figure 615 Style Creation Dialog 4. Click left on the button Modify to apply the changes. If you choose OK. 7. The changes are applied to the selected prim.

Any sheets that reference the prim are updated with the modified design the next time they are redrawn or plotted. Only the prim definition needs to be changed. You can incorporate changes to the original prim definition into all your relevant drawings very quickly. Suppose that the design of a prim needs to be modified. This means that prims are very useful on sheets which contain large numbers of similar items. © CAD Schroer GmbH 627 . Storage of Prims Prims get their name from the fact that they are PRIMitive elements.) A description of the geometry of the prim is not stored on the sheet. They are termed primitive because only the prim properties are stored in memory with the other sheet information. For this reason very little space is used to store the prim information. Automatic Updating of Prims on Sheets The central storage of prims offers the advantage of storing a large number of identical symbols held in separate directories. For example. you may need to create hundreds of components on a single sheet. Using prims less memory is required to store that sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting How MEDUSA Stores and Updates Prims How MEDUSA Stores and Updates Prims This section describes how MEDUSA stores and displays prims. (See “Prim Properties” on page 623 for a description of the prim properties. in applications where you need to draw electronic circuits. It also gives the advantages this offers you.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Predefined Graphical Shapes (Prims) 628 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

..................................................................................... 648 • Masking Hidden Lines........ • Introduction to Crosshatching and Stippling................................ 631 • Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools ........................................ 652 © CAD Schroer GmbH 629 ....................... 633 • Crosshatch Properties ...........................................................................................MEDUSA4 Drafting AREA FILLS This chapter describes how to fill enclosed areas with a specified pattern................................................. 647 • Create Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching ............................................................ 646 • Filling Disjoint Areas ....................................... You can fill areas with lines using the crosshatch tool and with a pattern using the stipple tool... 637 • Stipple Properties........ 645 • Multiple Crosshatching...... 630 • Defining a Closed Area ....................... 641 • Selecting and Deleting Stippling or Crosshatching ...... 649 • Boolean Operations ................................................................

or you can specify the spacing between adjacent symbols. You can either create a solid pattern of symbols. known as stippling. Crosshatching The crosshatching tool allows you to cover an area of a drawing with a regularly spaced pattern of lines. For example. with no spacing between the symbols. or with a pattern of predefined symbols. save it as a symbol. You can change the style of the crosshatching by changing its properties. known as crosshatching. Figure 616 Examples of Crosshatching Stippling The stipple tools allow you to stipple an area with a symbol. and then stipple an area of a drawing using the star as the stippling symbol.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Introduction to Crosshatching and Stippling You can cover an area of a drawing with regularly spaced lines. Figure 617 shows some examples of stippling patterns. Figure 617 Examples of Stippling 630 © CAD Schroer GmbH . you could create a star. Figure 616 shows some examples of crosshatching.

if they make up a closed area. • A closed temporary line (see below). • Any number of individual lines.MEDUSA4 Drafting Defining a Closed Area Defining a Closed Area The area that you want to fill should be enclosed. Figure 618 Temporary Lines Defining the Area to be Filled Area to be crosshatched Temporary closed line Resulting area of crosshatching Deleting the Temporary Boundary Line You can delete the temporary line when the area has been filled. you could create a construction line to enclose the required area as shown in Figure 618. The area can have any shape you like. A closed are can be defined by: • Closed line(s). You can create these lines using any of the normal techniques for drawing lines. For example. Drawing a Temporary Line If you want to fill an area bounded by a number of existing lines you must create a temporary line that coincides with the separate lines so that it encloses the area to be filled. This makes it easier to delete the temporary boundary line as construction lines are created on a separate layer. It is recommended that you use a construction line type for the temporary lines. © CAD Schroer GmbH 631 . either at sheet level or in a group (you can use any line type).

632 © CAD Schroer GmbH . “Temporary Lines Defining the Area to be Filled” on page 631 without first having to define a temporary line. then an arrow appears on the drawing at the appropriate point. Seed Point enables you to fill the area shown in Figure 618. This is because it looks for the area defined by the intersection of the five lines. which is on the popup menu for the crosshatch or stipple tools. If there is a problem with the area as defined by the lines that you select. you can use the Seedpoint menu item.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Seed Point Crosshatching or Stippling As an alternative to drawing a temporary line to define the area that you want to fill.

Therefore. selecting elements and then using the popup menu. Crosshatching Areas Crosshatching areas works in general by choosing the crosshatch tool. You cannot fill text elements or prims. the result of crosshatching can get wrong. If you choose Seed Point.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools You can fill any shape assuming it is defined by a suitable line as explained in “Defining a Closed Area” on page 631. Properties opens the Crosshatch Properties dialog explained in “Crosshatch Properties” on page 637. you have to probe the appropriate area inside the drawing area to execute filling. Seed Point makes MEDUSA to find an area enclosed by several selected elements which intersect. Figure 619 Crosshatch and Stipple Tools The following sections give the steps for hatching and stippling separately because both kinds of filling an area work a little different. If the elements which enclose one area do not belong together. In this case use Seed Point for defining the area which shall be filled. Sheet Level forces MEDUSA to place the crosshatch on sheet level also. here is the popup menu available by the right mouse button after chosen the crosshatch tool: Figure 620 Popup Crosshatch Tool Apply executes crosshatching on all areas defined by the currently selected elements. © CAD Schroer GmbH 633 . if the selected elements are on another level. before giving the steps for hatching areas.

selecting elements and then using the popup menu. Select the element(s) or the line(s) defining the area that you want to fill.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Undo is used for canceling the last action. in which you placed the seed point. before giving the steps for stippling areas. Filling Areas with Symbols Filling areas with symbols. works in general by choosing the stippling tool. you have to select it again. 4. move the cursor inside the area to fill and click left. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. 3. • If you chose Seed Point. Exit Tool quits the tool. is filled. or • change the area fill properties and then fill other areas. Select the Crosshatches the selected areas tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. the selected area will be filled and the crosshatch becomes selected after the operation. You can undo several actions. Either choose the Apply or the Seed Point option from the popup menu • If you chose Apply. The elements selected in step 3 remain selected and you can go on filling the area with other patterns (for examples see “Multiple Crosshatching” on page 646). • fill other areas using the same properties. The selected area. For details see “Crosshatch Properties” on page 637. here is the popup menu available by the right mouse button after chosen the stippling tool: Figure 621 Popup Stippling Tool 634 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If you want to fill the same area with a different pattern. Change the properties of the Crosshatch tool if required. For crosshatching do the following steps: 1. Now you can • cancel the area fill by choosing Undo from the popup menu. Therefore. 2. the so called stippling.

2. Select the Stipples the selected areas tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. b. The Load Named Symbol dialog appears: Figure 622 Load Named Symbol Dialog a. 3. © CAD Schroer GmbH 635 . Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack. In this case use Seed Point for defining the area which shall be filled.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using the Crosshatch or Stipple Tools Apply executes stippling on all areas defined by the currently selected elements. The dialog closes and the chosen symbol is attached to the cursor. If the elements which enclose one area do not belong together the result of stippling can get wrong. Choose the symbol that you want to use. Exit Tool quits the tool. For details see “Stipple Properties” on page 641. Seed Point makes MEDUSA to find an area enclosed by several selected elements which intersect. Click Load. or the line(s) defining the area that you want to fill. For filling areas with symbols do the following steps: 1. Change the properties of the stipple tool if required. Properties opens the Temporary Stipple Properties dialog explained in “Stipple Properties” on page 641. You can undo several actions. If you choose Seed Point you have to probe the appropriate area inside the drawing area to execute filling. Select the element(s). Undo is used for canceling the last action.

636 © CAD Schroer GmbH . for example. spacing) and then fill other areas. • stipple other areas using a different symbol by choosing New Symbol from the popup menu and go on with step 3. or • change the area fill properties (for example.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills 4. by rotating the stipple symbol with Rotate by 90 from the popup menu (see also “Multiple Crosshatching” on page 646). you can point to the stipple tool. then move your cursor inside the area. choose Temp Properties. from the popup menu. Please note: If you know the path name of the symbol you want to stipple with. 5. and finally click left. The elements selected in step 3 remain selected. and type in the pathname of the symbol. Now you can • cancel the area fill by choosing Undo from the popup menu. • fill other areas using the same properties (re-start with step 3).. Either • choose the Apply option from the popup menu. or • choose Seed Point from the popup menu. • fill the same areas again.. The selected area is filled. Probe a point where you want to start stippling from inside the selected area.

Changing properties is explained in “Changing Crosshatch Properties” on page 640. This is known as the seed line. Spacing. © CAD Schroer GmbH 637 . based on the angle that you specify as shown in Figure 623. the system first constructs a temporary reference line. The rest of the crosshatching lines are then drawn parallel to the seed line and on both sides using the offset and spacing that you specified. Figure 623 Angle. However. only those crosshatch lines that fall within the crosshatching boundary are displayed on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Crosshatch Properties Crosshatch Properties To crosshatch an area. and Offset Seed Spacing Offset Crosshatching Angle The default settings for the crosshatch properties are: Property Offset Line Type Layer Angle Spacing Default Setting 0 mm Solid Crosshatching 45 degrees 5mm Crosshatch properties are available in the dashboard (see “Dashboard” on page 638) and inside the Crosshatch Properties dialog (see “Dialog” on page 639).

”Dialog” on page 639. Predefined crosshatches are Free. Layer gives the layer Crosshatching which is the default layer for crosshatching and stippling.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Dashboard If you have chosen the crosshatch tool or if you selected a crosshatch inside the drawing area. single and double are available with angles of +/.30. 638 © CAD Schroer GmbH . and Offset” on page 637. Angle gives the angle of the crosshatch lines from the horizontal. default. “Angle. This is used to calculate the position of the other crosshatch lines as shown in Figure 623. Spacing. In front of the dashboard the Crosshatches the selected areas tool is displayed. Offset sets the offset for the seed line from the sheet origin. Spacing. For details see ”Crosshatch Properties”. single and double. Double line option for drawing two lines instead of one. and Offset” on page 637. Figure 624 Crosshatches Dashboard Properties Style Layer Properties The following list explains the parameters as shown in the figure above: Properties opens the Crosshatch properties dialog. “Angle. 45 and 60 degrees. Style gives the type of the crosshatch. Spacing sets the distance between neighbored crosshatch lines in sheet units as shown in Figure 623. If Double line is off this entry is disabled. Once the Double line option is switched on the Gap option is also enabled. the dashboard displays its properties. Gap is the offset for the spacing between first and second line of a double lined crosshatch.

For details on its usage see ”Administration”. Figure 625 The Crosshatch Properties Dialog The dialog provides the same properties as explained for the dashboard on page 638. ”Dialogs”. Create additionally draws the crosshatch into the selected geometry. Therefore here only those parameters are given which were not explained before: Type sets the type of line. OK. Help work as usual. © CAD Schroer GmbH 639 . The dialog window remains open. For details see ”Overview of the Work Environment”. the Properties tool The Crosshatch properties dialog appears and you can make the changes you require (given in “Changing Crosshatch Properties” on page 640). ”Buttons” on page 32.MEDUSA4 Drafting Crosshatch Properties Dialog To use the Crosshatch Properties dialog select the crosshatch you want to change and click left on on the left of the dashboard. Apply applies the changes you made inside the dialog. Thickness sets the thickness of the line. Style (button) opens the Style Creation Dialog. Create. Color sets the color of the line. Cancel. ”Creating and Editing MEDUSA Styles” inside the MEDUSA Administration Guide.

in a simply way. On the left of the dashboard there is the Crosshatches the selected areas button • If the change of properties is set to default. ”Dialog” on page 639. For further information about creating or modifying properties styles see ”Administration”. the background of the button is yellow. 6. 5. Click the right mouse button to display the popup menu. Change Temporary To set the crosshatch properties temporarily. • If the change of properties is temporarily. the button has the standard background. Change Permanently Please note: Before changing default crosshatch properties the Administrator mode must be enabled. If the crosshatch tool is chosen or a crosshatch is selected the basic crosshatch properties are displayed in . the dashboard. Once you change temporary properties they remain at the new settings until you change them again or choose another style from the Style pulldown menu. • OK to apply the properties and close the dialog. For changing properties permanently you also use the Crosshatch properties dialog as shown in Figure 625. Click • Apply to apply the properties and retain the Crosshatch Properties dialog. 640 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 4. “The Crosshatch Properties Dialog” on page 639. The Crosshatch Properties dialog appears as given in Figure 625. Choose the Properties option. ”Creating and Editing MEDUSA Styles” in the MEDUSA Administration Guide. You can identify the mode of properties. 3. Click on the Crosshatches the selected areas tool 2. Select elements which define an area. use the Crosshatch Properties dialog. Choose crosshatch properties as required. Details are given in ”Crosshatch Properties”. temporary or default.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Changing Crosshatch Properties Crosshatch properties can be changed temporary or permanently. 1.

”Transforming Symbols”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Stipple Properties Stipple Properties When you fill an area with a stipple pattern. For example. Properties Dialog You can open the properties dialog while creating stipples by clicking right and choosing Properties from the popup menu. “Load Named Symbol Dialog” on page 635) is displayed when you choose the Stipples the selected areas tool. You can change the symbol that is used for stippling by typing a new name for the symbol. ”Rotating a Symbol” on page 452 or “Magnifying a Symbol” on page 452. © CAD Schroer GmbH 641 . the Load New Symbol dialog (see Figure 622. you create the pattern from a symbol. see ”Symbols”. Figure 626 Temporary Stipple Properties Dialog The Stipple Properties dialog provides the following parameters: File is the path and file name of the currently used symbol. Therefore many of the properties are similar to symbol properties. If this field is blank.

rigid defines the display of texts within a symbol. 642 © CAD Schroer GmbH . e. Rotate is used for rotating the stipple symbol by the defined angle.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Layer on which stippling is placed. A positive value rotates counterclockwise. Ratio defines that the values for shearing are evaluated either as an Angle or a Ratio. The option rigid defines that texts are displayed the same way as other elements of the symbol. Move The Horizontal and Vertical fields enable you to move the datum of the symbol that you used for stippling. (This means. legible. “Setting the Spacing Between Symbols” on page 643. see “Layers” on page 151.The option legible guarantees that the text is always readable (either from left to right or from bottom to top) also in the case that the symbol is rotated or mirrored. possibly the text is not more legible. It is Crosshatching by default. the legibility of the text remains. fixed. Mirror is used for mirroring the symbol separately at a Horizontal or Vertical axis. (See “Symbols” on page 443). A negative value rotates clockwise. scaled. The datum point is the position on the sheet that you probed when the symbol was saved. Step sets the spacing between the symbols in rows and columns. unscaled displays the symbol scaled or unscaled. Shear is used for shearing the symbol separately in Horizontal and Vertical direction. after rotating the symbol) The option fixed keeps the text orientation as saved with the symbol. To increase the spacing you need to enter a value greater than the dimensions of the symbol. Angle. Magnify is used for sizing the symbol separately in Horizontal and Vertical direction. The default spacing is that there is no space between the symbols. You can set the row and column spacing and the horizontal and vertical offset between the symbols as shown in Figure 627.g.

Right click to open the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Stipple Properties Figure 627 Setting the Spacing Between Symbols Changes the spacing between the columns Changes the vertical offset of the symbols Input fields of the Properties dialog Changes the spacing between the rows Changes the horizontal offset of the symbols Changing Stipple Properties You can change the stipple properties either by changing the default properties or by changing the properties temporarily. . © CAD Schroer GmbH 643 . Move your cursor over the Stipples the selected areas tool 2. Change Permanently To set default stipple properties: 1.

”Properties Dialog” on page 641. 644 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The Stipple Properties dialog opens. They are used as the new settings until you change them again. Both the Stipple Properties dialog and the temporary Stipple Properties dialog have the same options. Change the properties of the stipple tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills 3. The Load Named Symbol dialog appears (see Figure 622. “Load Named Symbol Dialog” on page 635). Choose Apply or OK for confirming your changes. For details see ”Stipple Properties”. 5. For getting back the default settings use the Defaults button in the properties dialog. Choose the symbol that you want to use and click left on the button Load. Please note: Changing the temporary properties does not affect the default property settings. For details see ”Stipple Properties”. 4. Choose Apply or OK for confirming your changes. ”Changing Stipple Properties” on page 643. 3. The Stipple Properties dialog opens. 5. you select another symbol for stippling. or you exit the tool. The stipple properties are set for this use of the tool only. 2. 4. Select the Stipples the selected areas tool located in the Text + Dimension tooltray. The dialog closes and the chosen symbol is attached to the cursor. Change Temporary To set temporary stipple properties: 1. Change the properties to your needs. Select Properties. Right click to open the popup menu and select Properties. Please note: The properties are used for all stipple operations you do in the current session.

The crosshatching or the stippling is deleted but not the selected elements. Deleting Area Fills To delete all the crosshatching or stippling on a sheet: 1. Click left on the icon of the appropriate selection tool as given in Figure 628. • Select the area fills using the Attribute Select Elements dialog as explained in ”Select”. ”Selecting Elements by Attributes” on page 112 2. or the Select crosshatching tool to • using the Select Stipple tool select crosshatching. Select the crosshatch or stipple elements you want to delete either by to select stippling. © CAD Schroer GmbH 645 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Selecting and Deleting Stippling or Crosshatching Selecting and Deleting Stippling or Crosshatching After creating stippling or crosshatching you can select them using the selection tools available inside the toolbar. Figure 628 Select Stipple Select crosshatching Selection Tools for Stippling and Crosshatching Selecting Area Fills To select stippling or crosshatching: 1. Move the cursor to a line in the filled area and click left. 3. Move the cursor over the black arrow down to the right of the Selects elements of any type tool . 3. Choose Delete from the Edit menu or click the button on the toolbar. 2. The selected crosshatch or stipple becomes highlighted which marks it as selected.

4. Set the offset to 2. 2. Choose Apply from the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Multiple Crosshatching You can create complex patterns by repeatedly crosshatching the same area using different crosshatch properties. Choose Negative Angle from the popup menu. Select the element. Choose Vertical from the popup menu. 1. from the popup menu. 5.. and click Apply. 3. Choose Apply from the popup menu. 2. Choose Temp Properties. Crosshatch the selected element at 45 degrees.. Figure 629 Creating Multiple Crosshatching To achieve the pattern shown in Figure 630. 3. Figure 630 Creating Offset Multiple Crosshatching 646 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Examples To achieve the pattern shown in Figure 629: 1.

Select the area that you want to fill using the Selects elements of any type tool .MEDUSA4 Drafting Filling Disjoint Areas Filling Disjoint Areas You can crosshatch or stipple disjoint areas at the same time leaving one or more islands that are not crosshatched within the normal crosshatch boundary as in Figure 631. Release the mouse button at this position 3. Select either the Crosshatches the selected areas tool or the Stipples the selected areas tool 2. For example you can drag the cursor diagonally across the area until a drag box encloses the elements and then release the left mouse button: Figure 632 Crosshatching Disjoint Areas: 2 Move the cursor at this position and press the left mouse button . © CAD Schroer GmbH 647 . The area is crosshatched and the boundary of the crosshatching is highlighted. Alternate areas are considered to be inside and outside the boundary line. Choose Apply from the popup menu. Figure 631 Crosshatching Disjoint Areas: 1 1.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Create Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching Dimension For making text clearly readable on a crosshatched area MEDUSA provides a tool in the Text + tooltray. Choose the Create gaps under text in crosshatching tool in the Text + Dimension tooltray. 2. which should be removed under the text. 1. which removes an existing crosshatching under the text and creates a gap between text and crosshatching. Select the desired text and the crosshatching. The crosshatching under and around the text will be immediately removed. Figure 633 Example of Using the Create Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching Tool 648 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Please note: The selected geometry which is on top has to consist of closed geometry. Figure 634 Popup Global Settings for HLR Operations Create hidden lines controls the display of hidden lines. Setting Properties for Masking Before using the masking tool you can set some properties for the operation which are used for the whole MEDUSA session. When the option is deactivated (default setting). centerlines are shown as usual. which have been created with centerlines. When the option is activated (check mark is set).MEDUSA4 Drafting Masking Hidden Lines Masking Hidden Lines MEDUSA provides the tool Perform HLR operations on geometry which works on two selection sets.g. when the option is activated (check mark is set). i. One selection set is masked by positioning the other selection set above it. In that case you have to select besides the geometry also the crosshatching or stippling. the settings for both options will be saved too. whether centerlines of geometries. are also displayed as hidden lines or not.g. dashed or dotted). dotted or not at all.. hidden lines are displayed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 649 . the centerlines of a hidden geometry are displayed according to the settings for hidden lines. 2D shapes that take part in HLR operations are post-processed as follows: • shapes that are still valid are left intact • shapes that have become invalid are smashed • shapes that have become empty (or with only centrelines) are deleted The selection sets can be crosshatched or stippled. Consider centerlines defines.e. Please note: When quitting MEDUSA and saving the defaults. The part of the geometry which is masked is displayed as hidden line (e. e. For opening this popup menu move the cursor over the Perform HLR operations on geometry tool and click right.

Apply uses the defined line style. Perform Masking a Selection Set 1. Figure 636 Popup HLR Operations 650 © CAD Schroer GmbH . the dialog remains opened.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Change HLR type opens the dialog for defining the line style of hidden lines. Now the following popup menu is available whose entries are explained in the following steps. Click left on the Perform HLR operations on geometry tool. With OK the chosen line style will be applied and the dialog is closed. which can be used for hidden lines. Figure 635 Dialog HLR Type Via arrow you can display a list of available styles.

• Choose Above or Below for masking the hidden lines. Inside the popup menu the entry Apply is enabled now. Choose the first selection set. Depending if you want the current selection set on top or beneath: • select Above. if you want the current selection below the next selection. or • select Below. you can Undo the masking you did and redo steps 2 to 4 for masking other selection sets. 5. Choose the second selection set. 4. if you want the current selection on top. Now you have the following possibilities using the popup menu: • Choose Apply for masking the hidden lines. If you do not agree with the result.MEDUSA4 Drafting Masking Hidden Lines 2. © CAD Schroer GmbH 651 . 3.

The result depends on the succession of selection (Difference). Now the following popup menu is available whose entries are explained in the list on top of this page. Inside the popup menu the entry Apply is enabled now. If you do not agree with the result. This tool works on closed geometry. After a boolean operation both selection sets are replaced by the result. You can do the following operations: • Connect two areas (Union). Please note: 2D shapes that take part in boolean operations are post-processed as follows: • shapes that are still valid are left intact • shapes that have become invalid are smashed • shapes that have become empty (or with only centrelines) are deleted For applying boolean operations on closed geometries: 1. Choose the second selection set. Choose the first selection set. Figure 637 Popup Boolean Operations 2. you can Undo the operation. crosshatching and stippling only. Choose Apply for executing the operation. 4. The type of line used for the result is determined by following rules: 652 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 5. • Subtract one area from another but keeping the subtracted area (Difference (keep)). Click left on the Perform boolean operations on geometry tool.MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Boolean Operations The tool Perform boolean operations on geometry combines two selection sets with each other and creates a new closed geometry from them. • Subtract one area from another. Choose a boolean operation from the popup menu. 6. • Intersect two areas (Intersection). 3.

Figure 638 Example Boolean Operation Union For boolean operations which subtract the succession of selection is important. Figure 639 Example Boolean Operation Difference Figure 640 Example Boolean Operation Difference (keep) © CAD Schroer GmbH 653 . The outermost left picture always gives the input for the results given on the right. The following figures show the results for selecting first the horizontal bar (on the left) and selecting first the vertical bar (on the right). • Using the operations Difference and difference (keep) the resulting elements contain the line types of the first selection only. difference and intersection operations.MEDUSA4 Drafting Boolean Operations • Using the operations Union and Intersection the resulting elements contain the line types of the first and the second selection. The following examples give the results for the union.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Area Fills Figure 641 Example Boolean Operation Intersection 654 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

................................................................................ 658 • Reference Tools ...... 664 © CAD Schroer GmbH 655 ....... 661 • Load.................... Convert........... Delete and Compare a Reference.......MEDUSA4 Drafting REFERENCE SHEET PROCEDURE The reference sheet procedure is an easy way of getting a first overview of an assembly by referencing single drawings or parts of drawings in one sheet............................................................................................ 656 • Porthole Tools ............ 660 • Creating a New Reference... • Overview . 657 • Creating Porthole Elements ...........................................................................................................

Reference tools are located in the Dimensions + Text tooltray and they are shown in Figure 642. Figure 642 Reference Sheet Tools Load a new reference Create a porthole element Load.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure Overview MEDUSA provides the possibility to reference drawings inside a sheet. convert and delete and compare selected reference 656 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Create porthole definition text create the porthole definition text. While creating porthole elements popup menus are available which provide the same functions as for creating regular elements like lines. Create the porthole datum prim creates the porthole datum prim. This chapter gives you an overview of the tools which create porthole elements. Figure 643 Tools for Creating Porthole Elements From left to right you find the following tools: Create a porthole group allows you to create a group from the porthole elements. Creating porthole groups and datum prims is executed immediately on the selected elements therefore there is no popup menu available. texts and rectangles. Control Copy Protect Flag opens the copy protect flag dialog which allows you to switch whether a porthole element can be copied or not.MEDUSA4 Drafting Porthole Tools Porthole Tools Porthole elements are used to define a certain part of a drawing for using it as reference. Create a porthole line creates a porthole line. Create a rectangular porthole creates a rectangular porthole. © CAD Schroer GmbH 657 .

which are completely inside the porthole line/rectangle. choosing the Create a porthole line tool and then drawing a closed line. or b. choosing the Create a rectangular porthole tool . 2. then click left to probe the left bottom corner of the rectangle and then click left to probe the top right corner.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure Creating Porthole Elements If you want a drawing or a part of a drawing used as reference inside other sheets. to assemble a machine. The Porthole Definition dialog opens. With this you are able to create porthole elements now. Now you have the area enclosing the elements which shall be referenced. 3. then you have to define it as porthole. in order to define the point at which the porthole will be placed as reference inside the assembly sheet. Choose the Create the porthole datum prim tool . belong to the porthole element. 6. Define the area containing the part of the sheet you want to use as reference either by a. for example. 658 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 4. Select a Porthole-Type. Figure 644 Porthole Definition Dialog 7. The field near the tree toggle button inside the status area shows you that the current level is the porthole group (CPH). Following options are available: • Inside Group Only elements. Choose the Create a porthole group tool . Click left inside the drawing area to place the prim. belong to the porthole element. The following procedure shows you how to do that: 1. which have at least one point inside the porthole line/ rectangle. 5. Open the sheet from which you want a part to be referenced. • Points Only elements on sheet level. Choose the Create porthole definition text tool .

8. belong to the porthole element. Behind the entry Porthole type in the name by which the porthole will be called for referencing it inside the assembly sheet. The creation of the porthole is complete and the sheet can be referenced inside an assembly sheet now.Save the sheet. belong to the porthole element. which have at least one point inside the porthole line/rectangle.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating Porthole Elements • Section All elements. see the chapter “Creating a New Reference” on page 661. Click left inside the drawing area to place the porthole definition text. which are inside the porthole line/rectangle and which are cut by the border line. 10. For creating a reference to this sheet you just made. 9. • Elements Only elements. © CAD Schroer GmbH 659 .

A click on the tool opens the Compare reference dialog and a file selector dialog. For details see “Creating a New Reference” on page 661. For details see “Comparing a Reference” on page 665. This function only works on references which are already displayed with Load reference. 660 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Then you can display the referenced sheet with Load reference and use the other reference tools. This chapter gives you an overview of the tools which work on references. Compare selected reference The tool is used to compare a selected reference with the source drawing in order to make pending modifications of the source drawing visible. Load reference This option allows you to load (display) all or selected references. You can use this option only if you already created at least one reference on the sheet with Load a new reference. This function only works on references which are already displayed with Load reference. Convert reference This option allows you to convert all or selected loaded references to regular elements. Figure 645 Tools for References From left to right you find the following tools: Load a new reference This option creates a reference on the sheet.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure Reference Tools Once you defined references you can use them for an assembly. for example. Delete reference This option deletes (hides) all or selected references.

646 Open Sheet Dialog 3. The Reference Group dialog displays the chosen file name with the complete path in the Sheet field. Open the sheet on which you want to reference the created porthole elements. 2. Figure 647 Dialog Reference Group © CAD Schroer GmbH 661 . Abb. which can be included in the target sheet. The Open Sheet and Reference Group dialogs open. In this dialog the commands for the reference appearance are defined.MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Reference Creating a New Reference Before you can display a drawing or part of it as reference you have to create this reference. Inside the Open Sheet dialog select the file name of the sheet on which the porthole element has been defined which you want to load as reference and confirm your choice with Open. proceed as follows: 1. In order to create a reference on your sheet. Choose the Load a new reference tool .

• Visible/Hitable The reference is visible and selectable on the sheet. Source layers are mapped on the Target layers whereas the layers are automatically switched to visible and hitable. The commands for source lines and target lines is written as REFLIN text string on the target sheet. 9. The command for source layers and target layers is written as REFLAY text string on the target sheet. or 662 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Furthermore you can define settings for visibility and selectivity. • Source lines/Target lines Maps the line styles of the source to line styles of the target sheet. Confirm your settings with Ok.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure 4. (See “Creating Porthole Elements” on page 658). • Visible/Unhitable The reference is visible but not selectable on the sheet. The reference is attached to the cursor and the Reference Group dialog closes. Enter the porthole name. The reference is attached to the cursor and the Reference Group dialog remains open. as defined while creating a porthole element. Only one REFSHT command is allowed. • Invisible/Hitable The reference is not visible but selectable . Please note: The specification of the porthole name is the only mandatory command and is written as REFSHT text string on your target sheet. which is loaded on the target sheet. Confirm your settings with Apply. 8. 5. 6. in the Porthole field. Within one reference call several REFLIN-commands are possible. You can do now the following: • If you want to reference another file continue with step 3. Click left on the sheet to place the reference. • Magnification Specifies the magnfication of reference information. • Invisible/Unhitable The reference is neither visible nor selectable. The magnification command is written on the target sheet as REFMAG text string. The Open Sheet dialog opens again for choosing another file for referencing. Within one reference call several REFLAY-commands are possible.in the structure tree. • Source layers/Target layers Defines the layers of the source sheet. which shall be loaded into the target sheet. or 7. Following additional reference appearance commands can be specified within the Reference group dialog. The command is written as REFSWT text string on your target sheet.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Creating a New Reference • If you want finish placing references choose Cancel inside the Open Sheet dialog as well as inside the Reference Group dialog. The first line REFSHT gives the file name. Now you should have at least one reference on your sheet which looks like the example given in the following figure. the second line REFMAG shows the magnification and the last line REFSWT shows you the set switches for visibility and selectivity (in the figure below it is set to visible VIS and selectable HIT) Figure 648 Example For a Reference © CAD Schroer GmbH 663 .

With this you can edit these elements inside the current sheet. The procedure is the same as given for ”Loading References”. For all these reference tools a popup menu is available which allows you to apply the current function either on selected or all references of a sheet: Loading References 1. 2. Deleting References The Delete reference tool allows you to make referenced drawings or parts of drawings become invisible.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure Load. If you want to apply the function on selected references only. Delete and Compare a Reference If you have references in your sheet MEDUSA provides the tools for displaying. Figure 649 Popup Menu for Reference Tools After choosing an application entry from the popup menu the drawings or parts of drawings are displayed immediately on the sheet. Choose the Load reference tool . select references by drawing a selection frame. The procedure is the same as given for ”Loading References”. converting and hiding the referenced drawing. Converting References The Convert reference tool allows you to convert referenced drawings into regular elements. Convert. 3. 664 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Converted references cannot be changed to references again. Load the reference by using the popup menu. Please note: There is no undo function for Convert reference.

which complies with the displayed referenced geometry. Select the reference you wish to compare with its source either on the sheet or in the structure tree. Delete and Compare a Reference Comparing a Reference The function provides the possibility to compare a selected reference with the source drawing in order to show pending modifications of the source geometry. © CAD Schroer GmbH 665 . 3. 1. Convert. The Reference clump is created and shown in the structure tree. with a PDS subgroup. Load a new reference and display it on the sheet. Figure 650 Structure Tree showing the Reference Clump 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Load. Choose the Compare selected reference tool .

If desired. you can select another layer from a pulldown list. Cancel closes the dialog and aborts the Compare selected reference tool. Click twice on the filename to transfer the path of the drawing to the Sheet input field and close the file selector dialog. Undo reverses the comparison process. Sheet 666 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The dialog remains open. Layer defines the layer on which the current geometry of the source will be written after having executed the compare process. Click Apply or OK to start the compare process. 6. Default setting is Graphical error messages. Figure 652 Compare Reference Dialog with Input of Source File gives the full path to the sheet on which the original of the referenced geometry is placed. 5. Figure 651 File Selector and Compare Reference Dialog 4.MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure A file selector dialog appears simultaneously with the Compare reference dialog. Help opens the online documentation. Choose the source drawing of the reference in the file selector dialog. The dialog remains open for the next comparison OK starts the compare process. Apply starts the compare process. The dialog is closed.

Update the structure tree using the Refresh option from the right mouse popup menu.Press the Cancel button in the Compare reference dialog to close the Compare Reference dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Load. The structure tree shows the differences between the previous (PDS group) and current version (RDS group) of the referenced geometry. Figure 653 Structure Tree showing the current (RDS) and previous Version (PDS) of the Reference 8. Select the RDS group in the tree to highlight the geometry of the current reference in the drawing. © CAD Schroer GmbH 667 . subsequently select the PDS group to highlight the previous state of the geometry . A new RDS group is created within the Reference Clump. To delete the updated geometry use the Undo button from the Compare Reference dialog 10.and compare both versions. 7. Delete and Compare a Reference The current geometry of the source reference is drawn into the sheet on the chosen layer. Convert. 9.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Reference Sheet Procedure 668 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

............................................................ 671 • SMART Edit Tools...................................................................................... Please note: SMART Edit is only available with the advanced version of MEDUSA............ which can be started with the option -advanced................................................................. 673 • Edit Dimension Values .................................... • Introduction ............................................................................. 683 © CAD Schroer GmbH 669 ... For details on starting MEDUSA see “Starting MEDUSA” on page 23................................................................. 679 • Geometry ............................................................................ 674 • Edit Dimension Lines ........................................... 680 • Dragging ............................. 670 • Calling SMART Edit .................MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART EDIT This chapter explains the functionality of SMART Edit........... 670 • General Selection Hints ...................... 677 • Datum ............................

However. Whilst in SMART Edit. The general idea is that the geometry or dimensions can be dragged to new positions or new values given and it will behave intelligently. This might be: • part of a view • a whole view • a number of related views MEDUSA provides various possibilities of selection. • If an arc or circle is dragged. SMART Edit changes the colour of the selected elements. fully dimensioned or over-dimensioned. Reference dimensions. an error message will be displayed. it retains either its centre or its tangency condition. Please note: The selection is limited to 1000 elements. • If a line is dragged. General Selection Hints Before choosing SMART Edit. Connectivity is retained so that joined lines remain joined. you can change the value of smart_size_limit. Dimensions are displayed using colour 2 (for default blue) and Geometry is displayed using colour 3 (for default cyan).dat file of the product. The limit is defined by smart_size_limit in the defaults. SMART Edit is designed to work on geometry that is undimensioned. relations are maintained so that tangencies remain tangent and coincident lines remain coincident. other dimension values are not changed. If this limit is exceeded. which are uneditable. • If a dimension value is edited. vertical or at an angle. are displayed using the usual highlight colour (for default) red. the cross-hair cursor is removed leaving a simple arrow cursor. 670 © CAD Schroer GmbH . it retains its orientation which remains horizontal. For details see “Select” on page 97. partly dimensioned.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Introduction The SMART Edit tool is provided to enable you to edit geometry and dimensions. larger selections take longer to process and might result in an error because of system resource limits. If necessary. select geometry and dimensions you wish to edit.

which was placed automatically after started SMART Edit mode. Select geometry you wish to edit. Figure 654 General Popup Menu 2.MEDUSA4 Drafting Calling SMART Edit Calling SMART Edit SMART Edit is available on selected elements. Click the right mouse button and choose SMART Edit from the general popup menu. In the general popup menu the entry SMART Edit is activated. The selection is highlighted in a different highlight color. For calling up SMART Edit do the following steps: 1. Please note: SMART Edit is active only if a geometry is selected. If no element is selected SMART Edit is disabled. The following popup menu is available now: Figure 655 SMART Edit Popup Menu Set datum This option allows you to move the reference point of the selected geometry defined by the prim. You may now drag the geometry or dimensions or enter new values in the dialogs which appear at the top of the drawing area below the dashboard. © CAD Schroer GmbH 671 .

quit SMART Edit and then choose the function Undo. You can exit SMART Edit also by choosing another tool. Reset all dimensions This option resets all dimensions of the selection to the values they had when started SMART Edit. Undo is used for canceling the last action.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Show over-dimensions This option shows all dimensions which are extra. so if you deleted any dimension you cannot get it back with this option. 672 © CAD Schroer GmbH . With these tools you can undo and redo single actions done in the SMART Edit session. You can undo several actions. Exit Tool quits SMART Edit. This option is no undo. Please note: SMART Edit uses the usual tools for Undo and Redo available inside the Edit menu and the toolbar. If you choose this option extra dimensions are shown bold. If you want to undo all changes done in a SMART Edit session. Its number depends on the number of actions stored to the history stack.

Figure 656 SMART Edit Tools The tools in detail are (from left to right): • Select dimension value (see “Edit Dimension Values” on page 674) • Select dimension line (see “Edit Dimension Lines” on page 677) • Select leader line (see “Edit Dimension Lines” on page 677) • Select geometry (see “Geometry” on page 680) © CAD Schroer GmbH 673 .MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Tools SMART Edit Tools After calling SMART Edit. By default. With the selection filter tools you can restrict the selection to the entities of interest. you can select any geometry and any dimension element (all tools are active). a toolset appears in the dashboard area providing selection filter tools.

Reset dimension value to original This button will change the dimension to the value it had when you entered SMART Edit. for example. The mouse wheel can also be used to change dimension values. Delete dimension This button deletes the dimension. Set dimension value to zero This button not only sets the value to zero but also deletes the dimension. the dimension(s) will change to this value. Reverse dimension This button effectively switches the dimension value from plus to minus. all other dimension values will remain unchanged unless they are over-dimensioned. for making angled lines orthogonal. When in SMART Edit mode. you can change a dimension value by selecting the dimension text with the left mouse button. See “Resetting All Dimensions” on page 676. For example. you may select further dimension values using the middle mouse button and edit them at the same time. Negative values cannot be entered. The dimension value dialog appears at the top of the drawing area: Figure 657 SMART Edit: Dimension Value Dialog From left to right you see the following options: Dimension value If you enter a new value and press Return. consider that the field showing the original measure is cleared if the values differ. 674 © CAD Schroer GmbH . The original value is shown at the right of the button. Toggle reference dimension This button makes the selected dimension(s) editable or uneditable.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Edit Dimension Values You can edit linear. See “Over-Dimensioning” on page 675. When a dimension value is changed in this way. you may wish to select a number of corner radii and set them to the same value. Zero cannot be entered as a dimension value. radial or angular dimension values. If you wish. This can be used. If you do so.

you can select the dimension you wish to be marked as reference and press the Toggle reference dimension button. left picture).MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Dimension Values Over-Dimensioning Geometry is over-dimensioned when there are too many dimensions. In that case. use Show over-dimensions from the popup menu (see Figure 655. “SMART Edit Popup Menu” on page 671). the dimension lines forming the chain are indicated with the usual highlight color (see Figure 658. picture in the middle). right picture). but they will change when other dimensions in the chain are edited. Reference dimensions cannot be edited directly. • Alternatively. The previous dimension will now be editable and the selection dimension not. reference dimensions are indicated with the usual highlight color (for default red) (see Figure 658. If a reference dimension is selected. SMART Edit marks some dimensions as reference. Dragging Dimension Values Instead of using the dialog to enter a new dimension value. (see Figure 658. To do this select a dimension text with the left mouse button but do not release the button. You can change which dimension in the chain is the reference dimension in two ways: • You can select the current reference dimension and press the Toggle reference dimension button in the dialog. Drag the dimension text along the dimension line. When SMART Edit is initialized. although the value is shown. you can also drag the dimension value. (See “Dragging” on page 677) © CAD Schroer GmbH 675 . The selected dimension is now editable and another dimension in the chain is shown as reference. Figure 658 SMART Edit: Over-Dimensions If you wish to know which dimensions are reference.

“SMART Edit Popup Menu” on page 671). You can also reset all dimensions by using the option Reset all dimensions from the popup menu (see Figure 655.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Resetting All Dimensions How to reset a single dimension was described on page 674. Reset all dimensions 676 © CAD Schroer GmbH . tialised. Reset all dimensions changes all dimensions back to the values they had when SMART Edit was inionly changes dimensions and does not affect undimensioned geometry.

This can be used. (See also “Dragging” on page 683) Leader line Moving the leader line will also move all the geometry and dimensions associated with it. or if no datum is visible.MEDUSA4 Drafting Edit Dimension Lines Edit Dimension Lines Dimension lines and leader lines can be moved. Move If you enter a value and press Return.0 and any value entered will move the selected line by the given value. the value is shown as 0. the selected line will move by the given distance. (To change the datum see “Datum” on page 679) If multiple lines have been selected which are not at the same distance from the datum. all the selected lines will move to the given distance from the datum.The mouse wheel may be used. All the dimensions associated with the selected leader line will change its value so that the other end of each dimension is not moved. the dimension line or leader line can be dragged by using the left mouse button and holding the button down while dragging. © CAD Schroer GmbH 677 . If this value is changed. to align all dimension lines at a particular position. Figure 659 SMART Edit: Dimension Line Dialog Distance The value shown is the distance of the selected line from the datum.0. this change is not propagated along a dimension chain. the value is shown as 0. First select the dimension or leader line you wish to move using the left mouse button. Unlike editing a dimension value.0 because the value is always relative to the current position. Dragging Instead of entering a value. The dimension line dialog will appear in the top of the drawing area. for example. The value in the dialog will return to 0. If the line selected is at the datum. Enter a new distance in the dialog and press Return or use the mouse wheel.

MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Figure 660 SMART Edit: Drag Leader Line Dimension line If you move a dimension line across the geometry it relates to. the ends of the leader lines will automatically be re-evaluated. Figure 661 SMART Edit: Drag Dimension Line 678 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

the datum will move to that position. the datum will be moved in one axis only. If a line is selected. “SMART Edit Popup Menu” on page 671). If you move a leader line or geometry that the datum is on. where the revised geometry is placed on the sheet depends on which point in the object is considered to be the datum. If you now select a point or a vertical or horizontal line on the geometry or on a dimension. then the datum will move with that entity. If a point is selected then the datum will move in X and Y. However. there is a unique interpretation. SMART Edit sets an arbitrary datum when it initializes. Figure 662 SMART Edit: Datum © CAD Schroer GmbH 679 . The datum is shown using a datum prim .MEDUSA4 Drafting Datum Datum When you change a dimension in a fully dimensioned view. Once the datum has been changed.a circle divided into quarters. You can change the position of the datum by selecting Set datum from the popup menu (see Figure 655. any edit to a dimension value will leave that position fixed.

you can edit the geometry whether or not is has dimensions.0. all the selected lines will move to the given distance from the datum. Move Enter the value by which you want the line to move and press Return.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Geometry When in SMART Edit. If the line selected is at the datum.vertical or horizontal lines • non-orthogonal lines . Figure 663 SMART Edit: Orthogonal Line Dialog Distance The value shown is the distance of the selected line from the datum. Alternatively. orthogonal lines can be dragged by holding down the left mouse button. left and right picture). by using the mouse wheel after clicking left into the text field. Length The length of the line is given and might be editable. the value is shown as 0. If this value is changed. If multiple lines have been selected which are not at the same distance from the datum. The lines are identified as being one of the following types: • Orthogonal lines . one end moves depending on the direction in which the line was defined. you will see a dialog at the top of the drawing area.0 and any value entered will move the selected line by the given value. the value is shown as 0.any angled line • Arcs and circles Orthogonal lines If you select an orthogonal line. Enter a new distance in the dialog and press Return or use the mouse wheel. The mouse wheel can be used to change the position of the line (see Figure 664. or by dragging (see “Dragging” on page 683). Any line. (To change the datum see “Datum” on page 679). circle or arc can be selected and moved either by entering a value and confirming it with Return. Enter a new value in the dialog and press Return or use the mouse wheel (see Figure 664. 680 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If the length is changed. left and middle picture). or if no datum is visible. The movement is perpendicular to the direction of the line.

The movement is perpendicular to the direction of the line. The mouse wheel can be used to change the position of the line (see Figure 666. you will see a dialog at the top of the drawing area. Alternatively. Angle Enter a new angle in the dialog and press Return or use the mouse wheel (see Figure 666. See also “Orthogonal lines” on page 680. left and middle picture).MEDUSA4 Drafting Geometry Figure 664 SMART Edit: Drag Orthogonal Lines Non-orthogonal lines If you select a non-orthogonal line. angled lines can be dragged by holding down the left mouse button. left and right picture). Move Enter the value by which you want the line to move and press Return. The line will maintain its angle but pass through the cursor. Figure 665 SMART Edit: Non-Orthogonal Line Dialog Distance The value shown is the distance of the selected line from the datum. Figure 666 SMART Edit: Drag Non-Orthogonal Lines © CAD Schroer GmbH 681 .

Fix circle centre The center remains unchanged. Centre X / Centre Y give the XY coordinates of the centre point. Figure 667 SMART Edit: Dialog for Arcs and Circles Radius / Diameter give radius or diameter of the current arc or circle. only the position of the center can change. Drag circle centre The arc/circle remains unchanged. you will see the following dialog at the top of the drawing area. Figure 668 SMART Edit: Solutions for Arcs 682 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Previous solution / Next solution Click left on one of these buttons displays a possible arc solution. only the arc/circle itself can change.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit Arcs and circles If you select an arc or a circle.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Dragging Dragging When you drag any dimension or geometry. Geometry can be dragged to coincide with other geometry: Figure 670 Example of Dragged Geometry 2 Dimension lines can be dragged to line up with other dimension lines: Figure 671 Example of Dragged Dimension Line © CAD Schroer GmbH 683 . This means that the line being dragged will "stick" to other elements depending which specifiers are set. it will snap back to its original value. if drag an element back over the grey image. This includes the original greyed out image which means that. the probe specifiers are in operation. the previous image can be seen in grey in the background: Figure 669 Example of dragged Geometry Except when dragging dimension values.

MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Edit The geometry used for the probe need not be part of the SMART selection. Figure 672 Example of Dragged Geometry 3 The distance that the probe snaps within is controlled by the Hit Radius. an "Intersection probe" has been used to position a dragged line. In this example. 684 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

........ • Calling SMART Drafting .......... 700 © CAD Schroer GmbH 685 ................ 699 • Changing Line Direction..................... 686 • Drawing Lines ................................................................... 696 • Using Construction Points....... SMART Drafting works with construction points................... In SMART Drafting construction lines are generated automatically between the placed construction points and the current point and the construction lines are displayed dynamically as you move the mouse cursor inside the drawing area...................................................................................... 695 • Flipping Arcs ..................... 697 • Extending an Existing Geometry with SMART Drafting ........................................ SMART Drafting allows fast and easy designing without drawing construction lines manually before drawing the geometry itself........ 692 • Drawing Arcs......................MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART DRAFTING SMART Drafting is a tool for easy drafting in MEDUSA providing to draw geometry in a modern way........................................................... easy to set at any position on the sheet at any time...................

Default snap mode is Auto Point. Angle absolute/incremental If this button is not pressed (default) the angle is displayed absolutely related to the global coordinate system. Default value is 5.00. By default it is off. A property dialog opens and the mouse cursor on the drawing area changes. 686 © CAD Schroer GmbH . no point will be found for snapping to. If this button is pressed the angle is displayed incremental relatively related to the last line. Default value is 1. Grid Steps Length If this button is pressed the grid steps length given in the field on the right hand side of the button is used for drawing the next point. snapping is off and you can probe anywhere on the sheet. The value can be increased or decreased with the arrow buttons on the right of the field. Additionally a popup menu is provided and some shortcuts are available to make drawing easier. You can switch to several snap modes using the popup menu (see “Popup Menu” on page 688). Define fixed values In these fields the values for the current point are displayed while drawing.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Calling SMART Drafting For calling up SMART Drafting choose the tool SMART Drafting from the Lines + Edit tooltray. Grid Steps Angle If this button is pressed (default) the grid steps angle given in the field on the right hand side of the button is used for drawing the next point. If this button is off. Properties Dialog Figure 673 SMART Drafting Properties AUTO Snap Grid Steps Angle Angle absolute/incremental Define fixed values Grid Steps Length From left to right the following buttons are provided: AUTO Snap If this button is pressed (default) automatic snapping is switched on and when probing on the sheet for example near or segment points are found.00. The value can be increased or decreased with the arrow buttons on the right of the field. For the first point of a line the fields are deactivated.

Both information fields update immediately when moving the mouse. for arcs it is Radius and Angle. you can close it by clicking on the xbutton . For entering a value into a field click left inside the field. which are empty until you have drawn the first point: Figure 674 SMART Drafting Mouse Pointer The information fields are: Length gives the length of the currently drawn segment. Mouse Cursor In the drawing area the mouse cursor changes after calling SMART Drafting. Once you have made your settings in the properties dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Calling SMART Drafting For lines Length and Angle are displayed. © CAD Schroer GmbH 687 . You can re-open the dialog at any time using the popup menu entry Properties (see “Popup Menu” on page 688). Details are given later in the sections for drawing like “Drawing Lines” on page 692 and “Drawing Arcs” on page 695. Also additional information will be given while drawing. Instead of clicking left inside a text field you also can use the short cuts Alt+v for Length/Radius and Alt+b for Angle. type the value and press Return on your keyboard or click left on the check mark behind the input field. Angle gives the angle of the currently drawn segment. Instead of clicking left on the appropriate check mark you also can use the short cuts Alt+1 for Length/Radius and Alt+2 for Angle. Information fields are attached now.

Nearest Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. therefore these are not explained in detail here. For each snap mode a cross reference to the appropriate probe specifier explanation is given below: Auto Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. Figure 676 AUTO Snap Popup Menu The snap modes work in the same way as the probe specifiers.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Popup Menu If you press the right mouse button on the drawing area. the following popup menu opens: Figure 675 SMART Drafting Popup Menu AUTO Snap Selecting this entry provides the following popup menu showing the available snap modes which can be pre-defined. 688 © CAD Schroer GmbH . “Auto Probe” on page 315. “Near Probe” on page 319. Middle Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. “Mid Segment Probe” on page 323.

Center Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. For details see “Drawing Lines” on page 692. “Perpendicular Probe” on page 321. It is not activated. New Line Close Line Close and New Line Delete Point All these entries work in the same way as the usual line editing options given in “Lines”. Exit Tool quits SMART Drafting. it will be deleted. Arc defines the current element to be an arc. Add Construction Point At the current position of the mouse cursor a construction point will be created. “Tangent Probe” on page 324. if there is no previous work step in the history stack. If you move the mouse. “Popup Menu While Drawing a Line” on page 355. Properties opens the SMART Drafting properties dialog (see “Properties Dialog” on page 686). Undo cancels the last work step. This entry is only active. Remove this Construction Point If there is a construction point at the current mouse cursor position. a construction line will be drawn between construction point and the mouse cursor. Instead of the menu entry you also can use the shortcut Alt+d on your keyboard. For details see “Drawing Arcs” on page 695. Flip Arc draw the bending of the current rubber band arc the other way round. “Center Probe” on page 322.MEDUSA4 Drafting Calling SMART Drafting Tangent Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. Redo executes the work step canceled before. For details see “Flipping Arcs” on page 696. Per Point described in “Probe Specifiers”. Instead of the menu entry you also can use the shortcut Alt+c on your keyboard. © CAD Schroer GmbH 689 . if Arc was chosen before. Line defines the current element to be a line (default).

Following figure illustrates this behavior.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Shortcuts Shift Key The Shift key fixes the angle to the current value as long as you keep the Shift key pressed. Figure 677 Example Background Color Angle Field Alt+a Toggle AUTO Snap in the properties dialog to be on or off. When moving the cursor after placing a construction point. a construction line is drawn between the construction point and the cursor. Alt+d The shortcut Alt+d deletes a construction point. Alt+s Toggle Grid Steps Length in the properties dialog to be on or off. It is blue as you move the cursor on the same side related to the last point when you pressed the Shift key. Alt+c If you press Alt+c on your keyboard a construction point is created at the current position of the mouse cursor. It turns to orange if you move the mouse cursor to the opposite side of the last point. Move the mouse cursor on a construction point and press Alt+d on your keyboard. The direction from the last point is indicated by the background of the Angle information field. 690 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Alt+x Toggle Angle absolute/incremental in the properties dialog to be on (incremental) or off (absolute). . For details on the properties dialog see “Properties Dialog” on page 686. Shortcuts for using Fixed Values Alt+v Sets the focus on the input field Length/Radius for entering a fixed value.MEDUSA4 Drafting Calling SMART Drafting Alt+q Toggle Grid Steps Angle in the properties dialog to be on or off. Alt+1 Confirms the input for the field Length/Radius and switches on the check mark Alt+2 Confirms the input for the field Angle and switches on the check mark . © CAD Schroer GmbH 691 . Alt+b Sets the focus on the input field Angle for entering a fixed value.

Snap Mode Information As you move the cursor close to existing elements. Please note: If the snap mode is not Auto Point. Near If you move the cursor close to a point of an existing element. Figure 678 Example: Snap Mode Information. see figure below. the rubber band between last point and mouse cursor turns into chain style until the cursor approaches an existing point on the sheet. Middle Point snap mode becomes active and Middle is given. the snap mode is Nearest Point and appears above the information fields. Middle Point 692 © CAD Schroer GmbH . then it turns back into dotted style. which matches the current snap mode. Nearest Point If you move the mouse pointer close to the center of a line. the information window expands showing the current snap mode.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Drawing Lines As you draw lines with SMART Drafting a rubber band and the current point is displayed while moving the mouse cursor. Figure 679 Example: Snap Mode Information.

where lines intersect. see figure below. Relation to Last Segment As you draw a line the relation to the last segment is displayed according to the current mouse position. © CAD Schroer GmbH 693 . a uppercase letter L is drawn at the intersection point. which cannot be set in the SMART Drafting popup menu explicitly (see “Calling SMART Drafting”. the following entries are given in the information window: Snap Mode Tangent Point Center Point Per Point Display Tangent Centre Perpendicular The information window also gives snap modes. Segment Point If you move the cursor close to a position. if you move the cursor close to a segment but apart from a line point. which can be pre-defined. Figure 681 Example: Segment is parallel against last one If the current segment is perpendicular against the last one. “Example: Using construction points 4” on page 698). Intersection is shown (for an example see Figure 690. Segment is shown.MEDUSA4 Drafting Drawing Lines According to the other snap modes. For example. Snap mode information is also given when drawing arcs (see “Drawing Arcs” on page 695). two parallel short lines are shown. Figure 680 Example: Snap Mode Information. “Popup Menu” on page 688). If the current segment is parallel against the last one.

MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Figure 682 Example: Segment is perpendicular against last one 694 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Figure 683 Example: Drawing Arcs 1 Also between arcs the intersection is always tangential. Choose Arc from the SMART Drafting popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting Drawing Arcs Drawing Arcs Please note: Before you can draw an arc you have to draw a line. The arc is drawn tangential at the last segment. Figure 684 Example: Drawing Arcs 2 © CAD Schroer GmbH 695 . You cannot draw an arc as first segment. This is indicated by the uppercase letter T in the drawing area.

Figure 685 Example: Flip Arcs 1 Now choose the entry Flip Arc from the SMART Drafting popup menu. The bending of the arc changes to the opposite side of the last point. Figure 686 Example: Flip Arcs 2 696 © CAD Schroer GmbH . use Flip Arc from the popup menu.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Flipping Arcs If you want the arcs bending to be on the opposite side of the last point (respectively the current point). For example. draw an arc and then move the cursor as given in the following figure related to the last drawn point.

The number of construction points is not restricted. A prim is drawn immediately at the current position. Draw a line and a construction point which is perpendicular to the last segment. The following simple example illustrates the use of construction points: 1.MEDUSA4 Drafting Using Construction Points Using Construction Points At any time you can place construction points on the sheet helping you to draw your design. Go on constructing (including the second construction point) according to the following figure. A construction point is displayed as a prim. Figure 687 Example: Using construction points 1 2. Press Alt+c on your keyboard. Please note: When quitting SMART Drafting all construction points are deleted. Move the cursor to the coordinates where to place the construction point. 2. For placing a construction point do following: 1. Figure 688 Example: Using construction points 2 © CAD Schroer GmbH 697 .

The intersection of both construction lines is the point to draw next in this construction. Figure 690 Example: Using construction points 4 The result of this simple example construction looks like in the following figure. you can see that a construction line is drawn between 2nd construction point and the current point. Place the next point of the polygon. from 2nd construction point to current point and from 1st construction point to current point. Figure 689 Example: Using construction points 3 4. Place the next point of the polygon according to the following figure. Figure 691 Example: Using construction points 5 698 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 5. As you move the mouse cursor down. Move the mouse cursor to the right and down on the y-coordinate of the first construction point. Now two construction lines are drawn.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting 3.

For example. In SMART Drafting the rubber band always will be attached to the last point of the element.MEDUSA4 Drafting Extending an Existing Geometry with SMART Drafting Extending an Existing Geometry with SMART Drafting If you have a geometry and you want to extend it using SMART Drafting. Now you can go on smart drafting as usual. you have the following geometry: Figure 692 Example: Continue Geometry 1 1. you have to edit the element and then choose the tool SMART Drafting. Choose the tool SMART Drafting . Figure 693 Example: Continue Geometry 2 The geometry is displayed highlighted. Figure 694 Example: Continue Geometry 3 SMART Drafting is activated and the information window appears close to the cursor. Double click on the element or choose Edit from the popup menu. © CAD Schroer GmbH 699 . 2.

For example. Figure 695 Example: Change Line Direction 1 Turn the line direction for changing the last point to be first point and vice versa. Automatically the previously first point of the already drawn part of the polygon becomes the last point and the rubber band is attached there. in the following polygon you want to have a similar arc on the left hand side on the same y-coordinate as the arc on the right side.MEDUSA4 Drafting SMART Drafting Changing Line Direction While drawing in SMART Drafting it can be helpful to continue drawing at the opposite side of the polygon for constructing reasons. Figure 696 Example: Change Line Direction 2 700 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is done easily by changing the line direction. for example.

...... 705 • Deleting Custom Tools .................................................................... 709 © CAD Schroer GmbH 701 ............................................................. 707 • Setting Background Color ...................... 702 • Customizing MEDUSA Tools ... 703 • Copying Tools .................................................................................................................. 708 • Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings .....MEDUSA4 Drafting CUSTOMIZING THE USER ENVIRONMENT This chapter describes the ways in which you can customize the user environment: • Controlling User Options........................................................................... 704 • Modifying Custom Tools........

Control User Options” on page 181. select the Switches. tab from the Defaults dialog (via the Options menu).MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment Controlling User Options The Switches tab allows you to control a number of user options... Figure 697 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches Details on the parameters are given in „Options”. To set user options. „Switches . 702 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

a line creation tool may be labelled with an image showing a line and it has an associated default line style Solid Thin.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing MEDUSA Tools Customizing MEDUSA Tools Copy Tools into User Tooltrays The majority of MEDUSA drafting function tools are located within the tooltrays. For details see “Copying Tools” on page 704. For details see „Overview of the Work Environment”. You can associate a different style and image with some of the copied tools. You can copy tools from other tooltrays into a User tooltray. Tools which have been modified are called custom tools. In addition to tools from tooltrays you can also copy tools from the toolbar into your User tooltray. „Tools and Tooltrays” on page 36. „Toolbar” on page 34. Adjust Toolbar The toolbar provides buttons and tools you also can customize to your needs. For example. For that reason MEDUSA allows you to customize the tools. A detailed description of how the tooltrays work can be found in the chapter „Overview of the Work Environment”. See “Modifying Custom Tools” on page 705. for example. © CAD Schroer GmbH 703 . to set up a tooltray containing the tools you use most frequently. Customize Style and Image of Tools Most element creation tools have a default style and image associated with them. Tools in tooltrays and tool sets in MEDUSA are set up and grouped together in a logical manner but not everyone uses MEDUSA in the same way.

Release the left mouse button to place the tool inside the drop area. Press and hold the left mouse button over the tool you wish to copy from the drop area to the User tooltray. 4. 2. 4. The drop area has been designed to act as a scratch area for custom tools. This indicates that you cannot drop the selected tool into this area. Release the left mouse button for placing a copy of the tool into the selected tooltray. With the left mouse button still pressed drag the cursor over to the drop area. Please note: The tool copied from the drop area is not automatically removed. If you attempt to do so the copy operation aborts. Press and hold the left mouse button over the tool you wish to copy. Moving a Tool to the User Tooltray The copied tool can remain in the drop area but since there is little room in this location it will generally be moved to one of the User tooltrays. 1. Then you can choose the wanted tool from the open toolset. 3. If the tool is inside a toolset you have to open the toolset first by clicking left on the small black arrow. Please note: As you are moving over the current tooltray. This indicates that this is a valid drop area. you will notice the cursor change to the following sign: . 2. There is one User tooltray in each set of tooltrays. As you move over the drop area the cursor changes to the picture of the tool you are just copying. you drag it first to the drop area and then to the required User tooltray. Open the required User tooltray. 704 © CAD Schroer GmbH . This is because you may wish to copy the custom tool to another user tooltray. The drop area is positioned below the probe specifiers beside the tooltray tabs (see “Quick Guide to the Work Environment” on page 26). 3.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment Copying Tools When you copy a tool. Copying a Tool to the Drop Area To copy a tool to the drop area: 1. where tools are held prior to copying to alternate User tooltrays. With the left mouse button still pressed drag the cursor over to the User tooltray.

The Icon Selector dialog opens: Figure 699 Icon Selection Dialog © CAD Schroer GmbH 705 .MEDUSA4 Drafting Modifying Custom Tools Modifying Custom Tools If you have tools inside a User tooltray these tools are called custom tools. MEDUSA pre-selects appropriate styles and images depending on the class of tool you are customizing. 2. If you want to change the image of the tool click left on the image on the right of the Style Selection dialog. 4. The tools you can customize are mainly the more general creation tools such as Create thin solid line. To modify a custom tool: 1. Select the Style Selection option to display the Style Selection dialog. Within MEDUSA you can associate a different style and image with some custom tools. Text. Classes within MEDUSA are Line. 3. Prim and Dimensions. Figure 698 Style Selection Dialog This dialog contains two entries which show the current style on the left and the image used for the custom tool on the right. If the tool is one of the tools you can modify a popup menu appears. Move your cursor over the custom tool inside the User tooltray and click the right mouse button. If you want to change the style select the required style from the pulldown menu available by clicking left the black arrow on the right of the style list.

The custom tool button inside the User tooltray is updated immediately with your changes. 706 © CAD Schroer GmbH . If you found the icon you want to use click left on the appropriate line inside the list and click left on OK.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment a. The Icon Selector dialog closes and the image of the tool inside the Style Selection dialog changes to the chosen icon. Search the icon you want to apply by using the scroll arrows on the right. Please note: You can also update non-custom tools in this way but the changes only last on a per session basis and they are lost when you exit MEDUSA. b. Click OK for applying your settings. 5.

Deleting a Tool from the Drop Area To delete a tool from the drop area. Select the required tool from the pulldown list within the Remove Custom Buttons dialog.MEDUSA4 Drafting Deleting Custom Tools Deleting Custom Tools You can only delete custom tools. b. drag the custom tool from the selected user toolwithin the drop area. or • click the Remove buttons from a customisation area button . either • drag the custom tool from the drop area and drop it over the Remove buttons from a customisation area button . press Remove All. To delete all custom tools within the drop area. The Remove Custom Buttons dialog opens listing all custom tools currently available within the drop area. You cannot delete tools from any of the pre-defined tooltrays. © CAD Schroer GmbH 707 . Deleting a Custom Tool from the User Tooltray To delete a custom tool from the user tooltray. The tray and drop it over the Remove buttons from a customisation area button tool is removed from the user tooltray immediately. Click Remove. Figure 700 Remove Custom Buttons Dialog To delete single custom tools: a.

chapter “Administration”.MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment Setting Background Color MEDUSA opens sheets by default with an ivory colored background. For details see “Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings” on page 709. You can change the background color by using the Select background dialog. When you close the program you will be asked if your changes should be saved as default setting. “Setting up Standard Colors”. The System Administrator is able to modify any color of the background color scheme. Select the Configuration > Select background color option from the Options menu. Choose one of the colors and click OK. Please note: You have to be in the Admin Mode for opening the dialog. The sheet appears in the requested color. 708 © CAD Schroer GmbH . Figure 702 The Select Background Color Dialog 2. 1. For default MEDUSA offers four different background colors. Figure 701 The Configuration Pulldown-Menu The Select background dialog is displayed. For further information see the Administration Guide.

© CAD Schroer GmbH 709 . • Click on Cancel aborts closing MEDUSA. The current settings are lost.MEDUSA4 Drafting Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings Saving Changes of the Work Environment Settings All work environment settings like custom tool changes and background color settings are saved when the MEDUSA session ends. When you reopen the program the previous default settings are used. • Click on Discard sets the work environment to the previous default and closes MEDUSA. If you have made any changes to your work environment and if you quit MEDUSA the following dialog is displayed allowing you to save your work environment: Figure 703 Save or Discard Defaults Dialog • Click on Save accepts the changes as default and closes MEDUSA. When you reopen the program the work environment appears with the changed settings.

MEDUSA4 Drafting Customizing the User Environment 710 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Toggle Select Popup Menu . . 75 Sheet Properties Dialog: Scale . . . . . . . . . . . .38 Line Tool Set. . if Predefined Directory does not exist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 The Save or Discard Defaults Dialog . . . . . . . . .20 Adding a Point to a Line:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Drag Selection. . . . 66 Print Dialog . . . . . . .26 Example for Popup Menus . . . . . . . 109 Selecting Modes (2) . . .33 The Toolbar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 The Select actions to Undo Dialog . 95 The Select Tools from the Menu Bar . . . . .38 Example for a Tool Set . . . . . . . . 77 Sheet Properties Dialog: Size . . . . . . . . . 102 Drag Selection: Example2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Write Protected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52 Open Sheet Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 69 Advance Printing Options Dialog . . Example1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 The Save or Discard Dialog 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Error Mandatory Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50 The Filter Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . .21 An Open Multi-segment Line . . . . . . . . . .60 Working Set Properties Dialog . . . 78 Sheet Header Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46 Pulldown Menu Close . . . . . . . 109 Multiple Selection Dialog .41 The File Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Select All or Deselect All Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 The Edit Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . .32 Often Used Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 The Image Save As Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . .49 The Save As Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 The Save or Discard Dialog 1 . . . 72 The Sheet Properties Dialog . . . . . . . .59 Save or Discard Working Set Dialog. . . . . . . .34 View Pulldown Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44 Sheet Type List of the New Option . . . . .21 Deleting Points in a Multi Segment Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Paste Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55 Sheet Working Sets Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . .61 Load WSD Error Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 67 Directory Pulldown Menu of the Print Dialog 68 Predefined Directory with added Filename .35 Features of the Tooltrays . . . . . . . . . .61 The Import Pulldown Menu . . . . . . 88 The Select actions to Undo Dialog 2 . . . . .MEDUSA4 Drafting LIST OF FIGURES Figure 1 Figure 2 Figure 3 Figure 4 Figure 5 Figure 6 Figure 7 Figure 8 Figure 9 Figure 10 Figure 11 Figure 12 Figure 13 Figure 14 Figure 15 Figure 16 Figure 17 Figure 18 Figure 19 Figure 20 Figure 21 Figure 22 Figure 23 Figure 24 Figure 25 Figure 26 Figure 27 Figure 28 Figure 29 Figure 30 Figure 31 Figure 32 Figure 33 Figure 34 Figure 35 Figure 36 Figure 37 Figure 38 Figure 39 Figure 40 Example of an Element Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37 Tooltray Buttons . . .36 Set of Tooltrays Pulldown Menu . .56 Popup Menu for Sheet Lists . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Plot Queue Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34 The Line Dashboard . 80 Mandatory Input Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Shapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Sheet History Option. . . . . . . . . . . .30 Section of the Menu Bar showing the File Menu 31 Open Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45 Special Sheets Dialog. . . . . . . .48 The Save Options of the File Menu . . . . .57 Reload WSD File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54 Preview of the Open Sheet Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 Selecting Modes (1) . . .40 Dialog Open Sheet . . . . . 91 Search Text Dialog. . . . . 110 © CAD Schroer GmbH 711 . . . . . . 63 Plot Dialog . . . . 76 Sheet Properties Dialog: Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 The Export File Dialog . . 62 The Export Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21 A Closed Multi-segment Line . . . . . . . 68 Error Message. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 The Select Actions to Redo Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Changing Selection Set: Example 1. . . . 105 Changing Selection Set: Example 2. . . . . . .38 Probe Specifiers . . . . . 94 Replace Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51 The Auto Save Dialog . . . 102 Popup Menu: Selection Entries .62 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Figure 80 The Import File Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22 Features of the Work Environment . . . . . . . . . .53 Display of File Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Figure 164 Basic Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Toolbars Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. 155 Layer Manager: Tab Layer Properties . . 127 Choose Views Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . 194 Figure 138 Menu Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Layers Menu . . . . . . . 209 Figure 156 Point Functions . . . . . 221 Figure 168 Search Direction: Horizontal-bottom up-from right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Figure 159 User Attributes Dialog . . . . 210 Figure 157 The Standard Point Functions Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Layer Manager: List Buttons . . . . . . . 179 Figure 130 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. . . . . 168 Change Layer Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Set Grid Origin to Element Corner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Select Elements By Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Figure 133 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Figure 171 Result . . . . . . 113 Tools for Manipulating Boundary Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 143 The Configuration Pulldown Menu . 161 Example: Rename Layer Name. . . . . . . . 122 Window Section Before and After Zoom Selection: . . . . . .Display having Selected an Element without Attribute . . . . 177 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. Dashboard Element Selection Limits . . . 223 Figure 172 Search Direction: Horizontal-top down-from left 224 712 © CAD Schroer GmbH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Moving a Point Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 The Sub-Grid Increment Pulldown Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Select Color Dialog . . 194 Figure 137 Context Menu of the Transformation Tools Mirror and Rotate . . . . . . 115 Example: Select Elements by Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Figure 136 Refsys Tab of Defaults Dialog. . 128 View Window Displayed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arc Factor 191 Figure 135 Display of the Arc Factor Options . . . . 204 Figure 152 The Protractor Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 213 Figure 160 User Attributes Dialog . . 130 View Window Frame Property Example . . . . . . . . . 121 Zoom Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Figure 150 The Select Background Color Dialog . . . 142 Grid Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. . . . . . . Section Sheet History Section. . . . . 181 Figure 132 Defaults Dialog: Tab Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 View Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Figure 145 The Add Plotter Dialog . . . . 200 Figure 148 The Compiling Fits Message in the Output Message Area . . . . . . . . . .Display having Selected an Element with Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 The Type Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Grid Properties Dialog . 180 Figure 131 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Figure 147 Plotter Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Option Incremental 169 Options Menu. . . . . . . . . 173 Defaults Dialog: Tab Commo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Text Legibility . . 133 Grids Menu . . . 178 Defaults Dialog: Tab Common. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 The Change Layer Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Select Elements by Area Dialog . . . . . . . . 148 Layers . . . 139 Color Button to open the Select Color Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 136 The Grid Name List . . . . . 130 Copying and Pasting Between View Windows 131 The Display Functions from the Menu Bar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Dashboard: Layers. . . . . . . . . . . 220 Figure 165 Search String Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 The Thickness Pulldown Menu . . . . . 157 Layer Manager: Tab Layer Set Management (admin Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Figure 149 Limit/Fit Choice Box in Dimension Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Section Message Area Display . . . . . . . . . Drawing Code Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Figure 140 Pulldown Menu Admin Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Figure 141 Admin Password . . . . . 222 Figure 170 Search Direction: Horizontal-top down-from right . . . . . . . 196 Figure 142 Admin Password Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Windows Dialog . . 162 Layer Datum Dialog . . . . 208 Figure 154 The Query Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 View Frames Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Figure 169 Result . 217 Figure 163 Textstyle Pulldown Menu of Number Dialog . . . . . . . . . . 168 The Change Layer Pulldown Menu . . . . 213 Figure 161 Number Option in the Utilities Pulldown Menu 217 Figure 162 Number Dialog . . . . . . . . 195 Figure 139 CADConvert Configuration-Path Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Store and Restore: Show Position . . . . . . . . . . 197 Figure 144 Plotter Configuration Dialog . . . . . . 120 Set of Tooltrays Pulldown Menu . . 172 Defaults Dialog: Tabs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Figure 134 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Fac. . . . . . 112 Group Box and Freehand Group Line . . .MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures Figure 81 Figure 82 Figure 83 Figure 84 Figure 85 Figure 86 Figure 87 Figure 88 Figure 89 Figure 90 Figure 91 Figure 92 Figure 93 Figure 94 Figure 95 Figure 96 Figure 97 Figure 98 Figure 99 Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102 Figure 103 Figure 104 Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107 Figure 108 Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111 Figure 112 Figure 113 Figure 114 Figure 115 Figure 116 Figure 117 Figure 118 Figure 119 Figure 120 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Save Filter Dialog. . . . . . . . . . 199 Figure 146 Plotter Information Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Figure 153 The Extend to Segment Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Figure 151 The Utilities Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Figure 155 Example of Specifying an Base Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Figure 158 The User Attributes Dialog . . . . . . 160 Select Color Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Figure 166 Search Direction: horizontal-bottom up-from left 221 Figure 167 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 Figure 226 Measure Dialog: Angle Over Three Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Figure 230 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Figure 229 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227 Figure 180 Search Direction: Vertical-top down-from right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235 Figure 190 Numeric Input Field with Popup Menu . . . . . .242 Figure 198 Input Fields for Setting Number and Arrangement of the Instance . . 293 Figure 253 Example Sub-Dashboard: Single Leader Line Changed. . . . . . 273 Figure 224 Measure Dialog: Distance Between Two Points 274 Figure 225 Measure Dialog: Distance Between Last and Current Point . . . . . .237 Figure 192 The Record Trail File Dialog . . .233 Figure 189 The Calculator. . . . . . . 292 Figure 249 Dimension Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240 Figure 195 The Instance along a Line Dialog . . . 292 Figure 248 Prim Dashboard . . . . . . .239 Figure 194 The Compare Files Dialog . . . . . 275 Figure 228 Measure Dialog: Query Line. . . . . . . . . . .258 Figure 210 The Toolbar. . . . . 271 Figure 221 Measure Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Figure 179 Result . 292 Figure 252 Dashboard: Generic Buttons . . . . . . . . 300 Figure 257 Style Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Figure 222 Measuring Properties Dialog . . . . 289 Figure 246 Line Dashboard . . . . . . 232 Figure 187 Result of the Un-number Command . . . . . . . . . . 277 Figure 232 Scale Views Dialog. . . . . . . . .241 Figure 196 The Instance Input Fields of the Instance Along a Line Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 Figure 219 Window Section Before and After Zoom Selection:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Figure 236 Detailing with Scale Views . . . . . 279 Figure 234 Display Scale Views . . 284 Figure 237 Detail . .267 Figure 217 Windows Dialog . 287 Figure 242 Tree Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225 Figure 176 Search Direction: Vertical-bottom up-from right 226 Figure 177 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245 Figure 201 The Open Sheet Dialog showing the Previews.266 Figure 216 View Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232 Figure 188 Result of the Re-number Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Figure 261 User Defined Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . .252 Figure 206 The Select List .264 Figure 213 Move Utilities Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228 Figure 182 Basic Sheet with existing Numbers 15 and 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253 Figure 208 Pulldown Menu of Help . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Figure 245 Selection Toolbar . . . .MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures Figure 173 Result . . . . . . 250 Figure 204 Bacis1 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Figure 233 Error Messages . 307 Figure 259 Dialog Merge User Styles. . . . . . . . . . 299 Figure 254 Example Sub-Dashboard: All Leader Lines Changed. . . . .236 Figure 191 The Trail File Pulldown Menu . . . . . 228 Figure 181 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262 Figure 211 View Pulldown Menu. . . . . . . 292 Figure 247 Text Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Figure 260 Example of a Group for which a Dashboard is Created. .252 Figure 207 Licenses Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Figure 227 Measure Dialog: Angle Between Two Lines. . . . . . 287 Figure 244 Tree Table Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Figure 175 Result .229 Figure 184 Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242 Figure 199 The Corner Normal Pulldown Menu .268 Figure 218 Store and Restore: Show Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Figure 243 Create Named Group Toolset . . . 229 Figure 183 Example . . . . . . . . .264 Figure 214 Sheets Toolbar . . . . . . 306 Figure 258 Style Tree Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Figure 235 Scale Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Figure 262 Probe Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Figure 220 Measure Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . .242 Figure 197 The From/To/ Direction Input Fields of the Instance Along a Line Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Figure 203 The Accel Mapkey Editor Dialog: Tab Mapkey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 Figure 263 Popup Probe Specifier . . . . . . . . . . . .224 Figure 174 Search Direction: Vertical-bottom up-from left . 246 Figure 202 The Accel Mapkey Editor Dialog: Tab Accel. . 277 Figure 231 Measure Dialog: 2D Properties of Geometry Output in File . . . . . . 292 Figure 251 Crosshatching Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230 Figure 185 Basic Sheet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243 Figure 200 Add Preview Dialog. . . . .257 Figure 209 Part of a Dialog Showing the Help Button. 299 Figure 255 Example Sub-Dashboard: Empty . . . . . . . . . 285 Figure 239 Detailed Scale View . . . . . . . . . . .263 Figure 212 Utilities Toolbar . . . 313 © CAD Schroer GmbH 713 . . . 286 Figure 241 Tree Navigation Mini-Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226 Figure 178 Search Direction: Vertical-top down-from left . 273 Figure 223 Measure Dialog: Line Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Figure 240 Line Navigation Toolbar . . .265 Figure 215 Utilities Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251 Figure 205 The Windows Pulldown Menu. . . . . . .238 Figure 193 The Replay Trail Entry Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Figure 238 Insert Detail into Scale View. . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Figure 250 Group Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . 299 Figure 256 Example Sub-Dashboard: Picked Several Issue Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 Figure 186 Search String Settings: String and Wildcard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rotate Option 359 Closed Geometry Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . 367 Popup Menu after having placed an Offset Line on the Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Example of Circles. . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 2 . 373 Line Properties Dialog . . . . . . . 354 Popup Menu While Drawing a Line . . . . . . 332 Status Area Right Part . . . . . . . . . . . . 388 Change Segment Length Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Create Solid Lines Toolset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Smooth Curve Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Elements Created Using Different Base Angles 361 Displaying Centerlines on Slots . . . . 370 Standard Line Types . . . . . . . . 362 Toolset for Creating Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Sheet Properties Dialog . . . . . . . 382 Point Functions-Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Chamfer Tools. . . . . Direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Fillet Tools . . . . 365 2D Features: Box Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353 Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Message Window opened via right Toggle visibility of output message area tool . . . . . . 314 Using the Intersection Probe Specifier: 1. . . . . . 363 Example for creating polygons. . . . . . . .Others Option . . . 347 Standard Line Tools. . 379 Application of the Gap Point Function . . . . . . 343 Tree Table Toolbar . . . 369 Line Properties Dashboard . . 322 Using the Mid-segment Probe Specifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Status Area Left Part . . . . . . . . . . 395 Example for Creating Segments Tangential to Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Standard Point Functions . . . . Undocked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Using Line Properties Dialog to Change Point Functions. . . . . . 358 Popup Menu While Pasting . . . . . . 385 Standard Edit Line Tools . 346 User Attributes Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Enter Coords Dialog. . . . . . . . . 326 Example for Offset from Datum . . . . . 323 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 1 . . 359 Popup Menu While Pasting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Line Point Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . 368 Input Fields while Creating an Offset Line with Chamfered Corners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Orthogonalize Line Tools . . 397 Example Modify Curve of Tangent Arc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Example of Group Structure . . 354 Enter Coords Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures Figure 264 Figure 265 Figure 266 Figure 267 Figure 268 Figure 269 Figure 270 Figure 271 Figure 272 Figure 273 Figure 274 Figure 275 Figure 276 Figure 277 Figure 278 Figure 279 Figure 280 Figure 281 Figure 282 Figure 283 Figure 284 Figure 285 Figure 286 Figure 287 Figure 288 Figure 289 Figure 290 Figure 291 Figure 292 Figure 293 Figure 294 Figure 295 Figure 296 Figure 297 Figure 298 Figure 299 Figure 300 Figure 301 Figure 302 Figure 303 Figure 304 Figure 305 Figure 306 Figure 307 Figure 308 Figure 309 Figure 310 Figure 311 Figure 312 Figure 313 Figure 314 Defaults Dialog: Tab Radii / Arc Fac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .and Endpoint 384 Traced Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 Example for Offset from Last Probe. . . . 365 Tools to Create Slots in 2D Feature Mode 366 Dashboard of a round-ended Slot . . . . . . . 341 Tree Viewer Popup Menu . . . . . . . . 342 Group Properties Dialog . . . . . 374 Style Creation Dialog. . . . . . 368 Example of the Offset Filter ON/OFF Option. . 337 The Tree Viewer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Using the Segment Probe Specifier. which are created at three Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 Example for an acute Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Split and Join Line Tools . . . . . . . 394 Create Arcs and Circles Tools. .333 A Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351 Line Direction . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Extend Line Tools . . . Docked . . . . . . . . 379 Point Function Arrowheads . 329 Enter Coords Dialog. . . . . . . . 328 Cartesian Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Tools to create an Offset Line to a selected Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Using the Intersection Probe Specifier: 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 The Tree Viewer . . . . . . 324 Using the Tangent Probe Specifier: 3 . . . . . . . . . 364 Dashboard 2D Features: Create Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 The Tree Viewer. . . . 320 Using the Perpendicular Probe Specifier: 1 321 Using the Perpendicular Probe Specifier: 2 321 Using the Center Probe Specifier for a Fillet . . . . . . . . . 350 Current Point . . . . . 358 Popup Menu While Drawing . 369 Examples of different Cut Values for a square Angle . . . . . . . . 394 Rotate Segment Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Option for Creating 2D Features . . . 366 Rotation Pulldown Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Change Arc Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Decor Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Popup Menu While Editing a Line . . 364 Figure 315 Figure 316 Figure 317 Figure 318 Figure 319 Figure 320 Figure 321 Figure 322 Figure 323 Figure 324 Figure 325 Figure 326 Figure 327 Figure 328 Figure 329 Figure 330 Figure 331 Figure 332 Figure 333 Figure 334 Figure 335 Figure 336 Figure 337 Figure 338 Figure 339 Figure 340 Figure 341 Figure 342 Figure 343 Figure 344 Figure 345 Figure 346 Figure 347 Figure 348 Figure 349 Figure 350 Figure 351 Figure 352 Figure 353 Figure 354 Figure 355 Figure 356 Figure 357 Figure 358 Figure 359 Figure 360 Dashboard 2D Features: Select Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Tangent Arc Dialog and an Example for the Resulting Tangential Arc . 355 Closed Geometry Toolsets . . 380 Standard Point Functions Disabled . . 373 Frequently Used Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390 Extend by Factor Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 Example Modify Weight of Tangent Arc . . . . 383 Setting Starting point-. . . . . . . . 342 The Tree Navigation Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Pulldown Menu Active Tool . . . . . . . . 392 Divide Line Tools. . . . . . . . . 337 Expanding Groups and Moving Around The Tree Structure . . . . . . 363 Dialog Switches. 377 Point Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 Example Convert Circular Arc to Tangent Arc 398 714 © CAD Schroer GmbH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .431 Magnify Toolsets. . . . . 447 Figure 416 Loaded Symbol Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Figure 414 Save Temporary Symbol Toolset . . . . . . . .412 View Direction Dialog . . . . . . . . .424 Tools for Transforming Selected Elements. . . . . . .426 Rotate Toolset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435 Tools for Boundary Groups. . . . . . . . . 481 Figure 448 Positive and Negative Offset Created at the Same Time . . . . . 482 Figure 449 Offset/Angle Entry Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422 Transformation Tools . . . . . . .437 Moving a Point Group . . . . . . . . . .405 2D Modeling Tool . . . . . . .399 Miscellaneous Tools . . . 411 Showing Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 Popup Menu during Transformation of Text Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427 Popup Menu of the Rotation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .408 Sectioned Shaft Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Figure 415 Symbols Dialog .436 Group Box and Freehand Group Lines. . . 476 Figure 440 Diameter and Radius Entry Box . . . . . . . . . .428 Mirror Toolsets .421 Restore Profile Dialog . . . . . 462 Figure 423 The Create Diagram Symbol Tools . .425 Popup Menu Option Move . . . . . . . . . . .399 Trim/Extend Segments Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400 Fillet Lines Popup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Figure 437 Creates Oblique Construction Line Toolset 475 Figure 438 Angle Entry box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Figure 435 Tools for Projecting Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Array . . . 465 Figure 429 Load Temporary Symbol Toolset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Figure 450 Vertical and Horizontal Offset Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 Figure 410 Connect and Clear Lines Toolsets . . . . .401 Example of Inserting Fillets between Line Segments and Joining the Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Figure 412 The Symbol Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Figure 431 Diagram Symbol Over Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Figure 439 Tools to Create Construction Circles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483 Figure 452 Oblique Offset Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Shear Toolsets . . . . . .MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures Figure 361 Figure 362 Figure 363 Figure 364 Figure 365 Figure 366 Figure 367 Figure 368 Figure 369 Figure 370 Figure 371 Figure 372 Figure 373 Figure 374 Figure 375 Figure 376 Figure 377 Figure 378 Figure 379 Figure 380 Figure 381 Figure 382 Figure 383 Figure 384 Figure 385 Figure 386 Figure 387 Figure 388 Figure 389 Figure 390 Figure 391 Figure 392 Figure 393 Figure 394 Figure 395 Figure 396 Figure 397 Figure 398 Figure 399 Figure 400 Figure 401 Figure 402 Figure 403 Figure 404 Figure 405 Figure 406 Figure 407 Other Tools . . 440 Figure 409 MovebyGrid Dialog. . . . 467 Figure 433 Diagram Symbol after Placement . . . . Dependent on Line Direction . . . .425 Move Toolset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412 Popup Sweep Profiles. .426 Popup Menu of the Move Tools . . . .438 Popup: Dynamic Aligning and Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466 Figure 430 Diagram Symbol Attached to Cursor . . .415 Popup Rotate Profiles . . . . . 460 Figure 422 Overview of Diagram Symbol Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Popup Menu while Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Figure 442 Examples of Construction Circle in different Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402 Example for Inserting Chamfers . 458 Figure 421 Filter Pulldown-Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Popup Menu of the Duplicate and Mirror Selected Elements Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Figure 425 Creating Connection Point Texts . . . 478 Figure 444 Example of the Creation of Construction Lines through Tangent Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404 Result after Point Added. . . .403 Line Navigation Buttons . . 483 Figure 451 45 Degree Offset Examples . . . . .413 Example of Edge Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438 Popup Menu for Transform Groups . . . . .409 Showing Centerlines . . . .429 Popup Menu of the Mirror Selected Elements Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 Example . . . . . . . . . 448 Figure 418 Load Symbol Temporary Properties Dialog 450 Figure 419 Dynamically Aligning Symbols . . . . . . 447 Figure 417 Load Temporary Symbol Toolset . . .417 Hole End View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Figure 441 Toolset for creating Construction Circles tangential. . . . . . . . . . . 442 Figure 411 JoinLine Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Tools for Manipulating Boundary Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 Figure 432 Diagram Symbol. . . .411 Example of Profile Sampling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Figure 443 Toolset for the Creation of tangential Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Example of Rotating a Profile to Form a Shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Shaft End View . . 445 Figure 413 Saving Temporary Symbol Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439 Figure 408 Grid Properties Dialog with Settings of Spacings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Figure 426 Creating a Diagram Datum Prim . . . . 479 Figure 446 Popup Menu while Creating Construction Lines 480 Figure 447 Positive and Negative Offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Figure 424 The Text Dashboard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 Example of Sectioned Shaft Volume of Revolution . 464 Figure 427 Save Diagram Symbol Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 Figure 445 Example of the Creation of a Tangent as Construction Line . . . .410 Showing and Hiding Normally Hidden Lines. . . . . . . .434 Example . . . . . . . . . . 483 Figure 453 Example of Offset Vertical Construction Lines 484 © CAD Schroer GmbH 715 . . . . 454 Figure 420 Symbol Manager Dialog . . . . . . . . . 465 Figure 428 The Save Named Symbol Dialog . .429 Example of the Mirror Lock/Mirror Unlock Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Figure 436 Tools and Toolset for Creating Single Construction Lines . . 467 Figure 434 The Construction Lines Tooltray . . . . . .420 Example of Sectioned Hole Volume of Revolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures
Figure 454 Example for Incremental Default Offset . . . 485 Figure 455 The Layer Manager Dialog: Tab Layer Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487 Figure 456 Example Confine Construction Line 1 . . . . 488 Figure 457 Example Confine Construction Line 2 . . . . 488 Figure 458 Example Confine Construction Line 3 . . . . 488 Figure 459 Tools to Switch Transportation Lines On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 Figure 460 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches . . . . . . . . . . 490 Figure 461 The Deflection Angle of Transported Construction Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491 Figure 462 Transporting a Construction Line. . . . . . . . 491 Figure 463 Projecting Construction Lines from a Profile . . 492 Figure 464 Popup Menu For Projection Construction Lines from Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Figure 465 Creating a Single Sectional View. . . . . . . . 493 Figure 466 Creating a Multi-plane Sectional View . . . . 494 Figure 467 Crosshatching a View (Ignoring the Plane Break Line). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Figure 468 Projected Construction Lines From a Rotated Section Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 Figure 469 Dynamic Construction Lines Tools . . . . . . 496 Figure 470 Popup Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Figure 471 XLine - Setup Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497 Figure 472 Dynamic Construction Line Angle and Offset Entry Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498 Figure 473 Example Dynamic Construction Line . . . . . 498 Figure 474 Positive and Negative Offsets . . . . . . . . . . 499 Figure 475 Tangential Dynamic Construction Line . . . 500 Figure 476 Perpendicular Dynamic Construction Line. 501 Figure 477 Crossed Dynamic Construction Line . . . . . 502 Figure 478 Example Dynamic Construction Lines with Offset 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502 Figure 479 Example Dynamic Construction Lines with Offset 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Figure 480 Example Dynamic Construction Lines Perpendicular to Diagonal Outlines . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Figure 481 Example Dynamic Construction Line as a Tangent between 2 Circles 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503 Figure 482 Example Dynamic Construction Line as a Tangent Between 2 Circles 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504 Figure 483 Example Dynamic Construction Lines as a Crossed Tangent Between 2 Circles 1 . . . 504 Figure 484 Dimension Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506 Figure 485 Dimensioning Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Figure 486 Defaults Dialog: Tab Dimension . . . . . . . . 508 Figure 487 Dashboard: Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511 Figure 488 Linear Dimension Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . 512 Figure 489 Popup Menu For Linear Dimensions . . . . . 513 Figure 490 Example of Parallel Dimension . . . . . . . . . 514 Figure 491 Example of Perpendicular Dimension . . . . 514 Figure 492 Linear Dimension Properties: Style and Format Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516 Figure 493 Dimension and Tolerance Style Buttons . . 517 Figure 494 Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517 Figure 495 Dual Dimension Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Figure 496 Figure 497 Figure 498 Figure 499 Figure 500 Figure 501 Figure 502 Figure 503 Figure 504 Figure 505 Figure 506 Figure 507 Figure 508 Figure 509 Figure 510 Figure 511 Figure 512 Figure 513 Figure 514 Figure 515 Figure 516 Figure 517 Figure 518 Figure 519 Figure 520 Figure 521 Figure 522 Figure 523 Figure 524 Figure 525 Figure 526 Figure 527 Figure 528 Figure 529 Figure 530 Figure 531 Figure 532 Figure 533 Figure 534 Figure 535 Figure 536 Figure 537 Figure 538 Figure 539 Figure 540 Dimension and Tolerance Format Options 518 Limits and Fits Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Example Test Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519 Linear Dimension Properties: Text and Arrows 520 Text Position buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520 Layer selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Direction buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Imperial Text Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 Dimension Type Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Dimension Spacing Option . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Text Format Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522 Arrows and Gaps Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Graphic Scaling Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Creating Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . 525 Popup Menu for Angular Dimensions . . . . 526 Angular Dimension Properties: Style and Format Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Angular Dimension Properties: Text and Arrows Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527 Angular Dimension Text Format Options . 528 Popup Menu for Dimensioning Circles and Arcs 530 Example of a Horizontal Symmetrical Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531 Cutout of the Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . 532 Example of a Horizontal Half a Symmetrical Dimension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533 Cutout of the Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . 533 The Datum Offset Dimension Creation Tools . 534 Example of Offset Dimensioning . . . . . . . . 534 The coordinates input field . . . . . . . . . . . . 535 Axonometric Dimension Dialog . . . . . . . . . 536 Isometric Default Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537 The Creates Notes Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 The Note Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 538 The Feature Control Frames and Datum Tools 539 The Feature Control Frame Datum Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539 Example: Dashboard During Creating a Horizontal Feature Control Frame . . . . . . . . . . 540 The feature Control Frame Popup Menu. . 540 Linear Dimension Example . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Quick Selection Tools for Dimensions. . . . 542 Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions . . . 543 Popup Menu 2 for Editing Dimensions . . . 544 Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions . . . 545 Message when Changing Dimensions 1 . . 546 Message when Changing Dimensions 2 . . 547 Message when Changing Dimensions 3 . . 548 Example for Arranging Coordinate Dimensions 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Example for Arranging Coordinate Dimensions 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549 Example Explode Dimension . . . . . . . . . . 550

716

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures
Figure 541 Figure 542 Figure 543 Figure 544 Figure 545 Figure 546 Figure 547 Figure 548 Figure 549 Figure 550 Figure 551 Figure 552 Figure 553 Figure 554 Figure 555 Figure 556 Figure 557 Figure 558 Figure 559 Figure 560 Figure 561 Figure 562 Figure 563 Figure 564 Figure 565 Figure 566 Figure 567 Figure 568 Figure 569 Figure 570 Figure 571 Figure 572 Figure 573 Figure 574 Figure 575 Figure 576 Figure 577 Figure 578 Figure 579 Figure 580 Figure 581 Figure 582 Figure 583 Figure 584 Figure 585 Figure 586 Figure 587 Figure 588 Figure 589 Figure 590 The Gap Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550 Set Gap Parameter Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . .551 The Welding Symbol Input Dialog. . . . . . . .552 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 1 . . . . . . . . .552 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 2 . . . . . . . . .553 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 3 . . . . . . . . .553 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 4 . . . . . . . . .553 Welding Symbol Popup 4a . . . . . . . . . . . . .553 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 5 . . . . . . . . .554 Welding Symbol Popup Menu 5a . . . . . . . .554 Welding Symbols 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554 Welding Symbols 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 Welding Symbols 7a/7b and the Welding Process List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .555 List of Named Welding Symbols . . . . . . . . .556 Dialog: Save or Discard a Named Welding Symbol as Default. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .556 Right Mouse Button Popup Menu . . . . . . . .557 The Load Surface Finish Symbol Toolset . .558 The Surface Finish Symbol Dialog . . . . . . .558 Detail of the Surface Finish Symbol Dialog.559 The Surface Symbol Popup Menu . . . . . . .560 Text Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562 Create Text Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563 Text Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .564 Dashboard: Text Properties . . . . . . . . . . . .565 Text Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566 Text types: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .567 Text Justification Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .568 Dashboard: Text Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570 Dashboard: Text Entry field . . . . . . . . . . . .572 Example Text Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .573 Examples of Special Characters in Text Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Special Characters Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . .574 Multi-line Text Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .575 Dashboard for Multi-Line Text (right part only) . 576 Popup Menu of the Create boxed Text Arrows Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576 Example for an arrow with two intermediate points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .577 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog . . . . . .579 Dashboard Balloon Texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582 Sub-Dashboard for Lines of Balloon Texts .582 Balloon Text Properties. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .583 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog, Example Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .584 Balloon Text Properties, Example Symbol .585 Text Translator Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .586 Table Creation Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591 Table Creation: Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Create Table Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .593 Create Table Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . .594 Justify Text Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Save Table Data Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595 Overwrite Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596 Figure 591 Figure 592 Figure 593 Figure 594 Figure 595 Figure 596 Figure 597 Figure 598 Figure 599 Figure 600 Figure 601 Figure 602 Figure 603 Figure 604 Figure 605 Figure 606 Figure 607 Figure 608 Figure 609 Figure 610 Figure 611 Figure 612 Figure 613 Figure 614 Figure 615 Figure 616 Figure 617 Figure 618 Figure 619 Figure 620 Figure 621 Figure 622 Figure 623 Figure 624 Figure 625 Figure 626 Figure 627 Figure 628 Figure 629 Figure 630 Figure 631 Figure 632 Figure 633 Figure 634 Figure 635 Figure 636 Figure 637 Figure 638 Figure 639 Figure 640 Figure 641 Figure 642 Figure 643 Load Table Data Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596 Popup Menu While Typing into Table Cell . 597 Table Creation: Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598 Style Creation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599 Dialog Fit Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602 Dialog Fit Table Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 Example for Fit Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604 Create a new table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606 Popup While Creating a New Table . . . . . . 607 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607 Example Drilling Table 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608 Add Data to Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609 Popup While Adding Data to Table . . . . . . 609 Example Drilling Table 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610 Edit Data of Circle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Example Drilling Table 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612 Setup Coordinate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 613 Warning: Start Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 Standard Prim Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619 Dashboard: Prims. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Prims Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Popup Menu While Placing Prims . . . . . . . 621 Prims Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 Prim Properties Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Style Creation Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626 Examples of Crosshatching . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Examples of Stippling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630 Temporary Lines Defining the Area to be Filled 631 Crosshatch and Stipple Tools . . . . . . . . . . 633 Popup Crosshatch Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633 Popup Stippling Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634 Load Named Symbol Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . 635 Angle, Spacing, and Offset. . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 Crosshatches Dashboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 The Crosshatch Properties Dialog . . . . . . . 639 Temporary Stipple Properties Dialog . . . . . 641 Setting the Spacing Between Symbols . . . 643 Selection Tools for Stippling and Crosshatching 645 Creating Multiple Crosshatching . . . . . . . . 646 Creating Offset Multiple Crosshatching . . . 646 Crosshatching Disjoint Areas: 1 . . . . . . . . . 647 Crosshatching Disjoint Areas: 2 . . . . . . . . . 647 Example of Using the Create Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching Tool. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648 Popup Global Settings for HLR Operations 649 Dialog HLR Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Popup HLR Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 650 Popup Boolean Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . 652 Example Boolean Operation Union . . . . . . 653 Example Boolean Operation Difference . . . 653 Example Boolean Operation Difference (keep) 653 Example Boolean Operation Intersection. . 654 Reference Sheet Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656 Tools for Creating Porthole Elements . . . . 657

© CAD Schroer GmbH

717

MEDUSA4 Drafting List of Figures
Figure 644 Figure 645 Figure 646 Figure 647 Figure 648 Figure 649 Figure 650 Figure 651 Figure 652 Figure 653 Figure 654 Figure 655 Figure 656 Figure 657 Figure 658 Figure 659 Figure 660 Figure 661 Figure 662 Figure 663 Figure 664 Figure 665 Figure 666 Figure 667 Figure 668 Figure 669 Figure 670 Figure 671 Figure 672 Figure 673 Figure 674 Porthole Definition Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . 658 Tools for References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 660 Open Sheet Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Dialog Reference Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661 Example For a Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663 Popup Menu for Reference Tools . . . . . . . 664 Structure Tree showing the Reference Clump. 665 File Selector and Compare Reference Dialog . 666 Compare Reference Dialog with Input of Source File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666 Structure Tree showing the current (RDS) and previous Version (PDS) of the Reference . 667 General Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 SMART Edit Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 SMART Edit Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673 SMART Edit: Dimension Value Dialog. . . . 674 SMART Edit: Over-Dimensions . . . . . . . . . 675 SMART Edit: Dimension Line Dialog . . . . . 677 SMART Edit: Drag Leader Line . . . . . . . . . 678 SMART Edit: Drag Dimension Line . . . . . . 678 SMART Edit: Datum. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679 SMART Edit: Orthogonal Line Dialog . . . . 680 SMART Edit: Drag Orthogonal Lines . . . . . 681 SMART Edit: Non-Orthogonal Line Dialog. 681 SMART Edit: Drag Non-Orthogonal Lines . 681 SMART Edit: Dialog for Arcs and Circles. . 682 SMART Edit: Solutions for Arcs . . . . . . . . . 682 Example of dragged Geometry . . . . . . . . . 683 Example of Dragged Geometry 2 . . . . . . . 683 Example of Dragged Dimension Line . . . . 683 Example of Dragged Geometry 3 . . . . . . . 684 SMART Drafting Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . 686 SMART Drafting Mouse Pointer. . . . . . . . . 687 Figure 675 Figure 676 Figure 677 Figure 678 Figure 679 Figure 680 Figure 681 Figure 682 Figure 683 Figure 684 Figure 685 Figure 686 Figure 687 Figure 688 Figure 689 Figure 690 Figure 691 Figure 692 Figure 693 Figure 694 Figure 695 Figure 696 Figure 697 Figure 698 Figure 699 Figure 700 Figure 701 Figure 702 Figure 703 SMART Drafting Popup Menu. . . . . . . . . . 688 AUTO Snap Popup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688 Example Background Color Angle Field . . 690 Example: Snap Mode Information, Nearest Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692 Example: Snap Mode Information, Middle Point 692 Example: Snap Mode Information, Segment Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693 Example: Segment is parallel against last one 693 Example: Segment is perpendicular against last one . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694 Example: Drawing Arcs 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Example: Drawing Arcs 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695 Example: Flip Arcs 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Example: Flip Arcs 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696 Example: Using construction points 1 . . . . 697 Example: Using construction points 2 . . . . 697 Example: Using construction points 3 . . . . 698 Example: Using construction points 4 . . . . 698 Example: Using construction points 5 . . . . 698 Example: Continue Geometry 1 . . . . . . . . 699 Example: Continue Geometry 2 . . . . . . . . 699 Example: Continue Geometry 3 . . . . . . . . 699 Example: Change Line Direction 1 . . . . . . 700 Example: Change Line Direction 2 . . . . . . 700 Defaults Dialog: Tab Switches . . . . . . . . . 702 Style Selection Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Icon Selection Dialog. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705 Remove Custom Buttons Dialog . . . . . . . . 707 The Configuration Pulldown-Menu . . . . . . 708 The Select Background Color Dialog . . . . 708 Save or Discard Defaults Dialog . . . . . . . . 709

718

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting

INDEX

A

B

C

D

E

F G H

I J

K

L M

N

O

P Q

R S T U V W X Y Z

Numeric
2D Features activate 364 Dashboard 364 properties 365 2D Modeling centerlines 409 crosshatching 409 edge projection 415 hidden lines 409 introduction 408 override centerlines 409 crosshatching 409 hidden lines 409 profile extrusion specifying angle 414 profile sampling 412 rotate profile to form a shaft 419 sectioned hole creation 421 sectioned shaft creation 420 Tools 408 2D Parametrics 253 3D Batch 254

A
accelerator key add 249 change function 248 change key 248 remove 248, 249 Activate 2D Features 364 Activate Scale View functions 281 Activating a Grid 145 Active working set 60 Active tool 332 add accelerator key 249 Add preview to sheet 244 add rows and columns to tables 594 Add Style to Favourites 308 Adding dimension segments 545

prims named 620 standard 619 printers 199 sheets to WSD files 58 Adding drillings to a table 608 Adding layer sets 164 Adding layers to layer set 164 adjust contents of the toolbar 263 Adjust the Toolbar 34 adjusting the toolbar 120 Admin Mode 196 -advanced 23 advanced mode 23 advanced options for printing 72 Advanced Plotting options dialog 72 Aligning geometry along line 439 alignment of symbols dynamic 454 Angle 141 Angles dimensioning creating 525 properties 527 for profile extrusion 414 measure 275 Angular Dimension Properties dialog Style and Format tab 527 Text and Arrows tab 527 Angular units 78 Annotating sheets 47 ANSII dimensioning standard 507 -api 23 api mode 23 Apply Drawing code change to all loaded sheets 178 Arc factor calculating 193 curve factor 191 default 191 maximum and minimum angle 192 Arc line function 378 Arcs appearance for plotting chord length 65

© CAD Schroer GmbH

719

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
appearance for printing chord length 70 appearance on sheet chord length 191 creating point on 324 defining shape using point weight 377 dimensioning 529 radius with an off-sheet center 530 area selecting elements by 100, 266 Area fills 629 deleting 645 properties changing 640, 643 selecting 645 Area selection by boundary groups 113 Areas defining for crosshatching or stippling 631 printing 69 selecting point groups 114, 437 Arrange coordinate dimensions text 549 Array 432 Arrowhead point function 380 Arrowhead point functions direction of line 380 Arrows dimensions 523 for dimensions 520 Arrows and Gaps 187 Arrows at a Text Box 576 aspect 568 attribute select elements by 112 Attributes layers 153 User Attributes Dialog 212 attributes layer customize 158 query user 347 Auto Probe Radii 189 Auto probe specifier 315 accuracy of 315 using windows 315 Auto Sheet Save 51 AUTO Snap 686 Popup Menu 688 Automatic 515 Autorotate when printing 71 Autoscaling area to print 70 Axis of rotation volume of revolution shaft 416 Axis of Rotation menu item 416 Axonometric Dimension dialog 536

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Backdrop printing 70 Background setting color 202, 708 ball2tab.cfg 600 balloon text create dialog 579 create dialog, example symbol 584 Balloon Text Dashboard 582 Balloon Text Properties 583 Example Symbol 585 balloon texts 579 create parts list 600 creating table from 583 creation 580 creation for design objects 581 error messages 581 item number 579 Base angle 206 Base Angle menu option 361 BLO prim 619 Blob 187 Boolean Operations 652 Border grid 137 Borders creating for sheet 79 in windows 130 Bore hole creating sectioned 421 Bore hole tables 606 Boundary brackets printing 72 Boundary group manipulation tools 114, 438 Boundary Groups 113, 436 manipulation 114 popup while transforming 438 transform 438 boundary groups create group lines 437 point groups 437 Boundary line, Select Elements by Area Dialog 116 Boundary lines for groups 113, 436 Boxes construction line tools 473 BSI dimensioning standard 507 Build filter from sheet selection 109 Build filter using sheet selection 109 button View or change the layer properties 159 Buttons dashboard 293, 299 Move Datum 456 properties 294 Unscale 455 Untransform 457 buttons common tab 175 generic 293 Move Datum by Probing 456 buttons in dialogs 32

B
Bacis1 251

720

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J C
Calculating chord angle 193 Calculator 235 calling up SMART Drafting 686 calling up SMART Edit 671 Cartesian 141 Cen line function 378 Center probe specifier 322 Centerlines 2D modeling 409 closed geometry 362 create when 2D modeling 410 overlap 362 override when 2D modeling 409 Chain dimensions 512 Chamfer lines 399 change accelerator key 248 Change Arcs, tools 397 Change curve of the selected tangent arc 397 Change layer 168 change properties of lines 374 change properties of lines with dashboard 374 Change Segment Length 390 change sheet sizes 78 Changing appearance of points 210, 379 coordinates of points 378 default probe specifier 313 dimension standards 188, 509 element property attributes 304 element style 304 hit radius 189, 313 layer set name 164 point functions 210, 379, 380 properties 304 using dashboard 296 sheet properties 346 stippling properties 643 Styles 304 changing prim properties 625 Changing Properties of a Text Style 571 Changing Text Style 570 Choosing probe specifiers 40 Set of tooltrays 37 tools 39 from toolsets 38 Tooltray 38 Chord angle calculating 193 Chords angles maximum and minimum 192 using to draw curves 65, 70, 191 Cir line function 378 Circle construction lines 476 Circles appearance for plotting chord length 65

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
appearance for printing chord length 70 appearance on sheet chord length 191 construction line tools 473 creating point at center of 322 creating point on 324 dimensioning 529 diameter 529 radius 529 Class Buttons 107 Cleanup 614 Clear 119, 133 Clear Flagged 99 Clear lines 442 click mouse button 27 Clip zoomed window 182 Clipboard 234 Clo line function 378 Cloning element properties using dashboard 297 Close and New Line 388 Close Line 388 Close Trail File 238 Close window 48 Closed Geometry popup menu 358 Closed geometry centerlines 362 properties 360 tools 357 closed geometry creating 357 Closed Geometry Properties 358 Closed Geometry Properties dialog 360 Closing Sheets of a WSD File 60 columns add to tables 594 Comma Separated Variable file 590 command start 23 Common select by area 115 common button 112 Common tab buttons 175 Compare selected reference tool 660, 665 Compare Trail Files 240 Comparing Reference 665 compile fits data files 201 complex line editing tools 390 Con line function 378 Configuration 197 Configuration file printer 201 confining construction lines 488 Connect lines 442 Console show/hide 252 Construction Circles Creating tangential 476, 477 Construction Line Creating tangential at two circles 478 construction line

© CAD Schroer GmbH

721

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Create Line Tools, overview 350 Create named group 338, 339, 343 Create named group with existing elements 338, 343 Create Notes, tools 538 Create segments tangential to surfaces, tool 396 Creates a datum named group for an offset datum dimension, tool 534 Creates a free feature control frame, tool 540 Creates a free feature control, toolset 539 Creates construction circle tangential to a line in three steps Tool 477 Creates construction circle tangential to a line in two steps Tool 477 Creates construction circle tangential to two lines Tool 477 Creates construction lines tangential at two circles,Tool 479 Creates construction lines through tangent points of two circles,Tool 478 Creates isometric dimensioning, tool 536 Creates polygons, tool 363 Creates prims of specified type and properties, tool 620 Creates transportation lines, tool 489 Creating Balloon Texts 580 error messages 581 Balloon Texts for desing objects 581 bore holes sectioned 421 centerlines when 2D modeling 410 closed geometry 357 construction lines 474 crosshatching when 2D modelling 411 custom sheets 46 dimensions angular 525 dynamic construction lines 500 elements using dashboard 297 faces 415 first point of line 353 grids 138 group boundary lines 436 linear dimensions 512 lines overview 353 use of current point 351 multi-line text 575 new groups 342 New Reference 661 orthogonal views 408 perpendicular line segments 321 points at grid points 317 Porthole Elements 658 solid shafts 419 sectioned 420 standard sheet 45 style 301 swept profiles 412 table data CSV files 590 Table from Balloon Texts 583 Text 564 hiding 487 Construction Line Extent 183 Construction lines absolute offset values 484 circle 476 confining 488 creating 474 datum point 474 deleting all 486 selected 486 oblique 475 offsetting multiple 484 single 481 overview 472 positive and negative offsets 481 tools 473 using previous datum point 480 construction lines dynamic 496 angle 498 offset 499 point recognition 497 properties 497 usage 502 use keyboard buttons 499 project through a profile 492 project through a section 493 projected 492 Construction Points 697 contents of the toolbar 263 context sensitive help 259 Convert reference 664 Convert reference tool 660 Convert the selected circular arc to a tangent point arc 398 Coordinate dimensions 512 Coordinates of points changing 378 of text element 567 coordinates dialog for entering values 329, 354 Copies number to plot 65 number to print 69 Copy 90 Copy to Clipboard 234 Copy to clipboard 182 Copying current WSD file 58 create gaps under Text in crosshatching 648 Create a (tangent-point) fillet of specified radius, tool 393 Create a fillet of specified radius, tool 393 Create a Table 593 Create Arcs, tools 395 Create chamfer, tool 394 Create Circles, tools 395 Create diagram connector text 463 Create diagram datum prim 464 Create diagram symbol 463 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog 579 Create Item Number Balloon Dialog, Example Symbol 584

722

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
Text Element with a Style 570 text, popup menu 563 WSD File 57 Creating Construction Circles tangential 476 Creating Construction Line tangential 478 Creating edges perpendicular to viewing direction 415 Crossed dynamic construction line 501 Crosshatches dashboard 638 Crosshatching 2D modeling 409 areas defining 631 around areas 647 create when 2D modelling 411 default settings 637 defining area to fill 631 Deleting 645 filling areas 629 multiple times 646 override when 2D modeling 409 overview 630 properties 637 changing 640 seed line 637 seedpoint 632 selecting 100, 266, 645 tools 633 crosshatching create gaps under text 648 popup menu 633 CSV files overview 590 CTRL key pan 123 pan and zoom 267 zoom 123 Ctrl-Key 29 Current point 351 selecting a point 286, 404 view plotting 65 printing 69 current grid 143 Current node 336 Cursor position 333 Curve Factor 191 Curves changing appearance for plotout 65 changing appearance for printout 70 changing appearance on sheet 191 custom selection tool 111 custom sheets creating 46 Custom tools deleting 707 modifying 705 Customizing layer attributes 158 layer sets 164 layers 162 tools 703 user environment 701

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Cut 90 Cut from Tree 288 Cutting elements using tree viewer 344

D
Dashboard 35 balloon text 582 changing properties 296 cloning element properties 297 components 293 creating elements 297 crosshatches 638 Dimensioning 511 displaying properties 295 overview 292 prims 620, 623 properties 294 Properties button 294 Text Properties 565 dashboard 2D Features 364 Dashboards dimension 292 group 292 line 292 prim 292 text 292 Datum dimensions 512 layer 167 probe specifier 327 Datum Offset Dimension 534 Datum point construction lines 474 offsetting construction lines from 484 prims 619 stippling symbol moving 642 symbols moving 456 text elements 568 using previous construction line datum point 480 datum point (definition) 327 Deactivate Scale View functions 281 Deactivating a Grid 145 Default crosshatching settings 637 dimensioning standards 186, 508 layer allocation 155 prims 620 probe specifier changing 313 sheet scale 77 sheet units 185 spacing stippling 642 Default font 175 Default style 302 Defaults arc factor 191 Defaults dialog

© CAD Schroer GmbH

723

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
Layer Manager List Switsches 183 Refsys tab 194 defaults.dat 442 Define vertices with left mouse button 182 Defines a new multi-sheet working set 57 Defining group boundary lines 113 Deflection angles 491 Degree angular unit 78 Delete 86 Delete all construction lines tool 486 delete diagram symbol 469 Delete Point 388 Delete reference 660, 664 delete rows and columns from tables 594 delete scale views 280 delete selection from tables 591 Deleting area fills 645 construction lines 486 selected 486 crosshatching and stippling 645 custom tools 707 dynamic construction lines 504 grids 149 layer sets 165 parts of dimensions 546 prims 622 Printers 198 tools from drop area 707 from user tooltray 707 whole dimensions 546 window views 126, 268 WSD Files 58 deleting a layer name 162 Deleting group lines 437 Deselect All 86, 103, 289 Deselect All Option 108 Deselect Once 103, 289 diagram connector text 463 diagram datum prim 464 Diagram symbol loading named 468 temporary 466 named 462 saving named 465 temporary 465 selecting and deleting 469 temporary 462 Dialog Crosshatch properties 639 Fit Table Properties 602 HLR Type 650 JoinLine Properties 442 Measuring Properties 273 Merge User Styles 309 MovebyGrid 440 Number 217 Save named Symbol 465 User Attributes 212 dialog 32

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
buttons 32 Dialogs Advanced Plotting Options 72 Angular Dimension Properties Style and Format tab 527 Text and Arrows tab 527 Closed Geometry Properties 360 Defaults Dimension 508 Enter Coords 329, 354 File Manager 53 Grid Properties 139 Help button 258 Icon Selection 705 Layer Datum 167 Line Point Properties 377 Linear Dimension Properties Style and Format tab 516 Text and Arrows tab 520 Load Symbol Temporary Properties 450 Measure 272 Plot 64 Plotter information 200 Plotter Properties 200 Point Functions 211, 381 Prim Properties 624 Prims 620 Print 67 Print Configuration 198 Profile Extrusion View Direction 413 Remove Custom Buttons 707 Sectioned Shaft Properties 409 Select Elements by Area 115 Sheet header Editor 80 Sheet Working Sets 56 Special Sheets 46 Style Selection 705 Symbol Manager 458 Symbols 447 Table Creation 591, 593 Temporary Stipple Properties 641 Text Properties 566 View Frames 130 Windows 125, 268 Working Set Properties 61 dialogs save as 50 save or discard 83 Diametric 187 Difference 652 Dimension dashboard 292 Dimension offset from a datum tool 534 Dimension Session Defaults 508 Dimensioning 505 dimensioning angular popup menu 526 arrange coordinate dimensions text 549 dashboard 511 explode 550 gaps 550 linear popup menu 513

724

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
Dimensions adding segments 545 angular creating 525 properties 527 text format 528 arcs 529 arrows 523 arrows and text 520 chain 512 circle diameter 529 circles and arcs 529 coordinate 512 datum 512 deleting part 546 deleting whole 546 direction 521 dual 518 editing 542 gaps 523 Imperial units 521 in scale views 281 layer 521 limit and fit 519 linear 512 linear properties 516 Prefix and suffix 518 radius of a circle 529 radius with an off sheet center 530 selecting 100, 266 spacing 522 standards 507 creating personal 509 modifying 188, 509 setting 186, 508 text format 522 text position 520 tolerance format 518 tolerance style 517 tools 506 type 522 values 519 DIN dimensioning standard 507 Direction of dimensions 521 of line 352 arrowhead point functions 380 Display 133 text always legible 184 text as rectangles 184 text as text 184 text at all orientations 184 text with shear 184 display grid 143 display only the selected elements 133 display reference 664 Display rubber band 182 display scale views 280 Displaying current grid 146 error messages 26

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
properties using dashboard 295 switch between sheets 26 tree viewer 336 Distance 206 Distance between text characters, gap 568 Divide segment into specified number of divisions or at selected point 392 Divide segment into two 392 Dock the Tree Viewer 337 DOT prim 619 double click mouse button 27 Double segment length 390 Drag selection 101 Dragging using the cursor 27 Draw Selection 133 Draw Selection only 107 Drawing area maximum 78 popup menus 30 Drawing code plotting 65 printing 69 Drawing interval grids 146 drilling tables appearance 613 Drop area deleting tools 707 using to copy tools 704 DTM prim 619 Dual dimensions 518 Duplicates and mirrors the selected elements 429 Duplicates and moves the selected elements 426 Duplicates and rotates the selected elements 427 DXF file load 53 DXF Files save 51 DXF symbols loading 460 Dyn. scaling, load symbol popup 448 Dyn. scaling, paste popup 91 Dynamic construction lines 496 angle 498 crossed 501 offset 499 perpendicular 501 point recognition 497 properties 497 tangential 500 use keyboard buttons 499 lines displaying during edit 182 scaling of symbols 455 turning off and on 281 dynamic alignment of symbols 454 construction lines usage 502

© CAD Schroer GmbH

725

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
Dynamic Construction Lines delete 504 Dynamic pan and zoom 267 dynamic pan and zoom 123 dynamic scaling, load symbol popup 448 dynamic scaling, paste popup 91 Dynamically align geometry 439

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Ending Groups 339 Ending line creation 353 Enter Coords Dialog 329, 354 Entering text text entry field 572 Error bell enable 182 Error messages displaying 26 error messages while creating balloon texts 581 Escape 187 ESC-Key 29 Example Drilling Table 1 608 Drilling Table 2 610 Drilling Table 3 612 Fit Tables 604 Scale View 284 Test Dimension 519 examples for boolean operations 653 Exit Tool (popup line edit) 389 Explode dimensions 550 export as DXF 51 export sheets 63 Extend by factor 390 Extend Line 391 Extend line to probed segment 391 Extend to Segment 208 Extent of construction lines 183 Extent,grid 142 Extruding profiles specifying angle 414

E
EAR prim 619 Edge projection 415 Edges creating perpendicular to viewing direction 415 Edit Description 201 Edit Line popup menu 388 Edit Menu 86 edit text field of a drawing 80 Editing 572 dimensions 542 lines displaying dynamic line to cursor 182 overview 387 style 301 tables 597 Editing drilling data 611 element classes 20 Element property attributes changing 304 Elements cloning properties using dashboard 297 creating point at datum of 327 using dashboard 297 cutting using tree viewer 344 layer allocation default 155 move 425 pasting using tree viewer 344 selecting by clicking 101 by dragging 101 using mouse 101 style changing 304 transforming using point boundary groups 114, 438 using to align a grid 148 elements reparent 340 Elements with user attribute selecting 112 Enable error bell 182 transportation lines 182 Enable at startup 176 Enable Transportation lines option 490 Enclosed select by area 116

F
Faces creating 415 Feature Control Frame Datum 539 File Write Protection 54 File entry separator 598 file export 63 file import 62 File Manager File preview 54 File Manager dialog 53 File Menu 44 file name of sheet 76 Files WSD 56 Fillet lines, tool 399 Filling areas with patterns or crosshatching 629 filling areas with symbols 635 Filter Selection, button in Power Selection Dialog 108 Find Text 94 Find text 87 Finishing line creation 353 Fit specifying in dimensions 519 Fit a smooth curve through the current line 391 Fit table properties 602 Fit Tables, creating 602 Fits 201

726

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
fits.xml 605 fittab_import_fit2xml 605 fixed 642 Fixed, Refsys option 194 Flag Selected 99 Flip 389 Font for text elements 567 Format of plotter 65 Format of printer 69 Free Feature Control Frame 540 Free probe specifier 316 Free style 302 freezing the active scale 281 Full grid 137 Full Sheet 118 full view 267 Functions lines 378 of points changing 210, 379

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
partial 146 points 136 properties setting 138 reset origin 148 showing lines 146 showing lines at intervals 146 Grids Menu 136 group create 338, 339, 343 select at sheet level 100, 266 Group boundaries creating 436 defining 113 freehand 113 Group dashboard 292 Group lines deleting 437 tools for drawing 113 using to transform elements 114, 438 Group types point group 114, 437 Groups 334 changing names 342 creating 342 creating boundary lines 436 drawing boundary lines 113 nesting 342 Properties 342 selecting 100, 266 groups definition 334 ending 339 members 335 nested 339 owners 335

G
gap 568 Gap point function 379 Gaps dimensions 523 gaps in dimension leader lines 550 Gaps Under Text in Crosshatching 648 Generic buttons 293 Geometry closed 357 measure 2D properties 276 of line 351 geometry zoom into 124, 267, 270 Getting Information on the Tools in a Tool Tray 260 Getting Information on Using the Active Tool 260 Gradians 78 Grid extent 142 representation 141 grid Full, Border, Small 137 Points or Lines 137 Grid lines 136 Grid probe specifier 317 Grid Properties dialog 139 Grids active and deactivate 145 aligning with elements 148 changing line spacing 141 choosing 143 creating 138 creating points on 317 delete 149 displaying 146 hiding lines 146 maximum number of 138 origin 140 align with element 148 setting by probing 148 overview 136

H
Half a symmetrical dimension tool 533 Halve segment length 390 Height of text legible 177 Help by buttons in dialogs 258 by message line 260 context sensitive 259 Help menu 257 Hidden line style 409 Hidden lines 2D modeling 409 override when 2D modeling 409 show when 2D modeling 410 hidden lines masking 649 Hide Console 252 hide construction lines 487 hide reference 664 Hiding grid lines 146 Hierarchy Navigation 287 Hit radius 313 changing 189, 313 querying 189, 313

© CAD Schroer GmbH

727

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
hit radius set up 189 Hitable 160 HLR Type 650 hold down a mouse button 27 Hole end view tool 417 Holes creating sectioned 421 Horizontal 513 Horizontal View menu option 415

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
layer identification by numbers 153 Layer list 107 Layer Manager 154 List Buttons 160 Settings for list 183 Layer Naming Convention 75, 346 Layer Properties 156 Layer Set Management 159 Layer Sets 156, 159 Layer sets adding 164 adding layers 164 changing name 164 deleting 165 remove layers 165 Layers 151 adding to layer sets 164 allocation default 155 attributes 153 delete name 162 dimensions 521 numbering datum 167 numbers 153 overview 152 plotting 65 printing 70 remove from layer sets 165 rename 163 sets 152 stippling 642 Layers Menu 154 leader line 538 legible 642 Legible Height menu option 177 Legible, Refsys option 194 Level 116 Level Navigation 287 libraries of symbols 444 Licenses 253 Limit specifying in dimensions 519 Lin line function 378 Line creation ending 353 Line dashboard 292 Line direction 352 order of points in line 351 reversing 405 Line functions flipping an arc 389 Line Navigation tool 404 Line Navigation toolbar 286 Line Point Properties (popup menu) 389 Line Point Properties dialog 377 line styles 371 line types 372 Linear Dimension Properties dialog Style and Format tab 516 Text and Arrows tab 520 Linear dimensions 512 Linear units 77

I
Icon Selector dialog 705 image save sheet as 52 Imperial units dimensions 521 import DXF file 53 import sheets 62 import STHENO sheet 53 Incremental angle 206 incremental offsets 484 Instancing 241 Intersection 652 Intersection probe specifier 318 Interval 142 Introduction 17 Inv line function 378 Invisible 160 ISO dimensioning standard 507 Isometric 536 isometric default angles 537 Item Number 579

J
JIS dimensioning standard 507 Join Lines 393 Join tangent point arcs, too 442 JoinLine Properties,Dialog 442 Justification 565 justification table 591 set to top left 593 justify text in tables 595

K
keyboard 29

L
Last probe specifier 325 Layer customize 162, 164 layer properties, button 159 Layer attributes customize 158 Layer Change 168 Layer datum dialog 167

728

© CAD Schroer GmbH

MEDUSA4 Drafting
A B C D E F G H I J
Lines construction 472 creating construction 474 perpendicular segment 321 creating points at intersection 318 at middle of segment 323 crosshatching boundaries 631 current point 351 direction effect on arrowhead point functions 380 editing overview 387 editing tools 386 finishing 353 first point 353 flipping the arc function 389 function 378 geometry 351 measure 276 measuring 272 measuring segments 273 navigating 286, 404 properties of points 377 selecting 100, 266 for editing 387 starting another line 353 temporary defining areas to fill 631 deleting 631 lines change properties 374 change properties with dashboard 374 clear 442 connect 442 construction projected 492 hidden masking 649 style variants 371 types 372 Load a new reference tool 660 Load a new reference, tool 661 load DXF file 53 Load image backdrop, Switches Control Panel 182 Load named diagram symbol 468 Load Named Symbol 458 Load reference tool 660 Load reference, tool 664 Load Symbol Temporary Properties, dialog 450 Load tables 596 Load temporary diagram symbol, tools 466 Load temporary symbol 448 popup menu 447 Loading a WSD File 58 DXF symbols 460 sheet in a WSD File 59 symbols named 459 temporary 447

K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
Locked properties 305 Log file print jobs 199 login command 23 lowercase 566

M
Magnify 432 Magnifying symbols 452 main features 19 Main window features of 26 Manage the properties associated with working sets 61 manipulate boundary groups 114 Mapkey 250 Margins around sheets printing 73 Masking a Selection 650 Masking Hidden Lines 649 Maximum sheet size 78 Maximum chord angle 192 Measure dialog 272 Measure toolbar 271 Measuring 2D properties of geometry 276 angles 275 Distance Between the Current Point and the Last Point 274 Distance Between Two Points 274 line segments 273 lines 272, 276 precision 273 Measuring properties 273 MED_CLIPBOARDCOPY 183 MEDParts 253 Members of groups 335 menu layers 154 Menu Bar Select 99 Menu options Arc Factor 191 Axis of Rotation 416 Base Angle 361 Horizontal View 415 Legible Height 177 Oblique View 415 Point Functions 210, 380 Reverse Offset 482 Vertical View 415 View Direction 413 menu Options 172 Menus popup 30 pulldown menus 31 Merge User Styles 308 Message Area Display Properties 176 Message line 332 message line 260 message window 332 Messages Types to Display 176

© CAD Schroer GmbH

729

438 lines 387 tools 705 working set sheet loading behavior 61 Mouse using to select elements 101 Mouse buttons dragging 27 Move 426 move 425 Move Datum back to original 457 Move Datum button 456 Move Datum by Probing 456 Move Point 388 Move segments.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z changing for groups 342 Naming Convention Layer 75. tool 399 Move the selected elements 426 Move the selected points 441 MovebyGrid. 314 Near probe specifier 319 Nested Group 339 Nested groups 342 New Line 388 New Line menu option 353 New Table 591 Next 119 next window 267 notes 538 NTE groups 538 Null line function 378 Null point function 379 Number of segments 141 Numbers layers 153 Mid segment probe specifier 323 Minimum chord angle 192 Minute angular unit 78 Mirror 431 Mirror Lock 430 Mirroring symbols 453 Mirrors the selected elements 429 Modify filter / Use for selection 109 Modify the weight of the selected tangent arc 397 Modifying custom tools 705 elements using point boundary groups 114. tool 440 Moving around the tree viewer 343 datum point symbols 456 tools to user tool tray 704 Multi-line text creating 575 Multiple crosshatching 646 elements selecting 104 Multiple Duplicate and Move 426 Multiple Duplicate and Rotate 428 multiple selection table 110 Multiple Selections of Text 573 Multi-segment Lines 21 My Favourites 307 O Oblique construction lines 475 Oblique View menu option 415 Offset from Last probe specifier 326 Offsets construction lines 481 absolute offset values 484 multiple 484 positive and negative construction lines 481 Online Documentation 256 Only join lines on same level in same group 442 open a sheet 53 preview 54 Opening additional view windows 128 operations boolean 652 Optimizing for printing 71 Options 171 user defining 181. 404 around the tree viewer 343 Near point radius probe specifiers 190. 346 Navigating along lines 286. 702 Origin of grid reset 148 of sheet 140 origin reset 137 set 137 Origin of grid 140 Origin rotation 141 Orthogonal views producing 408 Orthogonalize line within set tolerance 392 Orthogonalize whole line 392 Output message area 26 Over-Dimensions 675 N Name changing layer sets 164 named diagram symbol load 468 Named point functions 382 Named symbols loading 459 into sheet 458 named symbols 444 Names 730 © CAD Schroer GmbH . dialog 440 Moves geometry multiple of a grid offset.

437 Point Recognition 497 Points changing appearance 210.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J Overlapping centerlines 362 Overview 2D modelling 408 construction lines 472 creating a line 353 crosshatching and stippling 630 CSV files 590 editing lines 387 grids 136 of layers 152 selection methods 98 symbols 444 text properties 565 overview tooltrays. 404 on current grid 317 creating 317 properties of 377 sequence of 352 reversing 405 weight 377 points move selected 441 Polar 141 Popup Crosshatch Tool 633 Popup Menu create tables 594 for Angular Dimensions 526 For Linear Dimensions 513 Move 425 of the Create boxed Text Arrows Tool 576 While Typing into Table Cell 597 Popup Menu 1 for Editing Dimensions 543 Popup Menu 2 for Editing Dimensions 544 Popup Menu 3 for Editing Dimensions 545 Popup Menu for Transform Groups 438 Popup Menu Load temporary symbol 447 Popup Menu While Placing Prims 621 Popup menus Edit line 388 in drawing area 30 Popup Stippling Tool 634 porthole creating a new reference 661 reference tools 660 porthole element creation 658 porthole elements tools 657 Power Selection Tool 106 Draw selection only 107 multiple selection table 110 save filter in custom selector button 111 selection modes 108 precision of measuring 273 Prefix for dimensions 518 preview a file 54 Previewing symbol files 459 Previous 119 P pan dynamic 267 Pan Zoom 123 PAP prim 619 Parallel 513 Parametrics 253 Partial grid 146 Partially enclosed 116 Parts Library 253. 438 © CAD Schroer GmbH 731 . 445 Parts List 600 Paste 91 recreate structure 91 Paste from Tree 288 Pasting elements using tree viewer 344 PDS group 665 Perform boolean operations on geometry 652 Perform HLR operations on geometry 649 permanent sheet scale 76 Permanent sheet units 77 Perpendicular dynamic construction lines 501 probe specifier 321 Plot dialog 64 Plot Queue 66 Plotter Configuration 198 Plotter format 65 Plotter Information dialog 200 Plotter Properties dialog 200 Plotting backdrop 66 current view 65 defined areas 65 defining appearance of arcs 65 drawing code 65 number of copies 65 rotating area to plot 71 sheets 64 specific layers 65 title information 65 to specific scale 65 Visibility Settings of Design Objects 66 Point boundary groups transforming elements 114. 381 Point groups 114. 379 arrowhead 380 changing 380 gap 379 named point functions 382 Null 379 user-defined 383 Point functions dialog 211. 379 coordinates 378 creating at datum points 327 at line intersections 318 on arcs 324 moving between points 286. toolsets and tools 36 overview of create line tools 350 Owners of groups 335 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Point functions 210.

643 closed geometry 360 crosshatching 637 dashboard 294 displaying using dashboard 295 grids 138 groups 342 linear dimensions 516 lines changing 374 changing with the dashboard 374 modifying using dashboard 296 printer 200 previous window 267 Prim dashboard 292 Prim libraries Prims dialog box 620 Prim Properties dialog 624 Prim types 619 Prims 617 adding to sheet named prims 620 standard prims 619 choosing from a prim library 620 dashboard 620.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z to specific scale 70 printing edit description file 201 Printing documentation from Portable Document Format (PDF) files 16 Probe line 515 Probe points 515 Probe specifiers 311 auto 315 center 322 choosing 40 datum 327 free 316 grid 317 hit radius 313 intersection 318 last 325 mid segment 323 near 319 offset from last 326 perpendicular 321 probe radii 189. 313 segment 320 selecting 312 setting the default 313 tangent 324 ProDetail unlock imported elements 87 Profile extrusion tool 414 Profile Extrusion View Direction dialog 413 Profiles restoring when 2D modeling 422 sweeping 412 Project the construction lines from a section line 494 projected construction lines 492 Projecting Construction Lines Through a Profile 492 Projecting Construction Lines Through a Section 493 Projection construction lines from profiles 492 Projects a construction line from a rotated section line 494 Properties 2D Features 365 angular dimensions 527 attributes changing 304 balloon text 583 balloon text. 623 datum point 619 default 620 definition 618 deleting 622 how prims are displayed 627 selecting 100. example symbol 585 changing 304 crosshatching 640 stippling 640. 266 storage 627 tools 619 transforming 622 undoing 619 updating on sheets 627 prims change properties 625 popup menu 621 Prims dialog 620 Print advanced options 72 Print Configuration dialog 198 Print dialog 67 Printer format 69 Printer properties 200 Printers adding 199 configuration file 201 deleting 198 log files 199 Printing area options 69 automatically rotating plot area to fit page 71 autoscaling plot area to fit page 70 backdrop 70 boundary brackets 72 current view 69 defined areas 70 defining appearance of arcs 70 defining scrubbing area 73 defining text format 73 drawing code 69 nothing is printing 70 number of copies 69 optimization 71 optional user text 73 defining 74 sheared text 73 sheet margins 73 sheets 67 specific layers 70 text defining proportional spacing 73 title information 70 to file 74 732 © CAD Schroer GmbH .

Refsys option 194 Rotate 428 Rotate grid 141 Rotate profile to form a shaft 419 Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Holes 421 Rotate Profiles to Form Sectioned Shafts 420 Rotate profiles to form shafts tool 419 Rotate Segment. tools 394 Rotates the selected elements 427 Rotating area to plot 71 symbols 452 text elements 568 rows add to tables 594 rubber band display 182 Q Query Angle.tool 212 Querying 2D properties of geometry 276 angles 275 hit radius 189. 249 Remove chamfer. 313 lines 276 sheet properties 346 Quick Selection Tools for Dimensions 542 quit 83 R Radial 187 Radial Dimension 187 Radial increment 141 Radians 78 Raster plotting 66 Raster Backdrop 253 RCS 606 RDS group 667 Reads all balloon texts to a table. Defaults dialog 194 Relative offsets construction lines 484 Reload WSD File 59 remove accelerator key 248. 269 Restoring profiles from 2D modeling 422 Restoring window views 125.Grid 141 Reset 157 Reset Origin 137 reset sheet scale 77 Resetting grid origin 148 Restore window view 126. 268 Reusing datum point construction lines 480 Reverse Offset menu option 482 Reverse Points in line 389 Reversing line direction 405 rigid 642 Rigid. button 159 Properties button dashboard 294 Properties for Masking hidden lines 649 Properties of points 377 properties of tables 598 Proportional spacing for printing text 73 Protected Modify 160 Protractor 206 Pulldown menus 31 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z reference coordinate system 606 Reference dimensions 675 Reference Group dialog 661 reference tools 660 Referenced text 194 Refresh Graphics 267 Refresh window view 269 Refsys options 194 Refsys tab. 389 redraw 267 reference create new 661 hide 664 load 664 Reference clump 665 S Save all modified sheets (tool) 265 Save As Dialog 50 save as DXF file 51 Save As Image 52 © CAD Schroer GmbH 733 .MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J scale views 279 sheets querying and changing 346 SMART Drafting 686 style 301 symbols 450 text 565 text height 568 text rotation 568 unlocked 305 unused 305 views 129 properties cloning 297 layer. tool 393 Remove Style from Favourites 308 Remove the curve fitted through the current line 391 Removing layers from layer set 165 Removing sheets from WSD files 58 renaming a layer 163 Reparent 340 Replace Text 95 Replace text 87 Replace text properties 569 Replay Trail File 239 Representation. tool 600 Record Trail File 238 Recreate structure 91 Redo 89. Distance 208 line segment length 273 Query and edit user attributes 347 Query or change the properties of the current sheet 346 Query User Attribute. tool 394 Remove Custom Buttons dialog 707 Remove fillet.

MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z select text in tables 594 Select window 252 Selected elements toggle 104 Selected geometry zoom into 124. paste popup 91 Schematic symbols 455 Scrubbing area defining for plotter 73 Search Radii 189 Search text 87 Second angular unit 78 Sectioned Shaft Properties dialog 409 Seed line 637 Seedpoint crosshatching or stippling 632 Segment probe specifier 320 segments move 399 Select All Option 108 Select by Area Common 115 Enclosed 116 Toggle 115 select diagram symbol 469 Select elements by Area dialog 115 Select Elements by Attribute 112 Select elements by type. 266 elements by area 100. 266 stippling 100. solid creating 419 sectioned 420 shear 431 Save Filter Dialog 111 Save filter in custom selector button 111 Save or Discard Dialog 83 Save sheet 49 save tables 595 Saves the current multi-sheet set 57 Saving changes to the work environment 709 symbols temporary 446 window views 125. 266 probe specifiers 312 sheet elements 100. 266 Set of tooltrays 36. 266 sheet level group 100. 708 setting standard dimensions 508 Settings for Layer Manager List 183 Shaft end view tool 417 Shaft volume of revolution axis of rotation 416 Shafts. 268 Scale dimensions 537 Scale symbols 455 Scale text height 184 Scale View 278 Scale views 278 delete 280 dimensioning 281 display 280 example 284 properties changing 279 working with 281 Scales defining for plotted area 65 defining for printed area 70 dynamic symbols 455 turning off and on 281 freezing 281 of symbols on sheets 455 sheet default 77 permanent 76 temporary 77 using different 278 scaling dynamic. 266 for editing 387 multiple elements 104 overview of methods 98 prims 100. 267. 289 734 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 266 groups 100. class and layer 289 Select Flagged 99 Select Once 103. 266 tools 266 tools to select elements 100 using mouse 101 selecting custom tool 111 elements with user attributes 112 Selection 97 by boundary groups 113 filter 108 masking hidden lines 650 menu bar 99 Power selection tool 106 selection multiple criteria 110 Selection Criteria Options 106 Selection rectangle 101 Selection sets adding elements to 112 elements common to several selections 112 removing elements from 112 toggle selected elements 104 Selection tools 100. load symbol popup 448 dynamic. 266 text 100. 118 choosing 37 Set Origin 137 Set table justification 591 Set table justification to top left 593 Sets of layers 152 Setting background color 202. 270 Selecting by clicking 101 by dragging 101 crosshatching 100. 266 lines 100. 266 crosshatching and stippling 645 dimensions 100.

266 Sheet origin and grid origin 140 Sheet Properties querying and changing 346 Sheet properties angular units 78 linear units 77 maximum drawing area 78 sheet filename 76 sheet units 77 temporary sheet scale 77 sheet properties query 346 Sheet scale default 76 effect on symbols 455 Sheet Size standard 45 Sheet sizes changing 78 Sheet Tabs 26 Sheet type 47 Sheet units default 185 Sheet Working Sets dialog 56 Sheets add and remove to WSD file 58 annotating 47 border create 79 changing origin 140 loading behavior in working sets 61 loading into WSD files 59 maximum size 78 navigating structure using tree viewer 343 plotting 64 printing 67 boundary brackets 72 margins 73 optional text in title block 74 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z scale default 77 permanent 76 temporary 77 units 77 permanent 77 Sheets Toolbar 265 Shift-Key 29 Shortcuts. 266 Sheet Header Editor dialog 80 Sheet History Stack 179 Sheet history stack 82 Sheet level group selecting 100. SMART Drafting 690 Show All Layers 157 Show Console 252 show licenses 253 Show position of window views 126.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J Shear grid 141 Shear of text 568 Shearing symbols 453 Shearing text defining format when printing 73 Sheet plotting 65 printing 69 view full sheet 267 sheet auto save 51 export 63 import 62 save as image 52 saving 49 Sheet elements selecting 100. 269 Show Used Layers 157 Showing grid lines 146 hidden lines when 2D modeling 410 Size of symbols 455 Small grid 137 SMART Drafting 685 Arcs 695 calling up 686 Changing Line Direction 700 Construction Points 697 edit existing geometry 699 Mouse Pointer 687 Popup Menu 688 Properties 686 shortcuts 690 Snap Mode Information 692 SMART Edit 669 Arcs and circles 682 calling up 671 datum 679 edit Dimension Lines 677 edit dimension values 674 Non-orthogonal lines 681 Orthogonal lines 680 over-dimensions 675 selection 670 Snap Mode Information 692 sort a column 595 Spacing of grid lines 141 stippling symbols 642 Spacing between witness lines of dimensions 522 Special characters entering into text strings 574 Special Sheets dialog box sheet scale 76 Special Sheets dialogs 46 Special styles 302 Split Lines 393 Standard 187 standard dimensions 507 standard sheet size 45 start 23 start command 23 Status area Message line 260 overview 332 Step stippling 642 © CAD Schroer GmbH 735 .

702 symbol load temporary 448 popup menu 447 Symbol Manager 458 Symbol Manager Dialog 458 Symbol properties K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z reversing 457 Symbols 443. 601 creating data files 590 Delete Selection 591 Justify Text 595 properties 598 Select Text 594 tables Add and Delete Rows and Columns 594 create 593 create parts list 600 edit 597 load 596 popup menu 594 Save 595 736 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 645 Step 642 symbol datum moving 642 stippling fill with symbols 635 popup menu 634 Stippling tools 633 Store Image in Sheet 182 Storing prims 627 Storing window views 125. 461 changes undoing 457 containing text modifying 451 datum point moving 456 dynamic alignment 454 effect of sheet scale 455 in scale views 281 libraries 444 loading named symbols 459 magnifying 452 mirroring 453 named 444 loading into sheet 458 overview 444 preview files 459 rotating 452 scale of 455 scaling dynamic 455 schematic symbols 455 shearing 453 size 455 stippling changing 641 spacing 642 temporary 444 loading 447 properties 450 saving 446 tools 445 transforming 451 unscaling 455 symbols fill areas with 635 Move Datum back to original 457 welding symbol 552 Symbols dialog 447 Symmetrical dimension tool 531 Synchronise table with balloons on sheet. 268 Style changing 304 of tables 598 properties 301 style change of text 570 change properties for texts 571 create text 570 creating new 301 My Favourites 307 of lines 371 Style Creation Dialog for tables 599 Style list in Power selection dialog 107 Style Selection dialog 705 Style Tree 306 Style Tree Popup Menu 307 Style Variants 371 Styles default 302 definitions 305 free 302 special 302 unused properties 305 using 302 Sub-grid increment 142 Subscript 565 Suffix for dimensions 518 Superprims 620 Superscript 565 Sweep profiles 414 Sweeping profiles 412 switch add preview to sheet 244 Switches 181. 593 Tables 589. tool 600 T Tab Layer Properties 156 Table Creation dialog 591. 266.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J STHENO sheet import 53 Stipple Properties dialog 641 Stippling changing symbol 641 default spacing 642 defining area to fill 631 deleting 645 filling areas 629 layers 642 overview 630 properties changing 643 seedpoint 632 selecting 100.

95 rotating 568 search. height and width of characters 568 Box around Multi-line Text 576 datum point 568 display as rectangles 184 display as text 184 display at all orientations 184 displaying with shear 184 editing 572 entering special characters 574 entry field 572 font 567 for dimensions 520 for printed title block 74 format angular dimensions 528 defining for printed sheet 73 gap. popup menu 563 dashboard 565 multiple selection 573 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z properties change style 571 properties dialog 566 replace properties 569 tools 562 Text dashboard 292 text field of a drawing editing 80 text format for dimensions 522 Text properties overview 565 Text Properties dialog 566 The 550 Title block printing user text 73 Toggle select by area 115 Toggle button 112 toggle selection 104 Toggle visibility of output message area 332 Tolerances dimensions 517 format for dimensions 518 Tool Creates construction circle tangential to a line in three steps 477 Creates construction circle tangential to a line in two steps 477 Creates construction circle tangential to two lines 477 Creates construction lines tangential at two circles 479 Creates construction lines through tangent points of two circles 478 Moves geometry multiple of a grid offset 440 Query User Attribute 212 tool 36 Compare selected reference 660. 665 Convert reference 660 Load a new reference 660 Load reference 660 Reads all balloon texts to a table 600 SMART Drafting 686 smash 2D Feature 364 Synchronise table with balloons on sheet 600 Tool sets 38 choosing from 38 Tool tips 36 Toolbar selection tools 100 toolbar 34 adjust contents 263 adjust items 120 line navigation 286 measure 271 overview 262 selection tools 266 sheets 265 tree navigation 287 tree table 288 utilities 266 view 267 Tools 2D modelling 408 boundary group manipulation 114.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J sort a column 595 style creation dialog 599 Tangent probe specifier 324 Tangential dynamic construction lines 500 temporary crosshatching properties 640 temporary diagram symbol load 466 Temporary lines deleting 631 using to define area to fill 631 Temporary Scale views 281 Temporary sheet scale 77 Temporary Stipple Properties dialog 641 Temporary symbols loading 447 properties 450 saving 446 temporary symbols 444 Test dimension percentage 519 Text 572 always legible 184 aspect. 94 selecting 100. 438 © CAD Schroer GmbH 737 . 266 shear activating 184 defining for printing 73 shear value 568 Translator 586 UNICODE 587 width of text string 568 X and Y position 567 text arrows at -box 576 change style 570 create with style 570 creating 564 creation. find 87. distance between characters 568 height 568 legible height 177 modifying symbols containing text 451 multi-line 575 position on dimensions 520 replace 87.

702 User tools creating 704 User tooltray deleting tools 707 User-adjustable parameters 613 738 © CAD Schroer GmbH . 266 shaft end view 417 standard prims 619 stippling 633 symbols 445 transformation 424 tree navigation 343 tree viewer 344 tools create polygons 363 creating closed geometry 357 text 562 Tools for Creating Porthole Elements 657 Tools for References 660 toolset 36 tooltray 36 Tooltray buttons 38 Tooltrays choosing 38 tools 39 Trail file compare 240 record 238 replay 239 transform boundary groups 438 transform elements 423 transformation array 432 magnify 432 mirror 431 move 426 rotate 428 shear 431 Transformation tools 424 Transforming prims 622 symbols 451 Transforming Selected Elements 425 Translator 586 Transportation lines Enable 182 Transported construction lines 489 deflection angles 491 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Tree Navigation Toolbar 287 Tree navigation toolbar 343 Tree Table Toolbar 288 Tree Viewer dock/undock 337 Tree viewer cutting elements 344 displaying 336 navigating around 343 pasting elements 344 Tree viewer toolbar 344 TRI prim 619 Trims/extends end segments of lines. 389 Undock the Tree Viewer 337 Undoing changes to symbols 457 Undraw Selection 133 Unhitable 160 UNICODE Text 587 Union 652 Units angular 78 default 185 linear 77 permanent 77 sheets 77 Units dimensioning 518 Unlock ProDetail elements 87 Unlocked properties 305 Un-number. 708 user attributes query 347 User Attributes. Re-number 217 Unprotected 160 Unscale button 455 Untransforming symbols 457 Update Standard 188 Updating individual tables 612 uppercase 566 Url add to text 569 launch in internet browser 566 Usage of Dynamic Construction Lines 502 Use filter to control sheet selection 109 Use row height 598 Use Style 307 User background color 202. tool 399 tsh 53 Types dimensions 522 of sheet 47 U Undo 88. 404 Load a new reference 661 modify 705 move selected points 441 profile extrusion 414 projected construction lines 492 rotate profiles to form shafts 419 selection 100.dialog 212 User interface features of 26 User options 181.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J choosing 39 clear lines 442 connect lines 442 construction lines 473 create named prim 620 crosshatching 633 customizing 703 delete all construction lines 486 deleting custom tools 707 dimensioning 506 edge projection 415 hole end view 417 line edit 386 Line Navigation 286.

268 Work Environment save changes 709 work environment 26 Working set active 60 Working set definition files 56 Working Set Properties dialog 61 Working sets 56 modifying sheet loading behavior 61 Write Protection Display 54 WSD files 56 add and remove sheets 58 close sheets 60 copying 58 creating 57 deleting 58 loading 58 loading sheets 59 reload 59 V Values specifying for dimensions 519 variants of styles 371 Vertical 513 Vertical View menu item 415 View 117 view next 119 previous 119 View Direction dialog 413 View Direction menu item 413 View Frames dialog 130 View menu adjust toolbar 34 View or change the layer properties 159 View Properties 129 View the full area of the sheet 267 View Toolbar 267 View windows copy and paste between windows 131 viewing direction using to create perpendicular edges 415 Views current plotting 65 printing 69 orthogonal producing 408 saving window views 125. 269 window views store and restore 125. 268 Windows 251 copy and paste between different view windows 131 displaying borders 130 opening new 128 view windows 128 Windows dialog 125. 270 zoom dynamic 123. 267. 268 refresh 269 restore 126. 268 scale using different scales 278 showing window view positions 126. 267 zoom in 118. 267 Zoom on selected geometry 124. 269 store and restore window views 125. 270 Zoom out 267 Zoom to scale 119 © CAD Schroer GmbH 739 . 269 saving 125.xml 556 What are Groups? 334 wheel mouse 27 Width of text string 568 wildcards 42 Z Zoom 122 into selection 124.MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J User-defined point functions 383 using a dialog 32 Using styles 302 Utilities Number 217 Utilities Menu 204 Utilities Toolbar 266 K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z Window 118 Window views confining construction lines 488 delete 126. 268 show position 126. 268 Visible 160 X X spacing 141 X-Line Setup 497 Y Y spacing 141 W Weight control point defining shape of arc 377 of points 377 welding symbols 552 weldsym.

MEDUSA4 Drafting A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z 740 © CAD Schroer GmbH .